preliminary service manual - epanorama av...adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the...
Post on 02-Nov-2020
2 Views
Preview:
TRANSCRIPT
No. 51907Oct. 2001
AV-36F802AV-36F702
COPYRIGHT © 2001 VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LTD.
AV-36F802 /YAV-36F702 /Y
CONTENTS! SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
! SERVICE ADJUSTMENTS
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS (APPENDED)
STANDARD CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (APPENDED)
SERVICE MANUALCOLOUR TELEVISION
RM-C303G[AV-36F702]
RM-C301G[AV-36F802]
®
PRELIMINARY
BASIC CHASSIS
AC
AV-36F702AV-36F802
No. 51907 2
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS1. The design of this product contains special hardware, many circuits
and components specially for safety purposes. For continued pro-tection, no changes should be made to the original design unlessauthorized in writing by the manufacturer. Replacement parts mustbe identical to those used in the original circuits. Service should beperformed by qualified personnel only.
2. Alterations of the design or circuitry of the products should not bemade. Any design alterations or additions will void the manufactur-er's warranty and will further relieve the manufacturer of responsi-bility for personal injury or property damage resulting therefrom.
3. Many electrical and mechanical parts in the products have specialsafety-related characteristics. These characteristics are often notevident from visual inspection nor can the protection afforded bythem necessarily be obtained by using replacement componentsrated for higher voltage, wattage, etc. Replacement parts which havethese special safety characteristics are identified in the parts list ofService manual. Electrical components having such features areidentified by shading on the schematics and by ( ) on theparts list in Service manual. The use of a substitute replacementwhich does not have the same safety characteristics as the recom-mended replacement part shown in the parts list of Service manualmay cause shock, fire, or other hazards.
4. Use isolation transformer when hot chassis.The chassis and any sub-chassis contained in some products areconnected to one side of the AC power line. An isolation transformerof adequate capacity should be inserted between the product andthe AC power supply point while performing any service on someproducts when the HOT chassis is exposed.
5. Don't short between the LIVE side ground and ISOLATED (NEU-TRAL) side ground or EARTH side ground when repairing.Some model's power circuit is partly different in the GND. The dif-ference of the GND is shown by the LIVE : ( ) side GND, theISOLATED(NEUTRAL) : ( ) side GND and EARTH : ( ) sideGND. Don't short between the LIVE side GND andISOLATED(NEUTRAL) side GND or EARTH side GND and nevermeasure with a measuring apparatus (oscilloscope etc.) the LIVEside GND and ISOLATED(NEUTRAL) side GND or EARTH sideGND at the same time.If above note will not be kept, a fuse or any parts will be broken.
6. If any repair has been made to the chassis, it is recommended thatthe B1 setting should be checked or adjusted (See ADJUSTMENTOF B1 POWER SUPPLY).
7. The high voltage applied to the picture tube must conform with thatspecified in Service manual. Excessive high voltage can cause anincrease in X-Ray emission, arcing and possible component dam-age, therefore operation under excessive high voltage conditionsshould be kept to a minimum, or should be prevented. If severearcing occurs, remove the AC power immediately and determinethe cause by visual inspection (incorrect installation, cracked ormelted high voltage harness, poor soldering, etc.). To maintain theproper minimum level of soft X-Ray emission, components in thehigh voltage circuitry including the picture tube must be the exactreplacements or alternatives approved by the manufacturer of thecomplete product.
8. Do not check high voltage by drawing an arc. Use a high voltagemeter or a high voltage probe with a VTVM. Discharge the picturetube before attempting meter connection, by connecting a clip leadto the ground frame and connecting the other end of the lead througha 10kØ 2W resistor to the anode button.
9. When service is required, observe the original lead dress. Extraprecaution should be given to assure correct lead dress in the highvoltage circuit area. Where a short circuit has occurred, those com-ponents that indicate evidence of overheating should be replaced.Always use the manufacturer's replacement components.
10. Isolation Check(Safety for Electrical Shock Hazard)After re-assembling the product, always perform an isolation checkon the exposed metal parts of the cabinet (antenna terminals, video/audio input and output terminals, Control knobs, metal cabinet,screwheads, earphone jack, control shafts, etc.) to be sure the prod-uct is safe to operate without danger of electrical shock.
(1) Dielectric Strength TestThe isolation between the AC primary circuit and all metal partsexposed to the user, particularly any exposed metal part having areturn path to the chassis should withstand a voltage of 1100V AC(r.m.s.) for a period of one second.(. . . . Withstand a voltage of 1100V AC (r.m.s.) to an appliance ratedup to 120V, and 3000V AC (r.m.s.) to an appliance rated 200V ormore, for a period of one second.)This method of test requires a test equipment not generally found inthe service trade.
(2) Leakage Current CheckPlug the AC line cord directly into the AC outlet (do not use a lineisolation transformer during this check.). Using a “Leakage CurrentTester”, measure the leakage current from each exposed metal partof the cabinet, particularly any exposed metal part having a returnpath to the chassis, to a known good earth ground (water pipe, etc.).Any leakage current must not exceed 0.5mA AC (r.m.s.).However, in tropical area, this must not exceed 0.2mA AC (r.m.s.).
• Alternate Check MethodPlug the AC line cord directly into the AC outlet (do not use a lineisolation transformer during this check.). Use an AC voltmeter hav-ing 1000 ohms per volt or more sensitivity in the following manner.Connect a 1500Ø 10W resistor paralleled by a 0.15µF AC-type ca-pacitor between an exposed metal part and a known good earthground (water pipe, etc.). Measure the AC voltage across the resis-tor with the AC voltmeter. Move the resistor connection to each ex-posed metal part, particularly any exposed metal part having a re-turn path to the chassis, and measure the AC voltage across theresistor. Now, reverse the plug in the AC outlet and repeat eachmeasurement. Any voltage measured must not exceed 0.75V AC(r.m.s.). This corresponds to 0.5mA AC (r.m.s.).However, in tropical area, this must not exceed 0.3V AC (r.m.s.).This corresponds to 0.2mA AC (r.m.s.).
11. High voltage hold down circuit check.After repair of the high voltage hold down circuit, this circuit shall bechecked to operate correctly.See item “How to check the high voltage hold down circuit”.
GOODEARTHGROUND 0.15 µF AC-TYPE
AC VOLTMETER(HAVING 1000Ø/V,OR MORE SENSITIVITY)
PLACE THIS PROBEON EACH EXPOSEDMETAL PART1500Ø 10W
A V
This mark shows a fast POWER CORDREPLACEMENT WARNINGConnecting thr white line side ofpower cord to “WHT” character side.
operating fuse, theletters indicated belowshow the rating.
PWB
WHT
PW
White line side
AV-36F702AV-36F802
No. 51907 3
SERVICE ADJUSTMENTSADJUSTMENT PREPARATION1. You can make the necessary adjustments for this unit with either the remote control unit or with the adjustment equipment and parts
as given below.2. Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values which set the
screen to its optimum condition may differ from the initial settings.3. Make sure that AC power is turned on correctly.4. Turn on the power for the set and test equipment before use, and start the adjustment procedures after waiting at least 30 minutes.5. Unless otherwise specified, prepare the most suitable reception or input signal for adjustment.6. Never touch any adjustment parts, which are not specified in the list for this adjustment-variable resistors, transformers, capacitors, etc.7. Presetting before adjustment.
Unless otherwise specified in the adjustment instructions, preset the following functions with the remote control unit.
VIDEO STATUS STANDARD
HYPER SURROUND OFF
BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE CENTER
TINT, COLOR, PICTURE,CENTER
BRIGHT, DETAIL
MEASURING INSTRUMENT1. DC voltmeter(or digital voltmeter)2. Oscilloscope3. Signal generator ( Pattern generator ) [NTSC]4. Remote control unit5. TV audio multiplex signal generator6. Frequency counter7. Resistor (1MØ)
ADJUSTMENT ITEMS
• Check of B1 POWER SUPPLY
• RF AGC adjustment
• FOCUS adjustment
• WHITE BALANCE adjustmentWHITE BALANCE (Low Light) adjustmentWHITE BALANCE (High Light) adjustmentPIP HIGH LIGHT WHITE BALANCE Adjustment [Only for AV-36F802]
• BRIGHT adjustmentSUB BRIGHT adjustment
• CONTRAST adjustmentSUB CONTRAST adjustment
• DEFLECTION adjustmentV CENTER and TRAPEZIUM adjustmentV SIZE and V LINEARITY adjustmentH SIZE and H POSITION adjustmentSIDE PIN and CORNER PIN adjustmentPIP DISPLAY POSITION adjustment [Only for AV-36F802]
• User mode setting position
• CHROMA adjustmentSUB COLOR adjustmentSUB TINT adjustment
• MTS circuit adjustmentINPUT LEVEL checkSTEREO VCO adjustmentSAP VCO adjustmentFILTER checkSEPARATION adjustment
• PURITY and CONVERGENCE adjustmentsPURITY adjustmentSTATIC CONVERGENCE adjustmentDYNAIC CONVERGENCE adjustment
AV-36F702AV-36F802
4 No. 51907
ADJUSTMENT LOCATIONS
FRONT
S702 : MENUS703 : CHANNEL–S704 : CHANNEL+S705 : VOLUME–S706 : VOLUME+
LINE FILTER PWB
FRONT
3D Y/C MODULE PWB
FRONT
FRONTTOP
FRONT
TOP
TOP
DAF PWB
CRT SOCKET PWB
(SOLDER SIDE)
PIP PWB
AV SELECTOR PWB
MAIN PWB
POWER SW PWB FRONT CONTROL PWB
CN006B
P
B CN007
DAFCP
TP-E1
TP-G
S702S704S705 S703
S706IC101
D101
S701
E3
F901125V 5A
CN005
CN002
CN001
PW
CN005CN004
CN004
S1 DAF
UPPER : HMIDDLE : FOCUSLOWER : SCREEN
MPX
C
Q
E1HV
CP
E2
E1
K
P
CN
003
CN
002
CN
001
J501
SS
CN006 CN007
IC702
IC701 CPU
DEG
TU001
(Only for AV-36F802)
(Only for AV-36F802)
TU001
J601
R027
J602
K
Q
R507
Q511Heatsink
J502J504 J503
CN003
TU001
CN008CN009
FRONT
AV-36F702AV-36F802
No. 51907 5
BASIC OPERATION OF SERVICE MENU1. TOOL OF SERVICE MENU OPERATION
Operate the SERVICE MENU with the REMOTE CONTROL UNIT.
2. SERVICE MENU ITEMS
In general, basic setting (adjustments) items or verifications are performed in the SERVICE MENU.
• PICTURE ............................... This sets the setting values (adjustment values) of the VIDEO/CHROMA and DEFLECTION circuits.
• SOUND .................................. This sets the setting values (adjustment values) of the AUDIO circuit.
• THEATER .............................. This is used when the THEATER MODE is adjusted.
• OTHERS ................................ This is used when the OTHERS MODE is adjustment.
• PIP ......................................... This sets the setting values (adjustment values) of the PIP circuit. [Only for AV-36F802]
• LOW LIGHT ........................... This sets the setting values (adjustment values) of the WHITE BALANCE circuit.
• HIGH LIGHT .......................... This sets the setting values (adjustment values) of the WHITE BALANCE circuit.
• RF AFC .................................. This is used when the RF AFC MODE is verfifed. [Do not adjust/Only for AV-36F702]
• RF AFC1 ................................ This is used when the RF AFC1 MODE is verified. [Do not adjust/Only for AV-36F802]
• RF AFC2 ................................ This is used when the RF AFC2 MODE is verified. [Do not adjust/Only for AV-36F802]
• VCO (CW) .............................. This is not used for service.
• I2C BUS CTRL ...................... This is used when ON/OFF of the I2C BUS CTRL is set. [Fixed ON]
3. Basic Operations of the SERVICE MENU
(1) How to enter the SERVICE MENU.Press SLEEP TIMER key and, while the indication of “SLEEP TIMER 0 MIN.” is being displayed, press DISPLAY key and VIDEO STATUSkey on the remote control unit simultaneously to enter the SERVICE MENU screen 1 shown in the next figure page.
(2) SERVICE MENU screen selectionPress the UP / DOWN key of the MENU to select any of the following items.(The letters of the selected items are displayed in yellow.)
[AV-36F702]
• PICTURE • SOUND
• THEATER •OTHERS
• LOW LIGHT • HIGH LIGHT
• RF AFC
• VCO(CW) • I2C BUS CTRL
(3) Enter the any setting ( adjustment ) mode[AV-36F702]
• PICTURE, SOUND and OTHERS mode1) If select any of PICTURE, SOUND or OTHERS items, and the LEFT / RIGHT key is pressed from SERVICE MENU ( MAIN MENU ), the
screen 2 will be displayed as shown in figure page later.2) Then the UP / DOWN key is pressed, the PICTURE mode screen 3 or the SOUND mode screen 4 or the OTHER mode screen 5 is
displayed, and the PICTURE, SOUND or OTHERS setting can be performed.[AV-36F802]
• PICTURE, SOUND, OTHERS and 3-D Y/C mode1) If select any of PICTURE, SOUND, OTHERS or 3-D Y/C items, and the LEFT / RIGHT key is pressed from SERVICE MENU ( MAIN
MENU ), the screen 2 will be displayed as shown in figure page later.2) Then the UP / DOWN key is pressed, the PICTURE mode screen 3 or the SOUND mode screen 4 or the OTHER mode screen 5 or
the 3-D Y/C mode screen 6 is displayed, and the PICTURE, SOUND, OTHERS or 3-D Y/C setting can be performed.
• PIP mode [Only for AV-36F802]1) If select the PIP item, and the LEFT/RIGHT key is pressed from SERVICE MENU (MAIN MENU), the screen 6 will be displayed as shown
in figure page later.2) Then the UP/DOWN key is pressed, the PIP mode screen 7 is displayed, and the PIP setting can be performed.[AV-36F702]
• THEATER, LOW LIGHT, HIGH LIGHT, RF AFC, VCO(CW) and I2C BUS CTRL mode1) If select any of THEATER / LOW LIGHT / HIGH LIGHT / RF AFC / VCO (CW) / I2C BUS CTRL items, and the LEFT / RIGHT key is pressed
from SERVICE MENU ( MAIN MENU ), the screens 9 10 11 12 15 16 will be displayed as shown in figure page later.2) Then the settings or verifications can be performed.[AV-36F802]
• THEATER, LOW LIGHT, HIGH LIGHT, RF AFC1, RF AFC2, VCO(CW) and I2C BUS CTRL mode1) If select any of THEATER / LOW LIGHT / HIGH LIGHT / RF AFC1 / RF AFC2 / VCO (CW) / I2C BUS CTRL items, and the LEFT / RIGHT
key is pressed from SERVICE MENU ( MAIN MENU ), the screens 9 10 11 13 14 15 16 will be displayed as shown in figure pagelater.
2) Then the settings or verifications can be performed.
[AV-36F802]
• PICTURE • SOUND
• THEATER • OTHERS
• PIP • 3-D Y/C
• LOW LIGHT • HIGH LIGHT
• RF AFC1 • RF AFC2
• VCO(CW) • I2C BUS CTRL
AV-36F702AV-36F802
6 No. 51907
SERVICE MENU
PICTURE SOUNDTHEATER OTHERSPIP 3D Y/CLOW LIGHT HIGH LIGHTRF AFC1 RF AFC2VCO(CW) I2C BUS CTRL
SELECT BYOPERATE BY EX
IT
SERVICE MENU (MAIN MENU) SCREEN PICTURE MODE
EXIT BY
SELECT BYEXITEXIT BY
1. BRIGHTSTATUS
99999999999
1. NOISE DET.STATUS
99999999999
1. OSD POS. 999
SOUND MODE OTHERS MODE
1. PIP BRSTATUS
99999999999
HIGH LIGHT MODE
SCREEN PIP MODE (Only for AV-36F802)
EXITEXIT BY
SELECT BY
TOO HIGH GOOD TOO LOW
RF AFC1 ONFINE 999
SELECT BYOPERATE BY EX
IT
RF AFC1 MODE (Only for AV-36F802)[DO NOT ADJUST]
RF AFC2 MODE (Only for AV-36F802)[DO NOT ADJUST]
I2C BUS CTRL MODE[FIXED ON]
EXIT BY
TOO HIGH GOOD TOO LOW
RF AFC2 ONFINE 999
HIGH LEVELREFERENCE LEVELLOW LEVEL
SYNC : YES
SELECT BYOPERATE BY EX
ITEXIT BY
I2C BUS ON
SELECT BYOPERATE BY EX
ITEXIT BY
THEATER MODE (1/2) THEATER MODE (2/2)
TINT 999 B CUT. 999COLOR 999 R DRIVE 999PICTURE 999 B DRIVE 999BRIGHT 999 DC REST. 999DETAIL 999 BLK ST. 999R CUT. 999 GMM PNT 999G CUT. 999
PAGE 1/2
EXITEXIT BY
SELECT BYOPERATE BY
CD MAT. 99 CMP CD M 99RY GAIN 99 CMP RY G 99GY PHASE 99 CMP GY P 99CORING 99 CMP COR 99
PAGE 2/2
EXITEXIT BY
SELECT BYOPERATE BY
BRIGHT
LOW LIGHT MODE
999 999
999
999
HIGH LIGHT999 999
2 31
11
13
4 5
7 8
9
14
VCO (CW) MODE[DO NOT USE]
15
16
10
SERVICE MENU
PICTURE SOUNDTHEATER OTHERS
LOW LIGHT HIGH LIGHTRF AFCVCO(CW) I2C BUS CTRL
SELECT BYOPERATE BY EX
ITEXIT BY
[AV-36F702]
[AV-36F802]
TOO HIGH GOOD TOO LOW
RF AFC ONFINE 999
SELECT BYOPERATE BY EX
ITEXIT BY
RF AFC MODE (Only for AV-36F702)[DO NOT ADJUST]
12
1. YC 001STATUS
99999999999
3-D Y/C MODE(Only for AV-36F802)
6
AV-36F702AV-36F802
No. 51907 7
(4) Setting method1) UP / DOWN key of the MENU
Select the SETTING ITEM.
2) LEFT / RIGHT key of the MENUSetting (adjust) the SETTING VALUE of the SETTING ITEM.When the key is released the SETTING VALUE will be stored (memorized).
3) EXIT keyReturns to the previous screen.
(5) Releasing SERVICE MENU1) After returning to the SERVICE MENU upon completion of the setting (ad-
justment) work, press the EXIT key again.
¤ The settings for LOW LIGHT and HIGH LIGHT are described in the WHITE BAL-ANCE page of ADJUSTMENT.
1. BRIGHTSTATUS
99999999999
SETTING ITEM
INITIALSETTING VALUE (Adjust)SETTING VALUE
PICTURE MODE
AV-36F702AV-36F802
8 No. 51907
INITIAL SETTING VALUE OF SERVICE MENU1. Adjustment of the SERVICE MENU is made on the basis of the initial setting values; however, the new setting values which set the
screen in its optimum condition may differ from the initial setting.2. Do not change the initial setting values of the setting (Adjustment) items not listed in “ADJUSTMENT”.
• PICTURE MODEThe four setting items in the video mode No.6 EXT BRI., No.7 EXT PIC., No.8 EXT COL. and No.9 EXT TINT are linked to the items in the TVMODE No.1 BRIGHT, No.2 PICTURE, No.3 COLOR and No.4 TINT, respectively. When the setting items in the TV mode are adjusted, thevalues in the setting items in the video mode are revised automatically to the same values in the TV mode.(The initial setting values given in ( )are off-set values.)When the four items (No.6, 7, 8 and 9) are adjusted in the video mode, the setting values in each item are revised independently.
No. Setting (Adjustment) item Variable range Initial setting value Remark
1 BRIGHT 000 — 127 063
2 PICTURE 000 — 127 070
3 COLOR 000 — 127 072
4 TINT 000 — 127 063
5 TV DETAIL 000 — 063 050 AV-36F702
TV DETAIL 000 — 063 045 AV-36F802
6 EXT BRIGHT ±025 ±000
7 EXT PICT. ±025 +002
8 EXT COLOR ±025 ±000
9 EXT TINT ±025 ±000
10 EXT DETAIL 000 — 063 050 AV-36F702
EXT DETAIL 000 — 063 045 AV-36F802
11 CMP BRIGHT ±025 ±000
12 CMP PICT. ±025 ±000
13 CMP COLOR 000 — 127 068
14 CMP TINT 000 — 127 068
15 CMP DETAIL 000 — 063 050
16 CMP R CUT ±025 –011
17 CMP G CUT ±025 ±000
18 CMP B CUT ±025 –001
19 CMP R DRV ±025 ±000
20 CMP B DRV ±025 ±000
21 WPL 000 / 001 001
22 B. B. SW 000 / 001 000
23 C TRAP 000 / 001 000
24 CORING 000 / 001 000 AV-36F702
CORING 000 / 001 001 AV-36F802
25 CMP CORING 000 / 001 001
26 TV SHARPF 000 / 001 001
27 EXT SHARPF 000 / 001 001
28 CMP SHARPF 000 / 001 001
29 RGB CONT 000 — 063 031
30 TV ID SENS 000 / 001 000
31 EXT ID SEN 000 / 001 001
32 F ID 000 / 001 000
33 Y MUTE 000 / 001 000
34 AUDIO ATT 000 — 127 127
35 SUB CONT 000 — 015 008
AV-36F702AV-36F802
No. 51907 9
No. Setting (Adjustment) item Variable range Initial setting value Remark
36 R Y GAIN 000 / 001 001
37 CMP R Y GA 000 / 001 001
38 G Y PHASE 000 / 001 000
39 CMP G Y PH 000 / 001 000
40 CD MATRIX 000 — 003 003
41 CMP CD MAT 000 — 003 002
42 BLACK ST 000 — 003 001
43 DC REST 000 — 003 001
44 COLOR GMM 000 / 001 000
45 UV/CBCR 000 / 001 001
46 AT FLESH 000 / 001 000
47 ABL GAIN 000 — 003 000
48 ABL ST PNT 000 — 003 003
49 RGB ABCL 000 / 001 001
50 TV BPF TOF 000 / 001 000
51 EXT BPF TOF 000 / 001 000
52 GMM PNT 000 — 003 003
53 SVM GAIN 000 — 003 002
54 CMP SVM GA 000 — 003 002
55 SVM PHASE 000 / 001 000
56 AUDIO SW 000 / 001 000
57 BUZZ 000 / 001 000
58 IF FREQ 000 / 001 000
59 RF AGC 000 — 063 045
60 AFT MUTE 000 / 001 000
61 AFT SENS 000 / 001 001
62 R/G DRV SW 000 / 001 001
63 BLK SW 000 / 001 000
64 V S COR 000 — 015 010
65 V LIN 000 — 015 005
66 V SIZE 000 — 127 063
67 V AGC 000 / 001 000
68 V CENTER 000 — 063 052
69 TV AFC 000 — 003 000
70 EXT AFC 000 — 003 002
71 V POSI 000 — 007 000
72 H POSI 000 — 031 020
73 H SIZE 000 — 063 028
74 TV V FREQ 000 — 003 000
75 EXT V FREQ 000 — 003 003
76 SIDE PIN 000 — 063 025
77 STAND BY 000 / 001 000
78 TRAPEZ 000 — 063 035
79 V RAMP REF 000 / 001 001
80 V 48HZ 000 / 001 000
81 V EHT 000 — 007 000
82 TOP PIN 000 — 031 012
AV-36F702AV-36F802
10 No. 51907
83 H EHT 000 — 007 000
84 BTM PIN 000 — 031 011
85 V BLK LOW 000 — 003 000
86 V BLK UP 000 — 003 000
87 CAPTION IN 000 / 001 000
88 H BLK 000 / 001 000
89 SCREEN 000 / 001 000
90 ACB SW 000 / 001 000
91 ACB PULSE 000 — 015 007
92 OVER MODU 000 / 001 001
93 CB/CR_FIL 000 / 001 001
94 TEST 000 — 255 128
95 RF S/N TY 000 — 00 1 002 (36F702) / 001 (36F802)
96 EXT S/N TY 000 — 002 002 (36F702) / 001 (36F802)
97 RF SN YC E 000 — 255 005
98 RF SN YC F 000 — 255 016
99 RF SN YC G 000 — 063 032
100 RF SN YC H 000 — 255 025
101 EX SN YC E 000 — 255 005
102 EX SN YC F 000 — 255 016
103 EX SN YC G 000 — 063 032
104 EX SN YC H 000 — 255 025
105 RF SN VC 1 000 — 063 000
106 RF SN VC 2 000 — 063 007
107 RF SN VC 3 000 — 063 014
108 RF SN VC 4 000 — 063 021
109 EX SN VC 1 000 — 063 000
110 EX SN VC 2 000 — 063 007
111 EX SN VC 3 000 — 063 014
112 EX SN VC 4 000 — 063 021
113 COR LEVEL 000 — 003 003
114 VNR CHK 000 — 255 003
115 YC SN TIME 000 — 255 005
116 VC SN TIME 000 — 255 005
117 VM DATA A ±127 +008
118 VM DATA B ±127 –004
119 VM DATA C ±127 –016
120 VM DATA D 000 / 001 001
121 VC SN STOP 000 — 255 010
122 CH MUTE 000 / 001 000
123 VM OFF TY 000 / 001 000
124 VC VM OFF 000/001 001
125 YC VM OFF 000 — 255 255
126 F LOCK 000 — 002 002
127 VF LOCK EX 000/001 000
128 PURI RGB 000 — 063 031
129 PURI BCK 000/001 000
No. Setting (Adjustment) item Variable range Initial setting value Remark
AV-36F702AV-36F802
No. 51907 11
No. Setting (Adjustment) item Variable range Initial setting value Remark
1 NOISE DET. 000 / 001 001
2 IN LEVEL 000 — 063 025
3 FH MONITOR 000 / 001 000
4 STEREO VCO 000 — 063 030
5 PILOT CAN. 000 / 001 000
6 FILTER 000 — 063 030
7 LOW SEP. 000 — 063 028
8 HI SEP. 000 — 063 025
9 5FH MON. 000 / 001 000
10 SAP VCO 000 — 063 003
11 IN GAIN 000 / 001 000
12 FIL. OFFSET 000 — 010 000
13 BBE BASS ±015 +001
14 BBE TRE ±015 –001
• SOUND MODE
Setting (Adjustment) item Variable range Initial setting value Remark
TINT ±20 –06
COLOR ±20 –03
PICTURE ±50 –15
BRIGHT ±20 ±00
DETAIL ±20 +03
R CUTOFF ±20 ±00
G CUTOFF ±20 ±00
B CUTOFF ±20 ±00
R DRIVE ±99 +07
B DRIVE ±99 –25
DC REST. 00 — 03 01
BLK ST. 00 — 03 00
GMM PNT 00 — 03 01
CD MATRIX 00 — 03 01
RY GAIN 00 / 01 01
GY PHASE 00 / 01 00
CORING 00 / 01 01
CMP CD M 00 — 03 01
CMP RY G 00 / 01 01
CMP GY P 00 / 01 00
CMP COR 00 / 01 01
• THEATER MODE
AV-36F702AV-36F802
12 No. 51907
No. Setting (Adjustment) item Variable range Initial setting value Remark
1 OSD POS. 000 — 007 002
2 CCD POS. 000 — 015 003
3 EOSEL 000 / 001 000
4 MENU COLOR 000 — –030 –010
5 MENU PICT. 000 — –030 –010
6 MENU BRI. 000 — –030 –010
• OTHERS MODE
No. Setting (Adjustment) item Variable range Initial setting value Remark
1 PIP BR 000 — 015 005
2 PIP PICT 000 — 075 045
3 PIP TINT 000 — 063 036
4 PIP COL 000 — 015 010
5 P R CUT 000 — 015 003
6 P G CUT 000 — 015 000
7 P B CUT 000 — 015 002
8 P R DR 000 — 255 052
9 P G DR 000 — 255 055
10 P B DR 000 — 255 060
11 LEFT POS. 000 — 255 012
12 RIGHT POS. 000 — 255 026
13 UPPER POS. 000 — 127 012
14 LOWER POS. 000 — 127 011
15 PICT LOCK 000 / 001 001
16 SELDEL 000 — 007 000
17 AGCFIX 000 / 001 001
18 AGCADST 000 / 001 000
19 AGC 000 — 015 007
20 VSPDEL 000 — 031 000
21 VSPISQ 000 / 001 001
22 YCOR 000 / 001 001
23 XFREQF 000 / 001 001
24 WTCHDG 000 / 001 001
25 COLON 000 / 001 000
26 ACQNEW 000 / 001 000
27 DSTDET 000 / 001 001
28 CRIBEOK 000 / 001 000
29 FCBEOK 000 / 001 000
30 NOCRID 000 / 001 000
31 NONSED 000 / 001 000
• PIP MODE [Only for AV-36F802]
AV-36F702AV-36F802
No. 51907 13
No. Setting (Adjustment) item Variable range Initial setting value Remark
1 YC 001 000 ~ 003 001
2 YC 002 000 ~ 003 001
3 YC 003 000 ~ 003 001
4 YC 004 000 ~ 003 000
5 YC 005 000 ~ 003 000
6 YC 006 000 ~ 003 000
7 YC 007 000 ~ 003 003
8 YC 008 000 ~ 003 000
9 YC 009 000 ~ 003 001
10 YC 010 000 ~ 003 000
11 YC 011 000 ~ 007 004
12 YC 012 000 ~ 007 002
13 YC 013 000 ~ 015 002
14 YC 014 000 ~ 015 010
15 YC 015 000 ~ 015 002
16 YC 016 000 ~ 015 004
17 YC 017 000 / 001 000
18 YC 018 000 / 001 000
19 YC 019 000 ~ 003 002
20 YC 020 000 / 001 000
21 YC 021 000 / 001 000
22 YC 022 000 ~ 003 002
23 YC 023 000 / 001 000
24 YC 024 000 / 001 000
25 YC 025 000 / 001 000
26 YC 026 000 ~ 003 000
27 YC 027 000 ~ 003 001
28 YC 028 000 ~ 003 001
29 YC 029 000 ~ 003 001
30 YC 030 000 ~ 003 001
31 YC 031 000 ~ 003 002
32 YC 032 000 / 001 000
33 YC 033 000 ~ 007 000
34 YC 034 000 ~ 015 000
35 YC 035 000 ~ 007 002
36 YC 036 000 ~ 031 015
37 YC 037 000 ~ 003 000
38 YC 038 000 ~ 015 009
39 YC 039 000 ~ 003 001
40 YC 040 000 ~ 003 001
41 YC 041 000 / 001 000
42 YC 042 000 / 001 000
43 YC 043 000 / 001 000
44 YC 044 000 / 001 001
45 YC 045 000 ~ 015 003
46 YC 046 000 ~ 015 012
47 YC 047 000 ~ 015 008
• 3-D Y/C MODE [Only for AV-36F802]
AV-36F702AV-36F802
14 No. 51907
No. Setting (Adjustment) item Variable range Initial setting value Remark
48 YC 048 000 ~ 015 004
49 YC 049 000 ~ 015 010
50 YC 050 000 / 001 001
51 YC 051 000 / 001 001
52 YC 052 000 ~ 003 000
53 YC 053 000 / 001 000
54 YC 054 000 / 001 001
55 YC 055 000 / 001 001
56 YC 056 000 / 001 001
57 YC 057 000 ~ 015 000
58 YC 058 000 / 001 000
59 YC 059 000 / 001 001
60 YC 060 000 ~ 003 000
61 YC 061 000 ~ 015 000
62 YC 062 DBL 000 ~ 007 002
63 YC 063 N/A 000 ~ 015 002
64 YC 064 N/A 000 ~ 015 004
65 YC 065 N/A 000 ~ 015 002
66 YC 066 N/A 000 ~ 015 004
67 YC 067 000 / 001 000
68 YC 068 000 / 001 000
69 YC 069 000 / 001 000
70 YC 070 FIX 000 ~ 003 000
71 YC 071 000 / 001 000
72 YC 072 000 / 001 000
73 YC 073 000 / 001 001
74 YC 074 FIX 000 / 001 000
75 YC 075 FIX 000 / 001 000
76 YC 076 000 / 001 001
77 YC 077 FIX 000 / 001 000
78 YC 078 FIX 000 / 001 000
79 YC 079 FIX 000 ~ 007 005
80 YC 080 FIX 000 ~ 015 000
81 YC 081 FIX 000 ~ 015 008
82 YC 082 FIX 000 ~ 015 004
83 YC 083 FIX 000 ~ 015 004
84 YC 084 DBL 000 ~ 255 112
85 YC 085 DBL 000 ~ 255 008
86 YC 086 000 / 001 001
87 YC 087 000 ~ 003 003
88 YC 088 000 / 001 001
89 YC 089 000 / 001 000
90 YC 090 000 / 001 000
91 YC 091 000 / 001 000
92 YC 092 N/A 000 / 001 000
93 YC 093 N/A 000 / 001 000
94 YC 094 DBL 000 ~ 003 001
AV-36F702AV-36F802
No. 51907 15
No. Setting (Adjustment) item Variable range Initial setting value Remark
95 YC 095 DBL 000 / 001 001
96 YC 096 DBL 000 / 001 001
97 YC 097 DBL 000 / 001 000
98 YC 098 DBL 000 / 001 000
99 YC 099 DBL 000 ~ 003 000
100 YC 100 DBL 000 ~ 003 000
101 YC 101 DBL 000 / 001 000
102 YC 102 DBL 000 / 001 000
103 YC 103 DBL 000 / 001 001
104 YC 104 DBL 000 / 001 000
105 YC 105 DBL 000 / 011 000
106 YC 106 DBL 000 / 001 000
107 YC 107 DBL 000 ~ 007 002
108 3-D Y/C 000 / 001 001
Setting (Adjustment) item Variable range Initial setting value Remark
R CUTOFF 0 — 255 085
G CUTOFF 0 — 255 085
B CUTOFF 0 — 255 085
• LOW LIGHT MODE
Setting (Adjustment) item Variable range Initial setting value Remark
R DRIVE 0 — 127 060
B DRIVE 0 — 127 060
• HIGH LIGHT MODE
Setting (Adjustment) item Variable range Initial setting value Remark
RF AFC1 ON / OFF ON
FINE -77 — +77 ± × ×
• RF AFC1 MODE [Only for AV-36F802]
DO NOTADJUST
Setting (Adjustment) item Variable range Initial setting value Remark
RF AFC2 ON / OFF ON
FINE -77 — +77 ± × ×
• RF AFC2 MODE [Only for AV-36F802]
DO NOTADJUST
Setting (Adjustment) item Variable range Initial setting value Remark
I2C BUS ON/OFF [FIXED ON]
• I2C BUS CTRL MODE
DO NOTADJUST
Setting (Adjustment) item Variable range Initial setting value Remark
RF AFC ON / OFF ON
FINE -77 — +77 ± × ×
• RF AFC MODE [Only for AV-36F702]
DO NOTADJUST
AV-36F702AV-36F802
16 No. 51907
ADJUSTMENTS
ItemMeasuringinstrument
Test point Adjustment part Description
Check ofB1 POWERSUPPLY
DC Voltmeter R507 C504side (B1)
Q511heatsink ( )
1. Receive a black-and-white signal.2. Connect the DC Voltmeter to R507 C504 side (B1) and Q511 heatsink
( ).3. Confirm that the voltage is DC134V .+2V
-2V
RF AGCadjustment
1. Receive a broadcast.2. Select the No.59 RF AGC of the PICTURE MODE.3. Press the MUTING key of the remote control unit and turn off color.4. With the LEFT key of the remote control unit, get noise in the screen
picture. (0 side of setting value)5. Press the RIGHT key of the remote control unit and stop when noise
disappears from the screen.6. Change to other channels and make sure that there Is no irregular-
ity.7. Press the MUTING key and get color out.
No.59 RF AGC
ItemMeasuringinstrument Test point Adjustment part Description
ADJUSTMENT OF RF AGC
FOCUSadjustment
Signalgenerator
Notes:• Proceed to the following this adjustment after having completed theadjustments of B1 POWER SUPPLY, SUB BRIGHT and PICTURE.
• Set VIDEO STATUS to “STANDARD”.• The final adjustment of CONVERGENCE must be done after theFOCUS adjustment. (CONVERGENCE is changed by FOCUS ad-justment.)When makes difference by FOCUS adjustment, should be reconfirmingPURITY adjustment.
1. Receive a crosshatch signal.2. While looking at the screen center, adjust the FOCUS VR so that
the horizontal lines will be clear and in fine detail.3. Adjust the H VR so that the vertical lines will be clear and in fine
detail.4. Make sure that the picture is in focus even when the screen gets
darkened.
FOCUS VR[In HVT]
H VR[In HVT]
ItemMeasuringinstrument Test point Adjustment part Description
ADJUSTMENT OF FOCUS
B1 POWER SUPPLY
AV-36F702AV-36F802
No. 51907 17
Description
Note :Set VIDEO STATUS to “STANDARD”.
1. Receive a black-and-white signal.(Color off)2. Select the [LOW LIGHT] MODE from the SERVICE MENU.3. Set the initial setting value of BRIGHT is 063 with the LEFT / RIGHT
key of the remote control unit.4. Set the initial setting value of R CUTOFF, G CUTOFF and B CUT-
OFF is 085 with the 4 to 9 key of the remote control unit.5. Display a single horizontal line by pressing the 1 key of the remote
control unit.6. Turn the screen VR all the way to the left.7. Turn the screen VR gradually to the right from the left until either
one of the red, blue or green colors appears faintly.8. Adjust the two colors which did not appear until the single horizontal
line that is displayed becomes white using the 4 to 9 keys of theremote control unit.
9. Turn the screen VR to where the single horizontal line glows faintly.10.Press the 2 key to return to the regular screen.
9 The 3 EXIT key is the cancel key for the WHITE BALANCE.
Notes:• Proceed to the following this adjustment after having completed theadjustment of WHITE BALANCE LOW LIGHT.
• Set VIDEO STATUS to “STANDARD”.
1. Receive a black-and-white signal. (Color off)2. Select the [HIGH LIGHT] MODE from the SERVICE MENU.3. Set the initial setting value of R DRIVE and B DRIVE is 060 with the
4 , 6 , 7 and 9 keys of the remote control unit.4. Adjust the screen until it becomes white using the 4 , 6 , 7 and 9
keys of the remote control unit.
9 The 3 (EXIT) key is the cancel key for the WHITE BALANCE.
ItemMeasuringinstrument Test point Adjustment part
WHITEBALANCE(LOW LIGHT)adjustment
Signalgenerator
No.1 BRIGHT
R CUTOFFG CUTOFFB CUTOFF
SCREEN VR[In HVT]
WHITEBALANCE(HIGH LIGHT)adjustment
Signalgenerator
R DRIVEB DRIVE
ADJUSTMENT OF WHITE BALANCE
BRIGHT999
999
999 999
R CUTOFF
B CUTOFFBRIGHT
G CUTOFF
H.LINE ON
[LOW LIGHT] MODE
REMOTE CONTROL UNIT
H.LINE OFF EXIT
R CUTOFF G CUTOFF B CUTOFF
R CUTOFF G CUTOFF B CUTOFF
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
999 999
R DRIVE
B DRIVE
H.LINE ON
[HIGH LIGHT] MODE
REMOTE CONTROL UNIT
H.LINE OFF EXIT
R DRIVE B DRIVE
R DRIVE B DRIVE
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
HIGHT LIGHT
AV-36F702AV-36F802
18 No. 51907
ItemMeasuringinstrument Test point Adjustment part Description
PIPWHITEBALANCEHIGH LIGHTadjustment
Notes:• Proceed to the following this adjustment after having completed theadjustments of WHITE BALANCE LOW LIGHT andWHITE BALANCE HIGH LIGHT for the main picture.
• Set VIDEO STATUS to “STANDARD”.
1. Receive a black-and-white signal. (Color off)2. Select the PIP MODE from the SERVICE MENU.3. Then adjust the white color of the PIP screen using the No. 8 P R
DR and the No. 10 P B DR of the PIP MODE so that it is the samebrightness as the main screen.
No.8 P R DRNo.10 P B DR
Signalgenerator
PIP screen
Main screen
SUB BRIGHTadjustment
No.1 BRIGHT Notes:• Proceed to the following this adjustment after having completed theadjustments of WHITE BALANCE LOW LIGHT andWHITE BALANCE HIGH LIGHT.
• Set VIDEO STATUS to “STANDARD”.
1. Receive a broadcast.2. Select the No.1 BRIGHT of the PICTURE MODE.3. Set the initial setting value of the No.1 BRIGHT with the LEFT /
RIGHT key of the remote control unit.4. If the brightness is not best with the initial setting value, make fine
adjustment of the No.1 BRIGHT until you get the optimum bright-ness.
SUBCONTRASTadjustment
Notes:• Proceed to the following this adjustment after having completed theadjustment of SUB BRIGHT.
• Set VIDEO STATUS to “STANDARD”.
1. Receive a broadcast.2. Select the No.2 PICTURE of the PICTURE MODE.3. Set the initial setting value of the No.2 PICTURE with the LEFT /
RIGHT key of the remote control unit.4. If the contrast is not best with the initial setting value, make fine
adjustment of the No.2 PICTURE until you get the optimum con-trast.
No.2 PICTURE
ItemMeasuringinstrument Test point Adjustment part Description
ADJUSTMENT OF CONTRAST
ItemMeasuringinstrument Test point Adjustment part Description
ADJUSTMENT OF BRIGHT
[AV-36F802]
AV-36F702AV-36F802
No. 51907 19
ItemMeasuringinstrument Test point Adjustment part Description
V CENTER andTRAPEZIUMadjustment
Signalgenerator
No.68 V CENTERNo.78 TRAPEZ
1. Receive a crosshatch signal.2. Adjust the No.68 V CENTER of the PICTURE MODE to be the same
between the CRT vertical center and crosshatch vertical center.3. Adjust the No.78 TRAPEZ of the PICTUER MODE to be the vertical
lines straight.4. Confirm the vertical lines to be straight. If it is not straight, adjust to
be straight at the No.78 TRAPEZ.
Signalgenerator
Note:Proceed to the following this adjustment after having completed theadjustments of FOCUS, V CENTER, TRAPEZIUM, V-SIZEand V-LINEARITY.
1. Receive a crosshatch signal.2. Select the No.73 H SIZE of the PICTURE MODE.3. Set the initial setting value of the No.73 H SIZE with the LEFT /
RIGHT key of the remote control unit.4. Adjust the No.73 H SIZE until the horizontal screen size is 90%.5. Adjust the No.72 H POSI until the screen will be horizontally centered.
No.73 H SIZENo.72 H POSI
V SIZE andV LINEARITYadjustment
Signalgenerator
1. Receive a crosshatch signal.2. Select the No.66 V SIZE of the PICTURE MODE to squeeze the
laster.3. Adjust the No.65 V LIN of the PICTURE MODE to be symmetrical.4. Adjust the No.66 V SIZE until the vertical screen size is 92%.
No.66 V SIZENo.65 V LIN
Picture size 100%
H SIZE andH POSITIONadjustment
Picture size 100%
ADJUSTMENT OF DEFLECTION
Picturesize 100%
Screensize 92%
Screen size 90%
Picture size 100%
AV-36F702AV-36F802
20 No. 51907
ItemMeasuringinstrument Test point Adjustment part Description
SIDE PIN andCORNER PINadjsutment
Signalgenerator
No.76 SIDE PINNo.82 TOP PINNo.84 BTM PIN
Note:Proceed to the following this adjustment after having completed theadjustments of FOCUS, V CENTER, TRAPEZIUM, V-SIZE and V-LINEARITY.
1. Receive a crosshatch signal.2. Adjust such that vertical 2nd lines from left and right to be straight at
the No.76 SIDE PIN of the PICTURE MODE.3. Adjust the end of vertical 2nd lines from left and right to be straight
at the No.82 TOP PIN and the No.84 BTM PIN of the PICTUREMODE.
PIP DISPLAYPOSITIONadjustment[AV-36F802]
Notes:• Proceed to the following this adjustment after having completed theadjustments of V CENTER, TRAPEZIUM, V-SIZE, V-LINEARITY, HSIZE, H POSITION, SIDE PIN and CORNER PIN for the main pic-ture.
• Set VIDEO STATUS to “STANDARD”.
1. Receive a broadcast.2. Select the PIP MODE from the SERVICE MENU.3. Then adjust the PIP screen size so that it occupies 80% ± 2% of the
main screen area.
No.11 LEFT POS.No.12 RIGHT POS.No.13 UPPER POS.No.14 LOWER POS.
LEFT POS. RIGHT POS.
UPPER POS.
LOWER POS.
Mainscreensize
Main screen size
80%±2%
80% ±2%
Straight Straight
AV-36F702AV-36F802
No. 51907 21
ItemMeasuringinstrument Test point Adjustment part Description
SUB COLORadjustment
Notes:• Proceed to the following this adjustment after having completed theadjustment of CONTRAST.
• Set VIDEO STATUS to “STANDARD”.
[ Method of adjustment without measuring instrument ]1. Receive a broadcast.2. Select the No.3 COLOR of the PICTURE MODE.3. Set the initial setting value of the No.3 COLOR with the LEFT/RIGHT
key of the remote control unit.4. If the color is not the best with the Initial setting value, make fine
adjustment of the No.3 COLOR until you get the optimum color.
No.3 COLORSignalgeneratorOscilloscopeRemotecontrol unit
TP-BTP-E1 ( )[CRT SOCKETPWB]
YG
R
W Cy
(–)0V(+)
MgB
(A) Notes:• Proceed to the following this adjustment after having completed theadjustment of CONTRAST.
• Set VIDEO STATUS to “STANDARD”.
[ Method of adjustment using measuring instrument ]1. Input the full field color bar signal (75% white).2. Select the No.3 COLOR of the PICTURE MODE.3. Set the initial setting value of the No.3. COLOR with the LEFT/RIGHT
key of the remote control unit.4. Connect the oscilloscope between TP-B and TP-E1.5. Adjust COLOR and bring the value of (A) in the illustration to the
voltage +26V (VW–B).
SUB TINTadjustment
Notes:• Proceed to the following this adjustment after having completed theadjustment of CONTRAST.
• Set VIDEO STATUS to “STANDARD”.
[ Method of adjustment without measuring instrument ]1. Receive a broadcast.2. Select the No.4 TINT of the PICTURE MODE.3. Set the initial setting value of the No.4 TINT with the LEFT/RIGHT
key of the remote control unit.4. If the tint is not the best with the initial setting value, make fine ad-
justment of the No.4 TINT until you get the optimum tint.
No.4 TINTSignalgeneratorOscilloscopeRemotecontrol unit
TP-BTP-E1 ( )[CRT SOCKETPWB]
YG
R
W Cy
(–)0V(+)
Mg B(B)
Notes:• Proceed to the following this adjustment after having completed theadjustment of CONTRAST.
• Set VIDEO STATUS to “STANDARD”.
[ Method of adjustment using measuring instrument ]1. Input the full field color bar signal (75% white).2. Select the No.4 TINT of the PICTURE MODE.3. Set the initial setting value of the No.4 TINT with the LEFT/RIGHT
key to the remote control unit.4. Connect the oscilloscope between TP-B and TP-E1.5. Adjust TINT and bring the value of (B) in the illustration to the
voltvoltage +14V (VW–Mg).
ADJUSTMENT OF CHROMA
AV-36F702AV-36F802
22 No. 51907
ItemMeasuringinstrument Test point Adjustment part Description
MTS SAPVCOadjustment
Signalgenerator
Frequencycounter
No.9 5FH MON.
No.10 SAP VCO
1. Receive a RF signal (non modulated sound signal) from the an-tenna terminal.
2. Connect between pin 4 of [MPX] connector and GND (Pin 3 of [MPX]connector) through 1MØ Resistor.
3. Select the No.9 5FH MON. of the SOUND MODE, and reset thesetting value from 0 to 1.
4. Connect the Frequency Counter to pin 2 of [MPX] connector andGND (Pin 3 of [MPX] connector) .
5. Select the No.10 SAP VCO.6. Set the initial setting value of the No.10 SAP VCO with the LEFT/
RIGHT key of the remote control unit.7. Adjust the No.10 SAP VCO so that the frequency counter will dis-
play 78.67kHz±0.5kHz.8. Select the No.9 5FH MON. of the SOUND MODE, and reset the
setting value from 1 to 0.
MTS FILTERcheck
1. Select the No.6 FILTER of the SOUND MODE.2. Verify that the No.6 FILTER is set at its initial setting value.
No.6 FILTER
[MPX]Connector4 pin TP_952.53 pin GND2 pin AUDIO_R
MTSSEPARATIONadjustment
Note: Menu “MTS” is set to “STEREO”
1. Input a stereo L signal (300Hz) from the TV audio multiplex signalgenerator to the antenna terminal.
2. Connect an oscilloscope to pin 1 of [MPX] connector, and displayone cycle portion of the 300Hz signal.
3. Change the connection of the oscilloscope to pin 2 of [MPX] con-nector, and enlarge the voltage axis.
4. Select the No.7 LOW SEP. of the SOUND MODE.5. Set the initial setting value of the No.7 LOW SEP. with the LEFT/
RIGHT key of the remote control unit.6. Adjust the No.7 LOW SEP. so that the 300Hz signal level will be-
come minimum.7. Change the signal to 3kHz, and connect an oscilloscope to pin 1 of
[MPX] connector.8. Adjust the No.8 HI SEP. so that the 3kHz signal level will become
minimum.
No.7 LOW SEP.
No.8 HI SEP.
TV audiomultiplexsignalgenerator
Oscilloscope
[MPX]Connector1 pin AUDIO_L2 pin AUDIO_R3 pin GND
L-Channel signal waveform
R-Channel crosstalk portion
Minimum
1 cycle
MTS INPUTLEVELcheck
1. Select the No.2 IN LEVEL of the SOUND MODE.2. Verify that the No.2 IN LEVEL is set at its initial setting value.
No.2 IN LEVEL
MTS STEREOVCOadjustment
Signalgenerator
Frequencycounter
Note: Menu “MTS” is set to “STEREO”
1. Receive a RF signal (nonmodulated sound signal) from the antennaterminal.
2. Select the No.3 FH MONITOR of SOUND MODE, and change thesetting value from 0 to 1.
3. Connect the Frequency Counter to pin 2 of [MPX] connector andGND (Pin 3 of [MPX] connector).
4. Select the No.4 STEREO VCO.5. Set the initial setting value of the No.4 STEREO VCO with the LEFT/
RIGHT key of the remote control unit.6. Adjust the No.4 STEREO VCO so that the frequency counter will
display 15.73kHz±0.1kHz.7. Select the No.3 FH MONITOR of the SOUND MODE, and reset the
setting value from 1 to 0.
No.3 FH MONITOR
No.4 STEREO VCO
[MPX]Connector2 pin AUDIO R3 pin GND
ADJUSTMENT OF MTS CIRCUIT
AV-36F702AV-36F802
No. 51907 23
ADJUSTMENTS OF PURITY AND CONVERGENCE
Note: The final adjustment of CONVERGENCE must be done after theFOCUS adjustment. (CONVERGENCE is changed by FOCUSadjustment.)When makes difference by FOCUS adjustment, should bereconfirming PURITY adjustment.
PURITY ADJUSTMENT
1. Demagnetize CRT with the demagnetizer.
2. Loosen the retainer screw of the deflection yoke.
3. Remove the wedges.
4. Input a green raster signal from the signal generator, and turn thescreen to green raster.
5. Move the deflection yoke backward.
6. Bring the long lug of the purity magnets on the short lug and positionthem horizontally. (Fig.2)
7. Adjust the gap between two lugs so that the GREEN RASTER willcome into the center of the screen. (Fig.3)
8. Move the deflection yoke forward, and fix the position of the deflec-tion yoke so that the whole screen will become green.
9. Insert the wedge to the top side of the deflection yoke so that it willnot move.
10. Input a crosshatch signal.
11. Verify that the screen is horizontal.
12. Input red and blue raster signals, and make sure that purity is prop-erly adjusted.
Fig. 1
• P/C MAGNETS
P : PURITY MAGNET4 : 4 POLES (convergence magnets)6 : 6 POLES (convergence magnets)
CRT
WEDGE
P
P / CMAGNETS
4 6
DEFLECTION YOKE
Fig. 2
Long lug
Short lug
PURITY MAGNETS
Bring the long lug over the short lugand position them horizontally.
Fig. 3
(FRONT VIEW) GREEN RASTER
CENTER
AV-36F702AV-36F802
24 No. 51907
STATIC CONVERGENCE ADJUSTMENT
1. Input a crosshatch signal.
2. Using 4-pole convergence magnets, overlap the red and blue linesin the center of the screen (Fig. 4) and turn them to magenta (red/blue).
3. Using 6-pole convergence magnets, overlap the magenta(red/blue)and green lines in the center of the screen and turn them to white.
4. Repeat 2 and 3 above, and make best convergence.
DYNAMIC CONVERGENCE ADJUSTMENT
1. Move the deflection yoke up and down and overlap the lines in theperiphery. (Fig. 5)
2. Move the deflection yoke left to right and overlap the lines in theperiphery. (Fig. 6)
3. Repeat 1 and 2 above, and make best convergence.
• After adjustment, fix the wedge at the original position.Fasten the retainer screw of the deflection yoke.Fix the 6 magnets with glue.
RED
RED
RED
RED
BLUE
(FRONT VIEW)
(FRONT VIEW)
BLUE
BLUE
BLUE GREEN
GREENGREEN
GREEN
(FRONT VIEW)
GREEN GREEN
GREEN
GREEN
RED REDRED
RED
BLUE
BLUE
BLUE
BLUE
Fig. 4
Fig. 5
Fig. 6
AV-36F702AV-36F802
No. 51907 25
HOW TO CHECK THE HIGH VOLTAGE HOLD DOWN CIRCUIT1. HIGH VOLTAGE HOLD DOWN CIRCUIT
After repairing the high voltage hold down circuit shown in Fig. 1.This circuit shall be checked to operate correctly.
2. CHECKING OF THE HIGH VOLTAGE HOLD DOWN CIRCUIT
(1) Turn the POWER SW ON.(2) As shown in Fig. 1, set the resistor (between S1 connector 2 & 3 ).(3) Make sure that the screen picture disappears.(4) Temporarily unplug the power cord.(5) Remove the resistor (between S1 connector 2 & 3 ).(6) Again plug the power cord, make sure that the normal picture is displayed on the screen.
Fig. 1
2 3 S1 CONNECTOR
HEATER
RESISTOR23.0 kΩ ± 115 Ω 1/4 W
++
POWERON OFF
RY951
R952
D535
R532
R951
Q951
Q532
Q531
R533
R534
R535R538C533
D534 D531
D532BW
C525
R537 FR525
D525
T502
4
AV-36F702AV-36F802
26 No. 51907
SELF CHECK FUNCTIONS1. Outline
This model has self check functions given below. When a malfunction has been detected, the POWER is turned off and the LED flashes to informof the failure . The malfunction is detected by the signal input state of the control line connected to the microcomputer.
2. Self check items
Check item Details of detection Method of detection State of malfunction
3. Self check indicating function
The self-check function begins detection about 5 seconds after poweris supplied.In the event a malfunction is detected, the power is cut off immedi-ately.At this time, the ON-TIMER LED flashes to inform of the malfunc-tion.
[ON-TIMER LED indication]The ON-TIMER LED flashes at 0.5 seconds intervals.
POWERSupplied
After about5 seconds
Start ofdetection
Malfunctionis detected
POWER OFF
FlashingON-TIMER LED
Over-current protector Operation of B1 protector circuit. The microcomputer detects at 1second intervals.If NG is detected for more than200 ms, a malfunction is inter-preted.
When a malfunction has beendetected, the POWER is turnedoff. While the POWER is beingturned off , the power key of theremote controller is not opera-tional until the power code istaken out and put in again.
Printed in JapanVP 0110H.K/Y.S/A.N
JVC SERVICE & ENGINEERING COMPANY OF AMERICA
DIVISION OF JVC AMERICAS CORP.Head office : 1700 Valley Road, Wayne, New Jersey 07470 (973)317-5000
East Coast : 10 New Maple Avenue, Pine Brook, New Jersey 07058 (973)396-1000
Midwest : 705 Enterprise St. Aurora, Illinois 60504 (630)851-7855
West Coast : 5665 Corporate Avenue, Cypress, California 90630 (714)229-8011
Southwest : 10700 Hammerly, Suite 105, Houston,Texas 77043 (713)935-9331
Hawaii : 2969 Mapunapuna Place, Honolulu, Hawaii 96819 (808)833-5828
Southeast : 1500 Lakes Parkway, Lawrenceville, Georgia 30243 (770)339-2582
JVC CANADA INC.Head office : 21 Finchdene Square Scarborough, Ontario M1X 1A7 (416)293-1311
Vancouver : 13040 Worster Court Richmond B.C. V6V 2B3 (604)270-1311
®
COLOR TELEVISIONUSER'S GUIDE
For models:AV-36F802AV-36F702AV-32F802AV-32F702AV-27F802AV-27F702
Illustration of AV-27F802 and RM-C301G
IMPORTANT NOTE TO THE CUSTOMERIn the spaces below, enter the model and serial number of your television (locat-ed at the rear of the television cabinet). Staple your sales receipt or invoice tothe inside cover of this guide. Keep this user's guide in a convenient place for
future reference. Keep the carton and original packaging for future use.
Model NumberSerial Number
LCT0821-001D-A0901-TN-FAA-JIM
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 1
IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARDS, DO NOTEXPOSE THIS TV SET TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
CAUTION: TO INSURE PERSONAL SAFETY, OBSERVE THEFOLLOWING RULES REGARDING THE USE OFTHIS UNIT.
1.Operate only from the power source specified on the unit.2. Avoid damaging the AC plug and power cord.3. Avoid Improper installation and never position the unit where good venti-
lation is unattainable.4. Do not allow objects or liquid into the cabinet openings.5.In the event of trouble, unplug the unit and call a service technician.Do
not attempt to repair it yourself or remove the rear cover.
Changes or modifications not approved by JVC could void the warranty.
* When you don’t use this TV set for a long period of time, be sure to dis-connect both the power plug from the AC outlet and antenna for yoursafety.
* To prevent electric shock do not use this polarized plug with an extensioncord, receptacle or other outlet unless the blades can be fully inserted toprevent blade exposure.
CAUTION:To reduce the risk of electric shock.Do not remove cover (or back).
No user serviceable parts inside.Refer servicing to qualified service personnel.
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, with-in an equilateral triangle is intended to alert theuser to the presence of uninsulated “dangerousvoltage” within the product’s enclosure that maybe of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk ofelectric shock to persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral trian-gle is intended to alert the user to the presenceof important operating and maintenance (servic-ing) instructions in the literature accompanyingthe appliance.
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCKDO NOT OPEN
CAUTION
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 2
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS
CAUTION:
Please read and retain for your safety.Electrical energy can perform many useful functions. This TV set has been engineered andmanufactured to assure your personal safety. But improper use can result in potential electricalshock or fire hazards. In order not to defeat the safeguards incorporated in this TVset,observe the following basic rules for its installation, use and servicing.And also follow all warnings and instructions marked on your TV set.
INSTALLATION1 Your TV set is equipped with a polarized AC line plug (one blade of the plug is wider than the
other).
This safety feature allows the plug to fit into the power outlet only one way. Should you beunable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing the plug.Should it still fail to fit, contact your electrician.
2 Operate the TVset only from a power source as indicated on the TV set or refer to the oper-ating instructions for this information. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to yourhome, consult your TV set dealer or local power company.For battery operation, refer to theoperating instructions.
3 Overloaded AC outlets and extension cords are dangerous, and so are frayed power cordsand broken plugs. They may result in a shock or fire hazard. Call your service technician forreplacement.
4 Do not allow anything to rest on or roll over the power cord, and do not place the TV setwhere power cord is subject to traffic or abuse. This may result in a shock or fire hazard.
5 Do not use this TV set near water — for example, near a bathtub, washbowl, kitchen sink, orlaundry tub, in a wet basement, or near swimming pool, etc.
6 If an outside antenna is connected to the TV set, be sure the antenna system is grounded soas to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Section810 of the National Electrical Code provides information with respect to proper grounding ofthe mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna dischargeunit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection require-ments for the grounding electrode.
(POLARIZED-TYPE)
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 3
7 An outside antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines orother electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits.When installing an outside antenna system, extreme care should be taken to keep fromtouching such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be fatal.
8 TV sets are provided with ventilation openings in the cabinet to allow heat generated duringoperation to be released.Therefore:— Never block the bottom ventilation slots of a portable TV set by placing it on a bed, sofa,
rug, etc.— Never place a TV set in a “built-in” enclosure unless proper ventilation is provided.— Never cover the openings with a cloth or other material.— Never place the TV set near or over a radiator or heat register.
9 To avoid personal injury:— Do not place a TV set on a sloping shelf unless properly secured.— Use only a cart or stand recommended by the TVset manufacturer.— Do not try to roll a cart with small casters across thresholds or deep pile carpets.—Wall or shelf mounting should follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a
mounting kit approved by the manufacturer.
USE10 Caution children about dropping or pushing objects into the TV set through cabinet open-
ings. Some internal parts carry hazardous voltages and contact can result in a fire or elec-trical shock.
11 Unplug the TV set from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid or an aerosolcleaner.
12 Never add accessories to a TV set that has not been designed for this purpose. Such addi-tions may result in a hazard.
EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDINGAS PER NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 4
13 For added protection of the TV set during a lightning storm or when the TV set is to be leftunattended for an extended period of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect theantenna.This will prevent damage to product due to lightning storms or power line surges.
14 A TVset and cart combination should be moved withcare. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven sur-faces may cause the TV set and cart combination tooverturn.
SERVICE15 Unplug this TV set from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel
under the following conditions:A.When the power cord or plug is damaged or frayed.B. If liquid has been spilled into the TV set.C. If the TV set has been exposed to rain or water.D. If the TV set does not operate normally by following the operating instructions. Adjust
only those controls that are covered in the operating instructions as improper adjustmentof other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a quali-fied technician to restore the TV set to normal operation.
E.If the TV set has been dropped or damaged in any way.F.When the TV set exhibits a distinct change in performance — this indicates a need for
service.
16 Do not attempt to service this TV set yourself as opening or removing covers may exposeyou to dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to qualified service person-nel.
17 When replacement parts are required, have the service technician verify in writing that thereplacement parts he uses have the same safety characteristics as the original parts. Useof manufacturer’s specified replacement parts can prevent fire, shock, or other hazards.
18 Upon completion of any service or repairs to this TV set, please ask the service technicianto perform the safety check described in the manufacturer’s service literature.
19 When a TV set reaches the end of its useful life, improper disposal could result in a picturetube implosion.Ask a qualified service technician to dispose of the TV set.
20 Note to CATV system installer.This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s attention to Article 820-40 ofthe NEC that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that thecable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to thepoint of cable entry as practical.
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 5
PICTURE SETTINGS . . . . . . . 34Tint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Bright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Noise Muting . . . . . . . . . . . 35Set Video Status . . . . . . . . . . 35
SOUND SETTINGS . . . . . . . 36Bass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 6Treble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36MTS (Multi-channel Sound) . . . . 36
GENERAL ITEMS . . . . . . . . 37Purity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37On/Off Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . 37TV Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Audio Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38V4 Component-In/V2 Component-In . . . . . . . . . 39Closed Caption . . . . . . . . . . 39
BUTTON FUNCTIONS . . . . . . 40Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Exit and PIP Off . . . . . . . . . 40Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Video Status . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Sleep Timer . . . . . . . . . . . 41Hyper Surround . . . . . . . . . 41Muting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41BBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42100+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Return+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42VCR Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . 43DV D Buttons . . . . . . . . . . 4 3TV/CATV Switch . . . . . . . . . . 43VCR/DVD Switch . . . . . . . . . 43Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
PIP (Picture-In-Picture) . . . . . 44Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . 44On/Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44Freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Swap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Channel +/– . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
APPENDICES . . . . . . . . . . .46Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . 46Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Authorized Service Centers . . 49Search Codes . . . . . . . . . . 50Specifications . . . . . . . . . . .51
Table of ContentsUNPACKING YOUR TV . . . . . 7
QUICK SETUP. . . . . . . . . . . 8Getting Started . . . . . . . . . 8Remote Control . . . . . . . . . 8Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8Basic Operation . . . . . . . . . 8Making Basic Connections . . . 9Plug In Menu . . . . . . . . . . 10
CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . 11Cable and VCR Connections . . . . . . . 11Connecting to a DVD Player . . . . . . . . 14Connecting to an External Amplifier . . . . 15Connecting to a Camcorder . . . . . . . . 15Connecting to JVC AV Compu Link . . . . 6
REMOTE CONTROL . . . . . . 17Remote Control Basics . . . . . 17Changing the Batteries . . . . . 17
REMOTE PROGRAMMING . . . 18CATV and Satellite Codes . . . 18VCR Codes . . . . . . . . . . . 19DVD Codes . . . . . . . . . . . 20
ONSCREEN MENUS . . . . . . 21Using the Guide . . . . . . . . 21The Onscreen Menus . . . . . . 21
PLUG IN MENU . . . . . . . . . 22Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . 22Language . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Auto Tuner Setup . . . . . . . . 22Auto Clock Set . . . . . . . . . 23Manual Clock Set . . . . . . . . 24Finish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
CHANNEL SUMMARY . . . . . 25Channel Summary . . . . . . . 25
V–CHIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26US V–Chip Ratings . . . . . . . 27Setting US V–Chip Ratings . . . 28Directions . . . . . . . . . . . . 28Set Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . 29Movie Ratings . . . . . . . . . . 30Directions for Movie Settings . 30Canadian V–Chip Ratings . . . 31Canadian V–Chip Directions . . 31Unrated Programs . . . . . . . 32Set Lock Code . . . . . . . . . 33
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 6
Two AA Batteries1 Television
1 Remote Control
Thank you for your purchase of a JVC Color Television. Before you begin setting up your newtelevision, please check to make sure you have all of the following items. In addition to thisguide, your television box should include:
Once you have unpacked your television, the next step is to connect it to your antenna/cableor satellite system and to connect the audio/video devices you want to use with your televi-sion. To make these connections you will use plugs like the ones illustrated below.
A/V Input PlugRF ConnectorsUsed to connect acoaxial cable from anexternal antenna or CableTV system.
A matching TV stand is also available(optional).
Used to make video con-nections with VCRs,DVDs, Camcorders, etc(optional).
Used to connect JVC AVCompu Link capable components foran automated home the-ater.
Used to connectaudio/video devices likeVCRs, DVD players, stereoamplifiers, game consoles,etc.
S-Video Plug
AV Compu Link Cable
We recommend that before you start using your new television, you read your entire User’sGuide so you can learn about your new television’s many great features. But if you’re anxiousto start using your television right away, a quick setup guide follows on the next three pages.
Unpacking Your Television
7
Note: Your remote control may differ fromthe example illustratedhere.
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 7
8
Slide the cover on the back of the remote down towards the bottom of the remote control.Insert two batteries (included) carefully noting the “+”and “–” markings, placing the “–”end inthe unit first. Slide the cover back into place.
Getting StartedThese quick setup pages will provide you, in three easy steps, with the basic information youneed to begin using your new television right away. This information includes basic instructionson operating your remote control, making a simple cable/antenna and optional VCR connectionand, finally, information on programming your television's Auto Tuner.
If you have questions, or for more detailed information on any of these steps, please consultother sections of this manual.
Step One - The Remote ControlThe remote control is the key to operating your television's many great features. Before youcan operate your remote control, you first need to install the batteries (included).
Basic OperationTurn the television on and off by pressing the POWER button at the top right corner of theremote.
The four key feature buttons at the center of the remote can be used for basic operation of the television.The top and bottom buttons will scan forward and back through the available chan-nels. The right and left buttons will turn the volume up or down.These buttons are also markedwith four arrows and are also used with JVC's onscreen menu system. You will need to usethese buttons later in the Quick Setup.
The next step is to connect your television to an antenna or cable.
Power Button Key Feature Buttons
+Proceed to Step Two
Quick Setup 1
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 8
9
Cable/RF connector
Step Two - Making Basic ConnectionsNext you will need to connect your television to an antenna or cable system. The most basic antenna/cable connection is shown below. For more detailed connections, such as ones wherea cable box is required, see pages 11 to 13.
1) Connect the yellow video cable out from the VCR’s Video Output, in to the TV’s Video Input jack, OR connect an S-Video cable from the VCR’s S-Video output, to the TV’sS-Video input.
2) Connect the white audio cable out from the VCR’s Left Audio Output, in to the TV’s Left Audio Input Jack.
3) Connect the red audio cable out from the VCR’s Right Audio Output, in to the TV’s RightAudio Input jack.
Finally, once you have finished your connections, plug the power cord into the nearest poweroutlet and turn on the television.
1) Connect an RF cable out from the wall outlet in to the RF Input on the back of the TV.
+Proceed to Step Three
Quick Setup 2
Illustration of AV-27F802
You may also wish to connect a VCR at this point. A basic VCR connection is shown below.For detailed instructions on connecting a other components or a home theater system, seepages 14 to 16.
NOTE: A VCRis not required to operate your television.
Illustration of AV-27F802
AV Cables/Plugs
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 9
10
Press the buttons to move to AUTO TUNER SETUPPress the buttons to begin AUTO TUNER SETUP
To choose CABLE (if you are connected to a cable system) or AIR (if you use an antenna)To move to STARTTo start Auto Tuner Setup
The Auto Tuner will now memorize all of the clear, active channels your television canreceive. This will take one or two minutes.
NOW PROGRAMMING!
48
TUNER MODE : CABLE AIR
START
Step Three - The Plug In MenuWhen you turn your television on for the first time the Plug In Menu will appear. This menusets some of the basic settings for your television. A complete description of the Plug In Menucan be found starting on page 22. We recommend you complete the Plug In Menu itemsbefore you start using your television. But to begin watching your television right away you onlyneed to run the Auto Tuner Setup. This lets your television learn the channels it is able toreceive. To run the Auto Tuner Setup follow the steps below.
The Auto Tuner is finished when the message PROGRAMMING OVER! appears onscreen.
Your Quick Setup is now complete. You can now begin watching your television, or you cancontinue on in this guide for more information on connecting audio/video devices, programmingyour remote control, or using the JVC onscreen menu system to customize your televisionviewing experience.
PLUG IN MENU
LANGUAGE ENG FRE SPAAUTO TUNER SETUPSET CLOCK
FINISH
SELECT BYOPERATE BY EXIT BY
EXIT
The Quick Setup is complete
Quick Setup 3
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 10
Connections
1) Connect the antenna or cable TV wire from the wall outlet, in to the RF Input of the two-waysplitter.
2) Connect an RFcable from the one of the RF Outputs on the splitter, in to the RF Input on the back of the VCR.
3) Connect an RFcable from the other the RFOutput on the splitter, in to the RF Input on theback of the TV.
4) Connect the yellow video cable out from the VCR’s Video Output, in to the TV’s Video Inputjack, OR connect an S-Video cable from the VCR’s S-Video output, to the TV’s S-Video input.
5) Connect the white audio cable out from the VCR’s Left Audio Output, in to the TV’s LeftAudio Input Jack.
6) Connect the red audio cable out from the VCR’s Right Audio Output, in to the TV’s RightAudio Input jack.
• If your VCRis a mono sound unit, it will have only one Audio Out jack. Connect it to the TV’s Left Audio Input.
• Please consult your VCR’s owner’s manual for more information on its operation.
There are three basic types of antenna or cable connections:• If you have an antenna or have a cable system that does not require you use a cable box
to select channels, please refer to Diagram #1.• If you have a cable system that requires the use of a cable box to access all the chan-
nels, please refer to Diagram #2. If you cannot operate your Picture-In-Picture function using Diagram #2, try the connection shown in Diagram #3. It is possible yocable box allows the signal of only one channel at a time to be sent to your television.
• If you have a cable system that requires the use of a cable box to access certain premium channels, but not “basic”cable channels, please refer to Diagram #3.
• For your convenience, connection to a VCR is also shown in the following diagrams. AVCR is not necessary for operation of the television or Picture-In-Picture (PIP) function.You may omit the VCR from your connections if you wish.
• For instructions on connecting a VCR only, please see the Quick Setup on page 9.• For information on using PIP, please see page 44.
• The PIP feature is available on models AV-36F802, AV-32F802 and AV-27F802 only.
Cable and VCR Connections
11
Illustration of AV-27F802
Diagram #1
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 11
Connections
12
1) Connect the antenna or cable TV wire from the wall outlet, in to the RFInput of the cablebox.
2) Connect an RF cable from the RFOutput of the cable box, in to the RFInput on the back of the VCR.
3) Connect an RF cable from the RF Output of the VCR, in to the RF Input on the back of the TV.
4) Connect the yellow video cable out from the VCR’s Video Output, in to the TV’s Video Input jack, OR connect an S-Video cable from the VCR’s S-Video output, to the TV’s S-Video input.
5) Connect the white audio cable out from the VCR’s Left Audio Output, in to the TV’s Left Audio Input Jack.
6) Connect the red audio cable out from the VCR’s Right Audio Output, in to the TV’s Right Audio Input jack.
• Please see page 44 for information on using the PIP feature with a Cable Box.• If your VCRis a mono sound unit, it will have only one Audio Out jack. Connect it to the TV’s
Left Audio Input.• Please consult your VCR’s owner’s manual for more information on its operation.
Cable and VCR Connections - Continued
Illustration of AV-27F802
Diagram #2
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 12
Connections
13
The connection diagrams are intended to show some basic general connections.Some cable companies may require special connections to properly use your televi-sion or 2-tuner PIP function. If you follow these diagrams and either the television orPIPdoes not work properly, contact your local cable operator for more connectioninformation. Please see page 44 for more information on the PIP feature.
Cable and VCR Connections - Continued
1) Connect the antenna or cable TV wire from the wall outlet, in to the RF Input of the two-waysplitter.
2) Connect an RFcable from the one of the RFOutputs on the splitter, in to the cable box RFInput.
3) Connect an RF cable from the Cable Box Output, in to the VCR RF Input.4) Connect an RFcable from the other the RFOutput on the splitter, in to the RF Input on the
back of the TV.5) Connect the yellow video cable out from the VCR’s Video Output, in to the TV’s Video Input
jack, OR connect an S-Video cable from the VCR’s S-Video output, to the TV’s S-Videoinput.
6) Connect the white audio cable out from the VCR’s Left Audio Output, in to the TV’s LeftAudio Input jack.
7) Connect the red audio cable out from the VCR’s Right Audio Output, in to the TV’s Right Audio Input jack.
• Please see page 44 for information on using the PIP feature with a Cable Box.• If your VCRis a mono sound unit, it will have only one Audio Out jack. Connect it to the
TV’s Left Audio Input.• Please consult your VCR’s owner’s manual for more information on its operation.
Illustration of AV-27F802
Diagram #3
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 13
Connections
14
1) Connect Green cable out from DVD player “Y”Component Output, in to TV“Y” ComponentInput.
2) Connect Blue cable out from DVDplayer “PB” Component Output, in to TV “PB” ComponentInput.
3) Connect Red cable out from DVD Player “PR” Component Output, in to TV “PR” ComponentInput.
4) Connect White Audio cable out from DVDLeft Audio Output, in to TV Left Audio Input 2.
5) Connect Red Audio cable out from DVDRight Audio Output, in to TVRight Audio Input 2.
• Green, blue and red are the most common colors for DVD cables . Some models may varycolors. Please consult the user’s manual for your DVD Player for more information.
• Be careful not to confuse the red DVD cable with the red audio cable. It is best to completeone set of connections (DVDor Audio Output) before starting the other to avoid accidentallyswitching the cables.
• See page 20 for instructions on programming your remote control to operate the basic func-tions of your DVD player.
• AV-36F802, AV-32F802 & AV-27F802: You may also connect the DVD player to Input 4. Ifyou use Input 4 for the DVD connection, you must set the V4 COMPONENT-IN on the initialSetup Menu to “YES” for proper display of the DVD signal.
• AV-36F702, AV-32F702 & AV-27F702: If you use Input 2 (Component-In) for the DVDcon-nection, you must set the V2 COMPONENT-IN on the initial Setup Menu to “YES” for prop-er display of the DVD signal.
NOTE: Progressive DVDPlayers (players with an output scan of 31.5 KHz) will not work prop-erly with this television.
Connecting to a DVD player
Illustration of AV-27F802
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 14
Connections
1) Connect the yellow video cable out from the Camcorder’s Video Output, in to the TV’s VideoInput jack, OR connect an S-Video cable from the Camcorder’s S-Video output, to the TV’sS-Video Input.
2) Connect the white audio cable out from the Camcorder’s Left Audio Output, in to the TV’sLeft Audio Input jack.
3) Connect the red audio cable out from the Camcorder’s Right Audio Output, in to the TV’sRight Audio Input jack.
• If your Camcorder is a mono sound model it will have only one audio jack. Connect it to the TV’s Left Audio jack.
Connecting to an External Amplifier
Connecting to a Camcorder
1) Connect the white audio cable from the TV’s Left Audio Output jack to the Amplifier’s LeftAudio Input jack.
2) Connect the red audio cable from the TV’s Right Audio Output jack to the Amplifier’s RightAudio Input jack.
• See also “TV Speaker” and “Audio Out”on page 38 for more information on using externalspeakers.
You may connect a camcorder to your television by using the front Input Jacks (Input 3)located under the front panel door. To access, press lightly on the door to open it. You mayalso connect a game console or other equipment using these jacks. Camcorders may alsobe connected to the television’s rear input jacks.
Illustration of AV-27F802
Illustration of AV-27F802
15
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 15
Connections
16
To Connect: Plug one end of the AV Compu Link cable into the AV Compu Link input on yourVCR, DVD, or other Compu Link device. Plug the other end of the AV Compu Link cable intothe AV Compu Link input at the rear of the television.
Connecting to JVC AV Compu Link
JVC’s AV Compu Link feature makes playing video tapes or DVDs totally automatic. Simplyinsert a pre-recorded tape into your JVC-brand VCR or DVD into your JVC DVD player andthe device will automatically turn on and begin playback. At the same time, using the AVCompu Link, the VCR or DVD player sends a signal to the television telling it to turn on andswitch to the proper video input.• The AV Compu Link cable may be included with the JVC AV Compu Link accessory you
wish to connect. If it is not, contact an authorized JVCService Center forpart # EWP 805-012.
• AV Compu Link can only be used with JVC-brand products.
NOTE:• In order for the VCR playback to begin automatically, the recording tabs must be remove from
the VHS tape. If the tab is in place, automatic switching will occur when you push the VCR’sPLAY button.
• The AV Compu Link cable has a male 3.5 mm (mono) plug on each end.• If your JVC-brand VCR has “A Code/B Code Remote Control Switching”(see your VCR’s
instruction book), using VCR A Code will switch the TV to input 1.• To connect a JVC HiFi receiver or amplifier for a completely automated home theater, see
the HiFi’s connection instructions for detailed connection information.• AV COMPU LINK EX is compatible with the following receivers:RX-664V, RX-665V,
RX-668VBK, RX-774V, RX-778VBK, RX-884V, RX-888VBK, RX-1024V, RX-1028VBK, andlater receiver models.
Illustration of AV-27F802
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 16
Remote Control
• Before you can operate the remote control, you must firstinstall the batteries (included). See “Changing theBatteries” at the bottom of this page for instructions. (Foran illustration, please see page 8.)
• Press the POWER button to turn the television on or off.
• Make sure the TV/CATV switch is set to TV. Move theswitch to CATV only if you need to operate a cable box.
• Slide the VCR/DVD selector switch to VCR to control aVCR, slide to DVD to control a DVD player. Please seepages 18 to 20 for instructions on programming yourremote control to operate a Cable box, VCR or DVD player.
• Press the CH+ and CH– buttons to scan through the chan-nels. Tap the CH+ or CH– button to move through thechannels one channel at a time.
• To move rapidly through the channels using JVC’sHyperscan feature, press and hold CH+ or CH–. Thechannels will zip by at a rate of five channels per second.
• Press VOL+ or VOL– to raise or lower the volume. An indi-cator bar will appear onscreen to show you the televisionvolume level.
• The CH+/– and VOL+/– buttons are also used to navigateJVC’s onscreen menu system.
• You can directly access specific channels using the 10-keypad.
• For more information on remote control button features,see pages 40 to 45. For information on using theonscreen menus, see page 21.
Changing the Batteries Push down on the remote’s back cover and slide towards the bottom to remove it.Insert two AA batteries (supplied), carefully noting the "+" and "–" markings on the batteriesand on the remote control. To avoid a potential short circuit, insert the "–" end first. Be sure touse only size AA batteries.When batteries are installed, slide the cover back into place (until it clicks into position).• If the remote control acts erratically, replace the batteries . Typical battery life is six months to
one year. We recommend using alkaline batteries for longer battery life. When you changethe batteries, try to complete the task within three minutes. If you take longer than three min -utes, the remote control codes for your VCR, DVD, and/or Cable Box may have to be reset(see pages 18-20).
Remote Control Basics
NOTE: Remote control model RM-C301G is shown at theleft. A different model remote control may have come withyour television.
17
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 17
Remote ProgrammingSetting the CATV, VCR and DVD Codes
You can program your remote to operate your cable box, satellite receiver, VCR or DVD player by using the instructions and codes listed below. If the equipment does not respondto any of the codes listed below or to the code search function, use the remote control sup-plied by the manufacturer.
Cable Box or Satellite codesThe remote control is programmed with CATV and/or Satellite codes for power on, power off,channel up, channel down, and 10 key operation.1) Find the CATV/Satellite brand from the list of codes shown below.2) Slide the 2-way selector switch to “CATV”.3) Press and hold down the DISPLAY button.4) With the DISPLAY button held down, enter the first code number listed using the 10 key pad.5) Release the DISPLAY button.6) Confirm the operation of the Cable Box/Satellite receiver.
• If your CATVor Satellite box does not respond to the first code, try the others listed. If itdoes not respond to any code, try the Search Codes Function, on page 50.
18
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 18
Remote ProgrammingVCR codesThe remote control is programmed with VCR codes for power on, power off, play, stop,fast-forward, rewind, pause, record, channel up, and channel down operation.1) Find the VCR brand from the list of codes shown below.2) Slide the first 2-way selector switch to “TV” and the other 2-way selector switch to “VCR”.3) Press and hold down the DISPLAY button.4) With the DISPLAY button held down, enter the first code number listed with the 10 key pad.5) Release the DISPLAY button.6) Confirm the operation of the VCR.
• If your VCR does not respond to the first code, try the others listed. If it does not respond toany code, try the Search Codes Function, on page 50.
• Some manufacturer’s VCR’s may not respond to the TV/VCR button, even if other buttonswork properly.
• To record, hold down the REC button on the remote and press PLAY.
19
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 19
Remote Programming
20
DVD codesThe remote control is programmed with DVD codes for power on, power off, play, stop,fast-forward, rewind, previous chapter, next chapter, tray open/close, and still/pause operation.1) Find the DVD player brand from the list of codes shown below.2) Slide the first 2-way selector switch to “TV” and the other 2-way selector switch to “DVD”.3) Press and hold down the DISPLAY button.4) With the DISPLAY button held down, enter the first code number listed with the 10 key pad.5) Release the DISPLAY button.6) Confirm the operation of the DVD player.
• If your DVD player does not respond to the first code, try the others listed. If it does not respond to any code, try the Search Codes Function, on page 50.
• After you program your remote, some DVD buttons may not work properly. If some buttonsdo not work properly, use the remote control which came with your DVD player.
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 20
To bring up the onscreen menu, press the MENU button on the remote control. The item thatappears in yellow is the one currently selected. If you press the MENU button again, theonscreen display will skip to the next menu screen. If you use the Menu button on the TV’sfront panel instead of the remote, an additional menu screen showing channel number andinput will appear. The “Plug In Menu”will appear the first time the TV is plugged in.NOTE: Menus shown in this book are illustrations, not exact replications of the television’sonscreen displays.
Onscreen Menus
21
Using the Guide
The Onscreen Menus
PLUG IN MENU
LANGUAGE ENG FRE SPAAUTO TUNER SETUPSET CLOCK
FINISH
SELECT BYOPERATE BY EXIT BY
EXIT
Certain symbols are used throughout this guide to help you learn about the features of yournew television. The ones you will see most frequently are:
Up and Down arrows mean press the CH+ or CH– buttons. Pressing the CH+ or CH–buttons let you:• Move vertically in a main menu screen• Move through a submenu screen• Move to the next letter, number, or other choice in a submenu• Back up to correct an error• Scan through TVchannels (when not in a menu screen)
Left and right arrows mean press the VOLUME+ or VOLUME– buttons to move left or right to:• Select a highlighted menu item• Select an item in a submenu• Select numbers in certain menu options• Turn the volume up or down (when not in a menu screen)
The “Press Button” icon means you should press the button named on your remote control. (Button names appear in SMALL CAPITAL LETTERS.)
The “Helping Hand”icon points to the highlighted or selected item in a menu.
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 21
Plug In MenuIntroduction
Auto Tuner Setup
LanguageYou can choose to view your onscreen menus in three languages:English, French, or Spanish.
Press the MENU button
To LANGUAGE
To choose a language
In Auto Tuner Setup, the TV automatically scans through all available channels, memorizing theactive ones and skipping over blank ones or channels with weak signals. This means when youscan (using the CHANNEL +/– buttons) you will receive only clear, active channels.
Press the MENU button
To AUTO TUNER SETUP
To operate
To choose CABLEor AIR
To move to START
To start Auto Tuner Setup
• Noise Muting will not work during Auto Tuner Setup.• You will not need to press the MENU button to enter this screen from the Plug In Menu.
NOW PROGRAMMING !
PROGRAMMING OVER!
48
Programming will take approximately 1 to 2 minutes.
• You will not need to press the MENU button to enter this screen from the Plug In Menu.
The Plug In Menu comes up automatically when you first turn on the TV after plugging it in.The Plug In Menu helps you to get your TV ready to use by letting you set your preferences for:
• The Language in which you want the onscreen menus to appear,• The Auto Tuner Setup of which channels you wish to receive,• Setting the TV’s clock to the correct time so your timer functions will work properly.
Descriptions of each of the Plug In Menu features appear on this page and the next. We rec-ommend you complete the Plug In Menu setup first so your TV is set up just the way you want,right away.
22
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 22
Plug In Menu
23
Auto Clock SetBefore you use any of your TV’s timer functions, you must first set the clock. You may preciselyset your clock using the XDS time signal broadcast by most Public Broadcastingstations.Toset the clock using the XDS signal:
Enter the channel number of your local PBS station
Press MENU
To SETCLOCK
To operate
To AUTO
ToTIME ZONE
To select your time zone
To move to Daylight Savings Time (D.S.T.)
To turn D.S.T. ON or OFF
To FINISH
To save settings and exit
• If you do not have a PBS station in your local area, you will have to set the clock manually.See ‘Manual Clock Set’on the next page for instructions.
• The Daylight Savings Time feature automatically adjusts your TV’s clock for Daylight Savings.The clock will move forward one hour at 2:00 am on the first Sunday in April.The clock willmove back one hour at 2:00 am on the last Sunday in October.
• You will not need to press the MENU button to enter this screen from the Plug In Menu.
MODE AUTO MANUAL
TIME ZONE EASTERND.S.T. ON OFF
FINISH
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 23
Plug In Menu
24
Once you have the items in the Plug In Menu set to your personal preferences, move to theFinish option to save your settings.
To FINISH
To save settings and exit
• You can change the preferences you set in the Plug In Menu at any time using the regularJVC onscreen menu system.
Manual Clock Set
Finish
NOTE:
You will have to reset the clock after a power interruption. You must set the clock before operat-ing any timer functions.
To set your clock manually (without using the XDS signal), choose MANUAL from the Set Clockmenu and follow the steps below.
To SET CLOCK
To operate
To MANUAL
To move to the hour
To set the hour
To move to minutes
To set the minutes
To move to START CLOCK
To start clock and exit
MODE AUTO MANUAL
TIME --:-- --
START CLOCK
THANK YOU !!
• You will not need to press the MENU button to enter this screen from the Plug In Menu.
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 24
Channel SummaryChannel SummaryChannel Summary allows you to customize the line-up of channels received by your TV. Youcan add or delete channels from the line-up or prevent any unauthorized viewers from watchingany or all 181 channels .
Press the MENU button
To CHANNEL SUMMARY
To operate
The Channel Summary screen (above) will now be displayed with the channels set to scanmarked with an "ü". You can delete channels from the scan by removing the "ü". If any chan-nels were missed during Auto Tuner Setup and you wish to add them, you may by placing an"ü" next to the channel number.
To the SCAN column
To include or delete from scan
EXIT when finished
You can block access to a channel by activating the Channel Lock.
To CHANNELSUMMARY
To operate
To the Lock Column
ZERO to lock or unlock that channel
EXIT when finished
Channel Guard Message
When a viewer attempts to watch a guarded channel, the following message appears:
To watch a channel that you have locked,enter the Lock Code using the 10 key pad.If the wrong code is entered, the message“INVALIDLOCK CODE!”will flash on thescreen:
The channel cannot be accessed until the correct code is entered.
• Once a channel has been unlocked, it will remain unlocked until the television is turned off.• See also “Set Lock Code”, page 33.
C H NO. S C A N C H NO. SCAN
0 1 06 ü
0 2 ü 07
0 3 ü 08
0 4 ü 09 ü
0 5 ü 10 ü
THIS CHANNEL IS LOCKED BYCHANNEL GUARD. PLEASE ENTER LOCK CODE BY10 KEY PAD TO UNLOCK IT.
NO. - - - -
25
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 25
26
V-ChipYour TV is equipped with V-Chip technology which enables TV Parental Guidelines (for UnitedStates and Canada) and Movie (MPAA) Guideline controls. V-Chip technology allows you toprogram your TV to receive, or not to receive, programs based on content according to theguidelines. Programs which exceed the ratings limits you set will be blocked. When a viewerattempts to watch a blocked channel, this message appears:
The channel will remain blocked until the correct lock code is entered (see page 33 for informa-tion on setting your lock code).
You can customize the V-Chip settings of your television to match your personal tastes. TheV-Chip menu below is the starting point for your V-Chip settings.
You can use US V-Chip settings (for programming broadcast from the United States), Canadian V-Chip settings (for programming broadcast from Canada), and movie ratings. You may useany or all of the settings (US V-Chip, Canada V-Chip, Movie ratings). Descriptions for settingeach of the three V-Chip formats appear in the next seven pages along with descriptions of therating categories.
To access the rating categories:
THIS PROGRAMMING EXCEEDSYOUR RATING LIMITS.PLEASE ENTER LOCK CODE BY10 KEY PAD TO UNLOCK IT.
NO. - - - -
V-CHIP ON OFFSET US TV RATINGSSET MOVIE RATINGSSET CANADIAN RATINGS ENGSET CANADIAN RATINGS FREUNRATED VIEW BLOCK
FINISH
Special Note about Ratings
Some programs are not broadcast with a ratings signal. Therefore, even if you setup V-Chip ratings limits, these programs will not be blocked. Parents are cautioned to preview the con-
tents of these programs or movies.
Press the MENU button
ToV-CHIPTo operate (Lock icon will appear)
Press ZERO to access the V-Chip menu
To turn V-Chip ON or OFF (V-Chip must be turned ON for rating settings to operate)
To move to SET US TV RATINGS, SETMOVIE RATINGS, or SET CANADIANRATINGS (see following pages for descriptions of each item)
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 26
27
V-ChipUS V-Chip Ratings U.S.PARENTAL RATING SYSTEMSPrograms with the following ratings are appropriate for children. TV Y is Appropriate for All Children.
Programs are created for very young viewers and should be suitable for all ages, includingchildren ages 2 - 6.
TV Y7 is for Older Children.Most parents would find such programs suitable for children 7 and above. These programsmay contain some mild fantasy violence or comedic violence, which children should be ableto discern from reality.
Programs with the following ratings are designed for the entire audience. TV G stands for General Audience.
Most parents would find these programs suitable for all age groups. They contain little or noviolence, no strong language, and little or no sexual dialog or situations.
TV PG Parental Guidance Suggested.May contain some, but not much, strong language, limited violence, and some suggestivesexual dialog or situations. It is recommended that parents watch these programs first, orwith their children.
TV 14 Parents Strongly Cautioned.Programs contain some material that may be unsuitable for children under the age of 14including possible intense violence, sexual situations, strong coarse language, or intenselysuggestive dialog. Parents are cautioned against unattended viewing by children under 14.
TV MA Mature Audiences Only.These programs are specifically for adults and may be unsuitable for anyone under 17 yearsof age. TV MA programs may have extensiveV, S, L, or D.
Viewing Guidelines
In addition to the ratings categories explained above, information on specific kinds of contentare also supplied with the V-Chip rating. These types of content may also be blocked.Thecontent types are:
• V/FV is for VIOLENCE/FANTASY VIOLENCE • S stands for SEXUALCONTENT• L stands for strong LANGUAGE• D stands for suggestive DIALOG
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 27
V-Chip
28
Line up the cursor in the column (TV PG, TV G, etc.) with the content row (V/FV, S, etc.) and
press the or to move the cursor to the correct location. Press or to turn the lockingfeature on or off. An item is locked if the icon appears instead of a “—”.
For example: To block viewing of all TV 14 shows, move the cursor to the top row of thatcolumn and add a lock icon. Once you've put a lock on the top row, everything in that columnis automatically locked.
To the TV 14 ColumnTo turn on the lock
To FINISH
To save settings and exit
• If you want to change the setup, move the cursor to the top column and change the lock icon
to “—” by pressing or again. You may then select individual categories to block.
Press the MENU button
ToV-CHIPTo operate (Lock icon will appear)
Press ZERO to access the V-Chip menu
To turnV-Chip ON or OFF
To move to SET US TV RATINGS
To operate
V-CHIP ON OFFSET US TV RATINGSSET MOVIE RATINGSSET CANADIAN RATINGS ENGSET CANADIAN RATINGS FREUNRATED VIEW BLOCK
FINISH
Setting US V-Chip Ratings
Directions to set US V-Chip Ratings:
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 28
V-Chip
29
Setting ratings with the V-Chip button
Example 2:
If you want to set your V-Chip settings to block all programming above a current setting such asTV PG-V (with violence):
Press ZERO when TV-PG - V is displayed
To access Rating information about a certain program, press the V-CHIP button while viewingthat program. A display like this will appear :
If you decide you want to block this category of viewing, press "0" while the above screen isvisible, and all programs from that category will be blocked.
Example 1:
If you want to set your V-Chip settings to block all programming above TV PG:
• For Children's programming you can block TV-Y and Y7 programs by Pressing “0” when Y isdisplayed during a program. Programming for audiences other than children’s audiences willnot be affected.
PROGRAM IS RATED :TV-PG - V
All Programming above TV PG will be blocked.
Press ZERO when TV-PG is displayed
All Programming above TV PG - V (with Violence) will be blocked.
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 29
V-Chip
NR – Not Rated.This is a film which has no rating. In many cases these films were imported from countrieswhich do not use the MPAA ratings system. Other NR films may be from amateur producerswho didn’t intend to have their film widely released.NR (Not Rated) Programming may contain all types of programming including children's programming, foreign programs, or adult material.
G – General Audience .In the opinion of the review board, these films contain nothing in the way of sexual content, violence, or language that would be unsuitable for audiences of any age.
PG – Parental Guidance .Parental Guidance means the movie may contain some contents such as mild violence,some brief nudity, and strong language. The contents are not deemed intense.
PG-13 – Parents Strongly Cautioned.Parents with children under 13 are cautioned that the content of movies with this rating mayinclude more explicit sexual, language, and violence content than movies rated PG.
R - Restricted.These films contain material that is explicit in nature and is not recommended forunsupervised children under the age of 17.
NC-17 - No One Under 17.These movies contain content which most parents would feel is too adult for their children toview. Content can consist of strong language, nudity, violence, and suggestive or explicitsubject matter.
X - No One under 18.Inappropriate material for anyone under 18.
Movie Ratings
Press the MENU button
ToV-CHIPTo operate (Lock icon appears)
Press ZERO to access V-Chip setup options
To SET MOVIE RATINGSTo enter movies menu
For example, to block viewing of X and NC-17 rated from shows:
To the X ColumnTo turn on the lock
To the NC-17 Column
To turn on the lock
To FINISH
To save settings and exit
Directions to set Movie (MPAA) Ratings:
30
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 30
V-Chip
E – Exempt.Exempt programming includes:news, sports, documentaries and other informationprogramming, talk shows, music videos, and variety programming.
C – Programming Intended for Children.Violence Guidelines:There will be no realistic scenes of violence. Depictions of aggressivebehavior will be infrequent and limited to portrayals that are clearly imaginar y, comedic or unrealistic in nature.
C8+ – Programming Intended for Children 8 and Over .Violence Guidelines: Any realistic depictions of violence will be infrequent, discreet, of lowintensity and will show the consequences of the acts. There will be no offensive language,nudity or sexual content.
G – General Audience .Programming will contain little violence and will be sensitive to themes which could affect younger children.
PG - Parental Guidance.Programming intended for a general audience, but which may not be suitable for youngerchildren. Parents may consider some content not appropriate for children aged 8-13.
14+ - 14 Years and Older.Parents are strongly cautioned to exercise discretion in permitting viewing by pre-teens andearly teens. Programming may contain mature themes and scenes of intense violence.
18+ - Adult.Material intended for mature audiences only.
Canadian V-Chip Ratings
Directions to set Canadian V-Chip Ratings:Press the MENU button
ToV-CHIPTo operate (Lock icon appears)
Press ZERO to access V-Chip setup options
To SET CANADIAN RATINGS ENG (for English)To enter ratings menu
For example, to block viewing of programming rated 14+ and 18+:
To the 18+ Column
To turn on the lock
To the 14+ Column
To turn on the lock
To FINISH
To save settings and exit
• For instructions on “Set Canadian Ratings FRE (in French)”, please see page 31 in theFrench side of this user’s guide.
31
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 31
32
V-ChipUnrated ProgramsNotes About Unrated Programs:
Unrated programming refers to any programming which does not contain a rating signal.Programming on television stations which do not broadcast rating signals will be placed in the“Unrated Programming" category.
Examples of Unrated programs:
Emergency BulletinsLocally Originated ProgrammingNewsPolitical ProgramsPublic Service AnnouncementsReligious ProgramsSportsWeatherSome Commercials
• TV programs or movies that do not have rating signals will be blocked if the Unrated
Category is set to BLOCK.
Directions to Block Unrated Programs:
You can block programs that are not rated.
Press the MENU button
ToV-CHIP
To operate (The lock icon appears)
Press ZERO to access V-Chip setup options
To UNRATED
To VIEW or BLOCKPress EXIT when done
UNRATED VIEW BLOCK
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 32
V-ChipSet Lock CodeChannel Guard and V-Chip settings are protected by a four-digit Lock Code. Your TV comespre-set with a Lock Code of "0000". You may change the code to any four-digit number youwish. To change the Lock Code, follow the steps below.
Press the MENU button
To SETLOCK CODE
To operate
The lock icon appears.
Press ZERO to access the Lock Code
The first digit will be highlighted
To select the number
To move to the next digit
Continue to follow these directions for all four numbers.
To FINISH
To save settings and exit
Your Lock Code is now set..
LOCK CODE 0 0 0 0
FINISH
0
• After a power interruption you must reset the Lock Code.• Write your Lock Code number down and keep it hidden from potential viewers.• If you forget the Lock Code, a new code may be set using the steps listed above.
NOTE:
33
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 33
Picture Settings
34
Tint
Color
Picture
Bright
Detail
Tint allows you to adjust the levels of red and green in your TV picture.
Press the MENU button
To TINT
To increase the levels of green
To increase the levels of redTo move to the next setting
The color function lets you make all the colors in the TV picture appear either more vivid orsubtle.
Press the MENU button
To COLORTo make the colors more vivid
To make the colors more subduedTo move to the next setting
Picture allows you to adjust the levels of black and white on the TV screen, giving you a darkeror brighter picture overall.
Press the MENU button
To PICTURETo increase the level of contrast
To decrease the level of contrastTo move to the next setting
You can adjust the overall brightness of the TV picture with the Bright control.
Press the MENU button
To BRIGHT
To lighten the picture
To darken the pictureTo move to the next setting
The Detail feature adjusts the level of fine detail displayed in the picture.
Press the MENU button
To DETAIL
To make the picture sharper (more details)
To make the picture smoother (less detail)To move to the next setting
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 34
Picture Settings
35
Noise Muting
Set Video StatusWith Set Video Status, you can save your own set of picture quality adjustments as “Choice”and have access to them at the touch of a button.
Press the MENU button
To SETVIDEO STATUS
To operate
To set the TINT levels
To move to the next option
Repeat these steps until all levels are set.
To SAVEAS CHOICE
To save settings and exit
• You must use SAVE AS CHOICE to exit the Set Video Status menu, otherwise your prefer -ences will not be saved.
• You can access your “Choice”settings at any time by pressing the VIDEO STATUS button onthe remote control.
TINT -------------|-------------COLOR -------------|-------------PICTURE -------------|-------------BRIGHT -------------|-------------DETAIL -------------|-------------
SAVE AS CHOICE
The setting screen will disappear if you do not make any adjustments or move to the next set-ting in approximately three seconds. Any changes you have made to picture settings up to thatpoint will be stored. You can exit the Picture Settings menu at any time by pressing the EXIT
button on the remote control.
NOTE:
This feature inserts a blank blue screen over channels which are not broadcasting or are tooweak to be received clearly.
Press the MENU button
To NOISE MUTING
To turn Noise Muting ON or OFF
• Noise Muting will not work during Auto Tuner Setup or when you operate Channel Summary.
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 35
Sound Settings
You can increase or decrease the level of low-frequency sound in the TV’s audio with the Bassadjustment.
Press the MENU button
To BASS
To increase the bass
To decrease the bass
To move to the next setting
Use Treble to adjust the level of high-frequency sound in your TV’s audio.
Press the ME N U bu t t o n
To TREBLE
To increase the treble
To decrease the treble
To move to the next setting
Adjust the level of sound between the TV’s two speakers with the Balance setting.
Press the MENU button
To BALANCE
To shift the balance towards the right speaker
To shift the balance towards the left speaker
To move to the next setting
MTS technology allows several audio signals to be broadcast at once, giving you a choice inwhat you wish to hear with a TV program. In addition to mono or stereo sound, an MTS broad-cast may also include a Second Audio Program (SAP).
Press the MENU button
To MTS
Select the mode
(The ON AIR arrow tells you if a broadcast is in Stereo and/or contains an SAP).
• Keep the TV in STEREO mode to get the best sound quality. The sound will work inSTEREO mode even if a certain broadcast is in MONO sound only.
• Choose the MONO setting to reduce excessive noise on a certain channel or broadcast.• Selecting SAP will allow you to hear an alternative soundtrack, if one is available.
MTS (Multi-Channel Television Sound)
Treble
Balance
Bass
You can leave the Sound Settings menu at any time by pressing the EX I T button on theremote control.
NOTE:
36
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 36
General Items
The On/Off timer lets you program your television to turn itself on or off. You can use it as analarm to wake up, to help you remember important programs, or as a decoy when you're nothome.
Press the MENU button
To ON/OFFTIMER
To operate (begins with ON TIME)
To set the hour (AM/PM) you want the TV to turn on
To move to minutes
To set the minutes
To accept ON TIME and move to OFF TIME (the time the TV will turn off). Set the OFF TIMEthe same way as ON TIME
To accept OFFTIME and move to CHANNEL
To select channel
To move to MODE
Choose ONCE or EVERYDAY
To ON/OFFTIMER
Choose YES to accept the timer setting, choose NOif you don't wish to accept
To FINISH
To save settings
On/Off Timer
On/Off Timer Note for PIP (AV-36F802, AV-32F802 & AV-27F802) only.
• The On/Off time cannot be set to locked or guarded channels.• In order for the On/Off timer to work, the clock must be set.• After a power interruption, the Timer settings must be reset.
NOTE:
If the television is on when a timed event is about to start a Timer Preview window will appear.The Timer Preview window will appear in the lower right corner of the screen seven secondsbefore the timer is programmed to begin. When the timer activates, the Preview picture willbecome the main picture.
37
PurityThis helps clean up the picture so that it may not contain any “snow”.
Press the MENU button
To PURITY
To enter
To adjust purity
N S -------------|-------------
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 37
General Items
38
If your TV is connected to a stereo system, you can turn off the TV speakers and listen to theaudio through your stereo.
Press the MENU button
To TVSPEAKER
To turn the TV's speakers ONor OFF
EXIT when finished
• Before you turn the TV Speaker setting from OFF to ON, make sure that the TV volumelevel is low! If the TV volume is set too high, the sound level will be extremely loud.
• After a power interruption, the TVSpeaker settings will return to “ON”.
TV Speaker
• External Speakers: When using external speakers or amplifiers, shut off the TV Speakers(see ‘TV Speaker’) above.
NOTE:
If your television is connected to an external speaker source, Audio Out gives you the option of controlling the volume level with your TV’s remote control.
Press the MENU button
To AUDIO OUT
ToVARI or FIX
EXIT when finished
VARI: Lets you adjust the volume of the external speakers using the VOLUME +/– buttons onyour TV’s remote control.FIX: The volume of the external speakers is adjusted using the audio device’s remote control.
Audio Out
TV SPEAKER ON OFF
AUDIO OUT VARI FIX
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 38
General Items
Get the best quality video from your DVD player by using this setting and the DVD inputs at therear of the television. Set either to YES for component input (for DVD) or to NO for compositevideo input (for a regular VCR).
Press the MENU button
ToV4 COMPONENT-IN (or V2 COMPONENT-IN for models AV-36F702, AV-32F702and AV-27F702)
To turn the input ON or OFF
EXIT when finished
• This option should be used with DVD players only. For information on connecting VCR’s see page 11. For more information on connecting a DVD player, see page 14.
• AV-36F702, AV-32F702 & AV-27F702 note: These models do not have Input 4.
V4 Component-In (AV-36F802, AV-32F802 & AV-27F802) / V2 Component-In (AV-36F702, AV-32F702 & AV-27F702)
V4 COMPONENT-IN YES NO
Many broadcasts now include an onscreen display of dialog called Closed Captions. Somebroadcasts may also include displays of additional information in text form. Your television canaccess and display this information using the Closed Caption feature.To activate the ClosedCaption feature, follow the steps below.
Press the MENU button
To CLOSED CAPTION
To operate
To select CAPTION (for Closed Captions), TEXT (for text display), or OFF (for no display)
To move to CAPTION or TEXT
To select a caption (CC1 to CC4) or text channel (T1 to T4)
To accept that selection and move to FINISH
To save settings and exit
MODE : CAPTION
CAPTION : CC1 CC2 CC3 CC4TEXT : T1 T2 T3 T4
FINISH
Closed Caption
• Closed Caption subtitles are usually found on closed caption channel CC1. Some programsmay include additional text information which is usually found on text channel T1. The otherchannels are available for future use.
• Closed captioning may not work correctly if the signal being received is weak or if you areplaying a video tape.
• Most broadcasts containing Closed Captioning will display a notice at the start of theprogram.
NOTE:
39
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 39
Button Functions
The MENU button allows you to access JVC’s onscreen menu system. Press MENU to activatethe onscreen menu system.
• See individual topics (like “Sound Settings”) for specific information on using menus.
Press the EXIT button to leave a menu screen. On the RM-C301G this button is also labeled“PIP OFF”. Press EXIT/PIP OFF to turn off the Picture-in-Picture function (please see page 44for more information on the PIP feature).• PIP is available only on AV-36F802, AV-32F802 & AV-27F802.
Menu
Exit and PIP Off
Display
• Please note that if the Clock, Sleep Timer or On/Off Timer are not set, the Display screen willshow:"CLOCK NOT SET", "SLEEP TIMER OFF", and "ON/OFF TIMER OFF" respectively.
NOTE:
The Display screen shows the current status of timers and inputs.
Press the DISPLAY button
The screen above shows the following information:
• The current channel or AV input (Channel 07)
• The current time (12:20 pm)• Sleep Timer status/minutes remaining (The Sleep Timer is off)• On/Off Timer status (Set to turn on everyday at 7:00 PM, off at 10:00 PM)• Each Press of the DISPLAY button changes the display mode:
Display – Full screen shown above
Time – Shows the current time only
Channel – Shows the current channel
Off –Turns Display off
• You may also turn off the Display at any step by pressing EXIT.
07NOW 12:20 PMSLEEP TIMER OFFON/OFF TIMER EVERYDAY
ON TIME 7:00 PMOFF TIME 10:00 PM
40
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 40
Button FunctionsVideo Status
Muting
The VIDEO STATUS button gives you a choice of three TV picture display settings, including a display of your own preferences.
Standard – Resets the picture display to the factory settings.
Choice – Displays the setting levels you specified on the "Set Video Status"Menu(see page 35).
Theater – Gives a rich, film-like look to video.
Press the VIDEO STATUS button
The Sleep Timer can turn the TV off for you after you fall asleep. Program it to work in intervalsof 15 minutes, for a total time of up to 180 minutes.
Sleep Timer Message
20 seconds before the automatic shutoff, this message will appear:
GOOD NIGHT!!
PUSH SLEEP TIMER BUTTON
TO EXTEND.
Creates a deep, three-dimensional sound effect by channeling the audio through the TV's front-firing speakers. Press the HYPER SURROUND button to turn the effect on or off.
The MUTING button instantly turns the volume down completely when you press it. PressMUTING and the volume level will instantly go to zero. To restore the volume to its previouslevel, press MUTING again.
HYPER SURROUND ON OFF
Hyper Surround
Sleep Timer
41
Press the SLEEP TIMER button
You then have 20 seconds to press the Sleep Timer button to delay the shutoff for another
15 minutes.
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 41
Button Functions
Use the 100+ button to directly access channels above Channel 99. For example to move tochannel 124, press100+, 2 (two), 4 (four).
100+ Button
Return+
InputSelects the signal input source for the television:TV (for Antenna or Cable) or Video-1, 2, 3, or 4for video devices like VCR’s, DVD players, or camcorders.
IN P U T
BBEBBE high definition audio adds natural, clear and extraordinary sound quality to any program.Turn BBE On or Off using the BBE button.
BBE ON OFF
The RETURN+ button has two functions:
Return – Returns to the channel viewed just before the channel currently onscreen.
Return+ – Lets you program a specific channel to return to while scanning through the chan-nels using the CH+ and CH– buttons.
RETURN+ and hold for three seconds
The channel currently active has been programmed as your Return+ channel. Now scanthrough the channels using the CHANNEL+/– buttons
RETURN+
You will return to your programmed channel.
• To cancel your Return+ channel, press and hold the RETURN+ button for three seconds. Themessage “RETURN CHANNEL CANCELLED!”will appear.
• Return+ works only with the CHANNEL+/– buttons. Pressing any number key will cancelReturn+.
• Return+ does not affect the PIPchannel (AV-36F802, AV-32F802 & AV-27F802 only).
RETURN CHANNEL PROGRAMMED !
• BBE is a registered trademark of BBESound, Inc. For U.S., licensed from BBE Sound, Inc.under USP 4638258, 4482866 and 5510572. For Canada, licensed from BBE Sound, Inc.BBE is a registered trademark of BBESound, Inc.
NOTE:
• AV-36F702, AV-32F702 & AV-27F702 do not have a Video-4 input.
42
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 42
Button Functions
43
LightYour remote control includes illuminated buttons for key features like CHANNEL +/– andVOLUME +/–. Press the LIGHT button to turn the illumination on.
DVD Buttons
VCR Buttons
TV/CATV Switch
VCR/DVD Switch
You can also use this remote control to operate the basic functions of your DVD player. These functions include:play, rewind, fast-forward, stop, still/pause, previous/next, tray open/close,power on, and power off.
Move the selector switch to DVD to operate.
• The remote is preset with the code 000 to control JVC-brand DVD players.For any other manufacturer’s brand DVD player, please see the code chart and instructions on page 20.
Use either the television’s own tuner or a cable box to select channels. Set this switch to TV tooperate the television’s built-in tuner. Move the switch to CATV to operate a cable box.
• See page 18 for information on programming your remote for cable box operation.
You can control a VCR or DVDplayer with the buttons on the lower part of the remote control.Use the VCR/DVD selector switch to choose either VCR or DVD operation.
• See pages 19 and 20 for information on programming your remote with VCR and DVD oper-ating codes.
You can use this remote control to operate the basic functions of your VCR. These functionsinclude:play, record, rewind, fast-forward, stop, pause, channel scan, TV/VCR, power on, andpower off.
Move the selector switch to VCR to operate.
• The remote is preset with the code 000 to control JVC-brand VCR’s. For any other manufac-turer’s brand VCR, please see the code chart and instructions on page 19.
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 43
Button Functions - PIPPIP displays two separate pictures on screen. Your television has 2-Tuner PIP, meaning youcan view pictures from two different channels simultaneously. A special set of PIP control but-tons are located on the upper part of the remote control. Descriptions of each button appearon this page.
The PIP feature is available on models AV-36F802, AV-32F802 & AV-27F802 only.
On/MoveTurn PIP on by pressing the ON/MOVE button.
02
07
Cable Box NoteThe 2-Tuner PIP function may not operate when used with certain cable boxes. This isbecause while some models of cable box may receive up to 181 channels, they may only sendthe signal from one channel to your television (please also see diagram on page 11). For thePIPtuner to operate correctly, it must have access to all available channels. Since the televi-sion is receiving the signal of only one channel from the cable box, it is impossible for the 2-Tuner PIP to display a second, different channel.
Because there are many different models of cable boxes in use today, if you are having prob-lems operating your PIP feature with your cable box, we recommend you contact your localcable company for connection advice.
44
PIP OFF to turn PIP off
(PIP) ON/MOVE
NOTE:• Each press of ON/MOVE will shift the PIP window to a different corner.
ON/MOVE
Once PIP is turned on, you can move the PIP window to any of the TV’s main picture’sfour corners with the ON/MOVE button
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 44
Button Functions - PIPFreeze
Swap
Channel +/– for PIP
Source
Use the FREEZE button to lock a single, still image onto the PIP window.
• If PIP is off when FREEZE is pressed, a snapshot of the main screen is taken and placed inthe PIP window.
• If PIP is on when FREEZE is pressed, the image in the window when the button was pressedis held.
You can exchange the channel displayed on the main screen for the one shown in the PIP win-dow by pressing SWAP.
Like the main CHANNEL +/– buttons, CHANNEL +/– for PIP lets you scan through the channels inthe PIP window.
• Direct channel selection with the 10 key pad for PIPis not possible.
You can select the signal source for the PIP window image.
• If the PIP does not have a signal, the window will be blue.• If you connect a DVD to Video-2 or Video-4, the PIP window will be blue.
• The PIP window is 1/9 the size of the full screen.
• PIP will not display blocked channels or programs. A blue screen will display instead.
NOTE:
45
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 45
Troubleshooting
46
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 46
47
WarrantyFor Canadian model televisions, see the separate sheet for Canadian
Warranty information.
JVC COMPANY OF AMERICA warrants this product and all parts thereof, except as set forthbelow ONLY TO THE ORIGINAL PURCHASER AT RETAIL to be FREE FROM DEFECTIVEMATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP from the date of original retail purchase for the period shownbelow (the “Warranty Period”) (PICTURE TUBE is covered for Two (2) years.)
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY IS VALID ONLY IN THE FIFTY (50) UNITED STATES, THEDISTRICT OF COLUMBIA AND COMMONWEALTH OF PUERTO RICO.
WHAT WE WILL DO:If this product is found to be defective within the warranty period,JVC will repair orreplace defective parts at no charge to the original owner. Such repair and replacementservices shall be rendered by JVC during regular business hours at JVCauthorizedservice centers. Parts used for replacement are warranted only for the remainder of thisWarranty Period. All products and parts thereof may be brought to a JVCauthorizedservice center on a carry-in basis. Televisions with a screen size of 25 inches and largermay be covered on an in-home basis where such service is available.
WHAT YOU MUST DO FOR WARRANTY SERVICE:To determine if in-home service is ava i l a ble in your area, either contact the selling dealer (retail-er) or call 1-800-537-5722 to locate the nearest JVC authori zed service center. S e rvice loca-tions can also be obtained from our website h t t p : / / w w w. j v c s e rv i c e. c o m.In-home serv i c e, if ava i l-a bl e, will require clear access to the Te l evision by the service representative s.If in-home serv i c eis not ava i l a bl e, carry in service will be prov i d e d .
If service is not locally available, box the product carefully, preferably in its original car-ton, and ship, insured, with a copy of your bill of sale plus a letter of explanation of theproblem to the nearest JVC Factory Service Center, the name and location which will begiven to you by the toll free number.
If you have any questions concerning your JVC Product, please contact our CustomerRelations Department.
WHAT IS NOT COVERED:This limited warranty provided by JVC does not cover:1) Products which have been subject to abuse , accident,alteration,modification,tam-
pering,negligence, misuse, faulty installation,lack of reasonable care, or if repairedor serviced by anyone other than a service facility authorized by JVC to render suchservice, or if affixed to any attachment not provided with the products,or if the modelor serial number has been altered, tampered with,defaced or removed;
2) Initial installation, installation and removal from "built-in" entertainment centers andother mounting systems;3) Operational adjustments covered in the Owner’s Manual, normal maintenance , videoand audio head cleaning;4) Damage that occurs in shipment, due to an act of God,and cosmetic damage;5) Signal reception problems and failures due to line power surge;6) Video Pick-up Tubes/CCD Image Sensor, Cartridge, Stylus (Needle) are covered for 90days from the date of purchase;
Parts Labor
1 YEAR1 YEAR
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 47
48
Warranty
REFURBISHED PRODUCTS CARRY A SEPA R ATE WA R R A N T Y. THIS WA R R A N T YDOES NOT APPLY FOR DETAILS OF REFURBISHED PRODUCT WA R R A N T Y.PLEASE REFER TO THE REFURBISHED PRODUCT WARRANTY INFORMATIONPACKAGED WITH EACH REFURBISHED PRODUCT.
For customer use:Enter below the Model No. and Serial No.which is located either on the rear, bottom orside of the cabinet.Retain this information for future reference.
Model No.: Serial No.:Purchase Date: Name Of Dealer:
7) Accessories;8) Batteries (except that Rechargeable Batteries are covered for 90 days from date of pur-
chase.)
There are no express warranties except as listed above.
THE DURATION OF ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES,INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTYOF MERCHANTABILTY, IS LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTYHEREIN.
JVC SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR THE LOSS OF USE OF THE PRODUCT, INCONVENIENCE,OR ANY OTHER DA M AG E S , WHETHER DIRECT, I N C I D E N TAL OR CONSEQU E N T I A L(INCLUDING,WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGE TO TAPES, RECORDS OR DISCS) RESULT-ING FROM THE USE OF THIS PRODUCT, OR ARISING OUT OF ANY BREACH OF THIS WAR-RANTY, ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OFMERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO THEWARRANTY PERIOD SET FORTH ABOVE.
Some states do not allow the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages or limita-tions on how long the warranty lasts,so these exclusions or limitations may not apply toyou.This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rightswhich vary state to state.
JVCCOMPANYOF AMERICA 1700 Valley RoadDIVISION OF JVC AMERICAS CORP. Wayne, New Jersey 07470
h t t p : / / w w w. j v c s e rv i c e. c o m
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 48
49
Authorized Service Centers
QUALITY SERVICE
TOLL FREE: 1 (800) 537-5722http://www.jvc.com
HOW TO LOCATE YOUR JVC SERVICE CENTER
Dear Customer,
In order to receive the most satisfaction from your purchase, please read the instruction booklet before operating the unit. In the event that repairs are neces-sary, or for the address nearest your location within the Continental UnitedStates, please call 1 (800) 537-5722 for your nearest authorized servicer or visitour website at www.JVC.com.
Remember to retain your Bill of Sale for Warranty Service.
CautionTo prevent electrical shock, do not open the cabinet.There are no user serviceableparts inside. Please refer to qualified service personnel for repairs.
AccessoriesTo purchase accessories for your JVC product, you may contact your local JVCDealer. From the 48 Continental United States call toll free: 1 (800) 882-2345 or onthe web at www.JVC.com
For service in CanadaTo locate your local JVC service center or dealer in Canada please call:
Or visit us on the web at www.JVC.ca
Do not service the television yourself
In Eastern Canada:1 (416) 293-1311
In Western Canada:1 (604) 270-1311
En Français (Montréal):1 (514) 871-1311
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 49
50
Search CodesCable/Satellite Search Codes Function:1) Slide the first 2-Way Mode Selector switch to CATV.2) Press the TV POWER and RETURN+ buttons. Hold for at least three seconds and release.3) Press TV POWER, see if the CATV or Satellite box responds.4) If there was a response, press RETURN+. The operating codes are now set.If there was no
response, repeat Step 3.If you repeat Step 3 a total of 52 times without a response, use theremote control which came with the equipment.
5) Press RETURN+ to exit.
VCR Search Codes Function:1) Slide the first 2-way selector switch to “TV” and the other 2-way selector switch to “VCR”.2) Press the VCR POWER and RETURN+ buttons. Hold for at least three seconds and release.3) Press VCR POWER, see if the VCR responds.4) If there was a response, press RETURN+. The operating codes are now set.If there was no
response, repeat Step 3. If you repeat Step 3 a total of 80 times without a response, use the manufacturers remote control which came with the VCR.
5) Press RETURN+ to exit.
DVD Player Search Codes Function:1) Slide the first 2-way selector switch to “TV” and the other 2-way selector switch to “DVD”.2) Press the DVD POWER and RETURN+ buttons. Hold for at least three seconds and release.3) Press DVD POWER, see if the DVDplayer responds.4) If there was a response, press RETURN+. The operating codes are now set. If there was no
response, repeat Step 3.If you repeat Step 3 a total of 30 times without a response, use the manufacturers remote control which came with the DVDplayer.
5) Press RETURN+ to exit.
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 50
Specifications
51
Specifications subject to change without notice.
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 51
JVC COMPANY OF AMERICADivision of JVC Americas Corp.
1700 Valley RoadWayne, New Jersey, 07470
JVC CANADA, INC.21 Finchdene SquareScarborough, Ontario
Canada, M1X 1A7
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 52
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
AV-36F702AV-36F802
AV-36F702 /Y
AV-36F802 /Y
COLOR TELEVISION
BASIC CHASSIS
AC
No. 51907BDec. 2001
COPYRIGHT © 2001 VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LTD.
TVTV
RM-C303G[AV-36F702]
RM-C301G[AV-36F802]
CD-ROM No. SML200201
AV-36F702AV-36F802
q NOTE ON USING CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS1. SAFETY
The components identified by the symbol and shading arecritical for safety. For continued safety replace safety criticalcomponents only with manufactures recommended parts.
2. SPECIFIED VOLTAGE AND WAVEFORM VALUESThe voltage and waveform values have been measured under thefollowing conditions.
(1) Input signal : Color bar signal(2) Setting positions of each knob/button and
variable resistor : Original setting position whenshipped
(3) Internal resistance of tester : DC 20kØ/V(4) Oscilloscope sweeping time : H ⇒ 20µS/div
: V ⇒ 5mS/div: Others ⇒ Sweeping time is
specified(5) Voltage values : All DC voltage values
9Since the voltage values of signal circuit vary to some extent ac-cording to adjustments, use them as reference values.
3. INDICATION OF PARTS SYMBOL [EXAMPLE]• In the PW board : R1209 → R209
4. INDICATIONS ON THE CIRCUIT DIAGRAM(1) Resistors• Resistance value
No unit : [Ø]k : [kØ]M : [MØ]
• Rated allowable powerNo indication : 1/10 [W]Others : As specified
• TypeNo indication : Carbon resistorOMR : Oxide metal film resistorMFR : Metal film resistorMPR : Metal plate resistorUNFR : Uninflammable resistorFR : Fusible resistor
9Composition resistor 1/2 [W] is specified as 1/2S or Comp.
(2) Capacitors• Capacitance value
1 or higher : [pF]less than 1 : [µF]
• Withstand voltageNo indication : DC50[V]AC indicated : AC withstand voltage [V]Others : DC withstand voltage [V]
9 Electrolytic Capacitors47/50[Example] : Capacitance value [µF]/withstand voltage[V]
AV-36F702 /Y
AV-36F802 /Y STANDARD CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
• TypeNo indication : Ceramic capacitorMY : Mylar capacitorMM : Metalized mylar capacitorPP : Polypropylene capacitorMPP : Metalized polypropylene capacitorMF : Metalized film capacitorTF : Thin film capacitorBP : Bipolar electrolytic capacitorTAN : Tantalum capacitor
(3) CoilsNo unit : [µH]Others : As specified
(4) Power Supply
: B1
: B2(12V)
: 9V
: 5V
9Respective voltage values are indicated
(5) Test point
: Test point
: Only test point display
(6) Connecting method: Connector
: Wrapping or soldering
: Receptacle
(7) Ground symbol
: LIVE side ground
: ISOLATED(NEUTRAL) side ground
: EARTH ground
: DIGITAL ground
5. NOTE FOR REPAIRING SERVICEThis model’s power circuit is partly different in the GND. The differenceof the GND is shown by the LIVE : ( ) side GND and theISOLATED(NEUTRAL) : ( ) side GND. Therefore, care must be takenfor the following points.
(1) Do not touch the LIVE side GND or the LIVE side GND and theISOLATED(NEUTRAL) side GND simultaneously. If the above cau-tion is not respected, an electric shock may be caused. Therefore,make sure that the power cord is surely removed from the recepta-cle when, for example, the chassis is pulled out.
(2) Do not short between the LIVE side GND and ISOLATED(NEUTRAL)side GND or never measure the LIVE side GND andISOLATED(NEUTRAL) side GND at the same time with a measur-ing apparatus ( oscilloscope, etc.). If the above precaution is notrespected , a fuse or any parts will be broken.
• Since the circuit diagram is a standard one, the circuit and cir-cuit constants may be subject to change for improvement with-out any notice.
Dec. 2001 No. 51907B
AV-36F702AV-36F802
2-2 No.51907B
CONTENTSSEMICONDUCTOR SHAPES ................................................................................................................................. 2-2
BLOCK DIAGRAM .......................................................................................................................................................... 2-3
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
E
C
B
OUT
E
IN
E C BE C
(G)(D)(S)B
IN E OUT
E C B E
C
BE C B
CHIP TR
TOP VIEWBOTTOM VIEW FRONT VIEWTRANSISTOR
TOP VIEWBOTTOM VIEW FRONT VIEWIC
TOP VIEWCHIP IC
1 N
1 N
1 N
1
NN
N
N
N
1
SEMICONDUCTOR SHAPES
CHANNEL CHART [US] ........................................................................................................................................ 2-35[CA] ........................................................................................................................................ 2-36
PATTERN DIAGRAMS
MAIN PWB CIRCUIT DIAGRAM P2-7
MAIN, FRONT CONTROL AND POWER SW PWB CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS P2-11
PIP PWB CIRCUIT DIAGRAM — P2-13
AV SELECTOR PWB CIRCUIT DIAGRAM P2-15 P2-17
CRT SOCKET PWB CIRCUIT DIAGRAM P2-19
DAF PWB CIRCUIT DIAGRAM P2-21
LF PWB CIRCUIT DIAGRAM P2-23
ModelP.W.B. name
MAIN PWB PATTERN DIAGRAM P2-25 P2-27
CRT SOCKET PWB PATTERN DIAGRAM P2-29
PIP PWB PATTERN DIAGRAM P2-30
AV SELECTOR PWB PATTERN DIAGRAM P2-31
FRONT CONTROL PWB PATTERN DIAGRAM P2-32
LF, DAF AND POWER SW PWB PATTERN DIAGRAMS P2-33
AV-36F702ModelPattern name
AV-36F702
AV-36F802
AV-36F802
AV-36F702 AV-36F702
2-3No.51907B
BLOCK DIAGRAMS
2-4 No.51907B
P
J601COMPONENT
VIDEO-IN
J501INPUT1
P
Y
IC501
AV SW
IC101
1 CHIP DECODER
IC701
MICROCOMPUTER
T502
FBT
POWER SUPPLY
CIRCUIT
REG.
AC INB1
FOCUS
IC001MTS&TONE/VOL
CONTROL
IC702EEPROM
IC381AUDIO SW IC371
AMP
CF0214.5MHzTRAP
TU001TUNER
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO L/MONO
AUDIO R
IF R, G, B
CF0414.5MHz BPF
RGB DRIVE
IF
SIF
MPX
V. OUT
H. OUT
VTVR, G, B
V01
SCL0SDA0
SCL0SDA0
SCL0SDA0
SCL0SDA0
Y
C
L/R TVL/R
VIDEO
CY
C
YAV SW PWB (1/2)
FRONT CONTROL PWB
CRT SOCKET PWB
AV SW PWB (2/2)
MAIN PWBPOWER SW PWB
IC401VERT OUT
SCL0SDA0
DAF PWB
LF PWB
J502INPUT2
VIDEO
AUDIO L/MONO
AUDIO R
J401INPUT3(FRONT)
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO L/MONO
AUDIO R
J503AUDIO OUT
AUDIO L
AUDIO R
VOL+
POWER REMOCONRECEIVER
VOL- CH+ CH- MENU
ON TIMERLED
IC151SOUND
ENHANCEMENTAUDIO PROCESSOR
IC401AUDIO OUT
Q511H. OUT
SCREEN
HV
L/R
L/R
L/R
L/R
V
H
DY01DEF YOKE
SPL
SPR
AV-36F702 BLOCK DIAGRAM
COM_YCOM_CBCOM_CR
SCL1SDA1
TV
IC2013L DIGITAL
COMB FILTER
LPF
BPF
AMP
BUF
B
R
Y
C
Y
C
PR
Y
J602COMPONENTVIDEO-IN
J601COMPONENTVIDEO-IN
J501INPUT1
IC601VIDEO2/VIDEO4INPUT SELECT
PB
PB
PR
Y
IC301PIP
CONTROLLER
IC501
AV SW
IC101
1 CHIP DECODER
IC701
MICROCOMPUTER
T502
FBTPOWER SUPPLY
CIRCUIT
REG.
AC INB1
FOCUS
IC151Y/C SW
IC001MTS&TONE/VOL
CONTROL
IC2013D Y/CSEP.
Q302, Q303AMP
IC702MEMORY
IC202MEMORY
IC381AUDIO SW IC371
AMP
CF021
TU001TUNER
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO L/MONO
AUDIO R
IF R, G, B
CF041
RGB DRIVE
IF
SIF
MPX
V. OUT
H. OUT
VTVR, G, B
V01
TU001TUNER
V-PIP(TV)
SCLSDA
SCLSDA
SCLSDA
SCLSDA
SCLSDA
R-YB-YY
VC-RVC-GVC-B
Y
C
Y
L/RL/RVIDEOCY
CYC
Y
YC
C
OSD-ROSD-GOSD-B
VP
V-PIP(EXT.)
PIP PWB
AV SW PWB (1/2)
3D Y/C MODULE PWB
FRONT CONTROL PWB
CRT SOCKET PWB
AV SW PWB (2/2)
MAIN PWBPOWER SW PWB
AFC2
SCLSDA
Y
Q311, Q312AMP
IC401VERT OUT
C
SCLSDA
HP
LF PWB
J502INPUT4
VIDEO
AUDIO L/MONO
AUDIO R
J504INPUT2
J401INPUT3(FRONT)
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO L/MONO
AUDIO R
AUDIO L/MONO
AUDIO R
J503AUDIO OUT
AUDIO L
AUDIO R
VOL+
POWER REMOCONRECEIVER
VOL- CH+ CH- MENU
ON TIMERLED
IC151SOUND
ENHACEMENTAUDIO PROCESSOR
IC401AUDIO OUT
Q511H. OUT
SCREEN
HV
L/R
L/R
L/R
L/R
V
H
DY01DEF YOKE
SPL
SPR
AV-36F802 BLOCK DIAGRAM
DAF PWB
2-6No.51907B 2-5
AV-36F802 AV-36F802
No.51907B
AV-36F702AV-36F802
AV-36F702AV-36F802
2-7No.51907B
MAIN PWB CIRCUIT DIAGRAMCIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
2-8 No.51907B
X
Q022
SDA0
VTV
SCL0
AGC_MUTE
BT
0 QRN143J-0R0XL041
AFT1
0R002
5V_A
1000
/16
C00
3
∗1Q021
9V_VC
4.7k
R31
8
XQ651
10/50C002
5.6kR140
10/16
N
BP
C136
0.1B2
C302
1kR043
100/16C014
100/16C023
0.01C024
∗3D307
0.01
C04
6
∗1Q02
4
0.1 B2C027
∗C150
560R290
XY651
10/50C042
∗2Q041
2.7kR041
XR031
0.1 B2
C11
6
33/16C029
12kR021
XC
399
0.1
TF
C60
9
∗8D101
XR291
120kR292
XC667
XR032
XR033
220kR293
XR034
EHT
XC031
XC032
XL023
0Y654
XL0
26
XCH
C035
QGA2501C5-07ZCN004
XY154
XR037
MPX
10/50C045
4.7/50C001
47kR001
0R
003
0R
004
0
QRN143J-0R0X
L021
XR027
QAU0234-001! TU001
QAX0349-001CF001
XCH
C033
22QQL244K-220Z
L022
5V_A
1000pC025
XR036
QAX0639-001Z
CF021
XL024
2.7kR038
XR035
XQ023
0.01C011
0.01C012
5.6kR013 100
QRE121J-101Y
R014
18R015
27R016
1.8kR012
82R011
XC013
0.39QQLZ014-R39L012
XL0
11
2SC5083/L-P/-T
Q011
XY155
∗J602
0.01C016
0.01
C01
5
XR017
XL013
10/50C028
∗J602
XR610
0
QRN143J-0R0XL027 100/16
C038
470/10C036
100R023
0.47
/50
C02
6
0.01C037
1kR024
QAX0642-001ZCF041
∗8D102
820R028
33kR029
0.01
C28
8
560R025
150R022
1kR042
∗IC651
0.01C030
47p CHC044
47p CHC043
22
QQL244K-220Z
L042
CE40668-001ZX201
330R026
68kR030
10p CHC201
33k
R20
1
10/5
0C
041
.22/50C202
0.00
22C
203
∗4D352
2200
/6.3
C11
1
0.01
C11
2 2.2k
R30
1
2.2k
R30
2
2.2k
R30
3
0R354
100
R30
6
100
R30
5
100
R30
4
∗R611
CO
M_Y
XR612
100kR018
X
R019
SD
0.1 B2
C39
3 0.1 B2
C39
4
0.1 B
2C
395
100
R10
1
100
R10
2
QAX0324-002SF011
∗5
Q711
100/
16C39
1
0.01
C39
2
10kR799
10kR798
0R
360
10k
R35
9
CN0L1
CNMD1
X 1WR856
0.1T
FC
610
0.1T
FC
611
TB1253AN1CHIP DECODER
IC101
QQL244K-470ZL101
0.01
C23
7
1/50
C11
4
.47/50C113
1MR
111
33 2WQRG029J-330R857
XHS007
18 2WQRG029J-180
R858
1kR319
XR009
∗3D353
∗Y156
0R046
33p
NDC21HJ-330X
C04
7
0.01C048
0.15 TFC354
0.1
TF
C11
5
15kR047
150kR048
XC005
XC006
∗1Q352
MTZJ9.1C-T2D010
XQ353
0R355
12kR356
XR357
33/16C352
XC353
XR358
47/25C603
∗IC601
TU_POW
75R601
75R602
NQR0169-001XLC601
NQR0169-001XLC602
75R603
47/25C601
47/25C602
5V_D
56QQL244K-560ZL001
CN0E1
XLC001
NQR0169-001XLC603
0Y003
∗C606
0Y002
XC
396
∗R604
∗R605
∗LC604
∗LC605
∗R606
∗C604
∗C605
XC
397
XC
398
∗2Q025
0.01C034
LOO
P_F
∗LC606
XR
110
QGA2501C5-05ZCNMPX
BWD855
XR859
∗R607
∗R608
∗R609
∗D605
∗D602
∗4D601
∗4D
603
∗D
604
∗4D606
477/10C607 0.01
C608
0R039
5.6kR860
.82/
50T
FC
021
.47/
50T
FC
281
1.8kR231
∗3D306
QQR0621-002ZK939
∗3D305
∗3D310
∗3D309
∗3D308
R141
∗R615
C402
∗R614
∗1Q233
∗1Q232
47kR238
∗R
613
C022
R040
56p CHC233
XC234
56QQL244K-560Z
L232
3.9kR237
3.3kR241
1.5kR243
100/
16C
287
22p
CH
C133
10p
CH
C131
15kR132
68kR133
2.7kR131
5.6kR134
∗1Q131
1kR135
10p
CH
C132
220/
16C
282
0.01
C28
3
470
R28
8
ABL
1.8k
R28
1
680
R28
3
xR
285
150k
R28
9
4.7k
R28
6
10/5
0C
286
XR
284
3.9k
R28
22.
2/50
C28
4
0.01
C28
5
100R287
AN7809FIC852
H_OUTFBPEW
0R652
0R651
C_S
WV
C
FSC
47/25C663
47/25C664
3.3k
R020
Y_S
WV
C
V_G
R3D
ING
RO
UT
1kR136
∗1Q132
∗1Q133
1kR137
1kR139
1kR138
10pCH
C134
33p CHC135
0Y653
AN7805FIC853
XQ001
XD001
XC004
X
R008
XR007
XR006
XR005
XQ002
POW_8V
220/16C856
470/16C857
POW_12V
220/16C853
220/16C854
AN7812FIC851
POW_17V
100/25C851
100/16C852
NRSA63J-0R0XY652
XR654
XR653
GR_SW
TP_952.5
LTV
RTV
ASP_ABL
D_SW
∗R155
∗SWITCH
Q153
0R044
0R045
0.01C151
∗R156
VC_R
∗Y/C SW
IC151
GND
Vcc
∗SWITCH
Q154
VC_GVC_BVC_YS
GND
TV
V_OUT
X_RAY
YCSW
Y_V
CS
W
CEHT11B-002QHS006
QNN0349-002
J601
J601
SC
L0
SD
A0
CO
M_P
R
TV
AF
T1
AFT1
SC
L0
EHT
VC
_YS
VC
_R
VC
_G
VC
_B
SC
L0
Y_S
WV
C
SD
A0
C_S
WV
C
AGC_MUTE
SD
CO
M_P
R
CO
M_P
B
CO
M_Y
SD
V_O
UT
ASP_ABL
SD
A0
BSR_RY4
FSC
BSR_BY4
BSR_Y4
BSR_RY2
BSR_BY2
BSR_Y2
CO
M_P
B
CO
M_Y
D_S
W
VC_BVC_YS
VC_RVC_G
YCSW
TVX_RAY
SDA0TU_POW
SCL0
ASP_ABL
D_SW
H_O
UT
X_R
AY
FB
P
EW
H_OUTFBPEW
TU
_PO
W
CONTROL
12V
AG
C_M
UT
E
V_OUT
YC
SW
TU NC
SWITCH
AGC
FM
IF5V LOCKSCL SDAADRS
DEMOD.
AUDIOATT
SAW FILTER
BTNC
PIF PROC.
AU
DIO
OU
T
ANT INPUT
PIF GND
RF
AG
C
AG
CIF
LOO
P F
EX
T_A
U_I
N
GR&3DY/C
DC
NF
AF
TO
UT
VR
EF
IFV
ccD
ET
OU
T
DE
EM
P
4.5MHz
4.5MHzBPF
AMP
GN
D
GN
DG
ND
GN
DG
ND
GN
D
GN
DG
ND
GN
DG
ND
GN
DG
ND
GN
DG
ND
GN
DG
ND
GN
DG
ND
GN
DG
ND
GN
D
SC
LS
DA
5VA
3.0V
3.0V
Y-O
UT
C-O
UT
3.3V
3.3V
V-I
N
GR
SW
C-I
N
5V 5V 12V
IFG
ND
VC
OA
dj
IFV
cc
12V
GR
OU
T
F
12V
9V
5V
>3.
0V
3DY/C
BUFFER
GN
DT
P_9
52.5
AU
DIO
_LA
UD
IO_R
BUFFER
>3.
0V
BA17812Tor
or
or
BA17809T
BA17805T
TRAP
C047
Q011
AMP
TUNER
AMP
AMP
AMPSWITCH
REGULATOR
12V REGULATOR
9V REGULATOR
5V REGULATOR
SWICTH
BUFFER
SWICTH
(9V
)
Y C
lam
p F
ilter
CV
BS
Int i
n
AP
L D
et F
ilter
CV
BS
Ext
in
U in
V in
C in
CV
BS
out
Dig
GN
D
V o
ut
V R
amp
H V
cc(9
V)
H A
FC
Filt
er
Bla
ck D
et F
ilter
H o
ut
Syn
c ou
t
X R
ay
FB
P in
/GP
out
Dig
VD
D
EW
out
AB
CL
in
Ik in
EH
T in
SD
A
SC
L
RG
B V
cc(9
V)
Ext
B in
Ext
G in
Ext
R in
Ys/
Ym
in
SV
M o
ut
YC
GN
D
B o
ut
G o
ut
R o
ut
YC
Vcc
(5V
)
CW
out
AP
C F
ilter
X'ta
l
INPUT2
INPUT4(AV-36F802 ONLY)
Vcc
GND
GND GND
H
H H
RYBY
Y
Video 2
Video 4
MAIN PWB ASS'YSAC-1542A-M2(AV-36F702)SAC-1547A-M2(AV-36F802)
CNMD1
CNMD1
CNMD1
1.0Vp-p(H) 0.68Vp-p(H)
47 42
27
24
17
2.2Vp-p(H)
1.6Vp-p(H)
2.1Vp-p(H)
IC101
IC101
38
34
4.6Vp-p(H)
14 15 16
4.0Vp-p(H) 3.5Vp-p(H) 3.5Vp-p(H)
IC101
1.9Vp-p(V)
IC101
0V 4.8V 3.8V 4V
8.8V 2.
1V
2.3V
1.6V
2.1V
2.3V
2.2V
2.3V
2.4V
0V 4.8V
3.9V
6.8V8.9V 1.9V 3.1V0V
0.9V
3.2V 3.3V
3V
4.9V
4V
3.1V
1.7V
1.7V
0.6V
7.3V
4.6V
1.5V
4.8V
2.4V
2.4V
2.5V
0V 3V 0V
2.2V
2.2V
8.9V
2.4V
2.7V 3.1V 0V
2.8V
5.9V
2.4V 3.3V
2.2V
2.5V
4.5V 0V 3.1V 0V 3.1V 0V 4.6V
0V 0V 4.6V 8.8V 4.6V 0V 4.5V
4.9V
2.1V V
2.4
3.7V
1.4V
0.8V
8.7V 3.6V
2.9V
3.6V3.0V
2.6V 4.7V
2.4V
2.7V
4.7V
31.5V 0V1.6V
8.7V
1.0V
0V 0V 3.2V 4.2V 4.2V 4.2V
4.3V 2.6V 2.6V 2.6V 7V 7V 8.8V
8.7V
4.3V 3.7
V3.1V
5.7V
3.1V8.8V
2.5V
0V0.6V
0V
4V8.8V
3.4V
0.4V
1.4V
2.4V 2.7V 4.9V
3.3V
4.2V 2.6V
3.3V
3.7V4.9V
11.8V
2.6V
4.9V
3.3V
4.9V
8.7V
5.6V
5.0V
0NOT USEDNOT USEDQNN0349-00247µF/25V47µF/25V0.01µF470µF/10V47µF/25V47µF/25V47µF/25VNCF21CZ-105XQRG029J-180QRG029J-33000NOT USEDNOT USEDNOT USEDSAC-1547A-M2NOT USED00NOT USEDNOT USEDNOT USEDNOT USEDNOT USEDNOT USEDNOT USEDNOT USEDNOT USEDQRG029J-270QRG029J-470NOT USEDNOT USED220Ω220Ω220ΩSAC-1542A-M2
Y156Y155Y154J602C664C663C608C607C606C605C604C150R858R857R652R651R612R611R610
3.3kΩ3.3kΩ3.3kΩ75Ω75kΩ75Ω5.6kΩ22kΩQAU0234-001∗5∗5NQR0169-001XNQR0169-001XNQR0169-001X∗4∗4∗4PQ3RD13M52055FP-XTC4066BF/N/-XESAC-1547A-M2NOT USEDNOT USEDNOT USEDNOT USEDNOT USEDNOT USEDNOT USEDNOT USEDQAU0176-001NOT USEDNOT USEDNOT USEDNOT USEDNOT USEDNOT USEDNOT USEDNOT USEDNOT USEDNOT USEDNOT USEDSAC-1542A-M2
R609R608R607R606R605R604R156R155TU001Q154Q153LC606LC605LC604D605D604D602IC651IC601IC151∗ ∗DIFFERENCE LIST( PARTS)
: NRSA63J-0R0X
: DTC124EKA-X: MTZJ9.1C-T2: 1SS133-T2: 2SA1037AK/QR/-X: 2SC2412K/QR/-X
: NON MOUNT
∗3
∗5: MTZ8.2C-T2∗8
∗4
∗1∗2
X0
: BUS WIREBW
NOTE
2-10No.51907B 2-9
MAIN PWB CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
AV-36F702AV-36F802
AV-36F702AV-36F802
No.51907B
3.3 2WQRX029J-3R3
! FR524
150k1/2W
R527
120k1/2WR528
SARS01-T2D915
FR526
X
Y916
XC941
∗4K935
RU3YX-LFC4D935
CNDAF
SE135NIC921
ST
B_V
CC
0.001QCB32HK-102ZC531
XC922
1SS81-T5D526
4.7 FR1/2WQRZ9017-4R7
! FR52547
QRZ9011-470
! R525
X
Y917
MA
IN_P
OW
QQLZ018-760L521
2.4kNRSA02D-242X
! R535
2.7k1/2W*
R526
EH
T
ICP-N75-Y!
CP
CP932
QQH0110-001! T502
0.01QFLC2AJ-103Z
C527
2.2K1/2W*
R918
1000/25C524
1000/25QEHR1EM-108Z
C523
100/35C525
AU
_GN
D
XD542
3.3 2WQRX029J-3R3
!FR523
1SR35-400A-T2D537
ST
B_5
V
EL1Z-T3D523
EL1Z-T3D524
1SS81-T5D525
BWK940
XC528
XY905
15 FR1/2WQRK126J-150X
! FR521
RH1S-T3D521
10/250QETN2EM-106Z
C521
XL513
0Y902
100kR943
MTZJ5.1C-T2D918
CE42034-002T501
0.01 400VQFP32GJ-103
C919
.0015/500QCB32HK-152ZC940
470/200QEZ0169-477
C907
.1/100MY,5%
C410
∗3D914
ICP-N75-Y!
CP
CP933
47QRG01GJ-470
R909
∗1Q431
680 1/2W*QRK126J-681X
R914
∗3D920
MTZJ30A-T2D917
0.01QCZ9074-103
! C998
BWK914
R08
72-0
02K
920
47kR951
RGP10J-5025-T3D911
ST
B_G
ND
∗1Q440
680k
R1/2QRE121J-684Y
R919
0.001QCZ9054-102
C904
AU
_VC
C
0.001QCZ9054-102
C905
0.001QCZ9054-102
C908
CE41507-001PCN0CP
220/160QEZ0203-227
C931
1000P 2kVQCZ0340-102
C937
RU30A-F1D931
CEKP007-002
!
POSISTORTH901
100R440
S1
CH41169-005YCN0S1
P
QGA2501C5-06ZCN005
3300p 2KVQCZ0340-332
C9120.15
2WMFRR913
0.182WMFR
R912
330pNDC31HJ-331X
C916
HV
CHC802T-05N-JCN0HV
1.2kR944
1801/2W
R940
MTZJ5.1C-T2D529
MA700A-T2D910
BWD532
7.5kNRVA02D-752X
! R537
2.2/100
N
C505
6801/2W
R512
2SD1383K/AB/-XQ951
∗1Q941
330R529
10kR405
XR522
2 7WUNFQRF074J-2R0
R507
XR536
MA4068N/Z1/-T2
!
D531
V
22k1/2w
R930
QRF074K-R47R901
10kR412
10kR411
5V_A
10kR441
ABL
18 1/2W*R417
47/25C432
150 2WOMRQRL029J-151
R414
1QRX01GJ-1R0
R403
FBP
XD402
2SA1123/R/Z1-TQ971
101/2W*
R404
1/50QETN1HM-105Z
C411
0NRSA02J-0R0X
R407
XR408
QQR0621-002ZK401
100/35
QEHR1VM-107ZC404
QMFZ034-5R0Z-J1! F905
C522
1000/35QEHQ1VM-108
C421
1SR35-400A-T2D401
3.3k1/2W*
QRK126J-332X
R917
0.001QCZ9054-102
C906
XD415
2200/25QETM1EM-228
C938
2SD2645-YDQ511
OPT2WMFR
R916
XR409
8.2kR401
∗4K932
2.23W
QRT039J-2R2
R939
BWK938
STR-F6626/F3IC911
1500pCH2
C401
0.1B2
C415
∗4K933
QQS0090-001! T921
FB
P
RGP10J-5025-T3D930
10p/500 5%C405
V
0.015
CH
NCB21HK-153X
C403
BS
_17V
22k1/2w
R911
.1/100
MY
QFLC2AJ-104ZC407
47QQL26AK-470Z
L931
BWY401
100p
NDC31HJ-101X
Y911
XY914
BWY910
1/50C942
RGP10J-5025-T3D913
47QQL26AK-470Z
L933
0.01QCZ9074-103
! C999
1kR952
1501/2W
R953
1000/25QETN1EM-108Z
C951
33k
QRJ146J-333X
R523
390QRJ146J-391X
R531
0.82 TFQFV21HJ-824Z
C526
BW
Y904
XY909
GN
D
1SR124-400A-T2D527
0.0151400VHQFZ0198-153
!C513
0.022
PP630V
C514
XY912
27k3WMFR
QRL039J-273
R513
BWY913
K917
RBV-406MD901
∗4K912
K9162700p1800VH
QFZ0196-272
!
C510
RU3AM-LFC4
D502
RH3G-F1D501
VP
2
AC
4.7/50
N
QEZ0195-475Z
C507
ICP-N75-Y!
CP
CP936
8.2kR434
XC517
RGP10J-5025-T3!
!
D507
560p/500QCB32HK-561Z
C516
100/160QEZ0203-107
C504
CN00Q
0.47250VMPPQFZ0197-474
C515
QQLZ027-821L512
XR549
8.2k1/2W*
R545
8201/2W*
R548
2.2k1/2W*
R5441.2k1/2W*
R543
XC542
XR552
∗2Q541
∗2Q542
CN00P
33kR978
100kR547
1.2k3WMFR
QRL039J-122
R504
330p/500QCB32HK-331Z
C502
150p/500QCB32HK-151Z
C5012SC4212/Z1/
Q501
0R501
1SR35-400A-T2D956
10k1/2W*
R503
XR570
XR571
330R546
XR572
XR573
100/50QETN1HM-107Z
C914
XD543
XC543
D953
1K 0.5%R972
2.7k1/2W*
R973
22k1/2W*
R975
PO
W_8
V
47k1/2W
R977
∗3D973
MTZJ15C-T2D972
XR551
100/16C971
47/25C972
0B2
NRSA63J-0R0X
C925
2SD1408/OY/-LBQ543
XC949
CE41029-00AL511
XL940
270R502
1/160C503
221/2W
R511
1.5k3WMFR
QRL039J-152
R505
XR550
6.8kR435
CN00KXCN00A
LA7841IC401
H
10/50C973
47kR433
100kR432
1000/25QETN1EM-108Z
C935
0Y903
VGND
1000/25QETN1EM-108Z
C934
V
47QQL26AK-470Z
L934
ICP-N75-Y!
CP
CP934
MTZJ33A-T2D941
18
2WMFRQRL029J-183
R941
V
H
2.2k1/2W*
R924
0.1B2
C918
2200pC917
RGP10J-5025-T3D912 27
1/2W
R915
∗4K931
AB
L
X_R
AY
RU3YX-LFC4
D933
1500PQCB32HK-152ZC939
2200/25QETM1EM-228
C933
470pMY,5%
C913
47/25C948
BWD958
XC955
1SR35-400A-T2D957
1SR35-400A-T2D954
1SR35-400A-T2D955
27KR532
∗3D952
∗3D945
QSK0113-001! RY951
QSK0120-001! RY941
QQT0315-001! T951
QGZ5003C1-02CNDEG
XR935
1000/16C943
47QQL26AK-470Z
L937
1000/16C932
RU3YX-LFC4D937∗4
K937
2.7k1/2W
R431
TU
_PO
W
GN
D
OC
P
H_O
UT
B1_
PO
W
EW
12V
V_O
UT
PO
W_1
2V
BT
∗3D432
1SR35-400A-T2D431
1/50C431
12kR533
∗3D535
BWD534
2SC2785/JH/-TQ531
2SA1037AK/QR/-XQ532
12kR534
33kR538
WJM0212-003A
CN008
10/50C533
39 3WMFRQRL039J-390
R553
PO
W_1
7V QJB003-033626
CN009
TLP621(B)! PC921
AU
_GN
D
8V
POW_17V
POW_8V
EW
BS_17V
AB
L
B1_POW
AU_GND
X_R
AY
V_O
UT
H_O
UT
POW_12V
BT
TU
_PO
W
MAIN_POW
STB_GND
AU_VCC
STB_VCC
GND
PO
W_1
7V
ST
B_5
V15V
ST
B_G
ND
STB_5V
MA
IN_P
OW
PO
W_1
2V
BT
GN
D
ST
B_V
CC
BS
_17V
AU
_VC
C
PO
W_8
V
STB_5V
FB
P
QQD0029-001
FEED
V_a
mp
FOCUS
HVT
DAF
12V
H.OUT
B1
0.5
DAF
B1
V.OUT
QQW0107-001
NCB1
-Vcc
DEG
SCREEN
ISOLATED
VD
Vcc
V1V2H3
H5
HV
FOCUS
L01
NC
POWER REGULATOR
GN
D
GN
D
H_P
ULS
ET/B
SIDEPIN
217V
DEF YOKE
(V)
SIDEPIN
SCREEN
PB
PUMP UP
(H)
B1 135V
HEATER
MAIN PWB
PWB
TO
TO DAF
GN
D
GN
D
SWITCH
SWITCH
H.DRIVE
S_C
OR
E1
S_C
OR
E2
DY01
ASS'Y
X_RAY
H.DRIVE
H.DRIVE
DRIVE
OC
P
TP-91B
TP-E
14V
NC
.T
SIDEPIN_OUT
HB
GNDNC
OSC
XRAY1
TSD
QFP32JJ
XRAY2
SW TRANSF
LIVE ( )
BACK
( )
HEAT
RELAY
INNER
SINK
PIN
THERMALPROTECTION
PWBTO
RELAY
DEG
ERROR
MAIN
OVPGND
Vcc
TO CRT SOCKET PWBCN006
AMP
VOLTAGE
SWITCH
SWITCH
-223
NC
!
∗4
∗4
!
∗3
!
!
!
!
DAFPWB
FOR ADJ.CONNECTOR
TO CRT
SAC-1542A-M2 (AV-36F702)SAC-1547A-M2 (AV-36F802)
Q501
0.8Vp-p(H)
B
140Vp-p(H)
Q501 C
Q511
2.4Vp-p(H)
B
T502
T502
6Vp-p(V)
33Vp-p(H)
100Vp-p(H)
150Vp-p(H)
T502
90Vp-p(H)
8
150Vp-p(H)
2 T502 9
T5027 6 T502 4
32Vp-p(V)
60Vp-p(V)
IC401 2
IC401 3 7
0.6V
1.4V
0V0.7V
0V
13.6V
155V
0V
1.8V
134V
11.2V
-12.2V
0V
0.6V
-14.3V0.2V 14.6V
2.5V
2.5V
14.1V
11.7V
4.4V 11.8V
3.9V
5V
4.4V5V
5V
0V
0.2V
72.4V
-0.1V
3.4V
3.9V
0.6V
3.8V
3.2V
0.6V
17.6V
: NRSA63J-0R0X
: QQR0582-001Z: 1SS133-T2: 2SA1037AK/QR/-X: 2SC2412K/QR/-X
: NON MOUNT
∗3∗4
∗1∗2
X0
: BUS WIREBW
NOTE
AV-36F702AV-36F802
AV-36F702AV-36F802
2-11No.51907B
MAIN, FRONT CONTROL AND POWER SW PWB CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
2-12 No.51907B
QAX0307-001X700
MN1876478JL1IC701
X CH
C70
8
XC
HC
709
0.06
8C
710
4.7QQL244K-4R7Z
L700
100/16C707
100
R73
1
2.7k
R73
310
0R
732
2.7k
R73
4
XD
703
XD
704
XR
735
XR
736
2.2k
R73
7
10k
R74
0
0R
741
10k
R74
21k
R73
8
10k
R74
32.
7kR
739
xR74
4
XR
747
10k
R74
8
2.2k
R74
9
2.2k
R75
0
2.2k
R75
1
1kR
752
xR
746
0R
753
XY157
∗R
762 X
R79
7
10k
R76
3
0.00
1C
700 1k
R70
010
0R
708
4.7k
R70
4
100
R70
9
4.7k
R70
5
1kR
701
1kR
702
10k
R70
6
10k
R70
7
XR
703
XC
701
XR
716
XC
702
XR71
2
*R
714
10k
R71
5
XR71
7
xR71
0
1kR72
7
MM1437AF-XIC703
100/16C800
0.1B2
C801
100/16C802
10/50C803
10kR800
∗3D
801
1SS81-T2D800
10/50C806
0.015C805
S-24C04BDPIC702
10/50C807
1000
p
CH
C80
4
6.8kR769
∗2Q701
10kR772
QNS0001-001J810
6.8kR770
6.8kR774
XQ702
∗2Q703
XR773
10kR777
SD
∗1Q
700
1kR75
4
10kR756
15kR755
MT
ZJ5
.6B
-T2
D70
0
22k
R72
91/
50C
706
∗3D
701 1k
R72
8
CN00C
220
R76
822
0R
767
220
R76
622
0R
765
220
R76
4
MT
ZJ8
.2C
-T2
D70
8
MT
ZJ8
.2C
-T2
D70
7
MT
ZJ8
.2C
-T2
D70
6
MT
ZJ8
.2C
-T2
D70
9
MT
ZJ8
.2C
-T2
D71
0
XR781
xR783 X
R782
XC711
∗3D
702
0R807
QGA2501C5-04ZCN0SS
XR
801
VT
V
BS_17V
MP
XF
SC
xR
713
XR
711
0R71
8
XR71
9
XR72
0
1kR72
1
1kR72
2
1kR72
3
1kR72
4
180pCH
C703X
C704
XC
705
∗R72
5
1kR72
6
XR73
0
39pCH
C722
xR75
7
39pCH
C723
xR75
8
6.8kR778
XQ704
XR780
CO
M_Y
0R74
54.7kR784
XR785
120kR788
xR789
39kR786
XR787
4.7/50C712
XC713
XD
705
XR
802
XR
803
XR
804
330
R79
3
330
R79
4
330
R79
5
XR79
6
∗Y712
VP
2
XY700
0Y701
XY702
0Y703
0Y704
0Y705
FB
P
D_S
WG
R_S
WY
CS
W
AS
P_A
BL
*Y
152
Q705
10kR792 68k
R791
27kR790
1SS81-T2D711D712
D714
D713
BT
XC715
1/50C714
VC_B
QGB1505J1-35CN003
VC_YS
X_R
AY
VC_R
QGA2501C1-09CN006
TU
_PO
W
VC_G
BWK941
VP
RT
VLT
V
OC
P
AG
C_M
UT
E
TV
B1_
PO
W
MTZJ8.2C-T2D810
MA
IN_P
OW
10L8
10
1/50BP
C152
∗3D715
1kR
806
1/50C811
.47/50C810
XC812
0R810
AC
47k
R81
1
0.00
1C
813
1kR
812
∗3D
811
100k
R81
4
XR813
DTC144EKA-XQ810
150kR815
XC814
GN
D
0R
816
XC
815
AF
T1
QGB1505J1-25CN001
QGB1505J1-35CN002
XQ707
BW
D71
6
Y_V
CS
W
12V
9V_V
C
5V_A
AU
_VC
CA
U_G
ND
TP
_952
.5
V_G
R3D
IN
C_S
WV
C
Y_S
WV
C
SC
L0S
DA
0
5V_D
0Y800
ST
B_G
ND
GR
OU
T
XY151
ST
B_V
CC
0Y
150
ST
B_5
V
QGA2501C5-07ZCN007
1/50C612
MTZJ5.6B-T2D724MTZJ5.6B-T2D723
XC
727
LOO
P_F
XD812
0.015C816
100kR817
XR779
XC
728
0Y714
XY713
1kR81
8
CN0SN
LA6515IC501
2SA966/OY/-T
Q552
2SC1740S/QR/-TQ5512.7k
R594
22QRJ149J-220
R591
18kR592
10kR595
100kR593
10Q
RE
121J
-100
YR
588
100k
R58
7
XY153
150k
R58
6
4.7k
R58
5
DT
C36
3TK
-XQ
706
47k
R77
5
12k
R77
6
VP
560P
CH
2C
726
D72
2
XC725
470p
CH
C72
4
∗3D721
10k
R82
4
XR
825
XR
826
1kR827
XR823
XR
822
100k
R82
1
0.01
C72
1
6.8kR590
56k
R58
412
0k
R58
2
10Q
RE
121J
-100
YR
581
5.6kR589
0.47TF
C551
0.47TF
C552
47/25C553
68k
R58
3
VP
RE
MO
CO
N
VP
2
REMOCON
9V_VC
SCL0A
FT
1
KE
Y1
KE
Y2
X_R
AY
OSD
OS
DR
OS
DG
OS
DB
OS
DY
S
SIGNAL
LAT.
CLK
D_S
W
LAT.
DAT
A
A_M
UT
E
KEY2KEY1
COMPULINK
COMPULINK
MA
IN_P
OW
BS
_PO
W
TV
AG
C_M
UT
E
B1_
PO
W
GR
_SW
BB
E_S
W
AF
T1
VP
CONTROL
C/N
S_3
C_V
CS
W
FB
P
GND
M_M
UT
E
SDA0
STB_VCC
AS
P_A
BL
ST
B_5
V
STB_GND
LAT.DATA
LAT.CLK
P_LED
B_LED
NS_CORR
NS_SW
VP
2F
BP
CONTROL
MA
IN_P
OW
OSDYSOSDBOSDGOSDR
HP
BT
RBS
COM_Y
VBS
SC
L0
C/N
BS_POW
1CHIP_AVSW
S_S
W
P_L
ED
B_L
ED
NS
_SW
M_M
UT
E
YC
SW
OC
P
A_MUTE
HP
BS
TU
_PO
W
AC
NS
_CO
RR
BT
C3
V_C
CD
VC_YSVC_BVC_GVC_R
C3S3_GNDY3
VC_R
VC_G
VC_B
VC_YS
LTV
V3V3_GNDL3
V_VCSW
R3
S_3ABS_GND
STB_5V
RBS
Y3
12V
SD
B1_
PO
WT
V
AG
C_M
UT
ET
U_P
OW
OC
P
AS
P_A
BL
X_R
AY
YC
SW
GR
_SW
D_S
W
VO
L_AT
T
RTV
AC
CO
M_Y
GN
D
SD
RT
V
S3_GND
R3
V3_GNDV3
COM_Y
L3
LTV
S_SW
BS
BBE_SWV_CCDVOL_ATTSCL0SDA0A_MUTE
GR3D_AVSW
ABS_GND
VBS
VBS_GND
VBS_GND
LOO
P_F
LOO
P_F
SD
A0
FSC
MPX
5V_A
V_SWVC
GND
Y_VCSW
GND
C_VCSW
SD
A0
C_SWVC
Y_SWVC
TP
_952
.5
5V_A
9V_VC
9V_VC
12V
AU_GND
AU_VCC
MP
XF
SC
SC
L0
AC
Y_V
CS
W
C_S
WV
C
Y_S
WV
C
9V_V
C
5V_A
AU
_VC
CA
U_G
ND
TP_952.5
5V_D
5V_D
ST
B_G
ND
V_VCSW
ST
B_V
CC
ST
B_5
V
STB_GND
V_SWVC
VCC
Vss
sR
emoc
on
SD
A1
SC
L1
Key
1
Key
2
E.E
.Sen
s
D_M
OD
E
SY
ST
EM
1,2
C/N
Teid
en
AC
in
CM
SY
NC
AS
P_A
BL
N/S
CO
RR
EC
TIO
N
VM
_LE
VE
L
S_S
W
PO
WE
R_L
ED
BS
/SPA
_LE
D
N/S
ON
OF
F
M_M
UT
E
AV
DD
CR
EF
VP
H
VC
P
CV
BS
Vss
YC
SW
VO
L_AT
T
A_M
UT
E
SPA
_ON
/OF
FS
PA_S
TE
RE
O
OC
PM
EC
A
IIC_S
TOP
SY
ST
EM
3
SY
ST
EM
4
Vss
c
/H_S
ync
D_S
W
OS
D_Y
s
OS
D_B
OS
D_G
OS
D_R
GR
SWBS
TU
_PO
W
AG
C_M
UT
E
TV
B1_
Pow
BS
_Pow
Mai
n_P
ow
LOO
P_F
/RS
T
/V_S
ync
WA
KE
_UP
LAT.
CLK
LAT.
DAT
A
SD
A0
SC
L0
VD
D
OS
C1
OS
C2
Com
puLi
nk
ON
_TIM
ER
_LE
D
PIP
_AF
T
A0 A1 A2 Vss
VccTest
SCL1SDA1
CHIP
US C CHIP
MA
IN_A
FT
SP
EA
KE
R_O
nOff
VA
RI/F
IX
BB
E_O
nOff
CC
D_X
O
CC
D_X
I
Teid
en
X X X X X X X XX_R
AY
NC
NC
9V_VC9V_VC_GND9V_VC_GND
PIP5V
PIP5V_GND
MICOMGNDYS
B
PIP5V_GND
G
VP
VTV2GND
HP
R
HV_GND
V_PIP
NC
MICOMGND
NC
AFC2
PIP5V
9V_VC
SCL0SDA0
MICOMGND
NC
30V
MIX2_RMIX2_GMIX2_B
MIX2_YS
V_PIPGND
NC
30VGND
CM
P_S
WX
SD
X
XXXXX
Y_COMP
Y3S_3
FSCM_MUTE
RBS
COMPULINKEX
9V_SW
ST
B_G
ND
L
RR
L
L_GNDL_GND
R_GNDR_GND
A_VCCA_VCC
A_VCC_GNDA_VCC_GND
VOLATT
SOA
BBE
A_MUTE
STB_5V
9V_VC
MPX
9VGND
12V
12VGND
SDASCL
5VA
5VAGND
VTV(GROUT)
CIN1(NC)
YIN1(NC)
YCINGND
VOUT1GND
VOUT1(NC)
9V_VC
9V_SWGND
9V_VC
SSW
COUT
ASWYOUT
9VGND
LTV
V_PIP
VARI/FIX
ABSGND
VBSGND
V_CCD
LV3
V3GND
RV3
C3V3GND
V3V3GND
RTV
MAIN PWB ASS'YSAC-1542-M2(AV-36F702)SAC-1547A-M2(AV-36F802)
∗3
∗3
∗3
∗2
AV SELECTORPWB
PIP PWB(AV-36F802 ONLY)
∗3
15kR703
XR704
QJB003-093626CN006
XD401
KEY2
REMOCON
XR701LED_T
QNZ0453-001J401
15kR706
LED_P
1STB5V
XR927
∗4D403
4.7kR705
KEY1
XR926
QJB003-074426CN007
4.7kR702
S706
QJB003-060806CN00B
X
∗VA901
BWY401
0
NRSA63J-0R0X
Y402
∗4D402
75R404
S705
CN00L
NQR0169-001X
LC401
33kR406
XY905
.47/50C445
0.01C446
XY907
XL02
75R405
S702S703S704
XY904
XR925
XY
906
XS901
NQR0169-001XLC402
XCN0L1
∗4D404
∗4D405
75R401
220kR402
220kR403
1/50C443
1/50C442
.47/50C444
∗4D406
V3
R3
L3
LED_P
N/S ROTATION
LED_T
L
MENU
B
7
LED_P
VOL-
LED_T
REMOCON
KEY1
V
STB_5V
V3
YC
NC
NC
NC
STB_GND
L/MONO
R
12V
GND
REMOCONKEY1KEY2
VOL+ CH-
STB_5VSTB_GND
C3S3_GNDY3S_3V3V3_GNDL3A_GNDR3
CH+
S702-S706 QSW0619-003Z
FRONT CONTROL PWB ASS'YSAC-8507A-M2POWER
SWPWB
QGA2501C5-06ZCN00B
1.5kR108
∗3SWITCH
Q101
3.3kR107
SLR-342VR3FD101
REMOCON
LED_TLED_P1STB5V
∗3SWITCH
Q102
560R10147/25
C102
KEY1
QSW0847-001S701 GP1U281Q
REMOCONRECEIVER
IC101
OUT
Vcc
GND
(RED)
1.8VB
4.9V
V4.8
POWER
/0V4.8V
4.8V0V/
5V
or
KEY1STB_GND
LED_TLED_P
STB_5VREMOCON
PIC-28143SY
POWER SW PWB ASS'Y SAC-8601A-M2FRONTCONTROLPWB
: NRSA63J-0R0X
: DTA124EKA-X: MTZJ10C-T2: 1SS133-T2: 2SA1037AK/QR/-X: 2SC2412K/QR/-X
: NON MOUNT
∗3
∗5∗4
∗1∗2
X0
: BUS WIREBW
NOTE
5V5V
0V0V0V0V0V0V2V5V 0V0V0V5V0V0V0V0V0V0V2.6V0.4V2.4V0V1.6V5V5V5V
4.9V0V4.9V2.8V2.8V0V0V0V0V4.9V0V4.8V0V0V0V0V0.1V5V
4.7V
4.6V
4.5V
4.9V2.1V0V 0V 0V
4.6V
0V
5V
5.4V
0V 0V
4.9V
4.9V
7.8V
4.9V
5V 0V
4.9V
5V
4.7
V
0 V
0V
3V3.6V
2.4V
4.3V5V
4.9V
3.9V
0V
0V
2.7V
3.2V0V
2.2V
2.4V
2.7V
0.3V
3.8V 0V
4.6V 0V
2.6V
1.1V
00NOT USEDNOT USEDNOT USEDNOT USED1kΩ1kΩ1kΩSAC-1547A-M2NOT USEDNOT USED0000NOT USEDNOT USEDNOT USEDSAC-1542A-M2
Y712Y152R804R803R802R801R762R725R714
∗ ∗DIFFERENCE LIST( PARTS)
2-14No.51907B 2-13
PIP PWB CIRCUIT DIAGRAM [AV-36F802]
AV-36F802 AV-36F802
No.51907B
XBUFFER
Q102
10/50C004
QAU0206-001!
TU001
47/25C008
AN7805F5V REGULATOR
INOUT
IC001
XR007
BWY002
QGB1505K1-35
CN003
0R011
∗2Q303
BWY360
XR125
XR126
X
R012X
C012
XR124
XR123X
L121
0R121X
C121
XY351
XY359
XCF001
XQ304
XR310
XC001
0Y302
XC305
XC304
XL305
10/50C003
10/5
0C
006
BWL001
XY354
10kR002
100R004
0R005
100R003 10k
R001
XR006
XC010
XC011
BWY915
BWY355
BWY356
BWY357
BWY358
2.2kR303
100
R31
3
330R316
XR315
0Y30110
0R
311
2.2kR306
XR302
47kR301
0R314
∗5D301
∗2Q302
∗2Q301
XY903
0.1B2
C326
XC353
0C302
XC303
0.1B2
C331
0.1B2
C3160.1B2
C3170.1B2
C318
XC352
1/50C321
2.2/50C329
2.2/50C327
10/50C323
10/50C314
XC351
10/50C319
XY904
XY908
27p
CH
C312
0.01C330
0.01C315
XY909
27pCH
C313
0.01C322
0C301
0.01C324
0.01C320
0.01C325
0.01C328
27MHz X-TALQAX0521-001Z
X301
6.8L304
BWY910
6.8L303
6.8L302
X
IN OUT
IC351
47kR304
XR305
XY911
XY912
BWY913
XR333
XQ332
XQ331
0R331
BWC334
XR334
XR332
XC335
XR335
XR336
XR339
XQ334
XQ333
0R337
BWC336
XR340
XR338
XC337
1kR309
3.3kR308
3.3kR307 X
R341XR342
XR345
XR351
SDA9389X-XIC301
XQ336
XQ335
0R343
BWC338
XR346
XR344
XC339
XR347
XR348
0Y331
BWY352
0Y332
0Y333
XY353
0R317
XC332
68p CHC333
XD302
XY902BWY906
XY901
BWY907
XR127
SC
L0
SD
A0
9V_VC
30V
9V_V
C
R G BY
S
BOUT
ROUT
MIX
2_Y
S
9V_V
C_G
ND
AFC2
HP
VP
SD
A0
SC
L0
MIX
2_B
MIX
2_G
30V
MIX
2_R
SC
L0
R G BY
S
AF
C2
VP
HP
SD
A0
RO
UT
GO
UT
BO
UT
MIX
2_Y
S
MIX2_R
MIX2_B
MIX2_GGOUT
GN
D
NC
9V_V
CV
TV
2 G
ND
NC
NC
or BA17805T
NC
NC
CV
BS
1
NC
NC
NC
VR
EF
HC
VB
S2
CV
BS
3V
RE
FL
VS
SA
1
NC
VD
DA
1U
RE
FV
SS
A2
VD
DA
2
NC
RO
UT
BO
UT
GO
UT
YS
OU
TY
SIN
BIN
NC
RIN
9V_V
C
NC
GIN
V_P
IP
AMP
XIN
GN
D
V_PIP
XQ
SC
PV
P/S
CP
SD
AS
CL
VD
DV
SS T
XF
RE
Q
NC
NC
VPHP
(EXT.)
V_P
IP(T
V)
V_P
IP(E
XT.
)
PIP PWB ASS'YSAC0P501A-M2
5V
BUFFER
AMP BUFFER
AMP BUFFERMIX2_YS
9V
9V
PIP
5V
PIP
5V_G
ND
(CHIP)
PIP
5V
V_P
IP
GN
DA
FT
RF
_AG
CV
IDE
O
NC NC
5v 30vBTAGC 9V IFSCL SDAADRS
NC
LOCKNC
TUNER-IF1
NC
GN
D
GN
D
NC
(CHIP)
(CHIP)(CHIP)
PIP
5V_G
ND
MIC
OM
HV
_GN
D
MIC
OM
GN
D
30V
GN
D
MIC
OM
PIP CONTROLER
INVERTER
INVERTER
BUFFER
MAIN PWB
IC301 28
1.0Vp-p
1.1V
1.7V 4.7
V
0V0.6V
0.6V0.6V4.
9V
4.9V
4.9V0V2.2V
0.9V
4.2V
2.7V
2.7
V
2.4
V
0V
0.6
V
0.6
V
0.4
V
0V
0V4.9V0V0.
9V1.7
V
1.7V0.9V
0.6V
0V0.6V
8.8V
5V
2.5V
4.0V
2.4V
V8.8
32.1V5V
V2.62.4V2.5V4.6V
: NRSA63J-0R0X
: BUS WIRE (0Ω): 1SS133-T2: 2SC2412K/QR/-X
: NON MOUNT (OPEN)BW
∗2∗5
X0
NOTE
AV-36F702 AV-36F702
2-15No.51907B
AV SELECTOR PWB CIRCUIT DIAGRAM [AV-36F702]
2-16 No.51907B
AUDIO OUT
(NOT USED)
INPUT2
(NOT USED)
INPUT1
MAIN PWB
AV SELECTOR PWB ASS'YSAC0S511A-M2
: NRSA63J-0R0X
: DTC323TK-X: DTC124EKA-X: MTZJ10C-T2: 2SA1037AK/QR/-X: 2SC2412K/QR/-X
: NON MOUNT
∗4
∗8∗5
∗1∗2
X0
: BUS WIREBW
NOTE
0V
V V0V
4.3V
2.5 2.7
4.3V
3.9V
4.8V
0V
0V
4.4V
4.4V
3.9V
3.9V
0V
4.8V
V4.4
4.4V 3.93.9V V
4.4 4.7V V
8.7V3.5V 4.6V
4.4V
4.3V
4.4V
4.4V
4.4V
4.1V
3.8V
4.3V
4.4V4.4V4.4V 3.9V
4.2V
4.4V
3.9V
4.3V 3.7V
8.8V
4.4V
8.8V
4.4V
0V
V4.4
V4.4
V4.4 4.4
VV4.4 4.4V
V4.4
4.4V
8.7V
8.7V
4.4V4.4V4.4V
4.4V
4.4V
4.4V
0.6V
0V
0V
0V
0V
1.3V 1.3V
7.8V
0V
0.6V 0V
21.1V V2.1 10.10V
V10.1V
2.6VV2.4
0VVV4.5
V4.5
V4.4
V4.4
V4.4
VVVVVVVVVV4.54.54.54.54.54.54.54.54.54.54.5
4.5 4.5 4.5 4.4 4.7 0.2 3.2 4.5 0V4.42.74.44.15V1.24.5VVVV
4.5 5VVVVVVV
4.5VVVVVV
V4.4
V4.4
9V 4.5V
9V
/0V
7.2V
/0V
7.2V
4.6V
4.6V
4.6V
4.4V
0V
0V/
9V
0V/
9V
4.4V
4.6V
4.6V
4.6V
CXA2089Q-XIC501
QNZ0454-001J501
QGB1505K1-35CN002
XR534
∗2Q263
0.01C531
1kR270
680R269
0R528
0R529
XD522
33kR518
75R519
75R520
75R521
0.01C509
.47/50
C508
XLC501
XLC502
220kR522
220kR523
1/50C512
1/50C513
.47/50C511
0R558
0R559
0R560
0R561
XD523
XR524
XR525
XR526
0.01C206
75R527
XC515
XC514
XLC503
XLC504
220kR532
220kR533
1/50C520
1/50C521
.47/50C517
XR562
XR563
0R564
0R565
BA15218NIC371XY381
BWY401
3L DIGITAL COMB FILTERTC90A53NIC201
470kR242
4700pC237
XR535
XC522
XC523
0.01C532
XC533
100/16C401
XR
403
XD403
XC534
XC
408
1/50C412
1000/25C407
XR404
XD
402
XC409
R
0.001C309X
C307
L
L
R
0NRSA63J-0R0X
C3120R306
0R305
0.001C310
0NRSA63J-0R0X
C3111/50C413
220R303
2.2kR302
56k
R09
0
∗5Q301
220R304
XY152
QGB1505K1-25CN001
XD
512
∗4D
511
∗4D
508
XD
510
∗4D
509
∗4D
505
∗4D
504
∗4D
503
∗4D
502
∗4D
501
1kR
501
1kR
502
220
R50
3
1kR
504
1kR
505
XR
506
XD
506
∗4D
507
XD513
XD514
∗4D515
∗4D516
∗4D517
∗4D518
∗4D519
XD520
∗4D521
1kR507
1kR508
220R509
XD527
XD528
XR406
XR
511
XR
510
10kR243
10kR2440.01C238 0.01
C234
330R566
330R567
47/25C504
XY151
XC53
6
XC53
7
22/50C503
XR513
XR512
0.01C501
0.01C502
∗1Q211
47/50C205
180pCH
C246
0R568
XY201
∗5Q454
0.01C242
0.01C243
0.01C249
22k
R402
∗5Q302
0.01C244
0.01C247
0.01C248
0.01C241
1000/25C410
18kR401
XC453
0.22TFC404
XQ455
15
QQL244K-150Z
L202
XY202
BWL241
XC308
2.2kR301
XK201
XR405
10/50C233
0.01C236
XR252
XD453
39pCH
C255
∗1Q251
XR580
1000/25C411
680R253
1
NCF21CZ-105X
C40
3
390R254
47/25C333
15QQL244K-150Z
L261
470R251
1
NCF21CZ-105X
C40
2
XY203
∗2Q252
15pCH
C263
∗1Q262
1kR265
0R210
TC4066BP/N/VARI/FIX SWIC381
GND
Vcc
680
R25
5
LA4485IC401
470R263
22kR385
∗1Q453
.47/50C215
22kR386
1kR217
XC454
∗1Q212
1.8kR216180p
CH
C214100pCH
C212
47p CHC213
1.5kR215
4.7
QQL244K-4R7Z
L211
XC201
180R214
15kR211
0.01C245
1kR213
10/25
N
BP
C211
33kR212
2.2kR218
10/50C235
100R236
1kR234
100R231
100R235
0R223
2.7kR23322k
R230
47kR229
∗1Q218
∗2Q219
XQ451
1kR232
XY382
0.01
C53
8
0.01C539
2.2/
50
N
BP
C34
5
2.2/
50
N
BP
C34
4
0.01C226
XC254
XC253
XC261
XC262
BWL251
47/50C251
BWL201
XC203
XC204
0.01C252
XC455
XC209
XC208
0R
906
XEF202
XEF201
XR264
0.01C223
18kR459
XR461
XR457
33kR458
XR460
XR249
820R241
XJ504
QNN0349-001J502
0.01C239
12kR2398.2k
R238
10/50C232
10/50C231
100R258
100R261
∗1Q253
∗1Q261
2.2kR259
2.2kR262
BWL242BWL244BWL243
XR901
XR248
100R247
XR246
XR245
XR902
XR904
XR903
XQ901
100R202
.47/50
N
BP C505
XR451
2.2/50C084
XR453
XC451
XR454
XD451
XR452
0R574
1/50C343
4.7/50
N
BPC082
∗1Q509
100
R571
2.7kR573X
R572
100/16C331
3.3/50QBTC1CK-335Z
C089
0.1
B2
C33
7
6.8kR082
XC452
XR455
XR456
0.1B2
C081
2.2/
50C
338
220R391
22kR387
1/50
C09
2
0.1B2
C088
33k
R08
6
15k
0.5%
R08
7
220R392
∗8SWITCH
Q387
QNN0348-001J503
1/50
C09
3
220R396
220R395
22kR384
.47/50C391
∗8SWITCH
Q385∗8
SWITCH
Q384∗8
SWITCH
Q386
.47/50C392
1/50
NBP
C08
3
82kR393
82kR394
XD452
0.1B2
C087
XQ452
4.7/
50C
094
1/50
C09
5
3.3k
R08
5
0.01C265
XC267
.47/50
N
BPC264
X
N
C266
10/5
0
QBTC1CK-106Z
C09
1
XC
341
0.00
22C
336
0.02
7B
2C
334
0.047B2
C085
∗4D391
1.5k 0.5%R088
5.6k
R08
9
15kR083
1kR
081
10kR371
10kR372
10kR373
4.7kR378
6.8kR381
4.7kR377
XC374 33k
R375
33kR376
10kR374
BA15218NIC371
1/50
C09
0
∗5SWITCH
Q381
22kR382
47/25C373
1/50N BP
C372
68kR084
.47/
50C
086
100
R33
1
∗5SWITCH
Q382
CONTROLMTS &UPC1851BCU
TONE/VOL
IC001
NJM2150ADIC151
1/50
N
BPC151
100
R33
4
1/50
N
BPC152
22kR151
22kR152
22kR154
22kR153
0.0033C153
0.033
B2C155
0.033B2
C1560.0033
C154
10/5
0C
158
47/25C159
0.1B2
C160
XR15
6
XR15
8
0R155
0R157
10kR159
10/50C157
100
R33
2
∗4D392
100
R33
3
XC
342
0.00
22C
339
0.1
B2
C34
0
1/50
N
BP
C371
0.01C332
2.2/
50C
335
BSRT
V_CCD
C1
Y1
AVSWGND
V1
AVSWGND
LV1
RV1
AVSWGND
S_1
9V_VC
S2_1
S2_2
AVSWGND
Y_C
OM
P
Y2
AVSWGND
VA
RI/F
IX
V2
VIDEO2
LV2
RV2
C2
S_2
V2
SOA
MPX
VOL_ATT
BBE
RV
2
LV2
RV
3
LV3
AVSWGND
VIDEO3
V3
Y3
C3
BS
RT
S_3
9V_VC
Y2
C2
YIN1
S2_2
S_2
V1
RV1
C1
Y1
S_1
LV1
Y_COMP
C_2L
IIC
SDASCL
SD
A
RTVLTV
SC
L
LV3
YOUT
COUT
Y_2L
VTV
9V_VC
S_3
AV
SW
GN
D
AV
SW
GN
D
RV
3
A_G
ND
5VA
AV
SW
GN
DC
3
R
12V
CIN1
A_V
CC
YIN
1
L
FSC
V3
Y3 9V
_SW
C_2L
AV
SW
GN
D
VT
V
BB
E
YO
UT
CO
UT
SC
L
Y_2L
SD
A
RT
V
9V_V
C
5VA
S2_1
LTV
A_G
ND
V_C
CD
FS
C
VOUT1
CIN
1
VO
UT
1
A_M
UT
E
SO
A
A_MUTE
MP
X
A_V
CC
VO
L_AT
T
A_G
ND R
A_G
ND L
VARI_R
VARI_L
V1
LV1
Y1
RV
1
C1
S2-
1
S-1V2
LV2
Y2
S2-2
S-2
RV
2
C2
V3
LV3
Y3
RV3
C3
BSRT
S-3
LV4
V4
RV4
AD
R
SC
L
SD
A
DC
OU
T
CO
UT
2
LOU
T2
YO
UT
2
RO
UT
2
VO
UT
2
Vcc
MU
TE
YIN
1
BIAS
CIN1
LOUT1
YOUT1
ROUT1
VOUT1
TRAP
GND
COUT1
LTV
TV
RTV
VREFL
VREFH
Video1
Video4
VSS1
Video2
VDD1
SWITCH
SWITCH
(3.3k)
(L211)
(C402,C403)
VRB
VRT
ADIN
BIAS1
CLAMPC
1/2VDD
VDD2
(1.2k)
TEST
KILLER
VARI OUT
(1k)
YOUT
BIAS2
COUT
BIAS3
R
VFIL
CKIN
(L202,L301)
PIROT DET
VSS2
CBPF
VENH0
VENH1
1LINE
CORING
VDD3
VSS3
VREFV
VSS4
VDD4
L202
V
L
L
R
R
L
R
0V 0V0V 0V
0V
0V0V0V0V
LRR L
L_G
ND
L_G
ND
PHASE
(2Vp-p)
(∗1)
L
R_G
ND
R_G
ND
A_V
CC
A_V
CC
A_V
CC
_GN
DA
_VC
C_G
ND
VO
LAT
T
SO
A
BB
E
LTV
A_M
UT
E
9V_S
W
9V_V
C
MP
X
BB
E
9VG
ND
12V
12V
GN
D
SD
AS
CL
5VA
5VA
GN
D
VT
V
BS
CIN
1
YIN
1
YC
ING
ND
VO
UT
1GN
D
VO
UT
1
9V_S
W
9V_S
WG
ND
RB
SA
BS
GN
DY
_CO
MP
VB
SG
ND
VB
S
V_C
CD
9V_V
C
SS
W
CO
UT
AS
WY
OU
T
FS
C
LV3
V3G
ND
RV
3
S_3 C3
V3G
ND Y3
V3
V3G
ND
M_M
UT
E
(V_P
IP)
9VG
ND
ON
_OF
F
RT
V
GN
D
DET
VC
C
SDASCL
FIXEDLINE OUT
EXT1 IN INEXT2 TV OUTOUT
TONE/SURROUND VARIABLELINE
IIC BUS
VRE
Vcc
L_B
OO
ST
H_B
OO
ST
LPF
_LLP
F_R
1/2Vcc
CR
2_L
VARI/FIX
CR
_R
SAP DEMODULATION dbx NR
MOA
BP
F_L
BP
F_R
CR
1_L
L
R
CR
1_R
HP
F_L
BBE IC
HP
F_R
L_IN
PU
TR
_IN
PU
T
VR
EF
FOL
(1/2)
(2/2)
FOR EL1
L_O
UT
PU
T PD1 PD2 d01PH
D1
PH
D2
COM SDT NDT SOT SI1 SOA STI SRB ITI WTI WRB do2 VOF
R_O
UT
PU
T
9V
ER1 EL2 ER2 TVL TVR LBC LTC TLO RBC RTC TRO SUR LOT ROT D-GND
A-GND
0V0V 0V
0V
0V
0V
0V/4.8V
/0V7.2V
0V/9V
7.2V/0V
9V
4.4V
4.4V4.4V
4.4V4.4V
4.4V
0V
0V
2.1Vp-p(H)
EQ509
15
1.0Vp-p(H)
IC501 1.9Vp-p(H)
2.1Vp-p(H)
IC501
IC501
45
43
1.0Vp-p(H)
17
0.64Vp-p(H)
19 40
2.2Vp-p(H)
IC501
2-18No.51907B 2-17
AV SELECTOR PWB CIRCUIT DIAGRAM [AV-36F802]
AV-36F802 AV-36F802
No.51907B
CXA2089Q-XIC501
QNZ0454-001
J501
QGB1505K1-35CN002
220kR534
XQ263
xC531
XR270
XR269
0R528
0R529
XD522
33kR518
75R519
75R520
75R521
0.01C509
.47/50
C508
XLC501
XLC502
220kR522
220kR523
1/50C512
1/50C513
.47/50C511
0R558
0R559
0R560
0R561
XD523
XR524
XR525
XR526
XC206
75R527
XC515
XC514 XLC503
XLC504
220kR532
220kR533
1/50C520
1/50C521
.47/50
C517
XR562
XR563
0R564
0R565
BA15218NIC371
Y152
BWY401
IC201
XR242
XC237
220kR535
1/50C522
1/50C523
xC532
0.01C533
100/16C401
XR403
XD403
0.01C534
XC408
1/50C412
1000/25C407
XR404XD
402
XC409
R
0.001C309
XC307
L
L
R
0
NRSA63J-0R0X
C312
0R306
0R305
0.001C310
0
NRSA63J-0R0X
C3111/50C413 220
R303
2.2kR302
56k
R09
0
∗5Q301
220R304
XC
536
QGB1505K1-25CN001
XD
512
∗4D
511
∗4D
508
XD
510
∗4D
509
∗4D
505
∗4D
504
∗4D
503
∗4D
502
∗4D
501
1kR
501
1kR
502
220
R50
3
1kR
504
1kR
505
XR
506
XD
506
∗4D
507
XD513
XD514
∗4D515
∗4D516
∗4D517
∗4D518
∗4D519
XD520
∗4D521
1kR507
1kR508
220R509
∗4D527
∗4D528
XR406
1kR
5111k
R51
0
XR243
XR244XC238
XC234
330R566
330R567
47/25C504
XC
537
Y151
22/50C503
XR513
XR512
0.01C501
0.01C502
XQ211
XC205
XC246
0R568
XY201
∗5Q454
XC242
XC243
XC249
22k
R402
∗5Q302
XC244
XC247
XC248
XC241
1000/25C410
18kR401
XC453
0.22TFC404
XQ455
XL202
XY202
XL241
XC308
2.2kR301
XK201
XR405
XC233
XC236
XR252
XD453
XC255
XQ251
XR580
1000/25C411
XR253
1
NCF21CZ-105X
C40
3
XR254
47/25C333
XL261
XR251
1
NCF21CZ-105X
C40
2
XY203
XQ252
XC263
XQ262
XR265
X
R210
TC4066BP/N/VARI/FIX SW
IC381
GND
Vcc
XR25
5
LA4485IC401
XR263
22kR385
∗1Q453
XC215
22kR386
XR217
XC454
XQ212
XR216X
C214XC212
XC213
XR215
XL211
XC201
XR214
XR211
XC245
XR213
X
N
C211
XR212
XR218
XC235
XR236
XR234
XR231
XR235
XR223
XR233X
R230
XR229
XQ218
XQ219
XQ451
XR232
2.2/
50
N
BP
C34
5
2.2/
50
N
BP
C34
4
0.01
C53
9
0.01
C53
8
XC226
XC254
XC253
XC261
XC262
XL251
XC251
XL201
XC203
XC204
XC252
XC455
XC209
XC208
0R906
XEF202
XEF201
XR264
XC223
18kR459
XR461
XR457
33kR458
XR460
XR249
XR241
QNN0348-001J504
QNN0349-001J502
XC239
XR239
XR238
XC232
XC231
XR258
XR261
XQ253
XQ261
XR259
XR262
XL242
XL244
XL243
100R901
XR248
XR247
XR246
XR245
XR902
XR904
XR903
XQ901
100R202
.47/50
N
BPC505
XR451
2.2/50C084
XR453
XC451
XR454
XD451
XR452
XR574
1/50C343
4.7/50
N
BPC082
∗1Q509
100
R571
2.7kR573X
R572
100/16C331
3.3/16TAN
C089
0.1
B2
C33
7
6.8kR082
XC452
XR455
XR456
0.1B2
C081
2.2/
50C
338
220R391
22kR387
1/50
C09
2
0.1B2
C088
33k
R08
6
15k
1%
NRVA02D-153X
R08
7
220R392
∗8
SWITCH
Q387
QNN0348-001J503
1/50
C09
3
220R396
220R395
22kR384
.47/50C391
∗8
SWITCH
Q385 ∗8
SWITCH
Q384∗8
SWITCH
Q386
.47/50
C392
1/50
NBP
C08
3
82kR393
82kR394
XD452
0.1B2
C087
XQ452
4.7/
50C
094
1/50
C09
5
3.3k
R08
5
XC265
XC267
X
N
C264
X
N
C266
10/1
6TA
N
C09
1
OP
TC
341
0.00
22C
336
0.02
7B
2C
334
0.047B2
C085
∗4D391
1.5k1% NRVA02D-152X
R088
5.6k
R08
9
15kR083
1kR
081
10kR371
10kR372
10kR373
4.7kR378
6.8kR381
4.7kR377
OPTC374 33k
R375
33kR376
10kR374
BA15218NAMP
IC371
1/50
C09
0
∗5SWITCH
Q381
22kR382
47/25C373
1/50
N
BPC372
68kR084
.47/
50C
086
100
R33
1
∗5SWITCH
Q382
CONTROLMTS &UPC1851BCU
TONE/VOL
IC001
NJM2150ADIC151
1/50
N
BPC151
100
R33
4
1/50
N
BPC152
22kR151
22kR152
22kR154
22kR153
0.0033C153
0.033
B2C155
0.033B2
C1560.0033
C154
10/5
0C
158
47/25C159
0.1B2
C160
OP
TR
156
OP
TR
158
0R155
0R157
10kR159
10/50
C157
100
R33
2
∗4D392
100
R33
3
OP
TC
342
0.00
22C
339
0.1
B2
C34
0
1/50
N
BPC371
0.01C332
2.2/
50C
335
BSRT
V_CCD
C1
Y1
AVSWGND
V1
AVSWGND
LV1
RV1
AVSWGND
S_1
9V_VC
S2_1
S2_2
AVSWGND
Y_COMP
Y2
AVSWGND
VA
RI/F
IX
V2
VIDEO4
LV2
RV2
C2
S_2
V2
SOA
MPX
VOL_ATT
BBE
AVSWGND
RV
2
LV2
RV
3
LV3
AVSWGND
VIDEO3
V3
Y3
C3
BS
RT
S_3
9V_VC
Y2
C2
YIN1
S2_2
S_2
V1
RV1
C1
Y1
S_1
LV1
Y_COMP
C_2L
IIC
SDASCL
SD
A
RTVLTV
SC
L
LV3
YOUT
COUT
Y_2L
VTV
9V_VC
S_3
AV
SW
GN
D
AV
SW
GN
D
RV
3
A_G
ND
5VA
AV
SW
GN
DC
3
R
12V
CIN1
A_V
CC
YIN
1
L
FSC
V3
Y3
9V_S
W
AV
SW
GN
D
VT
V
BB
E
YO
UT
CO
UT
SC
L
Y_2L
SD
A
C_2L
RT
V
9V_V
C
5VA
S2_1
LTV
A_G
ND
V_C
CD
FS
C
VOUT1
CIN
1
VO
UT
1
A_M
UT
E
SO
A
A_MUTE
MP
X
A_V
CC
VO
L_AT
T
A_G
ND R
A_G
ND L
VARI_R
VARI_L
V1
LV1
Y1
RV
1
C1
S2-
1
S-1V2
LV2
Y2
S2-2
S-2
RV
2
C2
V3
LV3
Y3
RV3
C3
BSRT
S-3
LV4
V4
RV4
AD
R
SC
L
SD
A
DC
OU
T
CO
UT
2
LOU
T2
YO
UT
2
RO
UT
2
VO
UT
2
Vcc
MU
TE
YIN
1
BIAS
CIN1
LOUT1
YOUT1
ROUT1
VOUT1
TRAP
GND
COUT1
LTV
TV
RTV
VREFL
VREFH
Video1
Video2
VSS1
Video4
VDD1
DIGITAL COMB FILTER
(3.3k)
(L211)
(C402,C403)
VRB
VRT
ADIN
BIAS1
CLAMPC
1/2VDD
VDD2
(1.2k)
TEST
KILLER
AUDIO OUT
(1k)
YOUT
BIAS2
COUT
BIAS3
R
VFIL
CKIN
PIROT DET
VSS2
CBPF
VENH0
VENH1
1LINE
CORING
VDD3
VSS3
VREF
VSS4
VDD4
IC371
L
R
LRR L
L_G
ND
L_G
ND
PHASE
2Vp-p
(∗1)
L
R_G
ND
R_G
ND
A_V
CC
A_V
CC
A_V
CC
_GN
DA
_VC
C_G
ND
VO
LAT
T
SO
A
BB
E
LTV
A_M
UT
E
9V_S
W
9V_V
C
MP
X
BB
E
9VG
ND
12V
12V
GN
D
SD
AS
CL
5VA
5VA
GN
D
VT
V
VA
RI/F
IX
CIN
1
YIN
1
YC
ING
ND
VO
UT
1GN
D
VO
UT
1
9V_S
W
9V_S
WG
ND
RB
SA
BS
GN
DY
_CO
MP
VB
SG
ND
V_P
IP
V_C
CD
9V_V
C
SS
W
CO
UT
AS
WY
OU
T
FS
C
LV3
V3G
ND
RV
3
S_3 C3
V3G
ND Y3
V3
V3G
ND
M_M
UT
E
9VG
ND
ON
_OF
F
RT
V
GN
D
DET
VC
C
SDASCL
FIXEDLINE OUT
EXT1 IN INEXT2 TV OUTOUT
TONE/SURROUND VARIABLELINE
IIC BUS
VRE
Vcc
L_B
OO
ST
H_B
OO
ST
LPF
_LLP
F_R
1/2Vcc
CR
2_L
VARI/FIX
CR
_R
SAP DEMODULATION dbx NR
MOA
BP
F_L
BP
F_R
CR
1_L
L
R
CR
1_R
HP
F_L
BBE IC
HP
F_R
L_IN
PU
T
NC
R_I
NP
UT
NC
VR
EF
FOL
(1/2)
(2/2)
FOR EL1
L_O
UT
PU
T PD1 PD2 d01PH
D1
PH
D2
COMSDT NDTSOTSI1 SOA STI SRB ITI WTI WRB do2 VOF
R_O
UT
PU
T
R187R188
9V
ER1 EL2 ER2 TVL TVR LBC LTC TLO RBC RTC TRO SUR LOT ROT D-GND
A-GND
0V
AUDIO OUT
INPUT2
INPUT4
(NOT USED)
INPUT1
MAIN PWB
AV SELECTOR PWB ASS'YSAC0S505A-M2
2.1Vp-p(H)
E
2.2Vp-p(H)
40
1.0Vp-p(H)
15
43
45
2.1Vp-p(H)
17 19
1.0Vp-p(H)
IC501
IC501
IC501
Q509
IC501
1.9Vp-p(H)
0.64Vp-p(H)
3836
2.1Vp-p(H) 2.1Vp-p(H)
9V
/0V
7.2V
/0V
7.2V
4.6V
4.6V
4.6V
4.4V
0V
0V/
9V
0V/
9V
4.4V
4.6V
4.6V
4.6V
0V/4.8V
/0V7.2V
0V/9V
7.2V/0V
9V
4.4V
4.4V4.4V
4.4V4.4V
4.4V
0V
0V 0V0V 0V
0V
0V0V0V0V
0V0V 0V
0V
0V
0V
2.6VV2.4
0VVV4.5
V4.5
V4.4
V4.4
V4.4
V4.4
V4.4
VVVVVVVVVV4.54.54.54.54.54.54.54.54.54.54.5
9V 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.4 4.7 0.2 3.2 4.5 0V4.42.74.44.15V1.24.5VVVVV
4.5 5VVVVVVV
4.5VVVVVV
4.4V
3.9V
4.4V
3.9V
4.7V 3.9V
3.9V
4.4V
4.4V
4.4V
4.2V
4.4V
4.3V
3.8V
4.4V
4.1V
4.4V
4.3V
4.4V
4.6V8.7V3.5V2.7V
2.5V
0V
4.3V
3.9V
4.3V
4.8V
0V
0V
4.4V
3.9V
4.4V
3.9V
4.8V
0V
4.4V
4.4V
4.4V
4.4V
4.4V
4.44.4 4.4 4.4 4.4VVVVV
4.4VV
4.40V
4.4V 4.4V4.4V8.7V8.7V
8.8V
4.4V
4.4
V
0V
4.4
V
8.8V
4.3V 3.7V
1.3V
1.3V 0.6V
21.1V2.1V
0V 10.1V
10.1V
0V0V
0V
0V
0V
7.8V
0.6V0V
: NRSA63J-0R0X
: DTC323TK-X: DTC124EKA-X: MTZJ10C-T2: 2SC2412K/QR/-X
: NON MOUNT
∗4
∗8∗5
∗1
X0
: BUS WIREBW
NOTE
AV-36F702AV-36F802
AV-36F702AV-36F802
2-19No.51907B
CRT SOCKET PWB CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
2-20 No.51907B
: NRSA63J-0R0X
: 1SS133-T2: 2SA933AS/QR/-T: 2SC1740S/QR/-T
: NON MOUNT (OPEN)
∗3
∗1∗2
X0
: BUS WIRE (0Ω)BW
NOTE
XQ307
XQ310
150R301
1SS82-T2D304
18QQL244K-180Z
L301
47QQL244K-470Z
L3041k1/2WC
R325
∗3D301
5.6R145
0R316
XR319
XR322
15k2W
R310
5.6R146
18k2W
R313
2SC5083/L-P/-TQ302
Q305 XQ308
XQ311
150R302
1SS82-T2D305
18QQL244K-180Z
L302
47QQL244K-470Z
L3051k1/2WC
R326
∗3D302
1.2kR331
0R317
XR320
XR323
15k2W
R31118k2W
R314
10R308 150
R305
560pCH
C302
2SC5083/L-P/-TQ303
TP-E1
XQ309
XQ312
150R303
1.2kR332
1SS82-T2D306
18
QQL244K-180Z
L303
47QQL244K-470Z
L3061k1/2WC
R327
∗3D303
0R318
XR321
1.2kR333
XC331
Q304
XR324
15k2W
R31218k2W
R315
XC332
10R309
XC333
∗3D101
10R307 150
R304
XD102
150R306
470/16NC323
560pCH
C303
R
560pCH
C301
∗3D331
390R335
2SC5248/DE/Q108
1/250C321
XL106
1/250C322Q306
1M1/2WC
R361
BWR364
470k 1/2WCR363
1k1/2WC
R362
0.001 3KVQCZ0324-102
C363
BWC362
1/250C361
RM2C-LFA1D361
2SA1964/DE/Q107
CE41507-001PCN0E2
1.5kR334
TP-B
10/50C101
∗1Q109
R
G
B
120kR142
33kR136
WJA0029-002ACN005
1.5kR134
680R139
∗2Q103
XR141
0CH
C125
XMY
C107
XR144
XQ110
XD107
XR138
XC108
XR137
Ys
XQ104
XR110
3.3kR111
XR112
X
R113CE41492-001Z
K103
∗1Q105
∗2Q106
101/4W
QRJ146J-100X
! R114
CE41492-001ZK102
100/16
N
C109
47R115
47R116
G
CH41169-003YCN00V
B
B
G
R
220pCH
C111
220pCH
C110
5pCH
C122
XCH
C1270.0047
500V
C115
0.0047C114
TP-G
56kR127
5.6R129
1.2kR128
39R130
120R131
100/10C119
330/10N
C120
RH1S-T3D106
10/160C117
CE41492-001ZK105
CE41492-001ZK104 3902WA OMR
R132
150p5%500V
QCS32HJ-151Z
C121
100/6.3C118
10/160C113
39R124
5.6R125
1.2kR123
RH1S-T3D105
56kR126
680R143
Y
XR109
560QRZ9021-561
! R122
XR199
0R336
2SC5083/L-P/-TQ301
0R337
0R338
XD313
CE42670-001
!SK001
∗1Q151
∗2Q152
47kR151
68kR152
68kR153
47kR154
0.1NCB21EK-104X
C1510.1
NCB21EK-104X
C1521k
R117
CN0SC
CN0E4
XD312
XD314
1kR352
1kR351
1kR353
560R354
∗2Q351
∗3D351
56kR355
330/16C351
0R108
XR041
XR040
XY003
XY
001
BW
Y00
2
XR118
120R119
QJB003-074426
CN004
12V
VM DRIVE
HV
NC
CRT SOCKET PWB ASS'Y
B
G
R
HEATER
GND
G1
G2
G3
SPOT
VM STOPVM DRIVE
KILLA
VM AMP
VM COIL
HEATER
NC
(TO CRT NECK)
VM OUT
VM OUT
11.4V
NC
MAIN PWB
CRT
CRTEARTH
1W_FR
SAC-3513A-M2
MAIN PWB
R DRIVEG DRIVE
FOCUS
CRT SOCKET
FBT
MAIN PWB
HB
SCREEN
Y_VM
Ys
G
12V
R
GND
B
B DRIVE
V
2SC5147/CDE/F43
B1(135V)
GND
HB
159V
2SC5147/CDE/F43
2SC5147
SCREEN
/CDE/F43
A90AJZ90X02
500V
1.8V
2.4V
12V
6.5V
11.3V
2.7V
0V
3.3V
0V
1.8V
6.5V
1.1V
6.5V
6.5V
5.8V
5.8V
12V112V
58V
3V
58V
11.9V
160V
1.6V
160V
160V
V201
161V
11.9V
2.2V
1.7V
11.4V
166V
167V
201
166
V
V
166V
1.3V11.9
V
2.4V
1.9V
11.4V
158V
1.6V
158V
158
201V
V
2-22No.51907B 2-21
DAF PWB CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
AV-36F702AV-36F802
AV-36F702AV-36F802
No.51907B
180k1/2WR765
180k1/2WR764
180k1/2WR763
180k1/2WR762
180k1/2WR761
ES1F-LFG2D761
ES1F-LFG2D762
QFZ0122-682C761
QFZ0122-103C753
4.7kR757
12kR756
10kR754
1.2kR753
10kQRZ0056-103Z
R70312k1/2W
R702
22QRG01GJ-220
R701
47kR751
8.2kR752 56k
R755
XY701
∗1Q751
NZZ000000000427CN00Q
∗1Q752
NZZ000000000428CN00K
2SC4632Q753
0.033MY,5%
C751
QQLZ028-272L701
.1/50QFV71HJ-104Z
C701
47/25C752
QQR1153-001T701
120kR758
22k
3WOMRQRL039J-223
R771
MTZJ33A-T2D771
10/50C771
NZZ000000000429CN0CP
CE41507-001P
CNDAF
B1
B1NC
GND
V_Amp
H_Pulse
GND
DAF_Out
C_Pluse
NC
NC
AMP
DAF TRANSF.
BUFFERAMP
MAINPWB
MAINPWB
DAF PWB ASS'YSAC-2605A-M2
: 2SC3311A/QR/-T: NON MOUNT (OPEN)
∗1X
: BUS WIRE (0Ω)BW
NOTE
AV-36F702AV-36F802
AV-36F702AV-36F802
2-23No.51907B
LF PWB CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
2-24 No.51907B
LF PWB ASS'YSAC-9506A-M2
MAIN PWB
CN00P
!
CN0E3
OPTY901
OPTC905
AC125VQCZ9052-102
! C904
2.7MR1/2
QRZ9041-275
! R998
0.047AC275V
QFZ9040-473
MF
QFZ9067-473
! C902
0.1AC275V
QFZ9040-104
MFQFZ9067-104
! C903
0.1AC275V
MF
QFZ9067-104
! C901
QQR0527-004!
LINE FILTER
LF901
ERZV10V621CS! VA901
5.6 1/2WQRE121J-5R6Y
R997
PW
CN0PW
120 R1/2R999
5A
QMF0007-5R0J1
!
FUSEF901
QQR1159-001
!
LINE FILTER
LF902
XCN0E1
AC120V 60HzPOWER CORD
GMP14CO-200J3
or
or
2-26No.51907B 2-25
AV-36F702 AV-36F702
No.51907B
PATTERN DIAGRAMSMAIN PWB PATTERN DIAGRAM [AV-36F702]
A
A
B
B
C
C
D
D
E
E
F
F
G
G
H
H
I
I
JKLM
0
11
22
33
44
55
66
77
88
99 1
0
4
B
ISOLATED
TUNER
COMPONENT
60
/DEF
35
MJ
K
L
3 12 2 4
1
5
6
3
2
5
6
3
1
125V
5A
H.OUT
3 1
1
4
6
7
8
3DY/C
16 5
IN
OUT
C
E56
45
32
4 1
29
28
35 40
20
4
B
16
5
7
MICOM
1
30
25
20
15
10
5
1
GNDHB
HEATER
GND
E+14
E-14
HPB1 COL
ABL
23
4
5
7
8
9
10
6
BT
NC
IF
5V
NC
SDA
SCL
ADRS
AGC
TU
LIVE
81
38
1
IF/VIDEO/CHROMA
17 5
15
E
3
11
5 1
1
916
10 5
PIP
33
40 64
1520
30
50
35
DETOUTVOL
FBT OUT
LOCK
B
E
POWER
1
57
B
C
E
1
DAF
15
GND
5
6
9
5
1
5
10
13
2
34
1
V.OUT
17
8
14
RED
15
1
4
5
1
WHT
1
MARK
BRN
15
1
50
14
58
NOZAKI01.02.23
123
4 5
Group No.
CKF1457-
-1
OUT
C
IN
3 2
C002
C003
C004
C012
C013
C015
C021
C023
C025C026
C028
C029C030
C032
W102
C035
C036
C038
C042C043
C116
C132C134
C135
C150
W103
W477
W478
C284
W14
C034
L101
C354
C391
C404C410
C411
C517
C521
C525
C528
C542
C543
C601C602
C603
C604
C608
W108
W109
C664
C701
C703
C707
C711
C712C713C714 C715
C802
C84
C805
C813
C851
C853
C854
C857
C907
C913
C918
C727
C922
C931
C932
C933
W510
C939
C940
C941
C942
W511
R858
W480
R857
W481
W574
C973
C999
CF001
CF021
CF041
S
W112
CN006
CN007
CP934
D11
W482C048
W113
W114
W564
W116
W117
D352
D401
W483
D415
D431
D432
D507
D521
D525
D526D529
D531
D532D810
D542
D543
D601
D602
W515
W516
C951
W565
D700
D705
D706
D707
D708
D709D710
D711
D712
D714
D800
D811
M
W578
D910
D911
D912
D913D917
D918
W566
D930
D933
D935
HS007
D937
R939
D941
W584
W517
DAF
D952
D953
D9 54
D955
D956
D957
D958
D972
D973
F905
FR521
FR525
FR526
IC101
IC151
IC401
IC601
IC651
IC701
IC702
IC851
IC853
W520
K401
K914K916
K917
W488
K931
K932
K933
K935
L012
L013
L022
L024
W120
L026
L041
L512
L513
L521
L810
L933
L934
W585
IC501
PC921
Q001
Q002
Q011
Q022
Q131
Q132
A
Q233
W125
W129
W130
Q551
Q352
Q353
Q431
Q700
Q701Q702
Q703Q704
R588
MPX
R581 R582
Q941
R587
R589
Q951
Q971
R590
R001
R004
R005
R008
R011
R012R013
R014
R015
R016
R017
R021
R024
R025 26
R0 R027
R028
R029
R030
R031
R032
R03335R0R038
R043
R045
R101
R12
R111
R131R134
R135 R137
R138
R139
W132
R156
W135
Q711
R201
R231
A
R612 11R6
R237
R238
R610
RY941
C724
R243
R285
W137
W138
W139
W140
W141
W142
C725
C432
W150
W151
R592
R354R355
R358
R359
R401
R403
R404
R405
R411R412
R417
R432
R433
R503
R511
R513
R522
R526
R527
R528
R531
37R5
R538
R543
R544
R546
R548
R552
R553
R571
R572
R601
R602R603R65
R66
R608 W556
R594
R407
R653
W155
R700
R707
R708
R709
R710
R711
R712
R714
R728
R730
R753
R755
R756
R799
R769R770
R773
W157
W158
R777
R778
R780
R787
R793R794R795
R796
R797
R801R802R803R804
R812
R813
R815
C552
C553
R911
R915
R916
W557
W586
M
W587W590
W591
R935C723
R940
R944
W592
W593
W594W595
R953
W596
W612
R807
R972
R973
R978
SF011
T501
TH901
X201
X700
W541
Y150
Y151
R817
Y651
Y701
Y703
D723
Y800
Y902
N
Y905
HV
SS
S1
C816 IC703
Q511
W161
RY951
C
CP
CN005
HS003
MD1
W162
W163
T502
W164
W165
W167
W168
W169
W170
W171
W172
W522
W176
W523
W554
W191
W192
D724
K941
W200
W201
R293
W205
W210
W211
W213
W215
J601
W218
W220
W221
W222
J602
W229
W230
W497
W233
W234
Q707
G
W238
D855
CN
4
W240
W241
W243
W244
W245
W247
W249
W251
W253
W254
W255
W256
W259
W261
W263
W264
W265
W268
W270
W272
N
W277
W278
W280
C663
W282
W283
W284
W286
R779
W291
W457
J810
W295
W296
W543
W298
W299
W507
W301W302
W303
W305
W306
W307
W524
W309
W312
W314
L
UL MARK
Q
K
CN009
HS002
HS005
C728
W324
W327
W330
W331
W3 32
W335
W570
W337
W339
L
W346
W500
W352
C522 W353
W354
W356
W360
W361
D721
W368
W544
W525
W376
W385
H
W392
W393
W394
W501
W545
W398
W399
W404
W408
W409
W413
W414
W417
W418
W421
W422
W423
W424
C399
W526
C136
W430
W433
R291
R292
HS004
W435
W441
W442W443
W447
Q
W454W455
Q706
Q
Y712
Y654
Y714
E1
Y154Y155
W471
W472
W547
W476
R776
H
B
W504
D722
B
R823
R930
W536
G
W549
R047
C005
C006
L001
W550
W551
C612
L1
Y914
Y910
Y912
W553
C403
R409
W558
R440
R441
C925
C949
Y713
W559
D716
C396
C397C398
C
R
R
K939
W599
W600
W601
R613
R614
R615
R141
R040
K940
W609W611
Y916
Y917
S
35
30
25
20
20
2530
35
15
10
5
1510
5
2
1
2
125
AV
SW
20
15
10
512
RE
GU
LATOR
INO
UT
C
EB
SID
EP
IN
BC
E
13
12
C
BE
12
48
91011
1213
1416 3
57
1518
17
5
4
3
2
1
E
B
6
12
3
12
32
1
BR
NR
ED
WH
T
C001
C011
C014
C016
C022
C024C
027
C031
C0
33
C037
C041
C044
C045
C046
C111
C112
C113
C114
C115
C131
C133
C201
C202
C2
3
C233
C234
W537
C237
C281
C282
C283
C285
C286
C2
87
C288
W106
C352
C353
C392
C393
C394
C395
C41
C405
C407
C415
C421
C431
C501
C502
C503
C505
C507
R860
C515
C516
C523
C524
C526
C527
C531
C533
C605
C606
C607
C609
C610
C611
R318
W110
W1
11
C667
C700
C7
2
C704
C705C
706
C7
8C7
9C7
10
C800
C801
C803
C806
C807
C810
C811
C812
C814
C815
C852
W572
C856
C904
C905
C908
C948
C912
C914
Q531
C916
C917
C919
C934
C935
C937
C938
C943
R856
Y156
C955
W575
C971
C972
CN
001C
N002
CN
003
DE
G
CP
932
D812
D001
D102 D
305
6 D3
D307
W539
W576
D523
D524
D527
D534
D535
R009
D603
D604
D605
D606
W512
W577
W514
D701
D702
D7 3
D704
D713
D801
W579
W580
D901
D914
D915
D920
W581 D
38 9 D
3
D310
D931
D945
W485
W486
W487
D715
Y909
IC911
W519
CL004
D402
K912
K937
K938
L011
L021
L023
L027
L042
C047
L232
L511
L700
L931
L937
LC601
LC602
LC603
LC604
LC605
LC606
Q0
21
Q023
Q024
Q041
Q133
W122
W123
Q153
Q154
Q232
W124
W489
W127
W128
Q501
Q532
Q541
Q542
Q543
Q651
Q705 Q
810
Q552
R583
R584
R585
R586
R002
R0
3
R006
R007
R020
R022
R023
R034
R036
R0
37
R041
R042
R0
44
R132
R133
R136
W131
W133
W134
R155
W4
90
W491
R241
R2
81
R282
R283
R284
R286
R287
R2
88
R289
R301
R302
R303
R304
R3
5
R306
W459
R909
W145
W146
W540
R591
R593
R356
R357
60R
3
W492
R414
W493
R431
R434
R435
R501
R502
R507
R512
W153
R523
R529
R532
R533
R5
34
R535
R536
R545
R547
R549
R550
R551
R570
R573
R604
R607
R69
R595
C7
22
R651
R6
52
R654
W154
R701
R702
R703
R704
R705
R706
R713
R715
R716
R717
R718
R719
R7
20
R721
R722
R723
R724
R7
25R
726R
727
R729
R731
R732
R733
R734
R735
R736
R737
R738
R739
R740
R741
R742
R743
R744
R745
R746
R747
R748
R749
R750
R751
R752
R754 R
757R
758
R824
W527
R762
R763
R764
R765
R766R
767R
768
W156
R772
R7
74
W159
R781
R782
R783
R784
R785
R786
R788
R789
R790
R791
R792
R800
R810
R811
R814
R816
C551
SN
R912
R913
R914
R917
R918
R919
W160
R924
Y904
W528
R943
D537
R046
R951
R952
R290
W494
R975
R977
R110
W495
TU
001
Y152
Y153
Y401
Y6
52
Y653
Y700
Y702
Y74Y705
Y903
A
IC852
T951
IC921
R901
T921
W173
W175
W177
W180
W182
W183
W184
W185
W187
W188
W496
W193
W194
W195
W197
R798
W202
W567
W206
W207
W208
W209
W212
W214
W223
W224
W225
W568
W569
W231
W242
W246
W542
W250
W252
W258
W260
W498
W267
W2
69
W271
W273
W274
C152
R827
Q025
W292
W304
W310
W449
W3
11
W313
W318
CP
933
W320
C151
W325
R408
Y157
W456
W334
W340
W341
W342
W345
W349
W350
W351
W355
W358
W359
HS
006
W365
W366
W534
W371
W375
W377
W450
W381
CL002
W391
W474
W451
R039
W403
W407
W415
W416
W419
R140
W428
W429
W434
R319
W436
W437
W438
W440
W448
W460
W462
W464
C302
W467
W473
W475
W546
CN
008
75R
7
D353
W5
3
C726
W508
R018
R019
R821
R822
C721
R826
R825
R859
W535
48 W5
R0
48
CP
936
Y911
Y913
Q440
L940
R806
1 LC
Y002
Y003
W561
W562
W563
W604
R818
C4
2
W610
P
D010
C
E
C
B
C504
C510
C513
C51
4
C906
D501
D502
FR523
FR524
K920
R504R505
R525
C998
R941
CL003
FRONT
( ) TP-E1
( )
TP-91B (B1) CAUTION: FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST FIRE HAZARD,REPLACE ONLY WITH SAME TYPE AND RATED FUSE (S) ANDROHM'S MFR'S TYPE CP(S).
F
AV-36F802 AV-36F802
2-27No.51907B
MAIN PWB PATTERN DIAGRAM [AV-36F802]
2-28 No.51907B
A
A
B
B
C
C
D
D
E
E
F
F
G
G
H
H
I
I
JKLM
0
11
22
33
44
55
66
77
88
99 1
0
4
B
ISOLATED
TUNER
COMPONENT
60
/DEF
35
MJ
K
L
3 12 2 4
1
5
6
3
2
5
6
3
1
125V
5A
H.OUT
3 1
1
4
6
7
8
3DY/C
16 5
IN
OUT
C
E56
45
32
4 1
29
28
35 40
20
4
B
16
5
7
MICOM
1
30
25
20
15
10
5
1
GNDHB
HEATER
GND
E+14
E-14
HPB1 COL
ABL
23
4
5
7
8
9
10
6
BT
NC
IF
5V
NC
SDA
SCL
ADRS
AGC
TU
LIVE
81
38
1
IF/VIDEO/CHROMA
17 5
15
E
3
11
5 1
1
916
10 5
PIP
33
40 64
1520
30
50
35
DETOUTVOL
FBT OUT
LOCK
B
E
POWER
1
57
B
C
E
1
DAF
15
GND
5
6
9
5
1
5
10
13
2
34
1
V.OUT
17
8
14
RED
15
1
4
5
1
WHT
1
MARK
BRN
15
1
50
14
58
123
4 5
OUT
C
IN
3 2
CKF1457-CU2-1
01.07.04WATO
14
C002
C003
C004
C012
C013
C015
C021
C023
C025C026
C028
C029C030
C032
W102
C035
C036
C038
C042C043
C116
C132C134
C135
C150
W103
W477
W478
C284
W14
C034
L101
C354
C391
C404C410
C411
C517
C521
C525
C528
C542
C543
C601C602
C603
C604
C608
W108
W109
C664
C701
C703
C707
C711
C712C713C714 C715
C802
C84
C805
C813
C851
C853
C854
C857
C907
C913
C918
C727
C922
C931
C932
C933
W510
C939
C940
C941
C942
W511
R858
W480
R857
W481
W574
C973
C999
CF001
CF021
CF041
S
W112
CN006
CN007
CP934
D11
W482C048
W113
W114
W564
W116
W117
D352
D401
W483
D415
D431
D432
D507
D521
D525
D526D529
D531
D532D810
D542
D543
D601
D602
W515
W516
C951
W565
D700
D705
D706
D707
D708
D709D710
D711
D712
D714
D800
D811
M
W578
D910
D911
D912
D913D917
D918
W566
D930
D933
D935
HS007
D937
R939
D941
W584
W517
DAF
D952
D953
D9 54
D955
D956
D957
D958
D972
D973
F905
FR521
FR525
FR526
IC101
IC151
IC401
IC601
IC651
IC701
IC702
IC851
IC853
W520
K401
K914K916
K917
W488
K931
K932
K933
K935
L012
L013
L022
L024
W120
L026
L041
L512
L513
L521
L810
L933
L934
W585
IC501
PC921
Q001
Q002
Q011
Q022
Q131
Q132
A
Q233
W125
W129
W130
Q551
Q352
Q353
Q431
Q700
Q701Q702
Q703Q704
R588
MPX
R581 R582
Q941
R587
R589
Q951
Q971
R590
R001
R004
R005
R008
R011
R012R013
R014
R015
R016
R017
R021
R024
R025 26
R0 R027
R028
R029
R030
R031
R032
R03335R0R038
R043
R045
R101
R12
R111
R131R134
R135 R137
R138
R139
W132
R156
W135
Q711
R201
R231
A
R612 11R6
R237
R238
R610
RY941
C724
R243
R285
W137
W138
W139
W140
W141
W142
C725
C432
W150
W151
R592
R354R355
R358
R359
R401
R403
R404
R405
R411R412
R417
R432
R433
R503
R511
R513
R522
R526
R527
R528
R531
37R5
R538
R543
R544
R546
R548
R552
R553
R571
R572
R601
R602R603R65
R66
R608 W556
R594
R407
R653
W155
R700
R707
R708
R709
R710
R711
R712
R714
R728
R730
R753
R755
R756
R799
R769R770
R773
W157
W158
R777
R778
R780
R787
R793R794R795
R796
R797
R801R802R803R804
R812
R813
R815
C552
C553
R911
R915
R916
W557
W586
M
W587W590
W591
R935C723
R940
R944
W592
W593
W594W595
R953
W596
W612
R807
R972
R973
R978
SF011
T501
TH901
X201
X700
W541
Y150
Y151
R817
Y651
Y701
Y703
D723
Y800
Y902
N
Y905
HV
SS
S1
C816 IC703
Q511
W161
RY951
C
CP
CN005
HS003
MD1
W162
W163
T502
W164
W165
W167
W168
W169
W170
W171
W172
W522
W176
W523
W554
W191
W192
D724
K941
W200
W201
R293
W205
W210
W211
W213
W215
J601
W218
W220
W221
W222
J602
W229
W230
W497
W233
W234
Q707
G
W238
D855
CN
4
W240
W241
W243
W244
W245
W247
W249
W251
W253
W254
W255
W256
W259
W261
W263
W264
W265
W268
W270
W272
N
W277
W278
W280
C663
W282
W283
W284
W286
R779
W291
W457
J810
W295
W296
W543
W298
W299
W507
W301W302
W303
W305
W306
W307
W524
W309
W312
W314
L
UL MARKQ
K
CN009
HS002
HS005
C728
W324
W327
W330
W331
W3 32
W335
W570
W337
W339
L
W346
W500
W352
C522 W353
W354
W356
W360
W361
D721
W368
W544
W525
W376
W385
H
W392
W393
W394
W501
W545
W398
W399
W404
W408
W409
W413
W414
W417
W418
W421
W422
W423
W424
C399
W526
C136
W430
W433
R291
R292
HS004
W435
W441
W442W443
W447
Q
W454W455
Q706
Q
Y712
Y654
Y714
E1
Y154Y155
W471
W472
W547
W476
R776
H
B
W504
D722
B
R823
R930
W536
G
W549
R047
C005
C006
L001
W550
W551
C612
L1
Y914
Y910
Y912
W553
C403
R409
W558
R440
R441
C925
C949
Y713
W559
D716
C396
C397C398
C
R
R
K939
W599
W600
W601
R613
R614
R615
R141
R040
K940
W609W611
Y916
Y917
S
35
30
25
20
20
2530
35
15
10
5
1510
5
2
1
2
125
AV
SW
20
15
10
512
RE
GU
LATOR
INO
UT
C
EB
SID
EP
IN
BC
E
13
12
C
BE
12
48
91011
1213
1416 3
57
1518
17
5
4
3
2
1
E
B
6
3
12
32
1
BR
NR
ED
WH
T
2
1
C001
C011
C014
C016
C022
C024C
027
C031
C0
33
C037
C041
C044
C045
C046
C111
C112
C113
C114
C115
C131
C133
C201
C202
C2
3
C233
C234
W537
C237
C281
C282
C283
C285
C286
C2
87
C288
W106
C352
C353
C392
C393
C394
C395
C41
C405
C407
C415
C421
C431
C501
C502
C503
C505
C507
R860
C515
C516
C523
C524
C526
C527
C531
C533
C605
C606
C607
C609
C610
C611
R318
W110
W1
11
C667
C700
C7
2
C704
C705C
706
C7
8C7
9C7
10
C800
C801
C803
C806
C807
C810
C811
C812
C814
C815
C852
W572
C856
C904
C905
C908
C948
C912
C914
Q531
C916
C917
C919
C934
C935
C937
C938
C943
R856
Y156
C955
W575
C971
C972
CN
001C
N002
CN
003
DE
G
CP
932
D812
D001
D102 D
305
6 D3
D307
W539
W576
D523
D524
D527
D534
D535
R009
D603
D604
D605
D606
W512
W577
W514
D701
D702
D7 3
D704
D713
D801
W579
W580
D901
D914
D915
D920
W581 D
38 9 D
3
D310
D931
D945
W485
W486
W487
D715
Y909
IC911
W519
CL004
D402
K912
K937
K938
L011
L021
L023
L027
L042
C047
L232
L511
L700
L931
L937
LC601
LC602
LC603
LC604
LC605
LC606
Q0
21
Q023
Q024
Q041
Q133
W122
W123
Q153
Q154
Q232
W124
W489
W127
W128
Q501
Q532
Q541
Q542
Q543
Q651
Q705 Q
810
Q552
R583
R584
R585
R586
R002
R0
3
R006
R007
R020
R022
R023
R034
R036
R0
37
R041
R042
R0
44
R132
R133
R136
W131
W133
W134
R155
W4
90
W491
R241
R2
81
R282
R283
R284
R286
R287
R2
88
R289
R301
R302R
303
R304
R3
5
R306
W459
R909
W145
W146
W540
R591
R593
R356
R357
60R
3
W492
R414
W493
R431
R434
R435
R501
R502
R507
R512
W153
R523
R529
R532
R533
R5
34
R535
R536
R545
R547
R549
R550
R551
R570
R573
R604
R607
R69
R595
C7
22
R651
R6
52
R654
W154
R701
R702
R703
R704
R705
R706
R713
R715
R716
R717
R718
R719
R7
20
R721
R722
R723
R724
R7
25R
726R
727
R729
R731
R732
R733
R734
R735
R736
R737
R738
R739
R740
R741
R742
R743
R744
R745
R746
R747
R748
R749
R750
R751
R752
R754 R
757R
758
R824
W527
R762
R763
R764
R765
R766R
767R
768
W156
R772
R7
74
W159
R781
R782
R783
R784
R785
R786
R788
R789
R790
R791
R792
R800
R810
R811
R814
R816
C551
SN
R912
R913
R914
R917
R918
R919
W160
R924
Y904
W528
R943
D537
R046
R951
R952
R290
W494
R975
R977
R110
W495
TU
001
Y152
Y153
Y401
Y6
52
Y653
Y700
Y702
Y74Y705
Y903
A
IC852
T951
IC921
R901
T921
W173
W175
W177
W180
W182
W183
W184
W185
W187
W188
W496
W193
W194
W195
W197
R798
W202
W567
W206
W207
W208
W209
W212
W214
W223
W224
W225
W568
W569
W231
W242
W246
W542
W250
W252
W258
W260
W498
W267
W2
69
W271
W273
W274
C152
R827
Q025
W292
W304
W310
W449
W3
11
W313
W318
CP
933
W320
C151
W325
R408
Y157
W456
W334
W340
W341
W342
W345
W349
W350
W351
W355
W358
W359
HS
006
W365
W366
W534
W371
W375
W377
W450
W381
CL002
W391
W474
W451
R039
W403
W407
W415
W416
W419
R140
W428
W429
W434
R319
W436
W437
W438
W440
W448
W460
W462
W464
C302
W467
W473
W475
W546
CN
008
75R
7
D353
W5
3
C726
W508
R018
R019
R821
R822
C721
R826
R825
R859
W535
48 W5
R0
48
CP
936
Y911
Y913
Q440
L940
R806
1 LC
Y002
Y003
W561
W562
W563
W604
R818
C4
2
W610
P
D010
C
E
C
B
C504
C510
C513
C51
4
C906
D501
D50
2
FR523
FR524
K920
R504R505
R525
C998
R941
CL003
FRONT
( ) TP-E1
( )
TP-91B (B1) CAUTION: FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST FIRE HAZARD,REPLACE ONLY WITH SAME TYPE AND RATED FUSE (S) ANDROHM'S MFR'S TYPE CP(S).
F
2-30No.51907B 2-29
CRT SOCKET PWB PATTERN DIAGRAM PIP PWB PATTERN DIAGRAM [AV-36F802]
AV-36F702AV-36F802 AV-36F802
No.51907B
IC
H
R
SC
G
IC
BCD
11
22
3
4
C
A
0
CL002
B
G1
E
D CB
A
E
E B
C
1
0
B
GND
1 3
V
B
H
1 6
B1
H
MARKCRT EARTH
VM
CRT
B
FOCUS ADJ.
B
G G
B
E
C
EB
C
B
E
BE
3
4
RG12VB
MARK
E
TAKADA01.02.23
Y
C113
W001
R123
R125C111
C118
R142
R136R139
R199
R122
C127C121
C114
Q107L304
L301
R310
R313
R145
C117
TP-E1
10C1
R3 7
W022
C115
D301
R331
R301
R363
R364
W003
W004
C321
R305R308
R303
R306
D33
C332
R332
CN004
W009
W010W012
Q308
L302
L305
R311
R314
R315
R312
R108
R324
R323
R362
Y001
C322
W015
W016
W018R137
R109
R113
16R1
R128
E4
R130
R321
Q305
C361
W019
SCREEN
Q301
C331
C33
SK001
Q33
L306
Q108
R111
CN005
R334
R335
W028
R151
R152
R153
R154
C151
C152
E2
TP-G
W038
R351
D314
D313
C351
R355
D351
R040
HS011
HS013
HS014
TP-B
W039
C
INO
UT
VID
EO
RF
-AG
C
AF
T
GN
D
9V NC IF NC
30V
LOC
K
5V
9V
SD
A
SC
L
BT
AG
C
NC
NC
GN
D
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
1
10111215202527
5P
IP C
ON
TR
OLE
R
Y35
9
D30
1
IC35
1
W06
7
R35
1
Y35
8
W04
7
W06
8
W07
4
W05
0
R30
8W05
1
W05
2
C00
8
W05
5
W07
0
Y36
0
C31
9
C32
1
C32
3
C32
9
Q30
3
W05
8
R30
9W07
2
W06
1
L001
W06
2
R00
7
CF
001
Y91
5
W06
4
X30
1
Q10
2
Q30
1
2Q3
R00
1
R00
2
R00
3
R00
4
W06
6
W07
3
W07
6Y
302
C30
4
C30
5
R12
4
R30
4
R31
3
C01
1
C31
5
C31
6C
317
C31
8
C32
0C
322
C33
0C33
1
C12
1
R00
5
R01
1
C01
0
R12
3
Y35
1
IC30
1
R12
7
Y90
6
W03
7
W02
8
Y90
4
Y90
3
Y00
2
R31
7C
332
D30
2 C33
6
R34
0R
338
R34
1 337
R
Q33
4
Q33
3
C33
8 R34
3Q
335
R34
4R
346
Q33
6
R34
8 R34
7
R33
3
C33
4
R33
1Q
331
R33
2R
334
R34
5
Q33
2R
336
R33
5
W04
4
C
EB
B
BE
EE
E
EB
C
E
BE C
B
E
B
C
B
C
BB
E
E
B
C
BE
C
CE
B
E BE
E
BE
B
B
CK
F15
00-A
01-1
R12
4
C10
1
C10
8
D10
2
R14
3
R11
0
L106
C12
0R13
1
38R1
Q10
9
Q11
0
Q10
3
C12
5
Q10
4Q
106
R12
9
R32
5
R12
6
R30
4
C12
2
W02
5
D10
7
W02
3
W02
4
C30
1R
361
Y00
2
D30
4
D30
5W
006 C
109
R30
2
D10
5
D10
6
R13
2
C10
7
R30 9
R33
3
R14
6
D30
6
C33
3
W00
8
W01
1
Q31
1W
034
D33
1
HS
010
Q31
2
Q30
9
R32
6
W01
3
R11
7
R32
7
C32
3
R13
4
R1
44
L303
C36
2
R11
2
R11
5
D36
1
W0
26
R12
7
Q15
1
R31
8
R31
7R32
0
Q30
7
R14
1
Q30
4Q
306
Q31
0
R11
4
R31
6
R31
9
C11
9
D30
2
Q3
2
K10
2
K10
3
K10
4
K10
5
R33
7
Q10
5
R33
6
C36
3
R32
2
C30
2
R33
8
R11
8
R11
9
UL
MA
RK
D10
1
Q15
2
W03
0
R35
2
R35
3W
031
W03
2D31
2 D31
1
R35
4
Q35
1
W03
3
R04
1
W03
5
HS
012
Y00
3
IN
OUT
1 5
10
15
20 30
3525
1
15
20
25
NC ADRS
C
5
4
3
1
0
BCDE
0
1
2
3
4
5
E D C B A
2
14
PIP TUNER/IF
28
5
10
WATO
CKF1378-CU1
A
'01.01.25
Y357
IC001CL001
CN003
C001
C004
C006
W053
W054
C314
C327
C351
C352
W075
Y911
L302
L303
L304
R307
W065
W077
Q304R310
UL MARK
L305
R121
R125
R126
R301
R302R303
R305
R306
R311
R314R315
R316
L121 C003
C301
C302
C312
C313
C324
C325
C326
C328
C353
C012
R006
R012
Y912
C303
Y352
TU001
W006
Y353
Y354
W022
Y907
Y909
Y908
C333
Y901
Y902
Y910
Y301
Y913
R339
42R3
C337
C339 Y332
Y333
Y331
C335
W042
Y356
Y355
TOPTOP
FRONT( )
( )
AV-36F702AV-36F802
AV-36F702AV-36F802
2-31No.51907B
AV SELECTOR PWB PATTERN DIAGRAM FRONT CONTROL PWB PATTERN DIAGRAM
2-32 No.51907B
A
BC
C
D
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 77
GD
B
E
1 2 3 4
5
EF
G
F
0
6
A
1
2
4
3
C446
D406
R925
R405
R406
R702
R703 R705
R926
LC401
W005
CL001
Y401
15
1013
15
36
45
48
1
25
20
13
5
1
42
3
1
4
3
26
56
2
45
18
119
3712
1010
811
9
127
30
40
MT
S/T
ON
E/V
OL
BB
E/A
MP
AU
DIO
SW
SE
P
Y/C
AU
DIO
OU
T
1510
2021
3540
42
20
101
1115
5
30
37
10
24
1410
75
1
15
12
AV
SW
1410
5
2825
20
2225
18
NO
ZA
KI
CK
F14
53-C
01-1
31
24
00.1
2.22
C15
3
C25
3
C30
7
C30
8
IC40
1
D52
2
LC50
1
LC50
2
LC50
3
R26
4
C15
4
Y15
2
W20
1
W00
4
W00
5
W00
6
W00
7
J501
EF
201
EF
202
J503
D52
8
IC00
1 Q90
1
R08
4R
088
R15
1R
152
R15
3
C34
4
R15
4
R15
9
R33
1R
332
R37
1
C20
1
C20
3
C20
9
C21
1
C21
3
W00
8
W19
8
C22
6
C23
1
C24
5C
246
C24
7
C24
8C
249
C25
2
C25
5
R37
2
W00
9
W01
0
R40
1
C41
0
R40
2
C50
1
C50
3C
504
Y15
1
R37
8
C50
8
R38
2
R38
4
R39
2
R90
2
D40
2
D45
1
D45
2
D50
1
D50
2
D50
4
D50
8D
509
D51
5D
516
D51
7
D51
8
W01
1
W20
2 IC20
1
C45
4
IC50
1
L242
W01
4
J504
C20
6
Y38
1
L211
L241
L261
W01
6
W01
7
W01
8
W01
9
Q21
2
Q25
2
61Q2
Q45
2Q
455
W02
1
W02
2
W02
7
W02
9
W03
0
W03
4W
036
W03
7
W03
8
Y38
2
W04
2
W04
3
W04
4
W04
5
W04
6
W05
0
R21
1
R21
3R
214
R21
5
R21
7R
218
R23
2
R23
3
R23
4R
235
R24
1
R25
5R
258
R25
9R
263
R30
1
R30
2
R45
2R
453
R45
4
R45
5
W05
3
R50
1
R50
2
R50
6
R50
7
R50
8
R51
0
R51
3
R51
8
R51
9
R52
0
R52
2
R52
3
R52
4
R52
5
R52
6R
527
R52
8
W05
4
W05
5
R53
2
R53
3
W05
6
W05
7
W06
2
W06
3
W06
8
W07
4
R57
1
W08
0
W08
1
R90
6
C23
3
W08
6
W08
7
W09
2
W09
3
W09
4
W09
8 W09
9
W10
0
W10
1
W10
2
W10
3
W10
4
W10
6
W10
7
W10
8
W10
9
W11
5
W11
7
W11
8
W11
9
W12
1
W12
2
W12
3
W12
4
W12
5
W18
3
W12
8U
L M
AR
K
W13
0
W13
4
W13
9
W14
1
W14
2
W14
4
W14
5
W14
6
W14
7
W14
9
W15
5W
156
W15
8
W15
9
W16
2
W16
3
W16
4
W16
6
D45
3
W20
0
W16
9
W17
0
W17
1
W17
2
W17
3
W17
4
W17
6W
180
R58
0
C26
7
Q26
3
IC38
1
IC15
1
C08
4
C08
6
C09
0
C09
1
C09
3
C09
4
C09
5
C15
7
C15
8
C33
1
C33
5C
338
C37
3
C39
1
C08
2
C08
3
C15
1
C37
1
C37
2
Q38
4Q
385
D39
1
C08
1
C08
7
C15
5C
156
W18
4
Y40
1
W18
5 C23
5
C23
8
C23
9
L243
L244
R23
8
R23
9
R24
3
R24
4
W19
0
W19
1
W19
2W19
5
W19
6
C41
2
C41
3
J502
Y20
1
Y20
2
UP
PE
RR
IGH
TD
OW
NLE
FT
31
2 1
RL
V
VO
L+V
OL-
CH
+C
H-
ME
NU
610 5
1
12
34
56
78
1011
129
1314
15
3 4
56
15
71
59
MA
RK
MA
RK
MA
RK
S
MA
RK 1
3
1
MA
RK
CK
F1456-A
01-1
TAK
AD
A01.02.23
UL M
AR
K
J401
S901
VA
901C
442
C443
C444
C445
BL1
CN
006
CN
007
D401
D402
D403
D404
D405
R401
R402
R403
R404
R701
R704
R706
S702
S703
S704
S705
S706
W006
W007
L
R927
W003
Y402
LC402
Y904
Y905
Y906
Y907
3430
3525
20
15
10
5
2
1
24
25
20
158
1 5
2 10
15
C223
C254
C261
C262
W001
C451
D523
LC504
W188
Q251
W003
C345
W189
R252
R253R254
C264
C332
C336
R568
R572R574
R901
C339
C205
C341C342
C265
D527
CN001
CN002
C374
C531
C532
C533
C534
R081
R082R083
R085R086
R089
R155R156R157
R158
C536
R333R334
C204
C208
C212
C214
C215
R090
W199
C232C241
C242
C243C244
C251
C263
R373R374
R375R376
R377
C309
C310
C311
C312
C402
C403 C401
C407
C408
C409
C411
C452
C453
C502
C509
R381
C511
C512
C513
C514
C515
C517
R385
C520
C521
C522C523
R386
R387
R391
R393R394
R395
R396
C404
D403
D503D505
D506
D507
D510
D511
D512D513
D514
D519
D520D521
R903
R904
W203
K201
L201
L202
L251
W015
Q211
Q218
Q219
Q253
Q262
Q301
Q302
Q451
W020
W023
W024
W025
W026
Q509
W028
W031
W032
W033W035
W040
W041
W047
W048
W049
R202
C537
R210
R212
R216
R223
R229
R230R231
R236
R251
W051
W052
R261
R262
R265
R303
R304
R305
R306
R461
R460
R403
R404
R405
R406R451
R456
53Q4
Q454
R457
R503
R504
R505
R509
R511
R512
R521
R529
R534R535
W058
W059
W060
W061
W064
W066
W067
W069
W070
W073
W075
W076
W077
R558
R559 R560
R561
R562
R563
R564
R565
R566R567
R573
W078
W079
W082
W083
W085
HS401
W088
W089W090
W095
W096
W097
W105
W110
W111
W112
W113
W114
W116
W120
W126
W131
W133
W137
W138
W140
C234
W148
W150
W151W154
W157
W165
W177
W178
W179
C455
C266
R269
70R2
R458R459
IC371
C089
C092
C159
C333
C343
C392
C152
C505
Q381
Q382
Q386
Q387
D392
R087
C085
C088
C160
C334
C337
C340
W186
W187
C236
C237R242
R245R246R247R248
R249
W193
W194
W197
C538
Y203
C539
FRONT
TOP
FRONT
( )
( )
2-34No.51907B 2-33
LF, DAF AND POWER SW PWB PATTERN DIAGRAMS
AV-36F702AV-36F802
AV-36F702AV-36F802
No.51907B
- LF -
- DAF -
- POWER SW -
125V 5A
LIVE
ISOLATED
E1
E3
CKF1493-B01-1ISOLATED00.12.20 NOZAKI
F901
R998
UL MARK
Y902
Y903
Y904
Y905
3
WH
T
21
1
WH
TR
ED
BR
N
C901
C902
C903
C904
C905
PW
P
LF901
LF902
R999
VA
901
Y901
R997
3
Q
1
MARK
MARK K
541 6
CP
RED
DAF
11
8
ORANGE
CKF1455-A01-1
01.02.23 TAKADA
51
D771
R762
R763
R764
C701
L701
Q751
Q752
R755
CL002
C761
R701
R771
T701
D762 D761
CL001
POWER
POWER LED
6 1
31
CKF1375-B01-1
D101
S701
IC101
C102
R101
B UL MARK
C
BE
Q753
R757
R702
R761
R765
R703
C751C
752
C771
C753
UL M
AR
K
R758
R751
R752
R753
R754
R756
W003
W004
Y701
W001
W002
R107
R108
Q101
Q102
FRONT
FRONT
FRONT
( )
( )
( )
AV-36F702AV-36F802
No. 51907B 2-35
MODE
CHANNEL CHART (US
TV REAL DISP.020304050607080910111213
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVW
W+1W+2W+3W+4W+5W+6W+7W+8W+9W+10W+11W+12W+13W+14W+15W+16W+17W+18W+19W+20W+21W+22W+23W+24W+25W+26W+27W+28W+29W+30W+31W+32W+33W+34
141516171819202122232425262728293031323334353637383940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364656667686970
CATVBAND
CHANNEL TUNERBAND
IV
IV
II
II
I
I
I
VH
MID
SUPER
HYPER
ULTRA
VL
MODETV REAL DISP.
W+35W+36W+37W+38W+39W+40W+41W+42W+43W+44W+45W+46W+47W+48W+49W+50W+51W+52W+53W+54W+55W+56W+57W+58W+59W+60W+61W+62W+63W+64W+65W+66W+67W+68W+69W+70W+71W+72W+73W+74W+75W+76W+77W+78W+79W+80W+81W+82W+83W+84A-8A-4A-3A-2A-1
717273747576777879808182838485868788899091929394
1001011021031041051061071081091101111121131141151161171181191201211221231241250196979899
CATVBAND
CHANNEL TUNERBAND
IV
ULTRA
UHF
SUBMID
TOTAL 180CHVHF 124CH
UHF 56CH
14
69
NOTE:TO RECEIVE THE SUBSCRIPTION OR PREMIUM PROGRAMMING FROM CERTAINCABLE COMPANIES. SPECIAL ADAPTERS MAY BE REQUIRED.
AV-36F702AV-36F802
2-36 No.51907B
MODE
CHANNEL CHART (CA)
TV REAL DISP.020304050607080910111213
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVW
W+1W+2W+3W+4W+5W+6W+7W+8W+9W+10W+11W+12W+13W+14W+15W+16W+17W+18W+19W+20W+21W+22W+23W+24W+25W+26W+27W+28W+29W+30W+31W+32W+33W+34
141516171819202122232425262728293031323334353637383940414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364656667686970
CATVBAND
CHANNEL TUNERBAND
IV
IV
III
II
I
II
I
VH
MID
SUPER
HYPER
ULTRA
VL
MODETV REAL DISP.
W+35W+36W+37W+38W+39W+40W+41W+42W+43W+44W+45W+46W+47W+48W+49W+50W+51W+52W+53W+54W+55W+56W+57W+58W+59W+60W+61W+62W+63W+64W+65W+66W+67W+68W+69W+70W+71W+72W+73W+74W+75W+76W+77W+78W+79W+80W+81W+82W+83W+84A-8A-4A-3A-2A-1
7172737475767778798081828384858687888990919293941001011021031041051061071081091101111121131141151161171181191201211221231241250196979899
CATVBAND
CHANNEL TUNERBAND
IV
ULTRA
SUBMID
UHF
TOTAL 180CHVHF 124CH
UHF 56CH
14
69
NOTE:TO RECEIVE THE SUBSCRIPTION OR PREMIUM PROGRAMMING FROM CERTAINCABLE COMPANIES. SPECIAL ADAPTERS MAY BE REQUIRED.
Printed in JapanVP0112SW
36F702Y-UCM #436F802Y-UCM #4
JVC SERVICE & ENGINEERING COMPANY OF AMERICA
Head office : 1700 Valley Road, Wayne, New Jersey 07470 (973)317-5000East Coast : 10 New Maple Avenue, Pine Brook, New Jersey 07058 (973)396-1000Midwest : 705 Enterprise St. Aurora, Illinois 60504 (630)851-7855West Coast : 5665 Corporate Avenue, Cypress, California 90630 (714)229-8011Southwest : 10700 Hammerly, Suite 105, Houston, Texas 77043 (713)935-9331Hawaii : 2969 Mapunapuna Place, Honolulu, Hawaii 96819 (808)833-5828Southeast : 1500 Lakes Parkway, Lawrenceville, Georgia 30243 (770)339-2582
JVC CANADA INC.Head office : 21 Finchdene Square Scarborough, Ontario M1X 1A7 (416)293-1311Vancouver : 13040 Worster Court Richmond B.C. V6V 2B3 (604)270-1311
DIVISION OF JVC AMERICAS CORP.
®
AV-36F702AV-36F802
No. 51907B 37
PARTS LIST
CAUTIONq The parts identified by the symbol are important for the safety . Whenever replacing these parts, be sure to use specified ones to secure the
safety .
q The parts not indicated in this Parts List and those which are filled with lines --- in the Parts No. columns will not be supplied .
q P. W. Board Ass'y will not be supplied, but those which are filled with the Parts No. in the Parts No. columns will be supplied .
ABBREVIATIONS OF RESISTORS, CAPACITORS AND TOLERANCES
RESISTORS CAPACITORS
C R Carbon Resistor
F R Fusible Resistor
P R Plate Resistor
V R Variable Resistor
HV R High Voltage Resistor
MF R Metal Film Resistor
MG R Metal Glazed Resistor
MP R Metal Plate Resistor
OM R Metal Oxide Film Resistor
CMF R Coating Metal Film Resistor
UNF R Non-Flammable Resistor
CH V R Chip Variable Resistor
CH MG R Chip Metal Glazed Resistor
COMP. R Composition Resistor
LPTC R Linear Positive Temperature Coefficient Resistor
C CAP. Ceramic Capacitor
E CAP. Electrolytic Capacitor
M CAP. Mylar Capacitor
HV CAP. High Voltage Capacitor
MF CAP. Metalized Film Capacitor
MM CAP. Metalized Mylar Capacitor
MP CAP. Metalized Polystyrol Capacitor
PP CAP. Polypropylene Capacitor
PS CAP. Polystyrol Capacitor
TF CAP. Thin Film Capacitor
MPP CAP. Metalized Polypropylene Capacitor
TAN. CAP. Tantalum Capacitor
CH C CAP. Chip Ceramic Capacitor
BP E CAP. Bi-Polar Electrolytic Capacitor
CH AL E CAP. Chip Aluminum Electrolytic Capacitor
CH AL BP CAP. Chip Aluminum Bi-Polar Capacitor
CH TAN. E CAP. Chip Tantalum Electrolytic Capacitor
CH AL BP E CAP. Chip Tantalum Bi-Polar Electrolytic Capacitor
RESISTORS
F G J K M N R H Z P
±1% ±2% ±5% ±10% ±20% ±30%+30% +50% +80% +100%-10% -10% -20% 0%
AV-36F702AV-36F802
38 No. 51907B
CONTENTSUSING P.W. BOARD & REMOTE CONTROL UNIT ................................................................................. 39EXPLODED VIEW PARTS LIST ............................................................................................................... 40EXPLODED VIEW .................................................................................................................................... 41
[AV-36F702]PRINTED WIRING BOARD PARTS LIST
MAIN PW BOARD ASS'Y .....................................................................................................................................42DAF PW BOARD ASS’Y .......................................................................................................................................46CRT SOCKET PW BOARD ASS’Y .......................................................................................................................46FRONT CONTROL PW BOARD ASS’Y ...............................................................................................................47POWER SW PW BOARD ASS’Y ..........................................................................................................................47LF PW BOARD ASS’Y ..........................................................................................................................................47AV SELECTOR PW BOARD.................................................................................................................................48
REMOTE CONTROL UNIT PARTS LIST (RM-C303G-1A) ..............................................................................49
[AV-36F802]PRINTED WIRING BOARD PARTS LIST
MAIN PW BOARD ASS'Y .....................................................................................................................................50DAF PW BOARD ASS’Y .......................................................................................................................................54CRT SOCKET PW BOARD ASS’Y .......................................................................................................................54FRONT CONTROL PW BOARD ASS’Y ...............................................................................................................54POWER SW PW BOARD ASS’Y ..........................................................................................................................54LF PW BOARD ASS’Y ..........................................................................................................................................54PIP PW BOARD ASS’Y.........................................................................................................................................54AV SELECTOR PW BOARD ASS’Y .....................................................................................................................553D Y/C MODULE PW BOARD ASS’Y ..................................................................................................................56
REMOTE CONTROL UNIT PARTS LIST (RM-C301G-2A) ..............................................................................56
PACKING / PACKING PARTS LIST ......................................................................................................... 57
AV-36F702AV-36F802
No. 51907B 39
MAIN PW BOARD SAC-1542A-M2 SAC-1547A-M2DAF PW BOARD SAC-2605A-M2CRT SOCKET PW BOARD SAC-3513A-M2FRONT CONTROL PW BOARD SAC-8507A-M2POWER SW PW BOARD SAC-8601A-M2LF PW BOARD SAC-9506A-M2PIP PW BOARD — SAC0P501A-M2AV SELECTOR PW BOARD SAC0S511A-M2 SAC0S505A-M23D Y/C MODULE PW BOARD — SAC-0Y501AREMOTE CONTROL UNIT RM-C303G-1A RM-C301G-2A
USING P.W. BOARD & REMOTE CONTROL UNITAV-36F702 AV-36F802P.W.B ASS’Y
Model
AV-36F702AV-36F802
40 No. 51907B
EXPLODED VIEW PARTS LIST! Ref.No. Part No. Part Name Description Local
! L01 QQW0122-001 DEG COIL! T1502 QQH0110-001 FBT Within MAIN PWB! V01 A90AJZ90X02 CRT Inc. DY! 1 QMPD200-200-JC POWER CORD CN90PW Within LF PWB
2 LC30191-003A-A REMOCON WINDOW3 LC41193-001A-C JVC MARK4 LC20217-004B-A CONTROL KNOB5 A48457-4-S SPRING
6 WJY0016-003A BRAIDED WIRE7 WJY0013-002A BRAIDED WIRE(SUB) (x2)8 LC20629-001B-A S.P HOLDER (x2)9 LC41029-001A-A TAPPING SCREW (x4)10 LC40226-002A-A SPACER (x4)
! 11 CEBSS12D-04KJ2 SPEAKER (x2) SP01, SP0212 QYSBSB4012Z TAPPING SCREW (x4)
! 13 LC10883-001C-A CHASSIS BASE
! 14 LC20626-002C-A TERMINAL BOARD (AV-36F702)! 14 LC20626-001D-A TERMINAL BOARD (AV-36F802)
15 QYSBSB3010Z TAPPING SCREW (x4) [AV-36F702], (x6) [AV-36F802]16 CHGY0031-0C ANT CABLE ASSY (Only for AV-36F802)
! 17 LC11155-001C-A REAR COVER18 QYSBSFG4016Z TAPPING SCREW (x12)
! 19 GQ30032-001A-A RATING LABEL
! 20 LC20106-001D-A CORD CLAMP! 100 LC11153-001C-A FRONT CABI ASSY Inc. No. 101-104
101 LC20628-001B-A DOOR102 CM48229-00A-C DOOR LATCH103 LC31237-001A-A POWER KNOB104 CM36481-002A-A SPRING
AV-36F702AV-36F802
No. 51907B 41
EXPLODED VIEW
13
16
15
20
1
14
17
10
12
5
2
6
7
7
4
11
8
10
9
19
18
18
3
DAF PWB
MAIN PWB
LF PWB
AV SELECTORPWB
PIP PWB (Only forAV-36F802)
POWER SW PWB
FRONT CONTROL PWB
CRT SOCKET PWB
3D Y/C MODULE(Only for AV-36F802)
T1502
V01
L01
100
104
103
101102
! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local ! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local
AV-36F702
42 No. 51907B
PRINTED WIRING BOARD PARTS LIST(AV-36F702)MAIN PW BOARD ASS’Y(SAC-1542A-M2)
RESISTORR1001 NRSA63J-473X MG R 47kØ 1/16W JR1002-04 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR1011 NRSA63J-820X MG R 82Ø 1/16W JR1012 NRSA63J-182X MG R 1.8kØ 1/16W JR1013 NRSA63J-562X MG R 5.6kØ 1/16W JR1014 QRE121J-101Y C R 100Ø 1/2W JR1015 NRSA63J-180X MG R 18Ø 1/16W JR1016 NRSA63J-270X MG R 27Ø 1/16W J
R1018 NRSA63J-104X MG R 100kØ 1/16W JR1020 NRSA63J-332X MG R 3.3kØ 1/16W JR1021 NRSA63J-123X MG R 12kØ 1/16W JR1022 NRSA63J-151X MG R 150Ø 1/16W JR1023 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR1024 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR1025 NRSA63J-561X MG R 560Ø 1/16W JR1026 NRSA63J-331X MG R 330Ø 1/16W J
R1028 NRSA63J-821X MG R 820Ø 1/16W JR1029 NRSA63J-333X MG R 33kØ 1/16W JR1030 NRSA63J-683X MG R 68kØ 1/16W JR1038 NRSA63J-272X MG R 2.7kØ 1/16W JR1039 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR1041 NRSA63J-272X MG R 2.7kØ 1/16W JR1042-43 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR1044-46 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J
R1047 NRSA63J-153X MG R 15kØ 1/16W JR1048 NRSA63J-154X MG R 150kØ 1/16W JR1101-02 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR1111 NRSA63J-105X MG R 1MØ 1/16W JR1131 NRSA63J-272X MG R 2.7kØ 1/16W JR1132 NRSA63J-153X MG R 15kØ 1/16W JR1133 NRSA63J-683X MG R 68kØ 1/16W JR1134 NRSA63J-562X MG R 5.6kØ 1/16W J
R1135-39 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR1140 NRSA63J-562X MG R 5.6kØ 1/16W JR1201 NRSA63J-333X MG R 33kØ 1/16W JR1231 NRSA63J-182X MG R 1.8kØ 1/16W JR1237 NRSA63J-392X MG R 3.9kØ 1/16W JR1238 NRSA63J-473X MG R 47kØ 1/16W JR1241 NRSA63J-332X MG R 3.3kØ 1/16W JR1243 NRSA63J-152X MG R 1.5kØ 1/16W J
R1281 NRSA63J-182X MG R 1.8kØ 1/16W JR1282 NRSA63J-392X MG R 3.9kØ 1/16W JR1283 NRSA63J-681X MG R 680Ø 1/16W JR1286 NRSA63J-472X MG R 4.7kØ 1/16W JR1287 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR1288 NRSA02J-471X MG R 470Ø 1/10W JR1289 NRSA63J-154X MG R 150kØ 1/16W JR1290 NRSA02J-561X MG R 560Ø 1/10W J
R1292 NRSA63J-124X MG R 120kØ 1/16W JR1293 NRSA63J-224X MG R 220kØ 1/16W JR1301-03 NRSA63J-222X MG R 2.2kØ 1/16W JR1304-06 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR1318 NRSA63J-472X MG R 4.7kØ 1/16W JR1319 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR1354-55 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR1356 NRSA63J-123X MG R 12kØ 1/16W J
R1359 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1360 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR1401 NRSA63J-822X MG R 8.2kØ 1/16W JR1403 QRX01GJ-1R0 MF R 1.0Ø 1W JR1404 QRE121J-100Y MF R 10Ø 1/2W JR1405 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1407 NRSA02J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/10W JR1411-12 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W J
R1414 QRL029J-151 OM R 150Ø 2W JR1417 QRE121J-180Y C R 18Ø 1/2W JR1431 QRE121J-272Y C R 2.7kØ 1/2W JR1432 NRSA63J-104X MG R 100kØ 1/16W JR1433 NRSA63J-473X MG R 47kØ 1/16W JR1434 NRSA63J-822X MG R 8.2kØ 1/16W JR1435 NRSA63J-682X MG R 6.8kØ 1/16W JR1440 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W J
RESISTOR
R1441 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1501 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR1502 NRSA63J-271X MG R 270Ø 1/16W JR1503 QRE121J-103Y C R 10kØ 1/2W JR1504 QRL039J-122 OM R 1.2kØ 3W JR1505 QRL039J-152 OM R 1.5kØ 3W JR1507 QRF074J-2R0 UNF R 2.0Ø 7W JR1511 QRE121J-220Y C R 22Ø 1/2W J
R1512 QRE121J-681Y C R 680Ø 1/2W JR1513 QRL039J-273 OM R 27kØ 3W JR1515 QRE141J-0R0Y C R 0.0Ø 1/4W J
! R1523 QRJ146J-333X C R 33kØ 1/4W J! R1525 QRZ9011-470 F R 47Ø 1/2W J
R1526 QRE121J-272Y C R 2.7kØ 1/2W JR1527 QRE121J-154Y C R 150kØ 1/2W JR1528 QRE121J-124Y C R 120kØ 1/2W J
R1529 NRSA63J-331X MG R 330Ø 1/16W J! R1531 QRJ146J-391X C R 390Ø 1/4W J
R1532 NRSA63J-273X MG R 27kØ 1/16W JR1533-34 NRSA63J-123X MG R 12kØ 1/16W J
! R1535 NRSA02D-242X MG R 2.4kØ 1/10W! R1537 NRVA02D-752X MF R 7.5kØ 1/10W
R1538 NRSA63J-333X MG R 33kØ 1/16W JR1543 QRE121J-122Y C R 1.2kØ 1/2W J
R1544 QRE121J-222Y C R 2.2kØ 1/2W JR1545 QRE121J-822Y C R 8.2kØ 1/2W JR1546 NRSA63J-331X MG R 330Ø 1/16W JR1547 NRSA63J-104X MG R 100kØ 1/16W JR1548 QRE121J-821Y C R 820Ø 1/2W JR1553 QRL039J-390 OM R 39Ø 3W JR1581 QRE121J-100Y MF R 10Ø 1/2W JR1582 NRSA63J-124X MG R 120kØ 1/16W J
R1583 NRSA63J-683X MG R 68kØ 1/16W JR1584 NRSA63J-563X MG R 56kØ 1/16W JR1585 NRSA63J-472X MG R 4.7kØ 1/16W JR1586 NRSA63J-154X MG R 150kØ 1/16W JR1587 NRSA63J-104X MG R 100kØ 1/16W JR1588 QRE121J-100Y MF R 10Ø 1/2W JR1589 NRSA63J-562X MG R 5.6kØ 1/16W JR1590 NRSA63J-682X MG R 6.8kØ 1/16W J
R1591 QRJ149J-220 C R 22Ø 1/4W JR1592 NRSA63J-183X MG R 18kØ 1/16W JR1593 NRSA63J-104X MG R 100kØ 1/16W JR1594 NRSA63J-272X MG R 2.7kØ 1/16W JR1595 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1601-03 NRSA63J-750X MG R 75Ø 1/16W JR1610-12 NRSA63J-221X MG R 220Ø 1/16W JR1700-02 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W J
R1704-05 NRSA63J-472X MG R 4.7kØ 1/16W JR1706-07 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1708-09 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR1715 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1718 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR1721-24 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR1726-28 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR1729 NRSA63J-223X MG R 22kØ 1/16W J
R1731-32 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR1733-34 NRSA63J-272X MG R 2.7kØ 1/16W JR1737 NRSA63J-222X MG R 2.2kØ 1/16W JR1738 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR1739 NRSA63J-272X MG R 2.7kØ 1/16W JR1740 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1741 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR1742-43 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W J
R1745 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR1748 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1749-51 NRSA63J-222X MG R 2.2kØ 1/16W JR1752 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR1753 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR1754 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR1755 NRSA63J-153X MG R 15kØ 1/16W JR1756 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W J
AV-36F702
No. 51907B 43
! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local ! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local
AV-
36F
702
RESISTOR
R1763 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1764-68 NRSA63J-221X MG R 220Ø 1/16W JR1769-70 NRSA63J-682X MG R 6.8kØ 1/16W JR1772 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1774 NRSA63J-682X MG R 6.8kØ 1/16W JR1775 NRSA63J-473X MG R 47kØ 1/16W JR1776 NRSA63J-123X MG R 12kØ 1/16W JR1777 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W J
R1778 NRSA63J-682X MG R 6.8kØ 1/16W JR1784 NRSA63J-472X MG R 4.7kØ 1/16W JR1786 NRSA63J-393X MG R 39kØ 1/16W JR1788 NRSA63J-124X MG R 120kØ 1/16W JR1790 NRSA63J-273X MG R 27kØ 1/16W JR1791 NRSA63J-683X MG R 68kØ 1/16W JR1792 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1793-95 NRSA63J-331X MG R 330Ø 1/16W J
R1798-99 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1800 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1801-04 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR1806 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR1807 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR1810 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR1811 NRSA63J-473X MG R 47kØ 1/16W JR1812 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W J
R1814 NRSA63J-104X MG R 100kØ 1/16W JR1815 NRSA63J-154X MG R 150kØ 1/16W JR1816 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR1817 NRSA63J-104X MG R 100kØ 1/16W JR1818 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR1821 NRSA63J-104X MG R 100kØ 1/16W JR1824 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1827 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W J
R1857 QRG029J-470 OM R 47Ø 2W JR1858 QRG029J-270 OM R 27Ø 2W JR1860 NRSA63J-562X MG R 5.6kØ 1/16W JR1901 QRF074K-R47 UNF R 0.47Ø 7W KR1909 QRG01GJ-470 OM R 47Ø 1W JR1911 QRE121J-223Y C R 22kØ 1/2W JR1912 QRT029J-R18 MF R 0.18Ø 2W JR1913 QRT029J-R15 MF R 0.15Ø 2W J
! R1914 QRK126J-681X C R 680Ø 1/2W JR1915 QRE121J-270Y C R 27Ø 1/2W J
! R1917 QRK126J-332X C R 3.3kØ 1/2W JR1918 QRE121J-222Y C R 2.2kØ 1/2W JR1919 QRE121J-684Y C R 680kØ 1/2W JR1924 QRE121J-222Y C R 2.2kØ 1/2W JR1930 QRE121J-223Y C R 22kØ 1/2W JR1939 QRT039J-2R2 MF R 2.2Ø 3W J
R1940 QRE121J-181Y C R 180Ø 1/2W JR1941 QRL029J-183 OM R 18kØ 2W JR1943 NRSA63J-104X MG R 100kØ 1/16W JR1944 NRSA63J-122X MG R 1.2kØ 1/16W JR1951 NRSA63J-473X MG R 47kØ 1/16W JR1952 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR1953 QRE121J-151Y C R 150Ø 1/2W JR1972 NRVA02D-102X MF R 1kØ 1/10W±0.5%
R1973 QRE121J-272Y C R 2.7kØ 1/2W JR1975 QRE121J-223Y C R 22kØ 1/2W JR1977 QRE121J-473Y C R 47kØ 1/2W JR1978 NRSA63J-333X MG R 33kØ 1/16W J
CAPACITORC1001 QETN1HM-475Z E CAP. 4.7µF 50V MC1002 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC1003 QETN1CM-108Z E CAP. 1000µF 16V MC1011-12 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1014 QETN1CM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 16V MC1015-16 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1021 QFV71HJ-824Z MF CAP. 0.82µF 50V JC1023 QETN1CM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 16V M
CAPACITORC1024 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1025 NCB31HK-102X C CAP. 1000pF 50V KC1026 QETN1HM-474Z E CAP. 0.47µF 50V MC1027 NCB21HK-104X C CAP. 0.1µF 50V KC1028 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC1029 QETN1CM-336Z E CAP. 33µF 16V MC1030 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1034 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V K
C1036 QETN1AM-477Z E CAP. 470µF 10V MC1037 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1038 QETN1CM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 16V MC1041-42 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC1043-44 NDC31HJ-470X C CAP. 47pF 50V JC1045 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC1046 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1047 NDC21HJ-330X C CAP. 33pF 50V J
C1048 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1111 QETN0JM-228Z E CAP. 2200µF 6.3V MC1112 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1113 QETN1HM-474Z E CAP. 0.47µF 50V MC1114 QETN1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V MC1115 QFV71HJ-104Z MF CAP. 0.1µF 50V JC1116 NCB21HK-104X C CAP. 0.1µF 50V KC1131-32 NDC31HJ-100X C CAP. 10pF 50V J
C1133 NDC31HJ-220X C CAP. 22pF 50V JC1134 NDC31HJ-100X C CAP. 10pF 50V JC1135 NDC31HJ-330X C CAP. 33pF 50V JC1136 QENC1CM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 16V MC1151 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1152 QENC1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V MC1201 NDC31HJ-100X C CAP. 10pF 50V JC1202 QETN1HM-224Z E CAP. 0.22µF 50V M
C1203 NCB31HK-222X C CAP. 2200pF 50V KC1233 NDC31HJ-560X C CAP. 56pF 50V JC1237 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1281 QFV71HJ-474Z MF CAP. 0.47µF 50V JC1282 QETN1CM-227Z E CAP. 220µF 16V MC1283 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1284 QETN1HM-225Z E CAP. 2.2µF 50V MC1285 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V K
C1286 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC1287 QETN1CM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 16V MC1288 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1302 NCB21HK-104X C CAP. 0.1µF 50V KC1352 QETN1CM-336Z E CAP. 33µF 16V MC1354 QFV71HJ-154Z MF CAP. 0.15µF 50V JC1391 QETN1CM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 16V MC1392 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V K
C1393-95 NCB21HK-104X C CAP. 0.1µF 50V KC1401 NDC21HJ-152X C CAP. 1500pF 50V JC1403 NCB21HK-153X C CAP. 0.015µF 50V KC1404 QEHR1VM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 35V MC1405 QCS32HJ-100Z CH C CAP. 10µF 500V JC1407 QFLC2AJ-104Z M CAP. 0.1µF 100V JC1410 QFLC2AJ-104Z M CAP. 0.1µF 100V JC1411 QETN1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V M
C1415 NCB21HK-104X C CAP. 0.1µF 50V KC1421 QEHQ1VM-108 E CAP. 1000µF 35V MC1431 QETN1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V MC1432 QETN1EM-476Z E CAP. 47µF 25V MC1501 QCB32HK-151Z C CAP. 150pF 500V KC1502 QCB32HK-331Z C CAP. 330pF 500V KC1503 QETN2CM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 160V MC1504 QEZ0203-107 E CAP. 100µF 160V M
C1505 QENC2AM-225Z E CAP. 2.2µF 100V MC1507 QEZ0195-475Z E CAP. 4.7µF 50V MC1510 QFZ0196-272 MPP CAP. 2700pF 1.5kVH ±3%C1513 QFZ0198-153 MPP CAP. 0.015µF 1.5kVH ±3%C1514 QFP32JJ-223 PP CAP. 0.022µF 630V JC1515 QFZ0197-474 MPP CAP. 0.47µF 250V ZC1516 QCB32HK-561Z C CAP. 560pF 500V KC1521 QETN2EM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 250V M
! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local ! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local
AV-36F702
44 No. 51907B
CAPACITORC1523 QEHR1EM-108Z E CAP. 1000µF 25V MC1524 QETN1EM-108Z E CAP. 1000µF 25V MC1525 QETN1VM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 35V MC1526 QFV21HJ-824Z MF CAP. 0.82µF 50V JC1527 QFLC2AJ-103Z M CAP. 0.01µF 100V J
! C1531 QCB32HK-102Z C CAP. 1000pF 500V K! C1533 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V M
C1551-52 QFV71HJ-474Z MF CAP. 0.47µF 50V J
C1553 QETN1EM-476Z E CAP. 47µF 25V MC1601-03 QETN1EM-476Z E CAP. 47µF 25V MC1609-11 QFV71HJ-104Z MF CAP. 0.1µF 50V JC1612 QETN1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V MC1700 NCB31HK-102X C CAP. 1000pF 50V KC1703 NDC31HJ-181X C CAP. 180pF 50V JC1706 QETN1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V MC1707 QETN1CM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 16V M
C1710 NCB21EK-683X C CAP. 0.068µF 25V KC1712 QETN1HM-475Z E CAP. 4.7µF 50V MC1714 QETN1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V MC1721 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1722-23 NDC31HJ-390X C CAP. 39pF 50V JC1724 NDC31HJ-471X C CAP. 470pF 50V JC1726 NDC21HJ-561X C CAP. 560pF 50V JC1800 QETN1CM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 16V M
C1801 NCB21HK-104X C CAP. 0.1µF 50V KC1802 QETN1CM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 16V MC1803 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC1804 NDC31HJ-102X C CAP. 1000pF 50V JC1805 NCB31HK-153X C CAP. 0.015µF 50V KC1806-07 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC1810 QETN1HM-474Z E CAP. 0.47µF 50V MC1811 QETN1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V M
C1813 NCB31HK-102X C CAP. 1000pF 50V KC1816 NCB31HK-153X C CAP. 0.015µF 50V KC1851 QETN1EM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 25V MC1852 QETN1CM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 16V MC1853-54 QETN1CM-227Z E CAP. 220µF 16V MC1856 QETN1CM-227Z E CAP. 220µF 16V MC1857 QETN1CM-477Z E CAP. 470µF 16V M
! C1904-06 QCZ9054-102 C CAP. 1000pF 250V Z
! C1907 QEZ0169-477 E CAP. 470µF 200V M! C1908 QCZ9054-102 C CAP. 1000pF 250V Z
C1912 QCZ0340-332 C CAP. 3300pFC1913 QFLC1HJ-471Z M CAP. 470pF 50V JC1914 QETN1HM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 50V MC1916 NDC31HJ-331X C CAP. 330pF 50V JC1917 NCB31HK-222X C CAP. 2200pF 50V KC1918 NCB21HK-104X C CAP. 0.1µF 50V K
C1919 QFP32GJ-103 PP CAP. 0.01µF 400V JC1925 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JC1931 QEZ0203-227 E CAP. 220µF 160V MC1932 QETN1CM-108Z E CAP. 1000µF 16V MC1933 QETM1EM-228 E CAP. 2200µF 25V MC1934-35 QETN1EM-108Z E CAP. 1000µF 25V MC1937 QCZ0340-102 C CAP. 1000pFC1938 QETM1EM-228 E CAP. 2200µF 25V M
C1939-40 QCB32HK-152Z C CAP. 1500pF 500V KC1942 QETN1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V MC1943 QETN1CM-108Z E CAP. 1000µF 16V MC1948 QETN1EM-476Z E CAP. 47µF 25V MC1951 QETN1EM-108Z E CAP. 1000µF 25V MC1971 QETN1CM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 16V MC1972 QETN1EM-476Z E CAP. 47µF 25V MC1973 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V M
! C1998-99 QCZ9074-103 C CAP. 0.01µF 125V M
TRANSFORMERT1501 CE42034-002 H.DRIVE TRANSF.
! T1502 QQH0110-001 FBT! T1921 QQS0090-001 SWITCH.TRANSF.! T1951 QQT0315-001 POWER TRANSF.
COILL1001 QQL244K-560Z COIL 56µH KL1012 QQLZ014-R39 PEAKING COILL1021 QRN143J-0R0X C R 0.0Ø 1/4W JL1022 QQL244K-220Z COIL 22µH KL1027 QRN143J-0R0X C R 0.0Ø 1/4W JL1041 QRN143J-0R0X C R 0.0Ø 1/4W JL1042 QQL244K-220Z COIL 22µH KL1101 QQL244K-470Z COIL 47µH K
L1232 QQL244K-560Z COIL 56µH KL1511 CE41029-00A LINEARITY COILL1512 QQLZ027-821 CHOKE COIL 820µHL1521 QQLZ018-760 HEATER CHOKE 76µHL1700 QQL244K-4R7Z COIL 4.7µH KL1810 QQL244J-100Z COIL 10µH JL1931 QQL26AK-470Z COIL 47µH KL1933-34 QQL26AK-470Z COIL 47µH K
L1937 QQL26AK-470Z COIL 47µH K
DIODED1010 MTZJ9.1C-T2 ZENER DIODED1101-02 MTZJ8.2C-T2 ZENER DIODED1305-10 1SS133-T2 SI.DIODED1352 MTZJ9.1C-T2 ZENER DIODED1353 1SS133-T2 SI.DIODED1401 1SR35-400A-T2 SI.DIODED1431 1SR35-400A-T2 SI.DIODED1432 1SS133-T2 SI.DIODE
! D1501 RH3G-F1 SI.DIODE! D1502 RU3AM-LFC4 SI.DIODE
D1507 RGP10J-5025-T3 SI.DIODED1521 RH1S-T3 SI.DIODED1523-24 EL1Z-T3 SI.DIODED1525-26 1SS81-T5 SI.DIODED1527 1SR124-400A-T2 SI.DIODED1529 MTZJ5.1C-T2 ZENER DIODE
! D1531 MA4068N/Z1/-T2 ZENER DIODED1535 1SS133-T2 SI.DIODED1537 1SR35-400A-T2 SI.DIODED1601 MTZJ9.1C-T2 ZENER DIODED1603 MTZJ9.1C-T2 ZENER DIODED1606 MTZJ9.1C-T2 ZENER DIODED1700 MTZJ5.6B-T2 ZENER DIODED1701-02 1SS133-T2 SI.DIODE
D1706-10 MTZJ8.2C-T2 ZENER DIODED1711 1SS81-T2 SI.DIODED1712-15 1SS133-T2 SI.DIODED1721-22 1SS133-T2 SI.DIODED1723-24 MTZJ5.6B-T2 ZENER DIODED1800 1SS81-T2 SI.DIODED1801 1SS133-T2 SI.DIODED1810 MTZJ8.2C-T2 ZENER DIODE
D1811 1SS133-T2 SI.DIODE! D1901 RBV-406M BRIDGE DIODE
D1910 MA700A-T2 SI.DIODE! D1911-13 RGP10J-5025-T3 SI.DIODE
D1914 1SS133-T2 SI.DIODED1915 SARS01-T2 SI.DIODED1917 MTZJ30A-T2 ZENER DIODED1918 MTZJ5.1C-T2 ZENER DIODE
D1920 1SS133-T2 SI.DIODE! D1930 RGP10J-5025-T3 SI.DIODE
D1931 RU30A-F1 SI.DIODED1933 RU3YX-LFC4 SI.DIODED1935 RU3YX-LFC4 SI.DIODED1937 RU3YX-LFC4 SI.DIODED1941 MTZJ33A-T2 ZENER DIODED1945 1SS133-T2 SI.DIODE
AV-36F702
No. 51907B 45
! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local ! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local
AV-
36F
702
DIODED1952-53 1SS133-T2 SI.DIODED1954-57 1SR35-400A-T2 SI.DIODED1972 MTZJ15C-T2 ZENER DIODED1973 1SS133-T2 SI.DIODE
TRANSISTORQ1011 2SC5083/L-P/-T SI.TRANSISTORQ1021 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1024 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1025 2SA1037AK/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1041 2SA1037AK/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1131-33 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1232-33 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1352 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTOR
Q1431 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1440 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1501 2SC4212/Z1/ SI.TRANSISTOR
! Q1511 2SD2645-YD TRANSISTOR! Q1531 2SC2785/JH/-T SI.TRANSISTOR
Q1532 2SA1037AK/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1541-42 2SA1037AK/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTOR
! Q1543 2SD1408/OY/-LB SI.TRANSISTOR
Q1551 2SC1740S/QR/-T SI.TRANSISTORQ1552 2SA966/OY/-T SI.TRANSISTORQ1700 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1701 2SA1037AK/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1703 2SA1037AK/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1705 2SA1037AK/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1706 DTC363TK-X DIGI.TRANSISTORQ1711 DTC124EKA-X DIGI.TRANSISTOR
Q1810 DTC144EKA-X DIGI.TRANSISTORQ1941 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1951 2SD1383K/AB/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1971 2SA1123/R/Z1-T SI.TRANSISTOR
ICIC1101 TB1253AN I.C(M)IC1401 LA7841 I.C(MONO-ANA)IC1501 LA6515 I.C(MONO-ANA)IC1701 MN1876478JL1 I.C(MICRO-COMP)IC1702 AT24C04-F802Y I.C(MEMORY-OTH) (SERVICE)IC1703 MM1437AF-X I.C(MONO-ANA)IC1851 AN7812F I.C(MONO-ANA)IC1852 AN7809F I.C(MONO-ANA)
IC1853 AN7805F I.C(MONO-ANA)! IC1911 STR-F6626/F3 I.C(HYBRID)! IC1921 SE135N I.C(HYBRID)
OTHERSCF1001 QAX0349-001 CERAMIC FILTERCF1021 QAX0639-001Z CERAMIC FILTERCF1041 QAX0642-001Z CERAMIC FILTER
! CP1932 ICP-N75-Y I.C.PROTECT! CP1933 ICP-N75-Y I.C.PROTECT! CP1934 ICP-N75-Y I.C.PROTECT! CP1936 ICP-N75-Y I.C.PROTECT! F1905 QMFZ034-5R0Z-J1 FUSE
! FR1521 QRK126J-150X C R 15Ø 1/2W J! FR1523-24 QRX029J-3R3 MF R 3.3Ø 2W J! FR1525 QRZ9017-4R7 F R 4.7 Ø1/4W
J1601 QNN0349-002 PIN JACKJ1810 QNS0001-001 JACKK1401 QQR0621-002Z BEADS COREK1912 QQR0582-001Z BEADS COREK1916-17 QQR0582-001Z BEADS CORE
OTHERSK1920 QQR0872-002 FERRITE BEADSK1931-33 QQR0582-001Z BEADS COREK1935 QQR0582-001Z BEADS COREK1937 QQR0582-001Z BEADS COREK1939 QQR0621-002Z BEADS CORELC1601-03 NQR0169-001X EMI FILTER
! PC1921 TLP621(B) I.C(PH.COUPLER)! RY1941 QSK0120-001 RELAY
! RY1951 QSK0113-001 RELAYSF1011 QAX0324-002 SAW FILTER
! TH1901 CEKP007-002 P.THERMISTOR! TU1001 QAU0176-001 TUNER
W1106 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1111 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1113 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1140 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J
W1154 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1162 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1195 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1202 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1206 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1212-14 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1250 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1254-55 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J
W1265 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1267 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1269 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1274 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1291 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1298 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1310-11 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1313 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J
W1330-31 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1381 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1385 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1404 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1408 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1413 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1434-35 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1437-38 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J
W1440 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1442-43 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1447-48 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1454-55 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1464 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1478 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1487-89 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1492-96 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J
W1498 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1501 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1508 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1510-11 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1514-16 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1524-28 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1536 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1540 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J
W1542 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1546 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1548-49 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1557-59 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1564 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1567-69 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1572 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1575-79 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J
W1581 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1584-85 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1587 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1590-91 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1604 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1612 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JX1201 CE40668-001Z CRYSTALX1700 QAX0307-001 CER.RESONATOR
! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local ! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local
AV-36F702
46 No. 51907B
OTHERSY1002-03 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JY1150 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JY1154-55 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JY1652-54 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JY1701 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JY1703-05 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JY1714 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JY1800 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J
Y1902-03 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J
DAF PW BOARD ASS’Y(SAC-2605A-M2)! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local
RESISTORR2701 QRG01GJ-220 OM R 22Ø 1W JR2702 QRE121J-123Y C R 12kØ 1/2W JR2703 QRZ0056-103Z COMP.R 10kØ 1/2W KR2751 NRSA63J-473X MG R 47kØ 1/16W JR2752 NRSA63J-822X MG R 8.2kØ 1/16W JR2753 NRSA63J-122X MG R 1.2kØ 1/16W JR2754 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR2755 NRSA63J-563X MG R 56kØ 1/16W J
R2756 NRSA63J-123X MG R 12kØ 1/16W JR2757 NRSA63J-472X MG R 4.7kØ 1/16W JR2758 NRSA63J-124X MG R 120kØ 1/16W JR2761-65 QRE121J-184Y C R 180kØ 1/2W JR2771 QRL039J-223 OM R 22kØ 3W J
CAPACITORC2701 QFV71HJ-104Z MF CAP. 0.1µF 50V JC2751 QFLC1HJ-333Z M CAP. 0.033µF 50V JC2752 QETN1EM-476Z E CAP. 47µF 25V MC2753 QFZ0122-103 MPP CAP. 0.01µF 1.8kVH ±3%C2761 QFZ0122-682 MPP CAP. 6800pF 1.8kVH ±3%C2771 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V M
TRANSFORMERT2701 QQR1153-001 DEF.TRANSF.
COILL2701 QQLZ028-272 CHOKE COIL 2.7mH
DIODED2761-62 ES1F-LFG2 SI.DIODED2771 MTZJ33A-T2 ZENER DIODE
TRANSISTORQ2751-52 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ2753 2SC4632 SI.TRANSISTOR
CRT SOCKET PW BOARD ASS’Y(SAC-3513A-M2)
RESISTORR3108 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR3111 NRSA63J-332X MG R 3.3kØ 1/16W J
! R3114 QRJ146J-100X C R 10Ø 1/4W JR3115-16 NRSA63J-470X MG R 47Ø 1/16W JR3117 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR3119 NRSA63J-121X MG R 120Ø 1/16W J
! R3122 QRZ9021-561 F R 560Ø 1W JR3123 NRSA63J-122X MG R 1.2kØ 1/16W J
R3124 NRSA63J-390X MG R 39Ø 1/16W JR3125 NRSA63J-5R6X MG R 5.6Ø 1/16W JR3126-27 NRSA63J-563X MG R 56kØ 1/16W JR3128 NRSA63J-122X MG R 1.2kØ 1/16W JR3129 NRSA63J-5R6X MG R 5.6Ø 1/16W JR3130 NRSA63J-390X MG R 39Ø 1/16W JR3131 NRSA63J-121X MG R 120Ø 1/16W JR3132 QRL029J-391 OM R 390Ø 2W J
R3134 NRSA63J-152X MG R 1.5kØ 1/16W JR3136 NRSA63J-333X MG R 33kØ 1/16W JR3139 NRSA63J-681X MG R 680Ø 1/16W JR3142 NRSA63J-124X MG R 120kØ 1/16W JR3143 NRSA63J-681X MG R 680Ø 1/16W JR3145-46 NRSA63J-5R6X MG R 5.6Ø 1/16W JR3151 NRSA63J-473X MG R 47kØ 1/16W JR3152-53 NRSA63J-683X MG R 68kØ 1/16W J
R3154 NRSA63J-473X MG R 47kØ 1/16W JR3301-06 NRSA63J-151X MG R 150Ø 1/16W JR3307-09 NRSA63J-100X MG R 10Ø 1/16W JR3310-12 QRG029J-153 OM R 15kØ 2W JR3313-15 QRG029J-183 OM R 18kØ 2W JR3316-18 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR3325-27 QRC121K-102Z COMP. R 1kØ 1/2W KR3331-33 NRSA63J-122X MG R 1.2kØ 1/16W J
R3334 NRSA63J-152X MG R 1.5kØ 1/16W JR3335 NRSA63J-391X MG R 390Ø 1/16W JR3336-38 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR3351-53 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR3354 NRSA63J-561X MG R 560Ø 1/16W JR3355 NRSA63J-563X MG R 56kØ 1/16W JR3361 QRC121K-105Z COMP. R 1MØ 1/2W KR3362 QRC121K-102Z COMP. R 1kØ 1/2W K
R3363 QRC121K-474Z COMP. R 470kØ 1/2W K
CAPACITORC3101 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC3109 QETN1CM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 16V MC3110-11 NDC31HJ-221X C CAP. 220pF 50V JC3113 QETN2CM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 160V MC3114-15 QCB32HK-472Z C CAP. 4700pF 500V KC3117 QETN2CM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 160V MC3118 QETN0JM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 6.3V MC3119 QETN1AM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 10V M
C3120 QETN1AM-337Z E CAP. 330µF 10V MC3121 QCS32HJ-151Z CH C CAP. 150µF 500V JC3122 NDC31HJ-5R0X C CAP. 5.0pF 50V JC3125 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JC3151-52 NCB21EK-104X C CAP. 0.1µF 25V KC3301-03 NDC31HJ-561X C CAP. 560pF 50V JC3321-22 QETN2EM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 250V MC3323 QETN1CM-477Z E CAP. 470µF 16V M
C3351 QETN1CM-337Z E CAP. 330µF 16V MC3361 QETN2EM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 250V MC3363 QCZ0324-102 C CAP. 1000pF 3000V P
COILL3301-03 QQL244K-180Z COIL 18µH KL3304-06 QQL244K-470Z COIL 47µH K
DIODED3101 1SS133-T2 SI.DIODED3105 RH1S-T3 SI.DIODED3106 RH1S-T3 SI.DIODE
AV-36F702
No. 51907B 47
! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local ! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local
AV-
36F
702
POWER SW PW BOARD ASS’Y(SAC-8601A-M2)
DIODED3301 1SS133-T2 SI.DIODED3302 1SS133-T2 SI.DIODED3303 1SS133-T2 SI.DIODED3304 1SS82-T2 SI.DIODED3305 1SS82-T2 SI.DIODED3306 1SS82-T2 SI.DIODED3331 1SS133-T2 SI.DIODED3351 1SS133-T2 SI.DIODE
D3361 RM2C-LFA1 SI.DIODE
TRANSISTORQ3103 2SA933AS/QR/-T SI.TRANSISTORQ3105 2SC1740S/QR/-T SI.TRANSISTORQ3106 2SA933AS/QR/-T SI.TRANSISTORQ3107 2SA1964/DE/ SI.TRANSISTORQ3108 2SC5248/DE/ SI.TRANSISTORQ3109 2SC1740S/QR/-T SI.TRANSISTORQ3151 2SC1740S/QR/-T SI.TRANSISTORQ3152 2SA933AS/QR/-T SI.TRANSISTOR
Q3301-03 2SC5083/L-P/-T SI.TRANSISTORQ3304-06 2SC5147/CDE/F43 SI.TRANSISTORQ3351 2SA933AS/QR/-T SI.TRANSISTOR
OTHERSK3102-05 CE41492-001Z CHOKE COIL
! SK3001 CE42670-001 C.R.T.SOCKETW3024 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW3031-32 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW3035 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW3038-39 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J
FRONT CONTROL PW BOARD ASS’Y(SAC-8507A-M2)! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local
RESISTORR8401 NRSA63J-750X MG R 75Ø 1/16W JR8402-03 NRSA63J-224X MG R 220kØ 1/16W JR8404-05 NRSA63J-750X MG R 75Ø 1/16W JR8406 NRSA63J-333X MG R 33kØ 1/16W JR8702 NRSA63J-472X MG R 4.7kØ 1/16W JR8703 NRSA63J-153X MG R 15kØ 1/16W JR8705 NRSA63J-472X MG R 4.7kØ 1/16W JR8706 NRSA63J-153X MG R 15kØ 1/16W J
CAPACITORC8442-43 QETN1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V MC8444-45 QETN1HM-474Z E CAP. 0.47µF 50V MC8446 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V K
DIODED8402-06 MTZJ10C-T2 ZENER DIODE
OTHERSJ8401 QNZ0453-001 JACKK8401 QQR0621-002Z BEADS CORELC8401-02 NQR0169-001X EMI FILTERS8702 QSW0619-003Z PUSH SWITCH MENUS8703 QSW0619-003Z PUSH SWITCH CH-S8704 QSW0619-003Z PUSH SWITCH CH+S8705 QSW0619-003Z PUSH SWITCH VOL-S8706 QSW0619-003Z PUSH SWITCH VOL+
RESISTORR8101 NRSA63J-561X MG R 560Ø 1/16W JR8107 NRSA63J-332X MG R 3.3kØ 1/16W JR8108 NRSA63J-152X MG R 1.5kØ 1/16W J
CAPACITORC8102 QETN1EM-476Z E CAP. 47µF 25V M
DIODED8101 SLR-342VR3F L.E.D.
TRANSISTORQ8101-02 DTA124EKA-X DIGI.TRANSISTOR
ICIC8101 GP1U281Q IFR DETECT UNIT
OTHERSLC30190-001B-A L.E.D.HOLDER
S8701 QSW0847-001 TACT SWITCH (POWER)
LF PW BOARD ASS’Y(SAC-9506A-M2)! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local
RESISTORR9997 QRE121J-5R6Y C R 5.6Ø 1/2W J
! R9998 QRZ9041-275 C R 2.7MØ 1/2W KR9999 QRE121J-121Y C R 120Ø 1/2W J
CAPACITOR! C9901 QFZ9067-104 MM CAP. 0.1µF! C9902 QFZ9067-473 MM CAP. 0.047µF! C9903 QFZ9067-104 MM CAP. 0.1µF! C9904 QCZ9052-102 C CAP. 1000pF 125V
OTHERS! CN90PW QMPD200-200-JC POWER CORD! F9901 QMF0007-5R0J1 FUSE! FC9901 CEMG002-001Z FUSE CLIP! LF9901 QQR0527-004 LINE FILTER! LF9902 QQR1159-001 LINE FILTER! VA9901 ERZV10V621CS VARISTOR
! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local ! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local
AV-36F702
48 No. 51907B
AV SELECTOR PW BOARD ASS’Y(SAC0S511A-M2)
RESISTORR0081 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR0082 NRSA63J-682X MG R 6.8kØ 1/16W JR0083 NRSA63J-153X MG R 15kØ 1/16W JR0084 NRSA63J-683X MG R 68kØ 1/16W JR0085 NRSA63J-332X MG R 3.3kØ 1/16W JR0086 NRSA63J-333X MG R 33kØ 1/16W JR0087 NRVA02D-153X MF R 15kØ 1/10W±0.5%R0088 NRVA02D-152X MF R 1.5kØ 1/10W±0.5%
R0089 NRSA63J-562X MG R 5.6kØ 1/16W JR0090 NRSA63J-563X MG R 56kØ 1/16W JR0151-54 NRSA63J-223X MG R 22kØ 1/16W JR0155 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR0157 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR0159 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR0202 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR0210 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J
R0211 NRSA63J-153X MG R 15kØ 1/16W JR0212 NRSA63J-333X MG R 33kØ 1/16W JR0213 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR0214 NRSA63J-181X MG R 180Ø 1/16W JR0215 NRSA63J-152X MG R 1.5kØ 1/16W JR0216 NRSA63J-182X MG R 1.8kØ 1/16W JR0217 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR0218 NRSA63J-222X MG R 2.2kØ 1/16W J
R0223 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR0229 NRSA63J-473X MG R 47kØ 1/16W JR0230 NRSA63J-223X MG R 22kØ 1/16W JR0231 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR0232 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR0233 NRSA63J-272X MG R 2.7kØ 1/16W JR0234 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR0235-36 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W J
R0238 NRSA63J-822X MG R 8.2kØ 1/16W JR0239 NRSA63J-123X MG R 12kØ 1/16W JR0241 NRSA63J-821X MG R 820Ø 1/16W JR0242 NRSA63J-474X MG R 470kØ 1/16W JR0243-44 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR0247 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR0251 NRSA63J-471X MG R 470Ø 1/16W JR0253 NRSA63J-681X MG R 680Ø 1/16W J
R0254 NRSA63J-391X MG R 390Ø 1/16W JR0255 NRSA63J-681X MG R 680Ø 1/16W JR0258 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR0259 NRSA63J-222X MG R 2.2kØ 1/16W JR0261 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR0262 NRSA63J-222X MG R 2.2kØ 1/16W JR0263 NRSA63J-471X MG R 470Ø 1/16W JR0265 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W J
R0269 NRSA63J-681X MG R 680Ø 1/16W JR0270 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR0301-02 NRSA63J-222X MG R 2.2kØ 1/16W JR0303-04 NRSA63J-221X MG R 220Ø 1/16W JR0305-06 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR0331-34 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR0371-74 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR0375-76 NRSA63J-333X MG R 33kØ 1/16W J
R0377-78 NRSA63J-472X MG R 4.7kØ 1/16W JR0381 NRSA63J-682X MG R 6.8kØ 1/16W JR0382 NRSA63J-223X MG R 22kØ 1/16W JR0384-87 NRSA63J-223X MG R 22kØ 1/16W JR0391-92 NRSA63J-221X MG R 220Ø 1/16W JR0393-94 NRSA63J-823X MG R 82kØ 1/16W JR0395-96 NRSA63J-221X MG R 220Ø 1/16W JR0401 NRSA63J-183X MG R 18kØ 1/16W J
R0402 NRSA63J-223X MG R 22kØ 1/16W JR0458 NRSA63J-333X MG R 33kØ 1/16W JR0459 NRSA63J-183X MG R 18kØ 1/16W JR0501-02 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR0503 NRSA63J-221X MG R 220Ø 1/16W JR0504-05 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR0507-08 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR0509 NRSA63J-221X MG R 220Ø 1/16W J
RESISTOR
R0518 NRSA63J-333X MG R 33kØ 1/16W JR0519-21 NRSA63J-750X MG R 75Ø 1/16W JR0522-23 NRSA63J-224X MG R 220kØ 1/16W JR0527 NRSA63J-750X MG R 75Ø 1/16W JR0528-29 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR0532-33 NRSA63J-224X MG R 220kØ 1/16W JR0558-61 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR0564-65 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J
R0566-67 NRSA63J-331X MG R 330Ø 1/16W JR0568 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR0571 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR0573 NRSA63J-272X MG R 2.7kØ 1/16W JR0574 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR0906 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J
CAPACITORC0081 NCB21HK-104X C CAP. 0.1µF 50V KC0082 QENC1HM-475Z BP E CAP. 4.7µF 50V MC0083 QENC1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V MC0084 QETN1HM-225Z E CAP. 2.2µF 50V MC0085 NCB21HK-473X C CAP. 0.047µF 50V KC0086 QETN1HM-474Z E CAP. 0.47µF 50V MC0087-88 NCB21HK-104X C CAP. 0.1µF 50V KC0089 QBTC1CK-335Z TAN.CAP. 3.3µF 16V K
C0090 QETN1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V MC0091 QBTC1CK-106Z TAN.CAP. 10µF 16V KC0092-93 QETN1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V MC0094 QETN1HM-475Z E CAP. 4.7µF 50V MC0095 QETN1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V MC0151-52 QENC1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V MC0153-54 NCB31HK-332X C CAP. 3300pF 50V KC0155-56 NCB21HK-333X C CAP. 0.033µF 50V K
C0157-58 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC0159 QETN1EM-476Z E CAP. 47µF 25V MC0160 NCB21HK-104X C CAP. 0.1µF 50V KC0205 QETN1HM-476Z E CAP. 47µF 50V MC0206 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC0211 QENC1EM-106Z BP E CAP. 10µF 25V MC0212 NDC31HJ-101X C CAP. 100pF 50V JC0213 NDC31HJ-470X C CAP. 47pF 50V J
C0214 NDC31HJ-181X C CAP. 180pF 50V JC0215 QETN1HM-474Z E CAP. 0.47µF 50V MC0223 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC0226 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC0231-33 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC0234 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC0235 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC0236 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V K
C0237 NCB31HK-472X C CAP. 4700pF 50V KC0238-39 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC0241-45 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC0246 NDC31HJ-181X C CAP. 180pF 50V JC0247-49 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC0251 QETN1HM-476Z E CAP. 47µF 50V MC0252 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC0255 NDC31HJ-390X C CAP. 39pF 50V J
C0263 NDC31HJ-150X C CAP. 15pF 50V JC0264 QENC1HM-474Z BP E CAP. 0.47µF 50V MC0265 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC0309-10 NCB31HK-102X C CAP. 1000pF 50V KC0311-12 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JC0331 QETN1CM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 16V MC0332 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC0333 QETN1EM-476Z E CAP. 47µF 25V M
C0334 NCB21HK-273X C CAP. 0.027µF 50V KC0335 QETN1HM-225Z E CAP. 2.2µF 50V MC0336 NCB31HK-222X C CAP. 2200pF 50V KC0337 NCB21HK-104X C CAP. 0.1µF 50V KC0338 QETN1HM-225Z E CAP. 2.2µF 50V MC0339 NCB31HK-222X C CAP. 2200pF 50V KC0340 NCB21HK-104X C CAP. 0.1µF 50V KC0343 QETN1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V M
AV-36F702
No. 51907B 49
! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local ! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local
AV-
36F
702
CAPACITOR
C0344-45 QENC1HM-225Z BP E CAP. 2.2µF 50V MC0371-72 QENC1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V MC0373 QETN1EM-476Z E CAP. 47µF 25V MC0391-92 QETN1HM-474Z E CAP. 0.47µF 50V MC0401 QETN1CM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 16V MC0402-03 NCF21CZ-105X C CAP. 1µF 16V ZC0404 QFV71HJ-224Z MF CAP. 0.22µF 50V JC0407 QETN1EM-108Z E CAP. 1000µF 25V M
C0410-11 QETN1EM-108Z E CAP. 1000µF 25V MC0412-13 QETN1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V MC0501-02 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC0503 QETN1HM-226Z E CAP. 22µF 50V MC0504 QETN1EM-476Z E CAP. 47µF 25V MC0505 QENC1HM-474Z BP E CAP. 0.47µF 50V MC0508 QETN1HM-474Z E CAP. 0.47µF 50V MC0509 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V K
C0511 QETN1HM-474Z E CAP. 0.47µF 50V MC0512-13 QETN1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V MC0517 QETN1HM-474Z E CAP. 0.47µF 50V MC0520-21 QETN1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V MC0531-32 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC0538-39 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V K
COILL0202 QQL244K-150Z COIL 15µH KL0211 QQL244K-4R7Z COIL 4.7µH KL0261 QQL244K-150Z COIL 15µH K
DIODED0391-92 MTZJ10C-T2 ZENER DIODED0501-05 MTZJ10C-T2 ZENER DIODED0507-09 MTZJ10C-T2 ZENER DIODED0511 MTZJ10C-T2 ZENER DIODED0515-19 MTZJ10C-T2 ZENER DIODED0521 MTZJ10C-T2 ZENER DIODE
TRANSISTORQ0211-12 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ0218 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ0219 2SA1037AK/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ0251 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ0252 2SA1037AK/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ0253 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ0261-62 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ0263 2SA1037AK/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTOR
Q0301-02 DTC124EKA-X DIGI.TRANSISTORQ0381-82 DTC124EKA-X DIGI.TRANSISTORQ0384-87 DTC323TK-X DIGI.TRANSISTORQ0453 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ0454 DTC124EKA-X DIGI.TRANSISTORQ0509 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTOR
ICIC0001 UPC1851BCU I.C(MONO-ANA)IC0151 NJM2150AD I.C(MONO-ANA)IC0201 TC90A53N I.C(DIGI-MOS)IC0371 BA15218N I.C(MONO-ANA)IC0381 TC4066BP/N/ I.C(DIGI-MOS)IC0401 LA4485 I.C(MONO-ANA)IC0501 CXA2089Q-X I.C(MONO-ANA)
OTHERSJ0501 QNZ0454-001 PIN JACKJ0502 QNN0349-001 PIN JACKJ0503 QNN0348-001 PIN JACKW0003 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW0011 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW0031-33 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW0050 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW0060 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J
W0085-87 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW0099 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW0105 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW0109 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW0115-17 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW0131 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW0142 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW0148 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J
W0151 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW0154 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW0158 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW0162-65 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW0169-72 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW0174 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW0176-80 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW0184 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J
W0186-89 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J
REMOTE CONTROL UNIT PARTSLIST (RM-C303G-1A)! Ref.No. Part No. Part Name Description Local
UR52EC1286C BATTERY COVER
! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local ! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local
AV-36F802
50 No. 51907B
PRINTED WIRING BOARD PARTS LIST(AV-36F802)MAIN PW BOARD ASS’Y(SAC-1547A-M2)
RESISTORR1001 NRSA63J-473X MG R 47kØ 1/16W JR1002-04 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR1011 NRSA63J-820X MG R 82Ø 1/16W JR1012 NRSA63J-182X MG R 1.8kØ 1/16W JR1013 NRSA63J-562X MG R 5.6kØ 1/16W JR1014 QRE121J-101Y C R 100Ø 1/2W JR1015 NRSA63J-180X MG R 18Ø 1/16W JR1016 NRSA63J-270X MG R 27Ø 1/16W J
R1018 NRSA63J-104X MG R 100kØ 1/16W JR1020 NRSA63J-332X MG R 3.3kØ 1/16W JR1021 NRSA63J-123X MG R 12kØ 1/16W JR1022 NRSA63J-151X MG R 150Ø 1/16W JR1023 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR1024 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR1025 NRSA63J-561X MG R 560Ø 1/16W JR1026 NRSA63J-331X MG R 330Ø 1/16W J
R1028 NRSA63J-821X MG R 820Ø 1/16W JR1029 NRSA63J-333X MG R 33kØ 1/16W JR1030 NRSA63J-683X MG R 68kØ 1/16W JR1038 NRSA63J-272X MG R 2.7kØ 1/16W JR1039 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR1041 NRSA63J-272X MG R 2.7kØ 1/16W JR1042-43 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR1044-46 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J
R1047 NRSA63J-153X MG R 15kØ 1/16W JR1048 NRSA63J-154X MG R 150kØ 1/16W JR1101-02 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR1111 NRSA63J-105X MG R 1MØ 1/16W JR1131 NRSA63J-272X MG R 2.7kØ 1/16W JR1132 NRSA63J-153X MG R 15kØ 1/16W JR1133 NRSA63J-683X MG R 68kØ 1/16W JR1134 NRSA63J-562X MG R 5.6kØ 1/16W J
R1135-39 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR1140 NRSA63J-562X MG R 5.6kØ 1/16W JR1155 NRSA63J-223X MG R 22kØ 1/16W JR1156 NRSA63J-562X MG R 5.6kØ 1/16W JR1201 NRSA63J-333X MG R 33kØ 1/16W JR1231 NRSA63J-182X MG R 1.8kØ 1/16W JR1237 NRSA63J-392X MG R 3.9kØ 1/16W JR1238 NRSA63J-473X MG R 47kØ 1/16W J
R1241 NRSA63J-332X MG R 3.3kØ 1/16W JR1243 NRSA63J-152X MG R 1.5kØ 1/16W JR1281 NRSA63J-182X MG R 1.8kØ 1/16W JR1282 NRSA63J-392X MG R 3.9kØ 1/16W JR1283 NRSA63J-681X MG R 680Ø 1/16W JR1286 NRSA63J-472X MG R 4.7kØ 1/16W JR1287 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR1288 NRSA02J-471X MG R 470Ø 1/10W J
R1289 NRSA63J-154X MG R 150kØ 1/16W JR1290 NRSA02J-561X MG R 560Ø 1/10W JR1292 NRSA63J-124X MG R 120kØ 1/16W JR1293 NRSA63J-224X MG R 220kØ 1/16W JR1301-03 NRSA63J-222X MG R 2.2kØ 1/16W JR1304-06 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR1318 NRSA63J-472X MG R 4.7kØ 1/16W JR1319 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W J
R1354-55 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR1356 NRSA63J-123X MG R 12kØ 1/16W JR1359 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1360 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR1401 NRSA63J-822X MG R 8.2kØ 1/16W JR1403 QRX01GJ-1R0 MF R 1.0Ø 1W JR1404 QRE121J-100Y MF R 10Ø 1/2W JR1405 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W J
R1407 NRSA02J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/10W JR1411-12 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1414 QRL029J-151 OM R 150Ø 2W JR1417 QRE121J-180Y C R 18Ø 1/2W JR1431 QRE121J-272Y C R 2.7kØ 1/2W JR1432 NRSA63J-104X MG R 100kØ 1/16W JR1433 NRSA63J-473X MG R 47kØ 1/16W JR1434 NRSA63J-822X MG R 8.2kØ 1/16W J
RESISTOR
R1435 NRSA63J-682X MG R 6.8kØ 1/16W JR1440 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR1441 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1501 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR1502 NRSA63J-271X MG R 270Ø 1/16W JR1503 QRE121J-103Y C R 10kØ 1/2W JR1504 QRL039J-122 OM R 1.2kØ 3W JR1505 QRL039J-152 OM R 1.5kØ 3W J
R1507 QRF074J-2R0 UNF R 2.0Ø 7W JR1511 QRE121J-220Y C R 22Ø 1/2W JR1512 QRE121J-681Y C R 680Ø 1/2W JR1513 QRL039J-273 OM R 27kØ 3W JR1515 QRE141J-0R0Y C R 0.0Ø 1/4W J
! R1523 QRJ146J-333X C R 33kØ 1/4W J! R1525 QRZ9011-470 F R 47Ø 1/2W J
R1526 QRE121J-272Y C R 2.7kØ 1/2W J
R1527 QRE121J-154Y C R 150kØ 1/2W JR1528 QRE121J-124Y C R 120kØ 1/2W JR1529 NRSA63J-331X MG R 330Ø 1/16W J
! R1531 QRJ146J-391X C R 390Ø 1/4W JR1532 NRSA63J-273X MG R 27kØ 1/16W JR1533-34 NRSA63J-123X MG R 12kØ 1/16W J
! R1535 NRSA02D-242X MG R 2.4kØ 2W D! R1537 NRVA02D-752X MF R 7.5kØ 2W D
R1538 NRSA63J-333X MG R 33kØ 1/16W JR1543 QRE121J-122Y C R 1.2kØ 1/2W JR1544 QRE121J-222Y C R 2.2kØ 1/2W JR1545 QRE121J-822Y C R 8.2kØ 1/2W JR1546 NRSA63J-331X MG R 330Ø 1/16W JR1547 NRSA63J-104X MG R 100kØ 1/16W JR1548 QRE121J-821Y C R 820Ø 1/2W JR1553 QRL039J-390 OM R 39Ø 3W J
R1581 QRE121J-100Y MF R 10Ø 1/2W JR1582 NRSA63J-124X MG R 120kØ 1/16W JR1583 NRSA63J-683X MG R 68kØ 1/16W JR1584 NRSA63J-563X MG R 56kØ 1/16W JR1585 NRSA63J-472X MG R 4.7kØ 1/16W JR1586 NRSA63J-154X MG R 150kØ 1/16W JR1587 NRSA63J-104X MG R 100kØ 1/16W JR1588 QRE121J-100Y MF R 10Ø 1/2W J
R1589 NRSA63J-562X MG R 5.6kØ 1/16W JR1590 NRSA63J-682X MG R 6.8kØ 1/16W JR1591 QRJ149J-220 C R 22Ø 1/4W JR1592 NRSA63J-183X MG R 18kØ 1/16W JR1593 NRSA63J-104X MG R 100kØ 1/16W JR1594 NRSA63J-272X MG R 2.7kØ 1/16W JR1595 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1601-06 NRSA63J-750X MG R 75Ø 1/16W J
R1607-09 NRSA63J-332X MG R 3.3kØ 1/16W JR1651-52 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR1700-02 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR1704-05 NRSA63J-472X MG R 4.7kØ 1/16W JR1706-07 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1708-09 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR1714 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR1715 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W J
R1718 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR1721-28 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR1729 NRSA63J-223X MG R 22kØ 1/16W JR1731-32 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR1733-34 NRSA63J-272X MG R 2.7kØ 1/16W JR1737 NRSA63J-222X MG R 2.2kØ 1/16W JR1738 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR1739 NRSA63J-272X MG R 2.7kØ 1/16W J
R1740 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1741 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR1742-43 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1745 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR1748 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1749-51 NRSA63J-222X MG R 2.2kØ 1/16W JR1752 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR1753 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J
AV-36F802
No. 51907B 51
! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local ! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local
AV-
36F
802
RESISTORR1754 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR1755 NRSA63J-153X MG R 15kØ 1/16W JR1756 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1762 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR1763 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1764-68 NRSA63J-221X MG R 220Ø 1/16W JR1769-70 NRSA63J-682X MG R 6.8kØ 1/16W JR1772 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W J
R1774 NRSA63J-682X MG R 6.8kØ 1/16W JR1775 NRSA63J-473X MG R 47kØ 1/16W JR1776 NRSA63J-123X MG R 12kØ 1/16W JR1777 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1778 NRSA63J-682X MG R 6.8kØ 1/16W JR1784 NRSA63J-472X MG R 4.7kØ 1/16W JR1786 NRSA63J-393X MG R 39kØ 1/16W JR1788 NRSA63J-124X MG R 120kØ 1/16W J
R1790 NRSA63J-273X MG R 27kØ 1/16W JR1791 NRSA63J-683X MG R 68kØ 1/16W JR1792 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1793-95 NRSA63J-331X MG R 330Ø 1/16W JR1798-99 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1800 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1806 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR1807 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J
R1810 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR1811 NRSA63J-473X MG R 47kØ 1/16W JR1812 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR1814 NRSA63J-104X MG R 100kØ 1/16W JR1815 NRSA63J-154X MG R 150kØ 1/16W JR1816 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR1817 NRSA63J-104X MG R 100kØ 1/16W JR1818 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W J
R1821 NRSA63J-104X MG R 100kØ 1/16W JR1824 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR1827 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR1857 QRG029J-330 OM R 33Ø 2W JR1858 QRG029J-180 OM R 18Ø 2W JR1860 NRSA63J-562X MG R 5.6kØ 1/16W JR1901 QRF074K-R47 UNF R 0.47Ø 7W KR1909 QRG01GJ-470 OM R 47Ø 1W J
R1911 QRE121J-223Y C R 22kØ 1/2W JR1912 QRT029J-R18 MF R 0.18Ø 2W JR1913 QRT029J-R15 MF R 0.15Ø 2W J
! R1914 QRK126J-681X C R 680Ø 1/2W JR1915 QRE121J-270Y C R 27Ø 1/2W J
! R1917 QRK126J-332X C R 3.3kØ 1/2W JR1918 QRE121J-222Y C R 2.2kØ 1/2W JR1919 QRE121J-684Y C R 680kØ 1/2W J
R1924 QRE121J-222Y C R 2.2kØ 1/2W JR1930 QRE121J-223Y C R 22kØ 1/2W JR1939 QRT039J-2R2 MF R 2.2Ø 3W JR1940 QRE121J-181Y C R 180Ø 1/2W JR1941 QRL029J-183 OM R 18kØ 2W JR1943 NRSA63J-104X MG R 100kØ 1/16W JR1944 NRSA63J-122X MG R 1.2kØ 1/16W JR1951 NRSA63J-473X MG R 47kØ 1/16W J
R1952 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR1953 QRE121J-151Y C R 150Ø 1/2W JR1972 NRVA02D-102X MF R 1kØ 1/10W±0.5%R1973 QRE121J-272Y C R 2.7kØ 1/2W JR1975 QRE121J-223Y C R 22kØ 1/2W JR1977 QRE121J-473Y C R 47kØ 1/2W JR1978 NRSA63J-333X MG R 33kØ 1/16W J
CAPACITORC1001 QETN1HM-475Z E CAP. 4.7µF 50V MC1002 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC1003 QETN1CM-108Z E CAP. 1000µF 16V MC1011-12 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1014 QETN1CM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 16V MC1015-16 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1021 QFV71HJ-824Z MF CAP. 0.82µF 50V JC1023 QETN1CM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 16V M
CAPACITOR
C1024 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1025 NCB31HK-102X C CAP. 1000pF 50V KC1026 QETN1HM-474Z E CAP. 0.47µF 50V MC1027 NCB21HK-104X C CAP. 0.1µF 50V KC1028 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC1029 QETN1CM-336Z E CAP. 33µF 16V MC1030 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1034 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V K
C1036 QETN1AM-477Z E CAP. 470µF 10V MC1037 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1038 QETN1CM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 16V MC1041-42 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC1043-44 NDC31HJ-470X C CAP. 47pF 50V JC1045 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC1046 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1047 NDC21HJ-330X C CAP. 33pF 50V J
C1048 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1111 QETN0JM-228Z E CAP. 2200µF 6.3V MC1112 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1113 QETN1HM-474Z E CAP. 0.47µF 50V MC1114 QETN1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V MC1115 QFV71HJ-104Z MF CAP. 0.1µF 50V JC1116 NCB21HK-104X C CAP. 0.1µF 50V KC1131 NDC31HJ-220X C CAP. 22pF 50V J
C1132 NDC31HJ-100X C CAP. 10pF 50V JC1133 NDC31HJ-220X C CAP. 22pF 50V JC1134 NDC31HJ-100X C CAP. 10pF 50V JC1135 NDC31HJ-330X C CAP. 33pF 50V JC1136 QENC1CM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 16V MC1150 NCF21CZ-105X C CAP. 1µF 16V ZC1151 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1152 QENC1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V M
C1201 NDC31HJ-100X C CAP. 10pF 50V JC1202 QETN1HM-224Z E CAP. 0.22µF 50V MC1203 NCB31HK-222X C CAP. 2200pF 50V KC1233 NDC31HJ-560X C CAP. 56pF 50V JC1237 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1281 QFV71HJ-474Z MF CAP. 0.47µF 50V JC1282 QETN1CM-227Z E CAP. 220µF 16V MC1283 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V K
C1284 QETN1HM-225Z E CAP. 2.2µF 50V MC1285 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1286 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC1287 QETN1CM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 16V MC1288 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1302 NCB21HK-104X C CAP. 0.1µF 50V KC1352 QETN1CM-336Z E CAP. 33µF 16V MC1354 QFV71HJ-154Z MF CAP. 0.15µF 50V J
C1391 QETN1CM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 16V MC1392 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1393-95 NCB21HK-104X C CAP. 0.1µF 50V KC1401 NDC21HJ-152X C CAP. 1500pF 50V JC1403 NCB21HK-153X C CAP. 0.015µF 50V KC1404 QEHR1VM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 35V MC1405 QCS32HJ-100Z CH C CAP. 10µF 500V JC1407 QFLC2AJ-104Z M CAP. 0.1µF 100V J
C1410 QFLC2AJ-104Z M CAP. 0.1µF 100V JC1411 QETN1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V MC1415 NCB21HK-104X C CAP. 0.1µF 50V KC1421 QEHQ1VM-108 E CAP. 1000µF 35V MC1431 QETN1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V MC1432 QETN1EM-476Z E CAP. 47µF 25V MC1501 QCB32HK-151Z C CAP. 150pF 500V KC1502 QCB32HK-331Z C CAP. 330pF 500V K
C1503 QETN2CM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 160V MC1504 QEZ0203-107 E CAP. 100µF 160V MC1505 QENC2AM-225Z E CAP. 2.2µF 100V MC1507 QEZ0195-475Z E CAP. 4.7µF 50V MC1510 QFZ0196-272 MPP CAP. 2700pF 1.5kVH ±3%C1513 QFZ0198-153 MPP CAP. 0.015µF 1.5kVH ±3%C1514 QFP32JJ-223 PP CAP. 0.022µF 630V JC1515 QFZ0197-474 MPP CAP. 0.47µF 250V Z
! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local ! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local
AV-36F802
52 No. 51907B
CAPACITORC1516 QCB32HK-561Z C CAP. 560pF 500V KC1521 QETN2EM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 250V MC1523 QEHR1EM-108Z E CAP. 1000µF 25V MC1524 QETN1EM-108Z E CAP. 1000µF 25V MC1525 QETN1VM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 35V MC1526 QFV21HJ-824Z MF CAP. 0.82µF 50V JC1527 QFLC2AJ-103Z M CAP. 0.01µF 100V J
! C1531 QCB32HK-102Z C CAP. 1000pF 500V K
! C1533 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC1551-52 QFV71HJ-474Z MF CAP. 0.47µF 50V JC1553 QETN1EM-476Z E CAP. 47µF 25V MC1601-06 QETN1EM-476Z E CAP. 47µF 25V MC1607 QETN1AM-477Z E CAP. 470µF 10V MC1608 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1609-11 QFV71HJ-104Z MF CAP. 0.1µF 50V JC1612 QETN1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V M
C1663-64 QETN1EM-476Z E CAP. 47µF 25V MC1700 NCB31HK-102X C CAP. 1000pF 50V KC1703 NDC31HJ-181X C CAP. 180pF 50V JC1706 QETN1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V MC1707 QETN1CM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 16V MC1710 NCB21EK-683X C CAP. 0.068µF 25V KC1712 QETN1HM-475Z E CAP. 4.7µF 50V MC1714 QETN1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V M
C1721 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC1722-23 NDC31HJ-390X C CAP. 39pF 50V JC1724 NDC31HJ-471X C CAP. 470pF 50V JC1726 NDC21HJ-561X C CAP. 560pF 50V JC1800 QETN1CM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 16V MC1801 NCB21HK-104X C CAP. 0.1µF 50V KC1802 QETN1CM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 16V MC1803 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V M
C1804 NDC31HJ-102X C CAP. 1000pF 50V JC1805 NCB31HK-153X C CAP. 0.015µF 50V KC1806-07 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC1810 QETN1HM-474Z E CAP. 0.47µF 50V MC1811 QETN1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V MC1813 NCB31HK-102X C CAP. 1000pF 50V KC1816 NCB31HK-153X C CAP. 0.015µF 50V KC1851 QETN1EM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 25V M
C1852 QETN1CM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 16V MC1853-54 QETN1CM-227Z E CAP. 220µF 16V MC1856 QETN1CM-227Z E CAP. 220µF 16V MC1857 QETN1CM-477Z E CAP. 470µF 16V M
! C1904-06 QCZ9054-102 C CAP. 1000pF 250V Z! C1907 QEZ0169-477 E CAP. 470µF 200V M! C1908 QCZ9054-102 C CAP. 1000pF 250V Z
C1912 QCZ0340-332 C CAP. 3300pF
C1913 QFLC1HJ-471Z M CAP. 470pF 50V JC1914 QETN1HM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 50V MC1916 NDC31HJ-331X C CAP. 330pF 50V JC1917 NCB31HK-222X C CAP. 2200pF 50V KC1918 NCB21HK-104X C CAP. 0.1µF 50V KC1919 QFP32GJ-103 PP CAP. 0.01µF 400V JC1925 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JC1931 QEZ0203-227 E CAP. 220µF 160V M
C1932 QETN1CM-108Z E CAP. 1000µF 16V MC1933 QETM1EM-228 E CAP. 2200µF 25V MC1934-35 QETN1EM-108Z E CAP. 1000µF 25V MC1937 QCZ0340-102 C CAP. 1000pFC1938 QETM1EM-228 E CAP. 2200µF 25V MC1939-40 QCB32HK-152Z C CAP. 1500pF 500V KC1942 QETN1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V MC1943 QETN1CM-108Z E CAP. 1000µF 16V M
C1948 QETN1EM-476Z E CAP. 47µF 25V MC1951 QETN1EM-108Z E CAP. 1000µF 25V MC1971 QETN1CM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 16V MC1972 QETN1EM-476Z E CAP. 47µF 25V MC1973 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V M
! C1998-99 QCZ9074-103 C CAP. 0.01µF 250V M
TRANSFORMERT1501 CE42034-002 H.DRIVE TRANSF.
! T1502 QQH0110-001 FBT! T1921 QQS0090-001 SWITCH.TRANSF.! T1951 QQT0315-001 POWER TRANSF.
COILL1001 QQL244K-560Z COIL 56µH KL1012 QQLZ014-R39 PEAKING COIL 0.39µHL1021 QRN143J-0R0X C R 0.0Ø 1/4W JL1022 QQL244K-220Z COIL 22µH KL1027 QRN143J-0R0X C R 0.0Ø 1/4W JL1041 QRN143J-0R0X C R 0.0Ø 1/4W JL1042 QQL244K-220Z COIL 22µH KL1101 QQL244K-470Z COIL 47µH K
L1232 QQL244K-560Z COIL 56µH KL1511 CE41029-00A LINEARITY COILL1512 QQLZ027-821 CHOKE COIL 820µHL1521 QQLZ018-760 HEATER CHOKE 76µHL1700 QQL244K-4R7Z COIL 4.7µH KL1810 QQL244J-100Z COIL 10µH JL1931 QQL26AK-470Z COIL 47µH KL1933-34 QQL26AK-470Z COIL 47µH K
L1937 QQL26AK-470Z COIL 47µH K
DIODED1010 MTZJ9.1C-T2 ZENER DIODED1101-02 MTZJ8.2C-T2 ZENER DIODED1305-10 1SS133-T2 SI.DIODED1352 MTZJ9.1C-T2 ZENER DIODED1353 1SS133-T2 SI.DIODED1401 1SR35-400A-T2 SI.DIODED1431 1SR35-400A-T2 SI.DIODED1432 1SS133-T2 SI.DIODE
! D1501 RH3G-F1 SI.DIODE! D1502 RU3AM-LFC4 SI.DIODE
D1507 RGP10J-5025-T3 SI.DIODED1521 RH1S-T3 SI.DIODED1523-24 EL1Z-T3 SI.DIODED1525-26 1SS81-T5 SI.DIODED1527 1SR124-400A-T2 SI.DIODED1529 MTZJ5.1C-T2 ZENER DIODE
! D1531 MA4068N/Z1/-T2 ZENER DIODED1535 1SS133-T2 SI.DIODED1537 1SR35-400A-T2 SI.DIODED1601-06 MTZJ9.1C-T2 ZENER DIODED1700 MTZJ5.6B-T2 ZENER DIODED1701-02 1SS133-T2 SI.DIODED1706-10 MTZJ8.2C-T2 ZENER DIODED1711-15 1SS81-T2 SI.DIODE
D1721-22 1SS133-T2 SI.DIODED1723-24 MTZJ5.6B-T2 ZENER DIODED1800 1SS81-T2 SI.DIODED1801 1SS133-T2 SI.DIODED1810 MTZJ8.2C-T2 ZENER DIODED1811 1SS133-T2 SI.DIODE
! D1901 RBV-406M BRIDGE DIODED1910 MA700A-T2 SI.DIODE
! D1911-13 RGP10J-5025-T3 SI.DIODED1914 1SS133-T2 SI.DIODED1915 SARS01-T2 SI.DIODED1917 MTZJ30A-T2 ZENER DIODED1918 MTZJ5.1C-T2 ZENER DIODED1920 1SS133-T2 SI.DIODE
! D1930 RGP10J-5025-T3 SI.DIODED1931 RU30A-F1 SI.DIODE
AV-36F802
No. 51907B 53
! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local ! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local
AV-
36F
802
DIODE
D1933 RU3YX-LFC4 SI.DIODED1935 RU3YX-LFC4 SI.DIODED1937 RU3YX-LFC4 SI.DIODED1941 MTZJ33A-T2 ZENER DIODED1945 1SS133-T2 SI.DIODED1952-53 1SS133-T2 SI.DIODED1954-57 1SR35-400A-T2 SI.DIODED1972 MTZJ15C-T2 ZENER DIODE
D1973 1SS133-T2 SI.DIODE
TRANSISTORQ1011 2SC5083/L-P/-T SI.TRANSISTORQ1021 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1024 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1025 2SA1037AK/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1041 2SA1037AK/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1131-33 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1153-54 DTC124EKA-X DIGI.TRANSISTORQ1232-33 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTOR
Q1352 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1431 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1440 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1501 2SC4212/Z1/ SI.TRANSISTORQ1511 2SD2645-YD TRANSISTOR
! Q1531 2SC2785/JH/-T SI.TRANSISTORQ1532 2SA1037AK/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1541-42 2SA1037AK/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTOR
! Q1543 2SD1408/OY/-LB SI.TRANSISTORQ1551 2SC1740S/QR/-T SI.TRANSISTORQ1552 2SA966/OY/-T SI.TRANSISTORQ1700 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1701 2SA1037AK/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1703 2SA1037AK/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1705 2SA1037AK/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1706 DTC363TK-X DIGI.TRANSISTOR
Q1711 DTC124EKA-X DIGI.TRANSISTORQ1810 DTC144EKA-X DIGI.TRANSISTORQ1941 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1951 2SD1383K/AB/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ1971 2SA1123/R/Z1-T SI.TRANSISTOR
ICIC1101 TB1253AN I.C(M)IC1151 TC4066BF/N/-XE I.C(DIGI-MOS)IC1401 LA7841 I.C(MONO-ANA)IC1501 LA6515 I.C(MONO-ANA)IC1601 M52055FP-X I.C(MONO-ANA)IC1651 PQ3RD13 I.C(MONO-ANA)IC1701 MN1876478JL1 I.C(MICRO-COMP)IC1702 AT24C04-F802Y I.C(MEMORY-OTH) (SERVICE)
IC1703 MM1437AF-X I.C(MONO-ANA)IC1851 AN7812F I.C(MONO-ANA)IC1852 AN7809F I.C(MONO-ANA)IC1853 AN7805F I.C(MONO-ANA)
! IC1911 STR-F6626/F3 I.C(HYBRID)! IC1921 SE135N I.C(HYBRID)
OTHERSCF1001 QAX0349-001 CERAMIC FILTERCF1021 QAX0639-001Z CERAMIC FILTERCF1041 QAX0642-001Z CERAMIC FILTER
! CP1932-34 ICP-N75-Y I.C.PROTECT! CP1936 ICP-N75-Y I.C.PROTECT! F1905 QMFZ034-5R0Z-J1 FUSE! FR1521 QRK126J-150X C R 15Ø 1/2W J! FR1523-24 QRX029J-3R3 MF R 3.3Ø 2W J
OTHERS! FR1525 QRZ9017-4R7 F R 4.7Ø 1/4W J
J1601-02 QNN0349-002 PIN JACKJ1810 QNS0001-001 JACKK1401 QQR0621-002Z BEADS COREK1912 QQR0582-001Z BEADS COREK1916-17 QQR0582-001Z BEADS COREK1920 QQR0872-002 FERRITE BEADSK1931-33 QQR0582-001Z BEADS CORE
K1935 QQR0582-001Z BEADS COREK1937 QQR0582-001Z BEADS COREK1939 QQR0621-002Z BEADS CORELC1601-06 NQR0169-001X EMI FILTER
! PC1921 TLP621(B) I.C(PH.COUPLER)! RY1941 QSK0120-001 RELAY! RY1951 QSK0113-001 RELAY
SF1011 QAX0324-002 SAW FILTER
! TH1901 CEKP007-002 P.THERMISTOR! TU1001 QAU0234-001 TUNER
W1106 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1111 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1113 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1131 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1140 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1154 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J
W1162 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1195 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1202 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1206 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1212-14 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1250 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1254-55 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1265 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J
W1267 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1269 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1274 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1291 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1298 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1310-11 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1313 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1330-31 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J
W1381 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1385 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1404 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1408 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1413 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1416 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1434-35 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1437-38 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J
W1440 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1442-43 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1447-48 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1454-55 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1464 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1478 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1487-89 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1492-96 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J
W1498 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1501 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1503 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1508 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1510-11 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1514-16 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1523-28 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1536 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J
W1540 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1542 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1546 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1548-49 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1557-59 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1564 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1567-69 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1572 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J
! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local ! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local
AV-36F802
54 No. 51907B
OTHERSW1575-81 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1584-85 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1587 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1590-91 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1600 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1604 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW1612 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JX1201 CE40668-001Z CRYSTAL
X1700 QAX0307-001 CER.RESONATORY1002-03 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JY1150 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JY1152 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JY1156 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JY1652-54 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JY1701 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JY1703 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J
Y1712 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JY1714 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JY1800 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JY1902-03 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JY1911 NDC31HJ-101X C CAP. 100pF 50V J
DAF PW BOARD ASS’Y(SAC-2605A-M2)! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local
Refer to PARTS LIST in page 46 for this PW BOARD.
CRT SOCKET PW BOARD ASS’Y(SAC-3513A-M2)! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local
Refer to PARTS LIST in page 46 for this PW BOARD.
FRONT CONTROL PW BOARD ASS’Y(SAC-8507A-M2)! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local
Refer to PARTS LIST in page 47 for this PW BOARD.
POWER SW PW BOARD ASS’Y(SAC-8601A-M2)! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local
Refer to PARTS LIST in page 47 for this PW BOARD.
LF PW BOARD ASS’Y(SAC-9506A-M2)! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local
Refer to PARTS LIST in page 47 for this PW BOARD.
RESISTORR0001-02 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR0003-04 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR0005 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR0011 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR0121 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR0301 NRSA63J-473X MG R 47kØ 1/16W JR0303 NRSA63J-222X MG R 2.2kØ 1/16W JR0304 NRSA63J-473X MG R 47kØ 1/16W J
R0306 NRSA63J-222X MG R 2.2kØ 1/16W JR0307-08 NRSA63J-332X MG R 3.3kØ 1/16W JR0309 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR0311 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR0313 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR0314 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR0316 NRSA63J-331X MG R 330Ø 1/16W JR0317 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J
R0331 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR0337 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR0343 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J
CAPACITORC0003-04 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC0006 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC0008 QETN1EM-476Z E CAP. 47µF 25V MC0301-02 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JC0312-13 NDC31HJ-270X C CAP. 27pF 50V JC0314 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC0315 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC0316-18 NCB21HK-104X C CAP. 0.1µF 50V K
C0319 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC0320 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC0321 QETN1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V MC0322 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC0323 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC0324-25 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC0326 NCB21HK-104X C CAP. 0.1µF 50V KC0327 QETN1HM-225Z E CAP. 2.2µF 50V M
C0328 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC0329 QETN1HM-225Z E CAP. 2.2µF 50V MC0330 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC0331 NCB21HK-104X C CAP. 0.1µF 50V KC0333 NDC31HJ-680X C CAP. 68pF 50V J
COILL0302-04 QQL244J-6R8Z COIL 6.8µH J
DIODED0301 1SS133-T2 SI.DIODE
TRANSISTORQ0301-03 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTOR
ICIC0001 AN7805F I.C(MONO-ANA)IC0301 SDA9389X-X I.C(DIGI-MOS)
OTHERS! TU0001 QAU0206-001 TUNER
W0047 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW0066 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JX0301 QAX0521-001Z CRYSTALY0301-02 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JY0331-33 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J
PIP PW BOARD ASS’Y(SAC0P501A-M2)
AV-36F802
No. 51907B 55
! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local ! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local
AV-
36F
802
RESISTORR0081 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR0082 NRSA63J-682X MG R 6.8kØ 1/16W JR0083 NRSA63J-153X MG R 15kØ 1/16W JR0084 NRSA63J-683X MG R 68kØ 1/16W JR0085 NRSA63J-332X MG R 3.3kØ 1/16W JR0086 NRSA63J-333X MG R 33kØ 1/16W JR0087 NRVA02D-153X MF R 15kØ 1/10W±0.5%R0088 NRVA02D-152X MF R 1.5kØ 1/10W±0.5%
R0089 NRSA63J-562X MG R 5.6kØ 1/16W JR0090 NRSA63J-563X MG R 56kØ 1/16W JR0151-54 NRSA63J-223X MG R 22kØ 1/16W JR0155 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR0157 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR0159 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR0202 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR0301-02 NRSA63J-222X MG R 2.2kØ 1/16W J
R0303-04 NRSA63J-221X MG R 220Ø 1/16W JR0305-06 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR0331-34 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR0371-74 NRSA63J-103X MG R 10kØ 1/16W JR0375-76 NRSA63J-333X MG R 33kØ 1/16W JR0377-78 NRSA63J-472X MG R 4.7kØ 1/16W JR0381 NRSA63J-682X MG R 6.8kØ 1/16W JR0382 NRSA63J-223X MG R 22kØ 1/16W J
R0384-87 NRSA63J-223X MG R 22kØ 1/16W JR0391-92 NRSA63J-221X MG R 220Ø 1/16W JR0393-94 NRSA63J-823X MG R 82kØ 1/16W JR0395-96 NRSA63J-221X MG R 220Ø 1/16W JR0401 NRSA63J-183X MG R 18kØ 1/16W JR0402 NRSA63J-223X MG R 22kØ 1/16W JR0458 NRSA63J-333X MG R 33kØ 1/16W JR0459 NRSA63J-183X MG R 18kØ 1/16W J
R0501-02 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR0503 NRSA63J-221X MG R 220Ø 1/16W JR0504-05 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR0507-08 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR0509 NRSA63J-221X MG R 220Ø 1/16W JR0510-11 NRSA63J-102X MG R 1kØ 1/16W JR0518 NRSA63J-333X MG R 33kØ 1/16W JR0519-21 NRSA63J-750X MG R 75Ø 1/16W J
R0522-23 NRSA63J-224X MG R 220kØ 1/16W JR0527 NRSA63J-750X MG R 75Ø 1/16W JR0528-29 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR0532-35 NRSA63J-224X MG R 220kØ 1/16W JR0558-61 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR0564-65 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JR0566-67 NRSA63J-331X MG R 330Ø 1/16W JR0568 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J
R0571 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR0573 NRSA63J-272X MG R 2.7kØ 1/16W JR0901 NRSA63J-101X MG R 100Ø 1/16W JR0906 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J
CAPACITORC0081 NCB21HK-104X C CAP. 0.1µF 50V KC0082 QENC1HM-475Z BP E CAP. 4.7µF 50V MC0083 QENC1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V MC0084 QETN1HM-225Z E CAP. 2.2µF 50V MC0085 NCB21HK-473X C CAP. 0.047µF 50V KC0086 QETN1HM-474Z E CAP. 0.47µF 50V MC0087-88 NCB21HK-104X C CAP. 0.1µF 50V KC0089 QBTC1CK-335Z TAN.CAP. 3.3µF 16V K
C0090 QETN1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V MC0091 QBTC1CK-106Z TAN.CAP. 10µF 16V KC0092-93 QETN1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V MC0094 QETN1HM-475Z E CAP. 4.7µF 50V MC0095 QETN1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V MC0151-52 QENC1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V MC0153-54 NCB31HK-332X C CAP. 3300pF 50V KC0155-56 NCB21HK-333X C CAP. 0.033µF 50V K
AV SELECTOR PW BOARD ASS’Y(SAC0S505A-M2)
CAPACITORC0157-58 QETN1HM-106Z E CAP. 10µF 50V MC0159 QETN1EM-476Z E CAP. 47µF 25V MC0160 NCB21HK-104X C CAP. 0.1µF 50V KC0309-10 NCB31HK-102X C CAP. 1000pF 50V KC0311-12 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JC0331 QETN1CM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 16V MC0332 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC0333 QETN1EM-476Z E CAP. 47µF 25V M
C0334 NCB21HK-273X C CAP. 0.027µF 50V KC0335 QETN1HM-225Z E CAP. 2.2µF 50V MC0336 NCB31HK-222X C CAP. 2200pF 50V KC0337 NCB21HK-104X C CAP. 0.1µF 50V KC0338 QETN1HM-225Z E CAP. 2.2µF 50V MC0339 NCB31HK-222X C CAP. 2200pF 50V KC0340 NCB21HK-104X C CAP. 0.1µF 50V KC0343 QETN1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V M
C0344-45 QENC1HM-225Z BP E CAP. 2.2µF 50V MC0371-72 QENC1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V MC0373 QETN1EM-476Z E CAP. 47µF 25V MC0391-92 QETN1HM-474Z E CAP. 0.47µF 50V MC0401 QETN1CM-107Z E CAP. 100µF 16V MC0402-03 NCF21CZ-105X C CAP. 1µF 16V ZC0404 QFV71HJ-224Z MF CAP. 0.22µF 50V JC0407 QETN1EM-108Z E CAP. 1000µF 25V M
C0410-11 QETN1EM-108Z E CAP. 1000µF 25V MC0412-13 QETN1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V MC0501-02 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC0503 QETN1HM-226Z E CAP. 22µF 50V MC0504 QETN1EM-476Z E CAP. 47µF 25V MC0505 QENC1HM-474Z BP E CAP. 0.47µF 50V MC0508 QETN1HM-474Z E CAP. 0.47µF 50V MC0509 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V K
C0511 QETN1HM-474Z E CAP. 0.47µF 50V MC0512-13 QETN1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V MC0517 QETN1HM-474Z E CAP. 0.47µF 50V MC0520-23 QETN1HM-105Z E CAP. 1µF 50V MC0533-34 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V KC0538-39 NCB31HK-103X C CAP. 0.01µF 50V K
DIODED0391-92 MTZJ10C-T2 ZENER DIODED0501-05 MTZJ10C-T2 ZENER DIODED0507-09 MTZJ10C-T2 ZENER DIODED0511 MTZJ10C-T2 ZENER DIODED0515-19 MTZJ10C-T2 ZENER DIODED0521 MTZJ10C-T2 ZENER DIODED0527-28 MTZJ10C-T2 ZENER DIODE
TRANSISTORQ0301-02 DTC124EKA-X DIGI.TRANSISTORQ0381-82 DTC124EKA-X DIGI.TRANSISTORQ0384-87 DTC323TK-X DIGI.TRANSISTORQ0453 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTORQ0454 DTC124EKA-X DIGI.TRANSISTORQ0509 2SC2412K/QR/-X SI.TRANSISTOR
ICIC0001 UPC1851BCU I.C(MONO-ANA)IC0151 NJM2150AD I.C(MONO-ANA)IC0371 BA15218N I.C(MONO-ANA)IC0381 TC4066BP/N/ I.C(DIGI-MOS)IC0401 LA4485 I.C(MONO-ANA)IC0501 CXA2089Q-X I.C(MONO-ANA)
! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local ! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local
AV-36F802
56 No. 51907B
OTHERSJ0501 QNZ0454-001 PIN JACKJ0502 QNN0349-001 PIN JACKJ0503-04 QNN0348-001 PIN JACKW0003 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW0011 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW0031-33 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW0050 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW0085-87 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J
W0099 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW0109 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW0115 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW0117 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW0142 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW0148 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW0151 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW0154 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J
W0158 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW0162-64 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW0170 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW0172 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW0176-80 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW0184 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W JW0186-89 NRSA63J-0R0X MG R 0.0Ø 1/16W J
3D Y/C MODULE PW BOARD ASS’Y(SAC-0Y501A)! Symbol No. Part No. Part Name Description Local
OTHERSSAC-0Y501A 3D Y/C MODILE
REMOTE CONTROL UNIT PARTSLIST (RM-C301G-2A)! Ref.No. Part No. Part Name Description Local
UR52EC1286C BATTERY COVER
AV-36F702AV-36F802
No. 51907B 57
PACKING PARTS LIST! Ref.No. Part No. Part Name Description Local
1 CP30055-A02-A TOP COVER2 CP30056-004-A POLY BAG3 RM-C301G-2A RC HAND UNIT (AV-36F702)3 RM-C303G-1A RC HAND UNIT (AV-36F802)4 LC11157-002A-A CUSHION ASSY 4pcs in 1set5 LC10181-030A-A PACKING CASE
! 6 LCT0821-001E-A INST BOOK [ENGLISH]7 CM36616-001-A CORNER LABEL 2pcs in 1set
8 BT-51028-1Q REGIST CARD9 BT-52004-1Q WARRANTY CARD10 QPA02503505 POLY BAG
PACKING
7
75
1
4
2
10
3 6
8 9
4
4
COLOR TELEVISIONUSER'S GUIDE
For models:AV-36F802AV-36F702AV-32F802AV-32F702AV-27F802AV-27F702
Illustration of AV-27F802 and RM-C301G
IMPORTANT NOTE TO THE CUSTOMERIn the spaces below, enter the model and serial number of your television (locat-ed at the rear of the television cabinet). Staple your sales receipt or invoice tothe inside cover of this guide. Keep this user's guide in a convenient place for
future reference. Keep the carton and original packaging for future use.
Model NumberSerial Number
LCT0821-001E-A0901-TN-FAA-JIM
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 1
IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARDS, DO NOTEXPOSE THIS TV SET TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
CAUTION: TO INSURE PERSONAL SAFETY, OBSERVE THEFOLLOWING RULES REGARDING THE USE OFTHIS UNIT.
1.Operate only from the power source specified on the unit.2. Avoid damaging the AC plug and power cord.3. Avoid Improper installation and never position the unit where good venti-
lation is unattainable.4. Do not allow objects or liquid into the cabinet openings.5.In the event of trouble, unplug the unit and call a service technician.Do
not attempt to repair it yourself or remove the rear cover.
Changes or modifications not approved by JVC could void the warranty.
* When you don’t use this TV set for a long period of time, be sure to dis-connect both the power plug from the AC outlet and antenna for yoursafety.
* To prevent electric shock do not use this polarized plug with an extensioncord, receptacle or other outlet unless the blades can be fully inserted toprevent blade exposure.
CAUTION:To reduce the risk of electric shock.Do not remove cover (or back).
No user serviceable parts inside.Refer servicing to qualified service personnel.
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, with-in an equilateral triangle is intended to alert theuser to the presence of uninsulated “dangerousvoltage” within the product’s enclosure that maybe of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk ofelectric shock to persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral trian-gle is intended to alert the user to the presenceof important operating and maintenance (servic-ing) instructions in the literature accompanyingthe appliance.
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCKDO NOT OPEN
CAUTION
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 2
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS
CAUTION:
Please read and retain for your safety.Electrical energy can perform many useful functions. This TV set has been engineered andmanufactured to assure your personal safety. But improper use can result in potential electricalshock or fire hazards. In order not to defeat the safeguards incorporated in this TVset,observe the following basic rules for its installation, use and servicing.And also follow all warnings and instructions marked on your TV set.
INSTALLATION1 Your TV set is equipped with a polarized AC line plug (one blade of the plug is wider than the
other).
This safety feature allows the plug to fit into the power outlet only one way. Should you beunable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing the plug.Should it still fail to fit, contact your electrician.
2 Operate the TVset only from a power source as indicated on the TV set or refer to the oper-ating instructions for this information. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to yourhome, consult your TV set dealer or local power company.For battery operation, refer to theoperating instructions.
3 Overloaded AC outlets and extension cords are dangerous, and so are frayed power cordsand broken plugs. They may result in a shock or fire hazard. Call your service technician forreplacement.
4 Do not allow anything to rest on or roll over the power cord, and do not place the TV setwhere power cord is subject to traffic or abuse. This may result in a shock or fire hazard.
5 Do not use this TV set near water — for example, near a bathtub, washbowl, kitchen sink, orlaundry tub, in a wet basement, or near swimming pool, etc.
6 If an outside antenna is connected to the TV set, be sure the antenna system is grounded soas to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Section810 of the National Electrical Code provides information with respect to proper grounding ofthe mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna dischargeunit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection require-ments for the grounding electrode.
(POLARIZED-TYPE)
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 3
7 An outside antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines orother electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits.When installing an outside antenna system, extreme care should be taken to keep fromtouching such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be fatal.
8 TV sets are provided with ventilation openings in the cabinet to allow heat generated duringoperation to be released.Therefore:— Never block the bottom ventilation slots of a portable TV set by placing it on a bed, sofa,
rug, etc.— Never place a TV set in a “built-in” enclosure unless proper ventilation is provided.— Never cover the openings with a cloth or other material.— Never place the TV set near or over a radiator or heat register.
9 To avoid personal injury:— Do not place a TV set on a sloping shelf unless properly secured.— Use only a cart or stand recommended by the TVset manufacturer.— Do not try to roll a cart with small casters across thresholds or deep pile carpets.—Wall or shelf mounting should follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a
mounting kit approved by the manufacturer.
USE10 Caution children about dropping or pushing objects into the TV set through cabinet open-
ings. Some internal parts carry hazardous voltages and contact can result in a fire or elec-trical shock.
11 Unplug the TV set from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid or an aerosolcleaner.
12 Never add accessories to a TV set that has not been designed for this purpose. Such addi-tions may result in a hazard.
EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDINGAS PER NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 4
13 For added protection of the TV set during a lightning storm or when the TV set is to be leftunattended for an extended period of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect theantenna.This will prevent damage to product due to lightning storms or power line surges.
14 A TVset and cart combination should be moved withcare. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven sur-faces may cause the TV set and cart combination tooverturn.
SERVICE15 Unplug this TV set from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel
under the following conditions:A.When the power cord or plug is damaged or frayed.B. If liquid has been spilled into the TV set.C. If the TV set has been exposed to rain or water.D. If the TV set does not operate normally by following the operating instructions. Adjust
only those controls that are covered in the operating instructions as improper adjustmentof other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a quali-fied technician to restore the TV set to normal operation.
E.If the TV set has been dropped or damaged in any way.F.When the TV set exhibits a distinct change in performance — this indicates a need for
service.
16 Do not attempt to service this TV set yourself as opening or removing covers may exposeyou to dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to qualified service person-nel.
17 When replacement parts are required, have the service technician verify in writing that thereplacement parts he uses have the same safety characteristics as the original parts. Useof manufacturer’s specified replacement parts can prevent fire, shock, or other hazards.
18 Upon completion of any service or repairs to this TV set, please ask the service technicianto perform the safety check described in the manufacturer’s service literature.
19 When a TV set reaches the end of its useful life, improper disposal could result in a picturetube implosion.Ask a qualified service technician to dispose of the TV set.
20 Note to CATV system installer.This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s attention to Article 820-40 ofthe NEC that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that thecable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to thepoint of cable entry as practical.
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 5
PICTURE SETTINGS . . . . . . . 34Tint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Bright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Noise Muting . . . . . . . . . . . 35Set Video Status . . . . . . . . . . 35
SOUND SETTINGS . . . . . . . 36Bass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 6Treble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36MTS (Multi-channel Sound) . . . . 36
GENERAL ITEMS . . . . . . . . 37Purity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37On/Off Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . 37TV Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Audio Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38V4 Component-In/V2 Component-In . . . . . . . . . 39Closed Caption . . . . . . . . . . 39
BUTTON FUNCTIONS . . . . . . 40Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Exit and PIP Off . . . . . . . . . 40Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Video Status . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Sleep Timer . . . . . . . . . . . 41Hyper Surround . . . . . . . . . 41Muting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41BBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42100+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Return+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42VCR Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . 43DV D Buttons . . . . . . . . . . 4 3TV/CATV Switch . . . . . . . . . . 43VCR/DVD Switch . . . . . . . . . 43Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
PIP (Picture-In-Picture) . . . . . 44Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . 44On/Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44Freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Swap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Channel +/– . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
APPENDICES . . . . . . . . . . .46Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . 46Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Authorized Service Centers . . 49Search Codes . . . . . . . . . . 50Specifications . . . . . . . . . . .51
Table of ContentsUNPACKING YOUR TV . . . . . 7
QUICK SETUP. . . . . . . . . . . 8Getting Started . . . . . . . . . 8Remote Control . . . . . . . . . 8Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8Basic Operation . . . . . . . . . 8Making Basic Connections . . . 9Plug In Menu . . . . . . . . . . 10
CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . 11Cable and VCR Connections . . . . . . . 11Connecting to a DVD Player . . . . . . . . 14Connecting to an External Amplifier . . . . 15Connecting to a Camcorder . . . . . . . . 15Connecting to JVC AV Compu Link . . . . 6
REMOTE CONTROL . . . . . . 17Remote Control Basics . . . . . 17Changing the Batteries . . . . . 17
REMOTE PROGRAMMING . . . 18CATV and Satellite Codes . . . 18VCR Codes . . . . . . . . . . . 19DVD Codes . . . . . . . . . . . 20
ONSCREEN MENUS . . . . . . 21Using the Guide . . . . . . . . 21The Onscreen Menus . . . . . . 21
PLUG IN MENU . . . . . . . . . 22Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . 22Language . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Auto Tuner Setup . . . . . . . . 22Auto Clock Set . . . . . . . . . 23Manual Clock Set . . . . . . . . 24Finish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
CHANNEL SUMMARY . . . . . 25Channel Summary . . . . . . . 25
V–CHIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26US V–Chip Ratings . . . . . . . 27Setting US V–Chip Ratings . . . 28Directions . . . . . . . . . . . . 28Set Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . 29Movie Ratings . . . . . . . . . . 30Directions for Movie Settings . 30Canadian V–Chip Ratings . . . 31Canadian V–Chip Directions . . 31Unrated Programs . . . . . . . 32Set Lock Code . . . . . . . . . 33
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 6
Two AA Batteries1 Television
1 Remote Control
Thank you for your purchase of a JVC Color Television. Before you begin setting up your newtelevision, please check to make sure you have all of the following items. In addition to thisguide, your television box should include:
Once you have unpacked your television, the next step is to connect it to your antenna/cableor satellite system and to connect the audio/video devices you want to use with your televi-sion. To make these connections you will use plugs like the ones illustrated below.
A/V Input PlugRF ConnectorsUsed to connect acoaxial cable from anexternal antenna or CableTV system.
A matching TV stand is also available(optional).
Used to make video con-nections with VCRs,DVDs, Camcorders, etc(optional).
Used to connect JVC AVCompu Link capable components foran automated home the-ater.
Used to connectaudio/video devices likeVCRs, DVD players, stereoamplifiers, game consoles,etc.
S-Video Plug
AV Compu Link Cable
We recommend that before you start using your new television, you read your entire User’sGuide so you can learn about your new television’s many great features. But if you’re anxiousto start using your television right away, a quick setup guide follows on the next three pages.
Unpacking Your Television
7
Note: Your remote control may differ fromthe example illustratedhere.
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 7
8
Slide the cover on the back of the remote down towards the bottom of the remote control.Insert two batteries (included) carefully noting the “+”and “–” markings, placing the “–”end inthe unit first. Slide the cover back into place.
Getting StartedThese quick setup pages will provide you, in three easy steps, with the basic information youneed to begin using your new television right away. This information includes basic instructionson operating your remote control, making a simple cable/antenna and optional VCR connectionand, finally, information on programming your television's Auto Tuner.
If you have questions, or for more detailed information on any of these steps, please consultother sections of this manual.
Step One - The Remote ControlThe remote control is the key to operating your television's many great features. Before youcan operate your remote control, you first need to install the batteries (included).
Basic OperationTurn the television on and off by pressing the POWER button at the top right corner of theremote.
The four key feature buttons at the center of the remote can be used for basic operation of the television.The top and bottom buttons will scan forward and back through the available chan-nels. The right and left buttons will turn the volume up or down.These buttons are also markedwith four arrows and are also used with JVC's onscreen menu system. You will need to usethese buttons later in the Quick Setup.
The next step is to connect your television to an antenna or cable.
Power Button Key Feature Buttons
+Proceed to Step Two
Quick Setup 1
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 8
9
Cable/RF connector
Step Two - Making Basic ConnectionsNext you will need to connect your television to an antenna or cable system. The most basic antenna/cable connection is shown below. For more detailed connections, such as ones wherea cable box is required, see pages 11 to 13.
1) Connect the yellow video cable out from the VCR’s Video Output, in to the TV’s Video Input jack, OR connect an S-Video cable from the VCR’s S-Video output, to the TV’sS-Video input.
2) Connect the white audio cable out from the VCR’s Left Audio Output, in to the TV’s Left Audio Input Jack.
3) Connect the red audio cable out from the VCR’s Right Audio Output, in to the TV’s RightAudio Input jack.
Finally, once you have finished your connections, plug the power cord into the nearest poweroutlet and turn on the television.
1) Connect an RF cable out from the wall outlet in to the RF Input on the back of the TV.
+Proceed to Step Three
Quick Setup 2
Illustration of AV-27F802
You may also wish to connect a VCR at this point. A basic VCR connection is shown below.For detailed instructions on connecting a other components or a home theater system, seepages 14 to 16.
NOTE: A VCRis not required to operate your television.
Illustration of AV-27F802
AV Cables/Plugs
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 9
10
Press the buttons to move to AUTO TUNER SETUPPress the buttons to begin AUTO TUNER SETUP
To choose CABLE (if you are connected to a cable system) or AIR (if you use an antenna)To move to STARTTo start Auto Tuner Setup
The Auto Tuner will now memorize all of the clear, active channels your television canreceive. This will take one or two minutes.
NOW PROGRAMMING!
48
TUNER MODE : CABLE AIR
START
Step Three - The Plug In MenuWhen you turn your television on for the first time the Plug In Menu will appear. This menusets some of the basic settings for your television. A complete description of the Plug In Menucan be found starting on page 22. We recommend you complete the Plug In Menu itemsbefore you start using your television. But to begin watching your television right away you onlyneed to run the Auto Tuner Setup. This lets your television learn the channels it is able toreceive. To run the Auto Tuner Setup follow the steps below.
The Auto Tuner is finished when the message PROGRAMMING OVER! appears onscreen.
Your Quick Setup is now complete. You can now begin watching your television, or you cancontinue on in this guide for more information on connecting audio/video devices, programmingyour remote control, or using the JVC onscreen menu system to customize your televisionviewing experience.
PLUG IN MENU
LANGUAGE ENG FRE SPAAUTO TUNER SETUPSET CLOCK
FINISH
SELECT BYOPERATE BY EXIT BY
EXIT
The Quick Setup is complete
Quick Setup 3
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 10
Connections
1) Connect the antenna or cable TV wire from the wall outlet, in to the RF Input of the two-waysplitter.
2) Connect an RFcable from the one of the RF Outputs on the splitter, in to the RF Input on the back of the VCR.
3) Connect an RFcable from the other the RFOutput on the splitter, in to the RF Input on theback of the TV.
4) Connect the yellow video cable out from the VCR’s Video Output, in to the TV’s Video Inputjack, OR connect an S-Video cable from the VCR’s S-Video output, to the TV’s S-Video input.
5) Connect the white audio cable out from the VCR’s Left Audio Output, in to the TV’s LeftAudio Input Jack.
6) Connect the red audio cable out from the VCR’s Right Audio Output, in to the TV’s RightAudio Input jack.
• If your VCRis a mono sound unit, it will have only one Audio Out jack. Connect it to the TV’s Left Audio Input.
• Please consult your VCR’s owner’s manual for more information on its operation.
There are three basic types of antenna or cable connections:• If you have an antenna or have a cable system that does not require you use a cable box
to select channels, please refer to Diagram #1.• If you have a cable system that requires the use of a cable box to access all the chan-
nels, please refer to Diagram #2. If you cannot operate your Picture-In-Picture function using Diagram #2, try the connection shown in Diagram #3. It is possible yocable box allows the signal of only one channel at a time to be sent to your television.
• If you have a cable system that requires the use of a cable box to access certain premium channels, but not “basic”cable channels, please refer to Diagram #3.
• For your convenience, connection to a VCR is also shown in the following diagrams. AVCR is not necessary for operation of the television or Picture-In-Picture (PIP) function.You may omit the VCR from your connections if you wish.
• For instructions on connecting a VCR only, please see the Quick Setup on page 9.• For information on using PIP, please see page 44.
• The PIP feature is available on models AV-36F802, AV-32F802 and AV-27F802 only.
Cable and VCR Connections
11
Illustration of AV-27F802
Diagram #1
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 11
Connections
12
1) Connect the antenna or cable TV wire from the wall outlet, in to the RFInput of the cablebox.
2) Connect an RF cable from the RFOutput of the cable box, in to the RFInput on the back of the VCR.
3) Connect an RF cable from the RF Output of the VCR, in to the RF Input on the back of the TV.
4) Connect the yellow video cable out from the VCR’s Video Output, in to the TV’s Video Input jack, OR connect an S-Video cable from the VCR’s S-Video output, to the TV’s S-Video input.
5) Connect the white audio cable out from the VCR’s Left Audio Output, in to the TV’s Left Audio Input Jack.
6) Connect the red audio cable out from the VCR’s Right Audio Output, in to the TV’s Right Audio Input jack.
• Please see page 44 for information on using the PIP feature with a Cable Box.• If your VCRis a mono sound unit, it will have only one Audio Out jack. Connect it to the TV’s
Left Audio Input.• Please consult your VCR’s owner’s manual for more information on its operation.
Cable and VCR Connections - Continued
Illustration of AV-27F802
Diagram #2
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 12
Connections
13
The connection diagrams are intended to show some basic general connections.Some cable companies may require special connections to properly use your televi-sion or 2-tuner PIP function. If you follow these diagrams and either the television orPIPdoes not work properly, contact your local cable operator for more connectioninformation. Please see page 44 for more information on the PIP feature.
Cable and VCR Connections - Continued
1) Connect the antenna or cable TV wire from the wall outlet, in to the RF Input of the two-waysplitter.
2) Connect an RFcable from the one of the RFOutputs on the splitter, in to the cable box RFInput.
3) Connect an RF cable from the Cable Box Output, in to the VCR RF Input.4) Connect an RFcable from the other the RFOutput on the splitter, in to the RF Input on the
back of the TV.5) Connect the yellow video cable out from the VCR’s Video Output, in to the TV’s Video Input
jack, OR connect an S-Video cable from the VCR’s S-Video output, to the TV’s S-Videoinput.
6) Connect the white audio cable out from the VCR’s Left Audio Output, in to the TV’s LeftAudio Input jack.
7) Connect the red audio cable out from the VCR’s Right Audio Output, in to the TV’s Right Audio Input jack.
• Please see page 44 for information on using the PIP feature with a Cable Box.• If your VCRis a mono sound unit, it will have only one Audio Out jack. Connect it to the
TV’s Left Audio Input.• Please consult your VCR’s owner’s manual for more information on its operation.
Illustration of AV-27F802
Diagram #3
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 13
Connections
14
1) Connect Green cable out from DVD player “Y”Component Output, in to TV“Y” ComponentInput.
2) Connect Blue cable out from DVDplayer “PB” Component Output, in to TV “PB” ComponentInput.
3) Connect Red cable out from DVD Player “PR” Component Output, in to TV “PR” ComponentInput.
4) Connect White Audio cable out from DVDLeft Audio Output, in to TV Left Audio Input 2.
5) Connect Red Audio cable out from DVDRight Audio Output, in to TVRight Audio Input 2.
• Green, blue and red are the most common colors for DVD cables . Some models may varycolors. Please consult the user’s manual for your DVD Player for more information.
• Be careful not to confuse the red DVD cable with the red audio cable. It is best to completeone set of connections (DVDor Audio Output) before starting the other to avoid accidentallyswitching the cables.
• See page 20 for instructions on programming your remote control to operate the basic func-tions of your DVD player.
• AV-36F802, AV-32F802 & AV-27F802: You may also connect the DVD player to Input 4. Ifyou use Input 4 for the DVD connection, you must set the V4 COMPONENT-IN on the initialSetup Menu to “YES” for proper display of the DVD signal.
• AV-36F702, AV-32F702 & AV-27F702: If you use Input 2 (Component-In) for the DVDcon-nection, you must set the V2 COMPONENT-IN on the initial Setup Menu to “YES” for prop-er display of the DVD signal.
NOTE: Progressive DVDPlayers (players with an output scan of 31.5 KHz) will not work prop-erly with this television.
Connecting to a DVD player
Illustration of AV-27F802
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 14
Connections
1) Connect the yellow video cable out from the Camcorder’s Video Output, in to the TV’s VideoInput jack, OR connect an S-Video cable from the Camcorder’s S-Video output, to the TV’sS-Video Input.
2) Connect the white audio cable out from the Camcorder’s Left Audio Output, in to the TV’sLeft Audio Input jack.
3) Connect the red audio cable out from the Camcorder’s Right Audio Output, in to the TV’sRight Audio Input jack.
• If your Camcorder is a mono sound model it will have only one audio jack. Connect it to the TV’s Left Audio jack.
Connecting to an External Amplifier
Connecting to a Camcorder
1) Connect the white audio cable from the TV’s Left Audio Output jack to the Amplifier’s LeftAudio Input jack.
2) Connect the red audio cable from the TV’s Right Audio Output jack to the Amplifier’s RightAudio Input jack.
• See also “TV Speaker” and “Audio Out”on page 38 for more information on using externalspeakers.
You may connect a camcorder to your television by using the front Input Jacks (Input 3)located under the front panel door. To access, press lightly on the door to open it. You mayalso connect a game console or other equipment using these jacks. Camcorders may alsobe connected to the television’s rear input jacks.
Illustration of AV-27F802
Illustration of AV-27F802
15
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 15
Connections
16
To Connect: Plug one end of the AV Compu Link cable into the AV Compu Link input on yourVCR, DVD, or other Compu Link device. Plug the other end of the AV Compu Link cable intothe AV Compu Link input at the rear of the television.
Connecting to JVC AV Compu Link
JVC’s AV Compu Link feature makes playing video tapes or DVDs totally automatic. Simplyinsert a pre-recorded tape into your JVC-brand VCR or DVD into your JVC DVD player andthe device will automatically turn on and begin playback. At the same time, using the AVCompu Link, the VCR or DVD player sends a signal to the television telling it to turn on andswitch to the proper video input.• The AV Compu Link cable may be included with the JVC AV Compu Link accessory you
wish to connect. If it is not, contact an authorized JVCService Center forpart # EWP 805-012.
• AV Compu Link can only be used with JVC-brand products.
NOTE:• In order for the VCR playback to begin automatically, the recording tabs must be remove from
the VHS tape. If the tab is in place, automatic switching will occur when you push the VCR’sPLAY button.
• The AV Compu Link cable has a male 3.5 mm (mono) plug on each end.• If your JVC-brand VCR has “A Code/B Code Remote Control Switching”(see your VCR’s
instruction book), using VCR A Code will switch the TV to input 1.• To connect a JVC HiFi receiver or amplifier for a completely automated home theater, see
the HiFi’s connection instructions for detailed connection information.• AV COMPU LINK EX is compatible with the following receivers:RX-664V, RX-665V,
RX-668VBK, RX-774V, RX-778VBK, RX-884V, RX-888VBK, RX-1024V, RX-1028VBK, andlater receiver models.
Illustration of AV-27F802
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 16
Remote Control
• Before you can operate the remote control, you must firstinstall the batteries (included). See “Changing theBatteries” at the bottom of this page for instructions. (Foran illustration, please see page 8.)
• Press the POWER button to turn the television on or off.
• Make sure the TV/CATV switch is set to TV. Move theswitch to CATV only if you need to operate a cable box.
• Slide the VCR/DVD selector switch to VCR to control aVCR, slide to DVD to control a DVD player. Please seepages 18 to 20 for instructions on programming yourremote control to operate a Cable box, VCR or DVD player.
• Press the CH+ and CH– buttons to scan through the chan-nels. Tap the CH+ or CH– button to move through thechannels one channel at a time.
• To move rapidly through the channels using JVC’sHyperscan feature, press and hold CH+ or CH–. Thechannels will zip by at a rate of five channels per second.
• Press VOL+ or VOL– to raise or lower the volume. An indi-cator bar will appear onscreen to show you the televisionvolume level.
• The CH+/– and VOL+/– buttons are also used to navigateJVC’s onscreen menu system.
• You can directly access specific channels using the 10-keypad.
• For more information on remote control button features,see pages 40 to 45. For information on using theonscreen menus, see page 21.
Changing the Batteries Push down on the remote’s back cover and slide towards the bottom to remove it.Insert two AA batteries (supplied), carefully noting the "+" and "–" markings on the batteriesand on the remote control. To avoid a potential short circuit, insert the "–" end first. Be sure touse only size AA batteries.When batteries are installed, slide the cover back into place (until it clicks into position).• If the remote control acts erratically, replace the batteries . Typical battery life is six months to
one year. We recommend using alkaline batteries for longer battery life. When you changethe batteries, try to complete the task within three minutes. If you take longer than three min -utes, the remote control codes for your VCR, DVD, and/or Cable Box may have to be reset(see pages 18-20).
Remote Control Basics
NOTE: Remote control model RM-C301G is shown at theleft. A different model remote control may have come withyour television.
17
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 17
Remote ProgrammingSetting the CATV, VCR and DVD Codes
You can program your remote to operate your cable box, satellite receiver, VCR or DVD player by using the instructions and codes listed below. If the equipment does not respondto any of the codes listed below or to the code search function, use the remote control sup-plied by the manufacturer.
Cable Box or Satellite codesThe remote control is programmed with CATV and/or Satellite codes for power on, power off,channel up, channel down, and 10 key operation.1) Find the CATV/Satellite brand from the list of codes shown below.2) Slide the 2-way selector switch to “CATV”.3) Press and hold down the DISPLAY button.4) With the DISPLAY button held down, enter the first code number listed using the 10 key pad.5) Release the DISPLAY button.6) Confirm the operation of the Cable Box/Satellite receiver.
• If your CATVor Satellite box does not respond to the first code, try the others listed. If itdoes not respond to any code, try the Search Codes Function, on page 50.
18
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 18
Remote ProgrammingVCR codesThe remote control is programmed with VCR codes for power on, power off, play, stop,fast-forward, rewind, pause, record, channel up, and channel down operation.1) Find the VCR brand from the list of codes shown below.2) Slide the first 2-way selector switch to “TV” and the other 2-way selector switch to “VCR”.3) Press and hold down the DISPLAY button.4) With the DISPLAY button held down, enter the first code number listed with the 10 key pad.5) Release the DISPLAY button.6) Confirm the operation of the VCR.
• If your VCR does not respond to the first code, try the others listed. If it does not respond toany code, try the Search Codes Function, on page 50.
• Some manufacturer’s VCR’s may not respond to the TV/VCR button, even if other buttonswork properly.
• To record, hold down the REC button on the remote and press PLAY.
19
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 19
Remote Programming
20
DVD codesThe remote control is programmed with DVD codes for power on, power off, play, stop,fast-forward, rewind, previous chapter, next chapter, tray open/close, and still/pause operation.1) Find the DVD player brand from the list of codes shown below.2) Slide the first 2-way selector switch to “TV” and the other 2-way selector switch to “DVD”.3) Press and hold down the DISPLAY button.4) With the DISPLAY button held down, enter the first code number listed with the 10 key pad.5) Release the DISPLAY button.6) Confirm the operation of the DVD player.
• If your DVD player does not respond to the first code, try the others listed. If it does not respond to any code, try the Search Codes Function, on page 50.
• After you program your remote, some DVD buttons may not work properly. If some buttonsdo not work properly, use the remote control which came with your DVD player.
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 20
To bring up the onscreen menu, press the MENU button on the remote control. The item thatappears in yellow is the one currently selected. If you press the MENU button again, theonscreen display will skip to the next menu screen. If you use the Menu button on the TV’sfront panel instead of the remote, an additional menu screen showing channel number andinput will appear. The “Plug In Menu”will appear the first time the TV is plugged in.NOTE: Menus shown in this book are illustrations, not exact replications of the television’sonscreen displays.
Onscreen Menus
21
Using the Guide
The Onscreen Menus
PLUG IN MENU
LANGUAGE ENG FRE SPAAUTO TUNER SETUPSET CLOCK
FINISH
SELECT BYOPERATE BY EXIT BY
EXIT
Certain symbols are used throughout this guide to help you learn about the features of yournew television. The ones you will see most frequently are:
Up and Down arrows mean press the CH+ or CH– buttons. Pressing the CH+ or CH–buttons let you:• Move vertically in a main menu screen• Move through a submenu screen• Move to the next letter, number, or other choice in a submenu• Back up to correct an error• Scan through TVchannels (when not in a menu screen)
Left and right arrows mean press the VOLUME+ or VOLUME– buttons to move left or right to:• Select a highlighted menu item• Select an item in a submenu• Select numbers in certain menu options• Turn the volume up or down (when not in a menu screen)
The “Press Button” icon means you should press the button named on your remote control. (Button names appear in SMALL CAPITAL LETTERS.)
The “Helping Hand”icon points to the highlighted or selected item in a menu.
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 21
Plug In MenuIntroduction
Auto Tuner Setup
LanguageYou can choose to view your onscreen menus in three languages:English, French, or Spanish.
Press the MENU button
To LANGUAGE
To choose a language
In Auto Tuner Setup, the TV automatically scans through all available channels, memorizing theactive ones and skipping over blank ones or channels with weak signals. This means when youscan (using the CHANNEL +/– buttons) you will receive only clear, active channels.
Press the MENU button
To AUTO TUNER SETUP
To operate
To choose CABLEor AIR
To move to START
To start Auto Tuner Setup
• Noise Muting will not work during Auto Tuner Setup.• You will not need to press the MENU button to enter this screen from the Plug In Menu.
NOW PROGRAMMING !
PROGRAMMING OVER!
48
Programming will take approximately 1 to 2 minutes.
• You will not need to press the MENU button to enter this screen from the Plug In Menu.
The Plug In Menu comes up automatically when you first turn on the TV after plugging it in.The Plug In Menu helps you to get your TV ready to use by letting you set your preferences for:
• The Language in which you want the onscreen menus to appear,• The Auto Tuner Setup of which channels you wish to receive,• Setting the TV’s clock to the correct time so your timer functions will work properly.
Descriptions of each of the Plug In Menu features appear on this page and the next. We rec-ommend you complete the Plug In Menu setup first so your TV is set up just the way you want,right away.
22
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 22
Plug In Menu
23
Auto Clock SetBefore you use any of your TV’s timer functions, you must first set the clock. You may preciselyset your clock using the XDS time signal broadcast by most Public Broadcastingstations.Toset the clock using the XDS signal:
Enter the channel number of your local PBS station
Press MENU
To SETCLOCK
To operate
To AUTO
ToTIME ZONE
To select your time zone
To move to Daylight Savings Time (D.S.T.)
To turn D.S.T. ON or OFF
To FINISH
To save settings and exit
• If you do not have a PBS station in your local area, you will have to set the clock manually.See ‘Manual Clock Set’on the next page for instructions.
• The Daylight Savings Time feature automatically adjusts your TV’s clock for Daylight Savings.The clock will move forward one hour at 2:00 am on the first Sunday in April.The clock willmove back one hour at 2:00 am on the last Sunday in October.
• You will not need to press the MENU button to enter this screen from the Plug In Menu.
MODE AUTO MANUAL
TIME ZONE EASTERND.S.T. ON OFF
FINISH
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 23
Plug In Menu
24
Once you have the items in the Plug In Menu set to your personal preferences, move to theFinish option to save your settings.
To FINISH
To save settings and exit
• You can change the preferences you set in the Plug In Menu at any time using the regularJVC onscreen menu system.
Manual Clock Set
Finish
NOTE:
You will have to reset the clock after a power interruption. You must set the clock before operat-ing any timer functions.
To set your clock manually (without using the XDS signal), choose MANUAL from the Set Clockmenu and follow the steps below.
To SET CLOCK
To operate
To MANUAL
To move to the hour
To set the hour
To move to minutes
To set the minutes
To move to START CLOCK
To start clock and exit
MODE AUTO MANUAL
TIME --:-- --
START CLOCK
THANK YOU !!
• You will not need to press the MENU button to enter this screen from the Plug In Menu.
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 24
Channel SummaryChannel SummaryChannel Summary allows you to customize the line-up of channels received by your TV. Youcan add or delete channels from the line-up or prevent any unauthorized viewers from watchingany or all 181 channels .
Press the MENU button
To CHANNEL SUMMARY
To operate
The Channel Summary screen (above) will now be displayed with the channels set to scanmarked with an "ü". You can delete channels from the scan by removing the "ü". If any chan-nels were missed during Auto Tuner Setup and you wish to add them, you may by placing an"ü" next to the channel number.
To the SCAN column
To include or delete from scan
EXIT when finished
You can block access to a channel by activating the Channel Lock.
To CHANNELSUMMARY
To operate
To the Lock Column
ZERO to lock or unlock that channel
EXIT when finished
Channel Guard Message
When a viewer attempts to watch a guarded channel, the following message appears:
To watch a channel that you have locked,enter the Lock Code using the 10 key pad.If the wrong code is entered, the message“INVALIDLOCK CODE!”will flash on thescreen:
The channel cannot be accessed until the correct code is entered.
• Once a channel has been unlocked, it will remain unlocked until the television is turned off.• See also “Set Lock Code”, page 33.
C H NO. S C A N C H NO. SCAN
0 1 06 ü
0 2 ü 07
0 3 ü 08
0 4 ü 09 ü
0 5 ü 10 ü
THIS CHANNEL IS LOCKED BYCHANNEL GUARD. PLEASE ENTER LOCK CODE BY10 KEY PAD TO UNLOCK IT.
NO. - - - -
25
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 25
26
V-ChipYour TV is equipped with V-Chip technology which enables TV Parental Guidelines (for UnitedStates and Canada) and Movie (MPAA) Guideline controls. V-Chip technology allows you toprogram your TV to receive, or not to receive, programs based on content according to theguidelines. Programs which exceed the ratings limits you set will be blocked. When a viewerattempts to watch a blocked channel, this message appears:
The channel will remain blocked until the correct lock code is entered (see page 33 for informa-tion on setting your lock code).
You can customize the V-Chip settings of your television to match your personal tastes. TheV-Chip menu below is the starting point for your V-Chip settings.
You can use US V-Chip settings (for programming broadcast from the United States), Canadian V-Chip settings (for programming broadcast from Canada), and movie ratings. You may useany or all of the settings (US V-Chip, Canada V-Chip, Movie ratings). Descriptions for settingeach of the three V-Chip formats appear in the next seven pages along with descriptions of therating categories.
To access the rating categories:
THIS PROGRAMMING EXCEEDSYOUR RATING LIMITS.PLEASE ENTER LOCK CODE BY10 KEY PAD TO UNLOCK IT.
NO. - - - -
V-CHIP ON OFFSET US TV RATINGSSET MOVIE RATINGSSET CANADIAN RATINGS ENGSET CANADIAN RATINGS FREUNRATED VIEW BLOCK
FINISH
Special Note about Ratings
Some programs are not broadcast with a ratings signal. Therefore, even if you setup V-Chip ratings limits, these programs will not be blocked. Parents are cautioned to preview the con-
tents of these programs or movies.
Press the MENU button
ToV-CHIPTo operate (Lock icon will appear)
Press ZERO to access the V-Chip menu
To turn V-Chip ON or OFF (V-Chip must be turned ON for rating settings to operate)
To move to SET US TV RATINGS, SETMOVIE RATINGS, or SET CANADIANRATINGS (see following pages for descriptions of each item)
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 26
27
V-ChipUS V-Chip Ratings U.S.PARENTAL RATING SYSTEMSPrograms with the following ratings are appropriate for children. TV Y is Appropriate for All Children.
Programs are created for very young viewers and should be suitable for all ages, includingchildren ages 2 - 6.
TV Y7 is for Older Children.Most parents would find such programs suitable for children 7 and above. These programsmay contain some mild fantasy violence or comedic violence, which children should be ableto discern from reality.
Programs with the following ratings are designed for the entire audience. TV G stands for General Audience.
Most parents would find these programs suitable for all age groups. They contain little or noviolence, no strong language, and little or no sexual dialog or situations.
TV PG Parental Guidance Suggested.May contain some, but not much, strong language, limited violence, and some suggestivesexual dialog or situations. It is recommended that parents watch these programs first, orwith their children.
TV 14 Parents Strongly Cautioned.Programs contain some material that may be unsuitable for children under the age of 14including possible intense violence, sexual situations, strong coarse language, or intenselysuggestive dialog. Parents are cautioned against unattended viewing by children under 14.
TV MA Mature Audiences Only.These programs are specifically for adults and may be unsuitable for anyone under 17 yearsof age. TV MA programs may have extensiveV, S, L, or D.
Viewing Guidelines
In addition to the ratings categories explained above, information on specific kinds of contentare also supplied with the V-Chip rating. These types of content may also be blocked.Thecontent types are:
• V/FV is for VIOLENCE/FANTASY VIOLENCE • S stands for SEXUALCONTENT• L stands for strong LANGUAGE• D stands for suggestive DIALOG
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 27
V-Chip
28
Line up the cursor in the column (TV PG, TV G, etc.) with the content row (V/FV, S, etc.) and
press the or to move the cursor to the correct location. Press or to turn the lockingfeature on or off. An item is locked if the icon appears instead of a “—”.
For example: To block viewing of all TV 14 shows, move the cursor to the top row of thatcolumn and add a lock icon. Once you've put a lock on the top row, everything in that columnis automatically locked.
To the TV 14 ColumnTo turn on the lock
To FINISH
To save settings and exit
• If you want to change the setup, move the cursor to the top column and change the lock icon
to “—” by pressing or again. You may then select individual categories to block.
Press the MENU button
ToV-CHIPTo operate (Lock icon will appear)
Press ZERO to access the V-Chip menu
To turnV-Chip ON or OFF
To move to SET US TV RATINGS
To operate
V-CHIP ON OFFSET US TV RATINGSSET MOVIE RATINGSSET CANADIAN RATINGS ENGSET CANADIAN RATINGS FREUNRATED VIEW BLOCK
FINISH
Setting US V-Chip Ratings
Directions to set US V-Chip Ratings:
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 28
V-Chip
29
Setting ratings with the V-Chip button
Example 2:
If you want to set your V-Chip settings to block all programming above a current setting such asTV PG-V (with violence):
Press ZERO when TV-PG - V is displayed
To access Rating information about a certain program, press the V-CHIP button while viewingthat program. A display like this will appear :
If you decide you want to block this category of viewing, press "0" while the above screen isvisible, and all programs from that category will be blocked.
Example 1:
If you want to set your V-Chip settings to block all programming above TV PG:
• For Children's programming you can block TV-Y and Y7 programs by Pressing “0” when Y isdisplayed during a program. Programming for audiences other than children’s audiences willnot be affected.
PROGRAM IS RATED :TV-PG - V
All Programming above TV PG will be blocked.
Press ZERO when TV-PG is displayed
All Programming above TV PG - V (with Violence) will be blocked.
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 29
V-Chip
NR – Not Rated.This is a film which has no rating. In many cases these films were imported from countrieswhich do not use the MPAA ratings system. Other NR films may be from amateur producerswho didn’t intend to have their film widely released.NR (Not Rated) Programming may contain all types of programming including children's programming, foreign programs, or adult material.
G – General Audience .In the opinion of the review board, these films contain nothing in the way of sexual content, violence, or language that would be unsuitable for audiences of any age.
PG – Parental Guidance .Parental Guidance means the movie may contain some contents such as mild violence,some brief nudity, and strong language. The contents are not deemed intense.
PG-13 – Parents Strongly Cautioned.Parents with children under 13 are cautioned that the content of movies with this rating mayinclude more explicit sexual, language, and violence content than movies rated PG.
R - Restricted.These films contain material that is explicit in nature and is not recommended forunsupervised children under the age of 17.
NC-17 - No One Under 17.These movies contain content which most parents would feel is too adult for their children toview. Content can consist of strong language, nudity, violence, and suggestive or explicitsubject matter.
X - No One under 18.Inappropriate material for anyone under 18.
Movie Ratings
Press the MENU button
ToV-CHIPTo operate (Lock icon appears)
Press ZERO to access V-Chip setup options
To SET MOVIE RATINGSTo enter movies menu
For example, to block viewing of X and NC-17 rated from shows:
To the X ColumnTo turn on the lock
To the NC-17 Column
To turn on the lock
To FINISH
To save settings and exit
Directions to set Movie (MPAA) Ratings:
30
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 30
V-Chip
E – Exempt.Exempt programming includes:news, sports, documentaries and other informationprogramming, talk shows, music videos, and variety programming.
C – Programming Intended for Children.Violence Guidelines:There will be no realistic scenes of violence. Depictions of aggressivebehavior will be infrequent and limited to portrayals that are clearly imaginar y, comedic or unrealistic in nature.
C8+ – Programming Intended for Children 8 and Over .Violence Guidelines: Any realistic depictions of violence will be infrequent, discreet, of lowintensity and will show the consequences of the acts. There will be no offensive language,nudity or sexual content.
G – General Audience .Programming will contain little violence and will be sensitive to themes which could affect younger children.
PG - Parental Guidance.Programming intended for a general audience, but which may not be suitable for youngerchildren. Parents may consider some content not appropriate for children aged 8-13.
14+ - 14 Years and Older.Parents are strongly cautioned to exercise discretion in permitting viewing by pre-teens andearly teens. Programming may contain mature themes and scenes of intense violence.
18+ - Adult.Material intended for mature audiences only.
Canadian V-Chip Ratings
Directions to set Canadian V-Chip Ratings:Press the MENU button
ToV-CHIPTo operate (Lock icon appears)
Press ZERO to access V-Chip setup options
To SET CANADIAN RATINGS ENG (for English)To enter ratings menu
For example, to block viewing of programming rated 14+ and 18+:
To the 18+ Column
To turn on the lock
To the 14+ Column
To turn on the lock
To FINISH
To save settings and exit
• For instructions on “Set Canadian Ratings FRE (in French)”, please see page 31 in theFrench side of this user’s guide.
31
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 31
32
V-ChipUnrated ProgramsNotes About Unrated Programs:
Unrated programming refers to any programming which does not contain a rating signal.Programming on television stations which do not broadcast rating signals will be placed in the“Unrated Programming" category.
Examples of Unrated programs:
Emergency BulletinsLocally Originated ProgrammingNewsPolitical ProgramsPublic Service AnnouncementsReligious ProgramsSportsWeatherSome Commercials
• TV programs or movies that do not have rating signals will be blocked if the Unrated
Category is set to BLOCK.
Directions to Block Unrated Programs:
You can block programs that are not rated.
Press the MENU button
ToV-CHIP
To operate (The lock icon appears)
Press ZERO to access V-Chip setup options
To UNRATED
To VIEW or BLOCKPress EXIT when done
UNRATED VIEW BLOCK
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 32
V-ChipSet Lock CodeChannel Guard and V-Chip settings are protected by a four-digit Lock Code. Your TV comespre-set with a Lock Code of "0000". You may change the code to any four-digit number youwish. To change the Lock Code, follow the steps below.
Press the MENU button
To SETLOCK CODE
To operate
The lock icon appears.
Press ZERO to access the Lock Code
The first digit will be highlighted
To select the number
To move to the next digit
Continue to follow these directions for all four numbers.
To FINISH
To save settings and exit
Your Lock Code is now set..
LOCK CODE 0 0 0 0
FINISH
0
• After a power interruption you must reset the Lock Code.• Write your Lock Code number down and keep it hidden from potential viewers.• If you forget the Lock Code, a new code may be set using the steps listed above.
NOTE:
33
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 33
Picture Settings
34
Tint
Color
Picture
Bright
Detail
Tint allows you to adjust the levels of red and green in your TV picture.
Press the MENU button
To TINT
To increase the levels of green
To increase the levels of redTo move to the next setting
The color function lets you make all the colors in the TV picture appear either more vivid orsubtle.
Press the MENU button
To COLORTo make the colors more vivid
To make the colors more subduedTo move to the next setting
Picture allows you to adjust the levels of black and white on the TV screen, giving you a darkeror brighter picture overall.
Press the MENU button
To PICTURETo increase the level of contrast
To decrease the level of contrastTo move to the next setting
You can adjust the overall brightness of the TV picture with the Bright control.
Press the MENU button
To BRIGHT
To lighten the picture
To darken the pictureTo move to the next setting
The Detail feature adjusts the level of fine detail displayed in the picture.
Press the MENU button
To DETAIL
To make the picture sharper (more details)
To make the picture smoother (less detail)To move to the next setting
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 34
Picture Settings
35
Noise Muting
Set Video StatusWith Set Video Status, you can save your own set of picture quality adjustments as “Choice”and have access to them at the touch of a button.
Press the MENU button
To SETVIDEO STATUS
To operate
To set the TINT levels
To move to the next option
Repeat these steps until all levels are set.
To SAVEAS CHOICE
To save settings and exit
• You must use SAVE AS CHOICE to exit the Set Video Status menu, otherwise your prefer -ences will not be saved.
• You can access your “Choice”settings at any time by pressing the VIDEO STATUS button onthe remote control.
TINT -------------|-------------COLOR -------------|-------------PICTURE -------------|-------------BRIGHT -------------|-------------DETAIL -------------|-------------
SAVE AS CHOICE
The setting screen will disappear if you do not make any adjustments or move to the next set-ting in approximately three seconds. Any changes you have made to picture settings up to thatpoint will be stored. You can exit the Picture Settings menu at any time by pressing the EXIT
button on the remote control.
NOTE:
This feature inserts a blank blue screen over channels which are not broadcasting or are tooweak to be received clearly.
Press the MENU button
To NOISE MUTING
To turn Noise Muting ON or OFF
• Noise Muting will not work during Auto Tuner Setup or when you operate Channel Summary.
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 35
Sound Settings
You can increase or decrease the level of low-frequency sound in the TV’s audio with the Bassadjustment.
Press the MENU button
To BASS
To increase the bass
To decrease the bass
To move to the next setting
Use Treble to adjust the level of high-frequency sound in your TV’s audio.
Press the ME N U bu t t o n
To TREBLE
To increase the treble
To decrease the treble
To move to the next setting
Adjust the level of sound between the TV’s two speakers with the Balance setting.
Press the MENU button
To BALANCE
To shift the balance towards the right speaker
To shift the balance towards the left speaker
To move to the next setting
MTS technology allows several audio signals to be broadcast at once, giving you a choice inwhat you wish to hear with a TV program. In addition to mono or stereo sound, an MTS broad-cast may also include a Second Audio Program (SAP).
Press the MENU button
To MTS
Select the mode
(The ON AIR arrow tells you if a broadcast is in Stereo and/or contains an SAP).
• Keep the TV in STEREO mode to get the best sound quality. The sound will work inSTEREO mode even if a certain broadcast is in MONO sound only.
• Choose the MONO setting to reduce excessive noise on a certain channel or broadcast.• Selecting SAP will allow you to hear an alternative soundtrack, if one is available.
MTS (Multi-Channel Television Sound)
Treble
Balance
Bass
You can leave the Sound Settings menu at any time by pressing the EX I T button on theremote control.
NOTE:
36
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 36
General Items
The On/Off timer lets you program your television to turn itself on or off. You can use it as analarm to wake up, to help you remember important programs, or as a decoy when you're nothome.
Press the MENU button
To ON/OFFTIMER
To operate (begins with ON TIME)
To set the hour (AM/PM) you want the TV to turn on
To move to minutes
To set the minutes
To accept ON TIME and move to OFF TIME (the time the TV will turn off). Set the OFF TIMEthe same way as ON TIME
To accept OFFTIME and move to CHANNEL
To select channel
To move to MODE
Choose ONCE or EVERYDAY
To ON/OFFTIMER
Choose YES to accept the timer setting, choose NOif you don't wish to accept
To FINISH
To save settings
On/Off Timer
On/Off Timer Note for PIP (AV-36F802, AV-32F802 & AV-27F802) only.
• The On/Off time cannot be set to locked or guarded channels.• In order for the On/Off timer to work, the clock must be set.• After a power interruption, the Timer settings must be reset.
NOTE:
If the television is on when a timed event is about to start a Timer Preview window will appear.The Timer Preview window will appear in the lower right corner of the screen seven secondsbefore the timer is programmed to begin. When the timer activates, the Preview picture willbecome the main picture.
37
PurityThis helps clean up the picture so that it may not contain any “snow”.
Press the MENU button
To PURITY
To enter
To adjust purity
N S -------------|-------------
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 37
General Items
38
If your TV is connected to a stereo system, you can turn off the TV speakers and listen to theaudio through your stereo.
Press the MENU button
To TVSPEAKER
To turn the TV's speakers ONor OFF
EXIT when finished
• Before you turn the TV Speaker setting from OFF to ON, make sure that the TV volumelevel is low! If the TV volume is set too high, the sound level will be extremely loud.
• After a power interruption, the TVSpeaker settings will return to “ON”.
TV Speaker
• External Speakers: When using external speakers or amplifiers, shut off the TV Speakers(see ‘TV Speaker’) above.
NOTE:
If your television is connected to an external speaker source, Audio Out gives you the option of controlling the volume level with your TV’s remote control.
Press the MENU button
To AUDIO OUT
ToVARI or FIX
EXIT when finished
VARI: Lets you adjust the volume of the external speakers using the VOLUME +/– buttons onyour TV’s remote control.FIX: The volume of the external speakers is adjusted using the audio device’s remote control.
Audio Out
TV SPEAKER ON OFF
AUDIO OUT VARI FIX
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 38
General Items
Get the best quality video from your DVD player by using this setting and the DVD inputs at therear of the television. Set either to YES for component input (for DVD) or to NO for compositevideo input (for a regular VCR).
Press the MENU button
ToV4 COMPONENT-IN (or V2 COMPONENT-IN for models AV-36F702, AV-32F702and AV-27F702)
To turn the input ON or OFF
EXIT when finished
• This option should be used with DVD players only. For information on connecting VCR’s see page 11. For more information on connecting a DVD player, see page 14.
• AV-36F702, AV-32F702 & AV-27F702 note: These models do not have Input 4.
V4 Component-In (AV-36F802, AV-32F802 & AV-27F802) / V2 Component-In (AV-36F702, AV-32F702 & AV-27F702)
V4 COMPONENT-IN YES NO
Many broadcasts now include an onscreen display of dialog called Closed Captions. Somebroadcasts may also include displays of additional information in text form. Your television canaccess and display this information using the Closed Caption feature.To activate the ClosedCaption feature, follow the steps below.
Press the MENU button
To CLOSED CAPTION
To operate
To select CAPTION (for Closed Captions), TEXT (for text display), or OFF (for no display)
To move to CAPTION or TEXT
To select a caption (CC1 to CC4) or text channel (T1 to T4)
To accept that selection and move to FINISH
To save settings and exit
MODE : CAPTION
CAPTION : CC1 CC2 CC3 CC4TEXT : T1 T2 T3 T4
FINISH
Closed Caption
• Closed Caption subtitles are usually found on closed caption channel CC1. Some programsmay include additional text information which is usually found on text channel T1. The otherchannels are available for future use.
• Closed captioning may not work correctly if the signal being received is weak or if you areplaying a video tape.
• Most broadcasts containing Closed Captioning will display a notice at the start of theprogram.
NOTE:
39
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 39
Button Functions
The MENU button allows you to access JVC’s onscreen menu system. Press MENU to activatethe onscreen menu system.
• See individual topics (like “Sound Settings”) for specific information on using menus.
Press the EXIT button to leave a menu screen. On the RM-C301G this button is also labeled“PIP OFF”. Press EXIT/PIP OFF to turn off the Picture-in-Picture function (please see page 44for more information on the PIP feature).• PIP is available only on AV-36F802, AV-32F802 & AV-27F802.
Menu
Exit and PIP Off
Display
• Please note that if the Clock, Sleep Timer or On/Off Timer are not set, the Display screen willshow:"CLOCK NOT SET", "SLEEP TIMER OFF", and "ON/OFF TIMER OFF" respectively.
NOTE:
The Display screen shows the current status of timers and inputs.
Press the DISPLAY button
The screen above shows the following information:
• The current channel or AV input (Channel 07)
• The current time (12:20 pm)• Sleep Timer status/minutes remaining (The Sleep Timer is off)• On/Off Timer status (Set to turn on everyday at 7:00 PM, off at 10:00 PM)• Each Press of the DISPLAY button changes the display mode:
Display – Full screen shown above
Time – Shows the current time only
Channel – Shows the current channel
Off –Turns Display off
• You may also turn off the Display at any step by pressing EXIT.
07NOW 12:20 PMSLEEP TIMER OFFON/OFF TIMER EVERYDAY
ON TIME 7:00 PMOFF TIME 10:00 PM
40
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 40
Button FunctionsVideo Status
Muting
The VIDEO STATUS button gives you a choice of three TV picture display settings, including a display of your own preferences.
Standard – Resets the picture display to the factory settings.
Choice – Displays the setting levels you specified on the "Set Video Status"Menu(see page 35).
Theater – Gives a rich, film-like look to video.
Press the VIDEO STATUS button
The Sleep Timer can turn the TV off for you after you fall asleep. Program it to work in intervalsof 15 minutes, for a total time of up to 180 minutes.
Sleep Timer Message
20 seconds before the automatic shutoff, this message will appear:
GOOD NIGHT!!
PUSH SLEEP TIMER BUTTON
TO EXTEND.
Creates a deep, three-dimensional sound effect by channeling the audio through the TV's front-firing speakers. Press the HYPER SURROUND button to turn the effect on or off.
The MUTING button instantly turns the volume down completely when you press it. PressMUTING and the volume level will instantly go to zero. To restore the volume to its previouslevel, press MUTING again.
HYPER SURROUND ON OFF
Hyper Surround
Sleep Timer
41
Press the SLEEP TIMER button
You then have 20 seconds to press the Sleep Timer button to delay the shutoff for another
15 minutes.
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 41
Button Functions
Use the 100+ button to directly access channels above Channel 99. For example to move tochannel 124, press100+, 2 (two), 4 (four).
100+ Button
Return+
InputSelects the signal input source for the television:TV (for Antenna or Cable) or Video-1, 2, 3, or 4for video devices like VCR’s, DVD players, or camcorders.
IN P U T
BBEBBE high definition audio adds natural, clear and extraordinary sound quality to any program.Turn BBE On or Off using the BBE button.
BBE ON OFF
The RETURN+ button has two functions:
Return – Returns to the channel viewed just before the channel currently onscreen.
Return+ – Lets you program a specific channel to return to while scanning through the chan-nels using the CH+ and CH– buttons.
RETURN+ and hold for three seconds
The channel currently active has been programmed as your Return+ channel. Now scanthrough the channels using the CHANNEL+/– buttons
RETURN+
You will return to your programmed channel.
• To cancel your Return+ channel, press and hold the RETURN+ button for three seconds. Themessage “RETURN CHANNEL CANCELLED!”will appear.
• Return+ works only with the CHANNEL+/– buttons. Pressing any number key will cancelReturn+.
• Return+ does not affect the PIPchannel (AV-36F802, AV-32F802 & AV-27F802 only).
RETURN CHANNEL PROGRAMMED !
• BBE is a registered trademark of BBESound, Inc. For U.S., licensed from BBE Sound, Inc.under USP 4638258, 4482866 and 5510572. For Canada, licensed from BBE Sound, Inc.BBE is a registered trademark of BBESound, Inc.
NOTE:
• AV-36F702, AV-32F702 & AV-27F702 do not have a Video-4 input.
42
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 42
Button Functions
43
LightYour remote control includes illuminated buttons for key features like CHANNEL +/– andVOLUME +/–. Press the LIGHT button to turn the illumination on.
DVD Buttons
VCR Buttons
TV/CATV Switch
VCR/DVD Switch
You can also use this remote control to operate the basic functions of your DVD player. These functions include:play, rewind, fast-forward, stop, still/pause, previous/next, tray open/close,power on, and power off.
Move the selector switch to DVD to operate.
• The remote is preset with the code 000 to control JVC-brand DVD players.For any other manufacturer’s brand DVD player, please see the code chart and instructions on page 20.
Use either the television’s own tuner or a cable box to select channels. Set this switch to TV tooperate the television’s built-in tuner. Move the switch to CATV to operate a cable box.
• See page 18 for information on programming your remote for cable box operation.
You can control a VCR or DVDplayer with the buttons on the lower part of the remote control.Use the VCR/DVD selector switch to choose either VCR or DVD operation.
• See pages 19 and 20 for information on programming your remote with VCR and DVD oper-ating codes.
You can use this remote control to operate the basic functions of your VCR. These functionsinclude:play, record, rewind, fast-forward, stop, pause, channel scan, TV/VCR, power on, andpower off.
Move the selector switch to VCR to operate.
• The remote is preset with the code 000 to control JVC-brand VCR’s. For any other manufac-turer’s brand VCR, please see the code chart and instructions on page 19.
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 43
Button Functions - PIPPIP displays two separate pictures on screen. Your television has 2-Tuner PIP, meaning youcan view pictures from two different channels simultaneously. A special set of PIP control but-tons are located on the upper part of the remote control. Descriptions of each button appearon this page.
The PIP feature is available on models AV-36F802, AV-32F802 & AV-27F802 only.
On/MoveTurn PIP on by pressing the ON/MOVE button.
02
07
Cable Box NoteThe 2-Tuner PIP function may not operate when used with certain cable boxes. This isbecause while some models of cable box may receive up to 181 channels, they may only sendthe signal from one channel to your television (please also see diagram on page 11). For thePIPtuner to operate correctly, it must have access to all available channels. Since the televi-sion is receiving the signal of only one channel from the cable box, it is impossible for the 2-Tuner PIP to display a second, different channel.
Because there are many different models of cable boxes in use today, if you are having prob-lems operating your PIP feature with your cable box, we recommend you contact your localcable company for connection advice.
44
PIP OFF to turn PIP off
(PIP) ON/MOVE
NOTE:• Each press of ON/MOVE will shift the PIP window to a different corner.
ON/MOVE
Once PIP is turned on, you can move the PIP window to any of the TV’s main picture’sfour corners with the ON/MOVE button
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 44
Button Functions - PIPFreeze
Swap
Channel +/– for PIP
Source
Use the FREEZE button to lock a single, still image onto the PIP window.
• If PIP is off when FREEZE is pressed, a snapshot of the main screen is taken and placed inthe PIP window.
• If PIP is on when FREEZE is pressed, the image in the window when the button was pressedis held.
You can exchange the channel displayed on the main screen for the one shown in the PIP win-dow by pressing SWAP.
Like the main CHANNEL +/– buttons, CHANNEL +/– for PIP lets you scan through the channels inthe PIP window.
• Direct channel selection with the 10 key pad for PIPis not possible.
You can select the signal source for the PIP window image.
• If the PIP does not have a signal, the window will be blue.• If you connect a DVD to Video-2 or Video-4, the PIP window will be blue.
• The PIP window is 1/9 the size of the full screen.
• PIP will not display blocked channels or programs. A blue screen will display instead.
NOTE:
45
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 45
Troubleshooting
46
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 46
47
WarrantyFor Canadian model televisions, see the separate sheet for Canadian
Warranty information.
JVC COMPANY OF AMERICA warrants this product and all parts thereof, except as set forthbelow ONLY TO THE ORIGINAL PURCHASER AT RETAIL to be FREE FROM DEFECTIVEMATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP from the date of original retail purchase for the period shownbelow (the “Warranty Period”) (PICTURE TUBE is covered for Two (2) years.)
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY IS VALID ONLY IN THE FIFTY (50) UNITED STATES, THEDISTRICT OF COLUMBIA AND COMMONWEALTH OF PUERTO RICO.
WHAT WE WILL DO:If this product is found to be defective within the warranty period,JVC will repair orreplace defective parts at no charge to the original owner. Such repair and replacementservices shall be rendered by JVC during regular business hours at JVCauthorizedservice centers. Parts used for replacement are warranted only for the remainder of thisWarranty Period. All products and parts thereof may be brought to a JVCauthorizedservice center on a carry-in basis. Televisions with a screen size of 25 inches and largermay be covered on an in-home basis where such service is available.
WHAT YOU MUST DO FOR WARRANTY SERVICE:To determine if in-home service is ava i l a ble in your area, either contact the selling dealer (retail-er) or call 1-800-537-5722 to locate the nearest JVC authori zed service center. S e rvice loca-tions can also be obtained from our website h t t p : / / w w w. j v c s e rv i c e. c o m.In-home serv i c e, if ava i l-a bl e, will require clear access to the Te l evision by the service representative s.If in-home serv i c eis not ava i l a bl e, carry in service will be prov i d e d .
If service is not locally available, box the product carefully, preferably in its original car-ton, and ship, insured, with a copy of your bill of sale plus a letter of explanation of theproblem to the nearest JVC Factory Service Center, the name and location which will begiven to you by the toll free number.
If you have any questions concerning your JVC Product, please contact our CustomerRelations Department.
WHAT IS NOT COVERED:This limited warranty provided by JVC does not cover:1) Products which have been subject to abuse , accident,alteration,modification,tam-
pering,negligence, misuse, faulty installation,lack of reasonable care, or if repairedor serviced by anyone other than a service facility authorized by JVC to render suchservice, or if affixed to any attachment not provided with the products,or if the modelor serial number has been altered, tampered with,defaced or removed;
2) Initial installation, installation and removal from "built-in" entertainment centers andother mounting systems;3) Operational adjustments covered in the Owner’s Manual, normal maintenance , videoand audio head cleaning;4) Damage that occurs in shipment, due to an act of God,and cosmetic damage;5) Signal reception problems and failures due to line power surge;6) Video Pick-up Tubes/CCD Image Sensor, Cartridge, Stylus (Needle) are covered for 90days from the date of purchase;
Parts Labor
1 YEAR1 YEAR
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 47
48
Warranty
REFURBISHED PRODUCTS CARRY A SEPA R ATE WA R R A N T Y. THIS WA R R A N T YDOES NOT APPLY FOR DETAILS OF REFURBISHED PRODUCT WA R R A N T Y.PLEASE REFER TO THE REFURBISHED PRODUCT WARRANTY INFORMATIONPACKAGED WITH EACH REFURBISHED PRODUCT.
For customer use:Enter below the Model No. and Serial No.which is located either on the rear, bottom orside of the cabinet.Retain this information for future reference.
Model No.: Serial No.:Purchase Date: Name Of Dealer:
7) Accessories;8) Batteries (except that Rechargeable Batteries are covered for 90 days from date of pur-
chase.)
There are no express warranties except as listed above.
THE DURATION OF ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES,INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTYOF MERCHANTABILTY, IS LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTYHEREIN.
JVC SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR THE LOSS OF USE OF THE PRODUCT, INCONVENIENCE,OR ANY OTHER DA M AG E S , WHETHER DIRECT, I N C I D E N TAL OR CONSEQU E N T I A L(INCLUDING,WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGE TO TAPES, RECORDS OR DISCS) RESULT-ING FROM THE USE OF THIS PRODUCT, OR ARISING OUT OF ANY BREACH OF THIS WAR-RANTY, ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OFMERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO THEWARRANTY PERIOD SET FORTH ABOVE.
Some states do not allow the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages or limita-tions on how long the warranty lasts,so these exclusions or limitations may not apply toyou.This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rightswhich vary state to state.
JVCCOMPANYOF AMERICA 1700 Valley RoadDIVISION OF JVC AMERICAS CORP. Wayne, New Jersey 07470
h t t p : / / w w w. j v c s e rv i c e. c o m
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 48
49
Authorized Service Centers
QUALITY SERVICE
TOLL FREE: 1 (800) 537-5722http://www.jvc.com
HOW TO LOCATE YOUR JVC SERVICE CENTER
Dear Customer,
In order to receive the most satisfaction from your purchase, please read the instruction booklet before operating the unit. In the event that repairs are neces-sary, or for the address nearest your location within the Continental UnitedStates, please call 1 (800) 537-5722 for your nearest authorized servicer or visitour website at www.JVC.com.
Remember to retain your Bill of Sale for Warranty Service.
CautionTo prevent electrical shock, do not open the cabinet.There are no user serviceableparts inside. Please refer to qualified service personnel for repairs.
AccessoriesTo purchase accessories for your JVC product, you may contact your local JVCDealer. From the 48 Continental United States call toll free: 1 (800) 882-2345 or onthe web at www.JVC.com
For service in CanadaTo locate your local JVC service center or dealer in Canada please call:
Or visit us on the web at www.JVC.ca
Do not service the television yourself
In Eastern Canada:1 (416) 293-1311
In Western Canada:1 (604) 270-1311
En Français (Montréal):1 (514) 871-1311
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 49
50
Search CodesCable/Satellite Search Codes Function:1) Slide the first 2-Way Mode Selector switch to CATV.2) Press the TV POWER and RETURN+ buttons. Hold for at least three seconds and release.3) Press TV POWER, see if the CATV or Satellite box responds.4) If there was a response, press RETURN+. The operating codes are now set.If there was no
response, repeat Step 3.If you repeat Step 3 a total of 52 times without a response, use theremote control which came with the equipment.
5) Press RETURN+ to exit.
VCR Search Codes Function:1) Slide the first 2-way selector switch to “TV” and the other 2-way selector switch to “VCR”.2) Press the VCR POWER and RETURN+ buttons. Hold for at least three seconds and release.3) Press VCR POWER, see if the VCR responds.4) If there was a response, press RETURN+. The operating codes are now set.If there was no
response, repeat Step 3. If you repeat Step 3 a total of 80 times without a response, use the manufacturers remote control which came with the VCR.
5) Press RETURN+ to exit.
DVD Player Search Codes Function:1) Slide the first 2-way selector switch to “TV” and the other 2-way selector switch to “DVD”.2) Press the DVD POWER and RETURN+ buttons. Hold for at least three seconds and release.3) Press DVD POWER, see if the DVDplayer responds.4) If there was a response, press RETURN+. The operating codes are now set. If there was no
response, repeat Step 3.If you repeat Step 3 a total of 30 times without a response, use the manufacturers remote control which came with the DVDplayer.
5) Press RETURN+ to exit.
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 50
Specifications
51
Specifications subject to change without notice.
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 51
JVC COMPANY OF AMERICADivision of JVC Americas Corp.
1700 Valley RoadWayne, New Jersey, 07470
JVC CANADA, INC.21 Finchdene SquareScarborough, Ontario
Canada, M1X 1A7
AV-27,32,36F7/802 A 9/4/01 9:44 AM Page 52
MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONSPOUR TÉLÉVISEUREN COULEURS
Pour le modèles:AV-36F802AV-36F702AV-32F802AV-32F702AV-27F802AV-27F702
Illustration du modèle AV-27F802 et RM-C301G
REMARQUE :Veuillez inscrire dans les espaces ci-dessous le modèle et le numero de série de votre téléviseur (situés à l’arrière du téléviseur). Agrafez votre reçu ou votre fac-ture à la page intérieure de ce guide. Rangez ce manuel dans un lieu où vous le retrouverez rapidment pour vous y référer. Gardez le carton et l’emballage
d’origine pour une utilisation ultérieure.
Numéro de sérieLCT0821-001E-A0901-TN-FAA-JIM
Numéro de modèle
802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 1
ATTENTION
ATTENTION: AFIN DE DIMINUER LES RISQUES D’ÉLECTRO-CUTION, NE RETIREZ PAS LE CAPOT OU LE PANNEAU
ARRIÈRE. AUCUNE PIÈCE À L’INTÉRIEUR N’EST RÉPARABLEPAR L’UTILISATEUR.ADRESSEZ-VOUS À UN RÉPARATEUR
QUALIFIÉ POUR LA MAINTENANCE.
Le symbole de l’éclair fléché dans un triangleéquilatéral prévient l’utilisateur de la présence detensions dangereuses non protégées, à l’in-térieur de l’appareil, suffisamment élevées pourconstituer un risque d’électrocution.
Le symbole du point d’exclamation dans un trian-gle équilatéral prévient l’utilisateur de laprésence d’importantes instructions d’utilisationet d’entretien dans la documentation accompag-nant cet appareil.
RISQUE D’ÉLECTROCUTIONNE PAS OUVRIR
IMPORTANTES PRÉCAUTIONSDE SÉCURITÉ
ATTENTION! POUR ÉVITER UN INCENDIE OU UNE ÉLECTROCUTION,N’EXPOSEZ PAS CE TÉLÉVISEUR À LA PLUIE OU À L’HUMIDITÉ.
AVERTISSEMENT! AFIN D’ASSURER LA SÉCURITÉ DES PERSONNES,OBSERVEZ LES RÈGLES SUIVANTES CONCERNANT L’UTILISATION DECET APPAREIL.
1) Faites fonctionner cet appareil avec la tension secteur spécifiée sur cet appareil.2) Évitez d’endommager la prise et le cordon secteur.3) Installez correctement l’appareil et placez-le dans un lieu correctement ventilé.4) Ne laissez aucun objet ou liquide pénétrer à l’intérieur de l’appareil.5) En cas de problème, débranchez l’appareil et appelez un technicien qualifié.
N’essayez pas de réparer vous-même ou de retirer le panneau arrière.
Les modifications ou changements non approuvés par JVC peuvent annuler la garantie.
* Pour votre sécurité, quand vous n’utilisez pas ce téléviseur pendant une longue péri-ode, déconnectez-le du secteur et débranchez l’antenne.
* Pour éviter une électrocution, n’utilisez pas cette fiche polarisée avec un prolongateur,avec une prise ou toute autre alimentation, sauf si les lames peuvent être entièrementinsérées sans être visibles.
802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 2
IMPORTANTES RÈGLES DE SÉCURITÉ
AVERTISSEMENT:
Veuillez lire et retenir ce qui suit pour votre sécurité.
L’énergie électrique autorise de nombreuses applications utiles. Ce téléviseur a été conçu etfabriqué pour assurer la sécurité de l’utilisateur. Mais une utilisation incorrecte peut produireune électrocution ou un incendie . Afin de ne pas aller à l’encontre des sécurités incluses dansce téléviseur, conformez-vous aux règles de base de son installation, de son utilisation et deson entretien.
Conformez-vous aussi aux avertissements et aux instructions inscrites sur votre téléviseur.
INSTALLATION
1 Le téléviseur est équipé d’une fiche secteur polarisée (une lame de la fiche est plus largeque l’autre).
Cette sécurité permet à la fiche de pénétrer dans une prise secteur seulement dans un sens.Si la fiche ne peut pas être insérée entièrement dans la prise, insérez-la dans l’autre sens. Sivous ne pouvez toujours pas l’insérer, appelez un électricien.
2 Utilisez votre téléviseur en l’alimentant avec la tension indiquée sur le téléviseur ou reportez-vous aux instructions d’utilisation pour vous en assurer. Si vous n’êtes pas certain de la ten-sion utilisée chez vous, consultez votre revendeur ou la compagnie d’électricité. Pour unfonctionnement sur piles, reportez-vous aux instructions d’utilisation.
3 Surcharger les prises de courant et utiliser des prolongateurs représentent un danger aumême titre que des cordons usagés et des prises cassées. Elles sont à l’origine d’incendieset d’électrocutions. Appelez un technicien qualifié pour opérer les remplacements.
4 Ne laissez aucun objet sur le cordon ou rouler dessus. Ne placez pas le téléviseur là où lecordon d’alimentation se trouve sur un passage fréquenté ou pouvant être abîmé afin d’éviterun risque d’électrocution ou d’incendie .
5 N’utilisez pas le téléviseur près de l’eau, d'une baignoire, d'un lavabo, d'un évier, d'unecuvette, dans un sous-sol humide ou près d’une piscine, par exemple.
6 Si une antenne extérieure est reliée au téléviseur, assurez-vous de la bonne mise à la terrede celle-ci afin de fournir une protection contre les surtensions et l’électricité statique. La sec-tion 810 du NEC fournit les informations nécessaires à une bonne mise à la terre du tubed’antenne et de son support ainsi que de la descente du câble qui doit transiter par un dis-positif de décharge, de la taille des conducteurs de mise à la terre, de l’emplacement du dis-positif de décharge et sur les impératifs liés aux prises de terre.
(TYPE POLARISE)
802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 3
7 Une antenne extérieure ne doit pas se trouver à proximité d’une ligne électrique, de poteauxd’éclairage public ou autres circuits électriques ou encore à un endroit où elle peut tombersur de telles lignes ou de tels circuits.Au cours de l’installation d’une antenne extérieure,faites particulièrement attention à ne pas entrer en contact avec ces lignes car un tel contactest mortel.
8 Les téléviseurs sont équipés avec des ouvertures de ventilation afin d’évacuer la chaleurgénérée pendant leur utilisation.
ll ne faut :
— jamais obstruer les ouvertures de ventilation sous le téléviseur portatif en le plaçant surun lit, un canapé, un tapis ;
— jamais placer le téléviseur dans une enceinte encastrée et sans ventilation suffisante ;
— jamais obturer les ouvertures avec un vêtement ou tout autre matériel ;
— jamais placer le téléviseur sur un radiateur ou à proximité d’une source de chaleur.
9 Pour éviter de blesser quelqu’un :
— ne placez jamais le téléviseur sur une étagère en pente sans l’avoir parfaitement arrimé ;
— utilisez seulement une table roulante recommandée par le fabricant du téléviseur ;
— ne faites pas passer la table roulante sur un seuil de porte ou sur une moquette épaisse;
— une installation sur un mur ou sur une étagère doit prendre en compte les instructions dufabricant et doit utiliser un kit de montage approuvé par ce dernier.
UTILISATION10 Prévenez les enfants de ne rien introduire dans le téléviseur par les ouvertures de ventila-
tion.Certains composants à l’intérieur sont sous tension et un contact peut provoquer unincendie ou une électrocution.
11 Débranchez la fiche secteur du téléviseur avant tout nettoyage. N’utilisez aucun nettoyantliquide ou en aérosol.
12 N’ajoutez aucun accessoire au téléviseur qui n’ait pas été conçu pour cet usage. Certainsajouts peuvent être dangereux.
EXEMPLE DE MISE À LA TERRE D’UNEANTENNE SELON LES PRESCRIPTIONS DU NEC
802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 4
13 Pour encore mieux protéger votre téléviseur pendant un orage ou si vous ne l’utilisez paspendant une longue période de temps, débranchez la prise secteur et déconnectez l’an-tenne.Vous évitez ainsi d’endommager le téléviseur en cas de foudre oude surtensions.
14 Un téléviseur sur meuble roulant doit être déplacé avec précautions. Desarrêts soudains, une force excessive ou une surface irrégulière peuventrenverser le téléviseur et son meuble roulant.
ENTRETIEN15 Débranchez le téléviseur de la prise secteur et faites appel à un réparateur qualifié pour un
dépannage dans les conditions suivantes :
A Quand le cordon ou la fiche sont endommagés ou usés.
B. Si un liquide a pénétré à l’intérieur du téléviseur.
C. Si le téléviseur a été exposé à la pluie ou à l’eau.
D. Si le téléviseur ne fonctionne pas normalement en respectant les instructions dumanuel.Procédez seulement aux réglages des commandes décrites dans le manuel. Eneffet, si vous déréglez d’autres commandes, des dommages peuvent se produire quidemanderont de longues réparations à un technicien qualifié pour refaire fonctionnernormalement l’appareil.
E.Si le téléviseur est tombé ou a été endommagé.
F.Quand les performances du téléviseur sont détériorées en permanence, ce qui indiquequ’il a besoin d’être réparé.
16 N’essayez pas de réparer vous-même en ouvrant le téléviseur ou en le retirant du boîtier,vous vous exposez à des tensions dangereuses.Faites réparer par un technicien agréé.
17 S’il est nécessaire de remplacer des composants, vérifiez avec le technicien qu’il utilise despièces détachées ayant les mêmes caractéristiques de sécurité que celles d’origine.Vouséviterez ainsi un incendie, une électrocution ou tout autre problème.
18 Après une réparation ou une maintenance, demandez au technicien de réaliser un test desécurité tel qu’il est décrit dans le manuel d’instructions.
19 Quant un téléviseur atteint la fin de sa vie utile, il faut vous en débarrasser sans faireimploser le tube cathodique. Demandez à un technicien de faire jeter le téléviseur.
20 Remarque pour l’installateur du système de télévision par câble (CATV):
Ce rappel a pour but d’attirer l’attention de l’installateur du système de télévision par câblesur l’article 820-40 du NEC qui fournit les indications pour une mise à la terre correcte et quispécifie en particulier que le câble de terre doit être connecté au système de mise à la terredu bâtiment aussi près que possible du point d’entrée du câble.
802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 5
Table des MatièresDÉBALLAGE DE VOTRETÉLÉVISEUR . . . . . . . . . . 7
CONFIGURATION RAPIDE . . . 8Pour débuter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8Première étape – La télécommande . . . . . 8Piles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8Fonctionnement de base . . . . . . . . . . . 8Réalisation des connexiones de base . . . . 9Le Plug In Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
CONNEXIONS . . . . . . . . . 11Connexions de câble et magnétoscope . . . 11Connexion à un lecteur de DVD . . . . . . . 14Connexion à un amplificateur extérieur . . . 15Connexion à un Caméscope . . . . . . . . . 15Connexions au liaisoninformatique AV de JVC . . . . . . . . . . . 16
TÉLÉCOMMANDE . . . . . . . 17Télécommande bases . . . . . . . . . . . 17Changement des Piles . . . . . . . . . . 17
PROGRAMMATION DE LATÉLÉCOMMANDE . . . . . . . 18Codes de boîte de câble oud’antenne parabolique . . . . . . . . . . . . 18Codes de magnétoscope . . . . . . . . . . . 19Codes de Lecteur DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Les Menus à l’Écran . . . 21Utilisation de ce Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . 21Les Menus à l’Écran . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
PLUG IN MENU . . . . . . . . . 22I n t r o d u c t i o n. . . . . . . . . . 2 2L a n g u e. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2Régler Auto Tune . . . . . . . . . 22Régler Horloge Automatique . . . 23Régler Horloge Manuel . . . . . . 24Te rm i n e r. . . . . . . . . . . . 2 4
Sommaire Canaux . . . . . . . 25Sommaire Canaux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
V–Chip . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26Régler Code Verrouiller . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
RÉGLAGES DE I’IMAGE . . . . . 34Teinte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Couleur . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34I m a g e. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 4Clarté . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Détail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Bruit réduit . . . . . . . . . . . . 35Régler statut vidéo . . . . . . . . 35
RÉGLAGES DU SON . . . . . . . 36Basse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Aigu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36MTS(Son multi canaux) . . . . . . 36
ÉLÉMENTS GÉNÉRAUX . . . . . 37Purete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37Minuterie On/Off . . . . . . . . . . 37Haut-parleur TV . . . . . . . . . . . 38Sans Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Entrée de Composant . . . . . . . . 39Sous–titres . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
FONCTIONS DES BOUTONS . . 40Menu (Bouton Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Exit (Sortie) et PIP Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Display (Affichage) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Video Status (Statut Vidéo) . . . . . . . . . . . 41Sleep Timer (Minuterie Sommeil) . . . . . . . 41Hyper Surround (Hyper Quadrosound) . . . . . 41Muting (Mise en sourdine du son) . . . . . . . 41BBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42100+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42R e t u rn +. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 2I n p u t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 2Boutons Magnétoscope . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Boutons DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Interrupteur TV/CATV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Interrupteur VCR/DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Light (Eclairage) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
PIP (Image-sur-Image) . . . . . . 44I n t r o d u c t i o n . . . . . . . . . . 4 4O n / M ove . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 4Freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45S wa p. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 5Channel +/– . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
ANNEXES . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Guide de dépannage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Garantie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Centres de réparations agréés . . . . . . . . 49Codes de Recherche . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50S p é c i f i c a t i o n s. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 1
802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 6
Deux PilesAA
1 Téléviseur 1 Télécommande
Merci d’avoir acheté un téléviseur en couleur JVC. Avant de commencer l’installation de votrenouveau téléviseur, assurez-vous d’avoir les pièces suivantes. Outre ce guide, le carton devotre téléviseur doit comprendre :
Lorsque vous aurez déballé votre téléviseur, l’étape suivante consiste à le raccorder à votreantenne, câble ou antenne parabolique, et à raccorder les appareils audio/vidéo que vousdésirez utiliser avec votre téléviseur. Pour réaliser ces connexions, vous utiliserez des fichestelles que celles illustrées ci-après.
Fiche d’entrée A VConnecteurs HFServent à raccorder un câblecoaxial provenant d’une antenneexterne ou d’un système de câblovision.
Un support de téléviseurest également offert(vendu séparément).
Sert à réaliser les connexionsvidéo avec certains magnéto-scopes, lecteurs de DVD,caméscopes, etc.
Sert à raccorder les appareilsaudio/vidéo tels que magnéto-scopes, lecteurs de DVD, amplifica-teurs stéréophoniques, consoles dejeux, etc.
Fiche S-Vidéo
Sert à raccorder les composants per-mettant la liaison informatique AVJVC en vue d’un cinéma automatiséen famille.
Câble de lien A Vinformatique
Avant de commencer à utiliser votre nouveau téléviseur, nous vous recommandons de lire ceguide en entier pour apprendre à connaître les nombreuses fonctions utiles de votre nouveautéléviseur. Toutefois, si vous êtes impatient de commencer à utiliser votre téléviseur immédi-atement, un guide de configuration rapide suit sur les trois prochaines pages.
Déballa ge de votre téléviseur
7
Remarque :IIse peutqu’une télécommandede modèle différent aitété fournie avec votretéléviseur.
802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 7
8
Faites glisser le couvercle à l’arrière de la télécommande vers le bas de la télécommande.Insérez deux piles en notant soigneusement les marquages « + » et « – » et en plaçant l’ex-trémité « – » dans l’appareil en premier. Remettez le couvercle en place.
Pour débuterCes pages de configuration rapide vous donneront, en trois étapes faciles, les informations debase dont vous avez besoin pour commencer à utiliser immédiatement votre nouveautéléviseur. Ces informations comprennent des instructions de base sur l’utilisation de votretélécommande, la réalisation d’une connexion simple à votre câble/antenne et d’une connexionfacultative à un magnétoscope, et, enfin, des informations sur la programmation du sélecteurAuto Tuner de votre téléviseur. Si vous avez des questions, ou pour obtenir des informationsplus détaillées sur l’une quelconque de ces étapes, veuillez consulter d’autres sections de ceguide.
Première étape – La télécommandeLa télécommande est essentielle à l’utilisation des nombreuses fonctions utiles de votretéléviseur. Avant de pouvoir utiliser votre télécommande, vous devez d’abord poser les piles(fournies).
Fonctionnement de baseMettez le téléviseur en marche et à l’arrêt en appuyant sur le bouton POWER situé dans le coinsupérieur droit de la télécommande.
Vous pouvez utiliser les quatre boutons des fonctions principales au centre de la télécom-mande pour le fonctionnement de base du téléviseur. Les boutons supérieur et inférieur ferontun balayage vers l’avant et vers l’arrière à travers les canaux disponibles. Les boutons droit etgauche augmenteront ou baisseront le volume. Ces boutons sont également marqués de qua-tre flèches et ils s’utilisent également avec le système JVC de menus à l’écran. Vous devrezutiliser ces boutons plus tard dans la Section de configuration rapide.
L’étape suivante consiste à raccorder votre téléviseur à une antenne ou à un câble.
Bouton marche/arrêtsur la télécommande
Bouton des fonctions principales sur la télécommande
+Procédez à la deuxième étape
Configuration rapide 1
802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 8
9
Câble/connecteur HF
Câbles/Fiches AV
Deuxième étape – Réalisation des connexiones de baseVous devrez ensuite raccorder votre téléviseur à une antenne ou à un système de câblovision.La connexion la plus simple à une antenne ou à un système de câblovision est illustrée ci-après.Pour des connexions plus détaillées, telles que celles faisant appel à une boîte de câble,reportez-vous aux pages 11 et 13.
Il vous sera peut-être opportun de raccorder également un magnétoscope à ce stade. Uneconnexion de base est illustrée ci-après pour un magnétoscope. Reportez-vous aux pages 14à 16 pour des instructions détaillées sur le raccordement d’autres composants ou d’un systèmede cinéma en famille.
Remarque : Vous n’avez pas besoin de magnétoscope pour utiliser votre téléviseur.
1) Raccordez le câble vidéo jaune sortant de la sortie vidéo du magnétoscope dans le jackd’entrée vidéo du téléviseur, OU raccordez un câble S-Vidéo depuis la sortie S-Vidéo dumagnétoscope dans l’entrée S-Vidéo du téléviseur.
2) Raccordez le câble audio blanc sortant de la sortie audio gauche du magnétoscope dans lejack d’entrée audio gauche du téléviseur.
3) Raccordez le câble audio rouge sortant de la sortie audio droite du magnétoscope dans lejack d’entrée audio droit du téléviseur.
Enfin, lorsque vous aurez terminé vos connexions, branchez le cordon dans la prise de courantla plus proche et mettez le téléviseur en marche.
1) Raccordez un câble HF depuis la sortie murale jusqu’à l’entrée HF à l’arrière du téléviseur.
+Procédez à la troisème étape
Illustration du modèle AV-27F802
Illustration du modèle AV-27F802
Configuration rapide 2
802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 9
10
Troisième étape - Le Plug In Men u
La Configuration rapideest maintenant terminée.
Appuyez sur les boutons et faites défiler jusqu’à RÉGLER AUTO TUNERAppuyez sur les boutons pour commencer RÉGLER AUTO TUNER
Pour choisir CÂBLE (si vous êtes raccordé à un système de câblovision) ou ANT. (sivous utilisez une antenne)Pour passer à la position COMMENCER
Pour commencer configuration automatique du sélecteur
L’Auto Tuner mettra maintenant en mémoire tous les canaux actifs et clairs que votre téléviseurpeut recevoir. Ceci prendra une ou deux minutes.
PROGRAMMATION EN COURS
48
MODE TUNER : CÂBLE ANT.
COMMENCER
Le Plug In Menu apparaît lorsque vous mettez votre téléviseur en marche pour la première fois.Ce menu permet d’effectuer quelques-uns des réglages de base de votre téléviseur. Voustrouverez, à compter de la page 22, une description complète du Plug In Menu. Nous vousrecommandons d’effectuer les sélections du Plug In Menu avant de commencer à utiliser votretéléviseur. Toutefois, pour commencer à utiliser immédiatement votre téléviseur, il vous suffitd’effectuer la configuration du sélecteur Auto Tuner. Votre téléviseur pourra ainsi apprendre lescanaux qu’il peut recevoir. Reportez-vous aux étapes ci-après pour configurer le sélecteurAuto Tuner.
La configuration du sélecteur Auto Tuner est terminée lorsque le message PROGRAMMATIONTERMINÉE apparaît à l’écran.
Votre Configuration rapide est maintenant terminée. Vous pouvez commencer à regarder latélévision, ou vous pouvez poursuivre la lecture de ce guide pour plus de renseignements surle raccordement des appareils audio/vidéo, la programmation de votre télécommande ou l’utili -sation du système JVC de menus à l’écran pour particulariser votre expérience d’écoute.
PLUG IN MENU
LANGUE ANG. FRAN. ESP.RÉGLER AUTO TUNERRÉGLER HORLOGE
TERMINER
CHOIX PAROPÈRE PAR
SORTIRPAR
EXIT
Configuration rapide 3
802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 10
ConnexionsConnexions de câble et magnétoscope
Schéma No. 1
Il existe trois types de base de connexion d’antenne ou de câble:
• Si vous avez une antenne ou un système de câble qui ne vous oblige pas à utiliser uneboîte de câble pour sélectionner les canaux, veuillez vous reporter au schéma No. 1.
• Si vous avez un système de câble qui nécessite l’utilisation d’une boîte de câble pouraccéder à l’ensemble des canaux, veuillez vous reporter au schéma No. 2. Si vous nepouvez utiliser votre fonction PIP (image sur image) en vous reportant au schéma No. 2,essayez la connexion illustrée dans le schéma No. 3. Il se peut que votre boîte de câblepermette la transmission, à votre téléviseur, du signal d’un seul canal à la fois.
• Si vous avez un système de câble qui nécessite l’utilisation d’une boîte de câble pouraccéder à certains canaux de premier choix, mais non aux canaux de câble de base,veuillez vous reporter au schéma No. 3.
• Pour votre commodité, la connexion à un magnétoscope est également illustrée dans lesschémas suivants. Un magnétoscope n’est pas nécessaire à l’utilisation du téléviseur nide la fonction PIP. Vous pouvez omettre le magnétoscope de vos connexions si vous ledésirez.
• Pour obtenir des instructions sur le raccordement d’un magnétoscope seulement, veuillezvous reporter au Guide de configuration rapide, à la page 9.
• Pour obtenir des instructions sur l’utilisation de l’image sur image (PIP), veuillez vousreporter à la page 44.
• La fonction PIP est disponible uniquement sur les modèles A V-36F802, AV-32F802 etAV-27F802.
Illustration du modèleAV-27F802
1) Raccordez le fil de câblovision ou d’antenne provenant de la sortie murale dans l’entrée HFdu répartiteur à deux voies.
2) Raccordez un câble HF provenant de l’une des sorties HF du répartiteur dans l’entrée HF àl’arrière du magnétoscope.
3) Raccordez un câble HF provenant de l’autre sortie HF du répartiteur dans l’entrée HF à l’ar-rière du téléviseur.
4) Raccordez le câble vidéo jaune provenant de la sortie vidéo du magnétoscope dans le jackd’entrée vidéo du téléviseur, ou raccordez un câble S-Vidéo depuis la sortie S-Vidéo dumagnétoscope à l’entrée S-Vidéo du téléviseur.
5) Raccordez le câble audio blanc provenant de la sortie audio gauche du magnétoscopedans le jack d’entrée audio gauche du téléviseur.
6) Raccordez le câble audio rouge provenant de la sortie audio droite du magnétoscope dansle jack d’entrée audio droit du téléviseur.
• Si votre magnétoscope est un appareil monophonique, il n’aura qu’un jack de sortie audio.Raccordez le à l’entrée audio gauche du téléviseur.
11
802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 11
Connexions
12
Connexions de câble et magnétoscope – suiteSchéma No. 2
Illustration du modèle AV-27F802
1) Raccordez le fil de câblovision ou d’antenne provenant de la sortie murale dans l’entrée HFde la boîte de câble.
2) Raccordez un câble HF provenant de la sortie HF de la boîte de câble dans l’entrée HF à l’arrière du magnétoscope.
3) Raccordez un câble HF provenant de la sortie HF à l’arrière du magnétoscope dans l’entréeHF à l’arrière du téléviseur.
4) Raccordez le câble vidéo jaune provenant de la sortie vidéo du magnétoscope dans le jackd’entrée vidéo du téléviseur, ou raccordez un câble S-Vidéo depuis la sortie S-Vidéo dumagnétoscope à l’entrée S-Vidéo du téléviseur.
5) Raccordez le câble audio blanc provenant de la sortie audio gauche du magnétoscope dansle jack d’entrée audio gauche du téléviseur.
6) Raccordez le câble audio rouge provenant de la sortie audio droite du magnétoscope dansle jack d’entrée audio droit du TV.
• Reportez-vous à la page 44 pour obtenir des info rmations surutiliser le fonction PIP avec unboîte de câbl e.
• Si votre magnétoscope est un appareil monophonique, il n’aura qu’un jack de sortie audio.Raccordez-le à l’entrée audio gauche du téléviseur.
• Pour plus de renseignements sur son fonctionnement, veuillez vous reporter au manueld’instructions du magnétoscope.
802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 12
Connexions
13
Les schémas de connexion ont pour but de montrer quelques connexions généralesde base. Certaines compagnies de câble peuvent exiger des connexions particulièresen vue d’une utilisation appropriée de votre téléviseur . Si vous suivez ces schémaset que le téléviseur ne fonctionne pas adéquatement,contactez votre compagnie decâble locale pour plus de renseignements concernant les connexions.
Connexions de câble et magnétoscope – suiteSchéma No.3
Illustration du modèle AV-27F802
1) Raccordez le fil de câblovision ou d’antenne provenant de la sortie murale dans l’entrée HFdu répartiteur à deux voies.
2) Raccordez un câble HF provenant de l’une des sorties HF du répartiteur à l’entrée HF de laboîte de câble.
3) Raccordez un câble HF provenant de la sortie de la boîte de câble dans l’entrée HF dumagnétoscope.
4) Raccordez un câble HF provenant de l’autre sortie HF du répartiteur à l’entrée HF à l’arrièredu téléviseur.
5) Raccordez le câble vidéo jaune provenant de la sortie vidéo du magnétoscope au jack d’en-trée vidéo du téléviseur, ou raccordez un câble S-Vidéo depuis la sortie S-Vidéo du magné-toscope à l’entrée S-Vidéo du téléviseur.
6) Raccordez le câble audio blanc provenant de la sortie audio gauche du magnétoscope aujack d’entrée audio gauche du TV.
7) Raccordez le câble audio rouge provenant de la sortie audio droite du magnétoscope aujack d’entrée audio droit du téléviseur.
• Reportez-vous à la page 44 pour obtenir des info rmations surutiliser le fonction PIP avec unboîte de câbl e.
• Si votre magnétoscope est un appareil monophonique, il n’aura qu’un jack de sortie audio.Raccordez-le à l’entrée audio gauche du téléviseur.
• Pour plus de renseignements sur son fonctionnement, veuillez vous reporter au manuel d’instructions du magnétoscope.
802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 13
Connexions
14
Connexion à un Lecteur de DVD
Illustration du modèle AV-27F802
1) Raccordez le câble vert provenant de la sortie composant « Y » du lecteur de DVD à l’en-trée du composant « Y » du téléviseur.
2) Raccordez le câble bleu provenant de la sortie composant « PB » du lecteur de DVD à l’en-trée du composant « PB » du téléviseur.
3) Raccordez le câble rouge provenant de la sortie composant « PR » du lecteur de DVD àl’entrée du composant « PR » du téléviseur.
4) Raccordez le câble audio blanc provenant de la sortie audio gauche du lecteur de DVD à l’entrée audio gauche 2 du téléviseur.
5) Raccordez le câble audio rouge provenant de la sortie audio droite du lecteur de DVD àl’entrée audio droite 2 du téléviseur.
• Le vert, le bleu et le rouge sont les couleurs les plus répandues pour les câbles de DVD. Lescouleurs peuvent différer sur certains modèles ; veuillez vous reporter au manuel d’instruc -tions pour de plus amples renseignements sur votre lecteur de DVD.
• Veillez à ne pas confondre le câble DVD rouge avec le câble audio rouge. Il est préférablede terminer une série de connexions (sortie audio ou DVD) avant de commencer l’autre afind’éviter de changer accidentellement les câbles.
• Reportez-vous à la page 20 pour des instructions sur le façon de programmer votre télécom-mande pour utiliser les fonctions de base de votre lecteur de DVD.
• AV-36F802, AV-32F802 et AV-27F802 : Vous pouvez également raccorder le lecteur de DVDà l’entrée 4.Si vous utilisez l’entrée 4 pour la connexion DVD, vous devez mettre le V4 COM-PONENT-IN sur le Menu de configuration initiale à la position « OUI » pour un affichageapproprié du signal DVD.
• AV-36F702, AV-32F702 et AV-27F702 : Si vous utilisez l’entrée 2 (Component-In) pour laconnexion DVD, vous devez mettre le V2 COMPONENT-IN sur le Menu de configuration ini-tiale à la position « OUI » pour un affichage approprié du signal DVD.
• Remarque : Les lecteurs de DVD progressifs (lecteurs avec un balayage de sortie de31,50 KHz) ne fonctionneront pas adéquatement avec ce téléviseur.
802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 14
Connexions
1) Raccordez le câble vidéo jaune provenant de la sortie vidéo du caméscope au jack d’entréevidéo du téléviseur, OU raccordez un câble S-Vidéo depuis la sortie S-Vidéo duCaméscope à l’entrée S-Vidéo du téléviseur.
2) Raccordez le câble audio blanc provenant de la sortie audio gauche du caméscope au jackd’entrée audio gauche du téléviseur.
3) Raccordez le câble audio rouge provenant de la sortie audio droite du caméscope au jackd’en trée audio droit du téléviseur.
• Si votre caméscope est un modèle monophonique, il n’aura qu’un jack audio. Raccordez-leau jack audio gauche du téléviseur.
Connexion à un Amplificateur Extérieur
Connexion à un Caméscope
1) Raccordez le câble audio blanc provenant du jack de sortie audio gauche du téléviseur aujack d’entrée audio gauche de l’amplificateur.
2) Raccordez le câble audio rouge provenant du jack de sortie audio droit du téléviseur aujack d’entrée audio droit de l’amplificateur.
• Reportez-vous également à « H. Parleur TV » et « Sans audio » à la page 38 pour de plusamples renseignements sur l’utilisation des haut-parleurs externes.
Vous pouvez raccorder un caméscope à votre téléviseur en utilisant les jacks d’entrée avant(entrée 3) situés sous la porte du panneau avant. Pour y avoir accès, appuyez doucementsur la porte pour l’ouvrir. Vous pouvez également raccorder une console de jeu ou un autreappareil à l’aide de ces jacks. On peut également raccorder les caméscopes aux jacks d’en-trée arrière du téléviseur.
Illustration du modèle AV-27F802
Illustration du modèle AV-27F802
15
802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 15
Connexions
Pour raccorder : Branchez une extrémité du câble de la liaison informatique AV dans l’entréede liaison informatique AV de votre magnétoscope ou lecteur DVD à liaison informatique.Branchez l’autre extrémité du câble de la liaison informatique AV dans l’entrée de la liaisoninformatique AV à l’arrière du téléviseur.
Connexions au Liaison informatique AV de JVC
Le Lien AV informatique JVC automatise entièrement la lecteur des bandes vidéo ou desDVD. Il vous suffit d’insérer une bande pré-enregistrée dans votre magnétoscope de mar-que JVC ou un DVDdans votre lecteur de DVD JVC et l’appareil se mettra automatiquementen marche et commencera la lecteur. Au même moment, grâce au Lien AV informatique, lemagnétoscope ou le lecteur de DVD envoie un signal au téléviseur lui disant de se mettreen marche et de passer à l’entrée vidéo appropriée.• Il se peut que le câble de la liaison informatique AV soit inclus avec l’accessoire de la liai -
son informatique AV JVC que vous désirez raccorder. Sinon, contactez un centre de serv-ice JVC agréé pour vous procurer la pièce No. EWP 805-012.
• La liaison informatique AV ne peut être utilisée qu’avec les produits de marque JVC.
REMARQUE :
• La lecture de la bande vidéo ne pourra commencer automatiquement que si les languettesd’enregistrement ont été retirées de la bande VHS. Si la languette est en place, il y auracommutation automatique lorsque vous appuierez sur le bouton PLAY du magnétoscope.
• Le câble de la liaison informatique AV possède une fiche mâle (mono) de 3,5 mm à chaqueextrémité.
• Si votre magnétoscope de marque JVC présente une commutation « A Code/B CodeRemote Control Switching » (commutation de télécommande code A/code B) (reportez-vousau manuel d’instructions de votre magnétoscope), l’utilisation du Code A magnétoscopecommutera le téléviseur à l’entrée 1.
• Si vous utilisez l’entrée 1 pour l’entrée vidéo de votre boîte de câble, utilisez le Code B mag-nétoscope pour sélectionner l’entrée 2 vidéo TV.
• Pour raccorder un amplificateur ou un récepteur haute fidélité JVC en vue de l’obtention d’uncinéma domestique entièrement automatisé, reportez-vous aux consignes de raccordementde l’appareil haute fidélité pour plus de renseignements sur le raccordement.
• AV COMPU LINK EX est compatible avec les récepteurs suivants:RX-664V, RX-665V,RX-668VBK, RX-774V, RX-778VBK, RX-884V, RX-888VBK, RX-1024V, RX-1028VBK et lesmodèles subséquents de récepteur.
Illustration du modèle AV-27F802
16
802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 16
Changement des PilesAppuyez sur le couvercle arrière de la télécommande et faites-le glisser vers le bas pour leretirer. Installez avec précaution les deux piles AA fournies en repérant les marques « + »et « – » des piles et de la télécommande. Pour éviter un court-circuit, insérez le « – » en pre-mier.Une fois les piles posées, enclenchez le couvercle en place.• Si la télécommande se comporte de façon anormale, remplacez les piles. Les piles durent
de six mois à un an. Nous vous recommandons d’utiliser des piles alcalines qui durent pluslongtemps.
Lorsque vous remplacez les piles, tâchez de le faire en moins de trois minutes. Si l’opérationde changement des piles dure plus de trois minutes, vous devrez peut-être réintroduire lescodes de la télécommande pour votre magnétoscope, lecteur de DVD et/ou votre boîte decâble (pages 18-20).
TélécommandeFonctiones de base de la télécommande• Avant de pouvoir utiliser la télécommande, vous devez d’abord
poser les piles (fournies). Reportez-vous à la section« Changement des piles » au bas de cette page pour instruc-tions. (Vous trouverez une illustration à la page 8.)
• Appuyez sur le bouton POWER pour mettre la télévision enmarche ou à l’arrêt.
• Assurez-vous que le commutateur TV/CATV se trouve sur laposition TV. Mettez le commutateur sur la position CATVseulement si vous devez utiliser une boîte de câble.
• Faites glisser le sélecteur VCR/DVD à la position VCR pourcommander un magnétoscope, faites glisser à la position DVDpour commander un lecteur de DVD. Veuillez vous reporteraux pages 18 à 20 pour instructions sur la programmation devotre télécommande en vue de l’utilisation d’une boîte decâble, d’un magnétoscope ou d’un lecteur de DVD.
• Appuyez sur les boutons CH+ et CH– pour balayer à traversles canaux. Tapez sur le bouton CH+ ou CH– pour passer àtravers les canaux un à la fois.
• Pour passer rapidement à travers les canaux à l’aide de lafonction Hyperscan de JVC, enfoncez et tenez les boutonsCH+ ou CH–. Les canaux défileront au rythme de cinq parseconde.
• Appuyez sur VOL+ ou VOL– pour augmenter ou baisser le vol-ume. Une barre indicatrice apparaîtra à l’écran pour vous mon-trer le niveau du volume de la télévision.
• Les boutons CH+/– et VOL +/– servent également à la naviga-tion dans le système JVC de menus à l’écran.
• Vous pouvez accéder directement à des canaux particuliers àl’aide du pavé à 10 touches.
• Pour plus de renseignements sur les fonctions des boutons dela télécommande, reportez-vous aux pages 40 à 45. Pour desinformations sur l’utilisation des menus à l’écran, reportez-vous à la page 21.
Remarque : La télécommande modèle RM-C301G est illustrée àgauche. Il se peut qu’une télécommande de modèle différent aitété fournie avec votre téléviseur.
17
802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 17
Programmation de laTélécommandeR é g l a ge des Codes CAT V, M ag n é t o s c o p e , et lecteur DV D
Vous pouvez programmer votre télécommande de manière à actionner votre boîte de câbl e,récepteur satellite, magnétoscope ou lecteur de DVD en vous reportant aux instructions et auxcodes apparaissant ci-après. Si l’appareil ne répond à aucun des codes énumérés ci-après ouà la fonction de recherche de codes, utilisez la télécommande fo u rnie par le fa b ri c a n t .
Codes de Boîte de Câble ou d’Antenne ParaboliqueLa télécommande est programmée avec les codes CATV et/ou antenne parabolique pour lamise en marche et à l’arrêt, le balayage de canaux vers le haut et vers le bas et le clavier à 10touches.1) Repérez la marque CATV/antenne parabolique à même la liste des codes apparaissant ci-après.2) Faites glissez l’interrupteur/sélecteur de mode à deux voies à la position CATV.3) Appuyez sur le bouton DISPLAY et tenez-le enfoncé.4) Introduisez le premier numéro de code indiqué au clavier à 10 touches tout en continuant à
appuyer sur le bouton DISPLAY.5) Relâchez le bouton DISPLAY.6) Assurez-vous que la boîte de câble/le récepteur d’antenne parabolique fonctionne.• Si votre boîte CATV ou d’antenne parabolique ne répond pas au premier code, essayez les
autres codes apparaissant sur la liste. Si elle ne répond à aucun code, essayez la fonctiondes codes de recherche décrite à la page 50.
18
802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 18
Programmation de laTélécommande
Codes de MagnétoscopeLa télécommande est programmée avec les codes magnétoscope pour la mise en marche et àl’arrêt, la lecture, l’arrêt, l’avance rapide, le rembobinage et le balayage de canaux vers le hautet vers le bas.
1) Repérez la marque magnétoscope à même la liste des codes apparaissant ci-après.2) Faites glissez le premier interrupteur/sélecteur à deux voies à la position « TV » et l’autre
interrupteur/ sélecteur à deux voies à la position « VCR ».3) Appuyez sur le bouton DISPLAY et tenez-le enfoncé.4) Introduisez le premier numéro de code indiqué au clavier à 10 touches tout en continuant à
appuyer sur le bouton DISPLAY.5) Relâchez le bouton DISPLAY.6) Assurez-vous que le magnétoscope fonctionne.• Si votre magnétoscope ne répond pas au premier code, essayez les autres codes apparais-
sant sur la liste. Si elle ne répond à aucun code, essayez la fonction des codes derecherche décrite à la page 50.
• Il se peut que les magnétoscopes de certains fabricants ne répondent pas au boutonTV/VCRmême si d’autres boutons fonctionnent correctement.
• Pour enregistrer, tenez le bouton REC de la télécommande enfoncé et appuyez sur PLAY.
19
802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 19
Programmation de laTélécommande
20
La télécommande est programmée avec les codes DVD pour la mise en marche et à l’arrêt, lalecture, l’arrêt, l’avance rapide, le rembobinage, chapitre précédent, chapitre suivant,l’overture/la fermeture du plateau, et l’image fixe/la pause.
1) Repérez la marque de lecteur DVD à même la liste des codes apparaissant ci-après.2) Faites glissez le premier interrupteur/sélecteur à deux voies à la position « TV » et l’autre
interrupteur/sélecteur à deux voies à la position « DVD ».3) Appuyez sur le bouton DISPLAY et tenez-le enfoncé.4) Introduisez le premier numéro de code indiqué au clavier à 10 touches tout en continuant à
appuyer sur le bouton DISPLAY.5) Relâchez le bouton DISPLAY.6) Assurez-vous que le lecteur DVD fonctionne.
• Si votre lecteur DVD ne répond pas au premier code, essayez les autres codes apparaissantsur la liste. Si elle ne répond à aucun code, essayez la fonction des codes de recherchedécrite à la page 50.
• Après que vous ayez programmé votre télécommande, il se peut que certains boutons DVDne fonctionnent pas adéquatement. Si certains boutons ne fonctionnent pas adéquatement,utilisez la télécommande qui était fournie avec votre lecteur DVD.
Codes de lecteur DVD
802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 20
Les Menus à l’Écran
21
Utilisation de ce Guide
Les Menus à l’Écran :
Les flèches montante et descendante signifient d’appuyer sur les boutons Channel Up ouChannel Down. Une pression des boutons de flèche montante ou descendante vous permetde :
Les flèches montante et descendante signifient d’appuyer sur les boutons Channel Upou Channel Down. Une pression des boutons de flèche montante ou descendante vouspermet de :• vous déplacer verticalement dans l’écran du menu principal• vous déplacer à travers un sous-menu• passer à la lettre ou au nombre suivant, ou autre choix dans un sous-menu• revenir en arrière afin de corriger une erreur• balayer les canaux de télévision (lorsque vous n’êtes pas dans un menu)
Les flèches gauche et droite signifient d’appuyer sur le bouton Volume Left ou VolumeRight pour :• sélectionner l’élément mis en relief dans un menu• sélectionner les options d’un sous-menu• sélectionner les numéros de certaines options de menu• monter ou baisser le volume (lorsque vous n’êtes pas dans un écran de menu)Appuyez sur le bouton « Appuyez » signifie qu’il faut appuyer sur ce bouton de la télé-commande.La « main d’aide »est dirigée vers l’élément en surbrillance ou sélectionné dans unmenu.
Pour faire remonter le menu à l’écran , appuyez sur le bouton MENU de la télécommande.L’élément qui apparaît en jaune est l’élément sélectionné. Si vous appuyez à nouveau sur lebouton MENU, l’affichage à l’écran passera à l’écran de menu suivant. Le « Plug In Menu »apparaîtra la première fois que le téléviseur sera branché.
Remarque : Les menus apparaissant dans ce manuel sont des illustrations et non des repro-ductions exactes des affichages à l’écran du téléviseur.
PLUG IN MENU
LANGUE ANG. FRAN. ESP.RÉGLER AUTO TUNERRÉGLER HORLOGE
TERMINER
CHOIX PAROPÈRE PAR
SORTIRPAR
EXIT
802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 21
Plug In Menu
22
Introduction
Régler Auto Tuner
LangueFaites votre choix entre l’anglais, le français ou l’espagnol pour les écrans des menus et desaffichages.
Appuyez sur le bouton MENU
Pour LANGUE
Pour choisir une langue
Au cours de la configuration automatique du sélecteur, le téléviseur analyse automatiquementtous les canaux disponibles, met en mémoire ceux qui sont actifs et saute les canaux vides ouceux dont le signal est faible. Ceci signifie que, lorsque vous balayez (à l’aide des boutonsCHANNEL +/–), vous ne recevez que des canaux clairs et actifs.
Appuyez sur le bouton MENU
Pour RÉGLER AUTO TUNER
Pour exécuter
Pour choisir CÂBLEou ANT.
Pour passer à la position COMMENCER
Pour commencer configuration automatique du sélecteur
• Bruit réduit est hors service au cours de la configuration automatique du sélcteur.• Vous n’aurez pas besoin d’appuyer sur le bouton Menu pour accéder à cet écran depuis le
Plug In Menu.
PROGRAMMATIONEN COURS
PROGRAMMATION TERMINÉE
48
La programmation durera 1 à 2 minutes.
• Vous n’aurez pas besoin d’appuyer sur le bouton Menu pour accéder à cet écran depuis lePlug In Menu.
Le Plug In Menu remonte automatiquement lorsque vous mettez le téléviseur en marche lapremière fois après l’avoir branché. Le Plug In Menu vous aide à préparer votre téléviseur àl’utilisation en vous permettant de fixer vos choix pour :
• la langue dans laquelle vous voulez que les menus à l’écran apparaissent,• la configuration automatique du sélecteur des canaux que vous désirez recevoir,• le réglage de l’horloge TV à la bonne heure de manière à ce que vos fonctions de minuterie
fonctionnent adéquatement.
Des descriptions de chacune des fonctions du Plug In Menu apparaissent sur cette page et surla page suivante. Nous vous recommandons de terminer la configuration du Plug In Menu enpremier de manière à ce que votre téléviseur soit immédiatement configuré de la manière dontvous le désirez.
802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 22
Plug In Menu
23
Régler Horloge AutomatiqueVous devez d’abord régler l’horloge avant d’utiliser l’une quelconque des fonctions de minuteriede votre téléviseur. Vous pouvez régler votre horloge avec précision à l’aide du signal horaireXDS diffusé par la plupart des stations PBS. Pour régler l’horloge à l’aide du signal XDS :
Introduisez le numéro de canal de votre station PBS locale
Appuyez sur MENU
Pour RÉGLERHORLOGE
Pour exécuter
Pour AUTO.
Vers TIME ZONE
Pour sélectionner votre fuseau horaire
Pour passer à l’heure avancée (D.S.T.)
Pour activer ou inhiber l’heure avancée
Pour TERMINER
Pour quitter et mettre les réglages en mémoire
• Si vous n’avez pas de poste PBS dans votre région, vous devrez régler l’horloge manuelle-ment.Reportez-vous à « Régler Horloge Manuel » en haut de la colonne suivante pourinstructions.
• La fonction heure avancée ajuste automatiquement l’horloge de votre téléviseur pour l’heureavancée. L’horloge avancera d’une heure à 2 heures du matin le premier dimanche d’avril.L’horloge reculera d’une heure à 2 heures du matin le dernier dimanche d’octobre.
MODE AUTO. MANUEL
TIME ZONE PACIFIQUED.S.T. ON OFF
TERMINER
• Vous n’aurez pas besoin d’appuyer sur le bouton Menu pour accéder à cet écran depuis lePlug In Menu.
802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 23
Plug In Menu
24
Pour régler votre horloge manuellement (sans utiliser le signal XDS), choisissez MANUELdepuis le menu Régler horloge et suivez les étapes ci-après.
Pour RÉGLERHORLOGE
Pour exécuter
Pour MANUEL
Pour passer à l’heure
Pour régler l’heure
Pour passer aux minutes
Pour régler les minutes
Pour PARTIR HORLOGE
Pour démarrer l’horloge et quitter
MODE AUTO. MANUEL
HEURE --:-- --
PARTIR HORLOGE
MERCI !!
Régler Horloge Manuel
REMARQUE :Vous devrez remettre l’horloge à l’heure après une panne secteur. Vous devez régler l’horlogeavant d’utiliser l’une quelconque des fonctions de minuterie.
Lorsque les éléments du Plug In Menu sont réglés à vos choix personnels, passez à l’optionFinish pour mettre vos réglages en mémoire.
Pour TERMINER
Pour mettre les réglages en mémoire et quitter
• Vous pouvez modifier les choix que vous avez définis dans le Plug In Menu à tout moment àl’aide du système de menus à l’écran JVC.
Terminer
• Vous n’aurez pas besoin d’appuyer sur le bouton Menu pour accéder à cet écran depuis lePlug In Menu.
802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 24
Sommaire CanauxSommaire Canaux
Sommaire canaux vous permet de particulariser l’éventail de canaux reçus par votre téléviseur.Vous pouvez ajouter ou éliminer des canaux de la liste de balayage ou les verrouiller afin d’em-pêcher des spectateurs non autorisés de regarder un ou plusieurs parmi ces canaux (jusqu’à181).
Appuyez sur le bouton MENU
Pour SOMMAIRE CANAUXPour exécuter
L’écran Sommaire canaux (au-dessus) affichera maintenant les canaux à balayer marqués d’un« ü ». Vous pouvez supprimer des canaux du balayage en retirant le « ü ». Si des canaux ontété manqués durant la configuration automatique du sélecteur et que vous désirez les ajouter,vous pouvez le faire en plaçant un « ü » à côté du numéro du canal.
Pour accéder à la colonne BALAYAGE
Pour inclure ou éliminer de la liste de balayage
EXIT lorsque vous avez terminé
Vous pouvez bloquer accés à canal avec Channel Guard.
Pour SOMMAIRE CANAUX
Pour exécuter
Pour accéder à la colonne de verrouillage
Appuyez sur le code d’accès ZÉRO (0) pour verrouiller ou déverrouiller ce canal
Appuyez pour quitter une fois terminé
Message d’un canal réservé
Ce message apparaît quand un spectateur tente de regarder un canal réservé :
Pour regarder un canal que vous avez verrouillé,entrez le code de verrouillage en utilisant le pavénumérique à 10 touches.
Si un code erroné est entré, le message suivantapparaît : CODED’ACCÈS INVALIDE
Il est impossible d’accéder à ce canal jusqu’à ceque le code correct soit introduit.
• Une fois un canal déverrouillé, il demeurera déverrouillé jusq’à ce que le téléviseur soit mis àl’arrêt.
• Reportez-vous « Régler Code Verrouiller », page 33.
C A N º . BA L AYA . CANº. BA L AYA.
0 1 06 ü
0 2 ü 07
0 3 ü 08
0 4 ü 09 ü
0 5 ü 10 ü
CE CANAL EST VERROUILLÉ PAR CODE ENTRER CODE DE CONTRÔLE AU CLAVIER DE 10 CHIFFRES
POUR LE LIBÉRERNO - - - -
25
802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 25
V-Chip
26
Votre téléviseur est pourvu de la technologie puce V, ce qui permet aux parents d’imposer desDirectives parentales pour la télévision (aux États-Unis et au Canada) et les films (MPAA). Latechnologie de la puce V vous permet de programmer votre téléviseur de manière à recevoir, ou àne pas recevoir, certains programmes sur la base de leur contenu conformément aux directives.Les programmes qui dépassent les limites de cotes que vous imposez seront bloqués. Lorsqu’unspectateur tente de voir un canal bloqué, le message suivant apparaît :
Le canal demeurera bloqué jusqu’à l’introduction du code de verrouillage approprié (reportez-vousà la page 33 pour obtenir des informations sur le réglage de votre code de verrouillage).
Vous pouvez adapter les réglages de la puce V de votre téléviseur à vos goûts personnels. LemenuV-Chip ci-après est le point de départ de vos réglages de puce V.
Vous pouvez utiliser les réglages américains de puce V (pour les programmes diffusés depuis lesÉtats-Unis), les réglages canadiens de puce V (pour les programmes diffusés depuis le Canada)et les cotes de film. Vous pouvez utiliser l’un quelconque des réglages ou tous les réglages (puceV US, puce V Canada, cotes de film). Des descriptions pour le réglage de chacun des trois for-mats de puce V apparaissent dans les sept pages qui suivent, accompagnées de descriptions descatégories de cotes.
Pour accéder aux catégories de cotes :
CE PROGRAMME DÉPASSE VOSLIMITES DE COTE.ENTRER CODE BLOCAGEPAR LE CLAVIER 10 TOUCHESPOUR DÉVERROUILLER
NO - - - -
V-CHIP ON OFFFIXER COTES TÉlÉVISEURFIXER COTES FILMSYST CLASSIFICAT CAN ANGSYST CLASSIFICAT CAN FRANONCOTÉ VISUALISER BLOC
TERMINER
Remarque spéciale au sujet des cotes
Certains programes ne possèdent pas de signal de cote. Par conséquent, même si vous configurez la puce V, ces programmes ne seront pas verrouillés. Les parents sont avisés de
regarder préalablement le contenu de ces programmes ou de ces films.
Appuyez sur le bouton MENU
Vers V-CHIPPour exécuter (l’icône de verrouillage aparaît)
Appuyez sur ZERO pour accéder au menu Puce V
Pour activer (ON) ou inhiber (OFF) la puce V (la puce V doit être activée pour queles réglages de cotes fonctionnent).
Pour passer à FIXER COTES TÉLÉVISEUR, FIXER COTES FILM ou SYST CLASSIFI-CATCAN (reportez-vous aux pages suivantes pour des descriptions de chaque option).
802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 26
V-Chip
27
Fixer Cotes Téléviseur (Systèmes Américains) SYSTÈMES AMÉRICAINS DE COTES PARENTALESLes programmes possèdant les cotes suivantes sont appropriés pour les enfants. TV Y est approprié pour tous les enfants.
Les programmes sont réalisés pour de très jeunes spectateurs et ils devraient convenir àtous les âges, y compris les enfants âgés de 2 à 6 ans.
TV Y7 est destiné aux enfants plus âges.La plupart des parents trouveraient ces programmes convenables pour les enfants âgés de7 ans et plus. On peut y trouver une certaine violence de comédie ou de fantaisie peusévère. Les enfants devraient pouvoir distinguer la réalité de la fantaisie.
Les programmes possèdant les cotes suivantes sont appropriés pour l’ensemble desspectateurs.
TV G signifie Audience Générale .La plupart des parents trouveraient ces programmes convenables pour tous les groupesd’âge. Ils contiennent peu de violence, voire même aucune, aucun langage choquant, etpeu de dialogue ou de situations sexuels, voire même aucun.
TV PG Direction parentale suggérée .Peut contenir un certain langage choquant, mais pas beaucoup, une violence limitée, et uncertain dialogue ou certaines suggestions à teneur sexuelle suggestive. Il est recommandéaux parents de regarder ces programmes en premier, ou de les regarder avec leurs enfants.
TV 14 Parents fortement mis en garde.Les programmes contiennent un matériel qui peut ne pas convenir aux enfants de moins de14 ans, notamment une possibilité de violence intense, de situations sexuelles, de langagegrossier et choquant, ou de dialogue fortement suggestif. Les parents sont mis en gardecontre l’écoute sans surveillance par des enfants de moins de 14 ans.
TV MA Audiences adultes seulement.Ces programmes sont destinés spécifiquement aux adultes, et il se peut qu’ils neconviennent pas à une personne âgée de moins de 17 ans. Les programmes TV MApeuvent présenter un important contenuV, S, L ou D.
Directives d’écouteOutre les catégories de cotes expliquées ci-dessus, des informations sont égalementfournies avec la cote puce V sur des types précis de contenu. Ces types de contenupeuvent également être bloqués. Les types de contenu sont les suivants :
• V/FV signifie VIOLENCE/VIOLENCE FANTAISIE • S signifie CONTENU SEXUEL• L signifie LANGAGE choquant• D signifie DIALOG suggestif
802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 27
V-Chip
Alignez le curseur de la colonne (TV PG, TV G, etc.) sur la rangée contenu (V/FV, S, etc.) et
appuyez sur or pour déplacer le curseur à l’emplacement correct. Appuyez sur or pour activer ou inhiber la fonction de verrouillage. Un élément est verrouillé si apparaîtl’icône plutôt qu’un « – ».
Exemple. Pour bloquer l’écoute de tous les programmes TV 14, déplacez le curseur à larangée supérieure de cette colonne et ajoutez une icône de verrouillage. Lorsque vous aurezplacé un verrou sur la rangée supérieure, tout ce qui se trouve dans cette colonne seraverrouillé automatiquement.
Vers la colonne TV 14
Pour activer le verrouillage
Pour TERMINER
Pour mettre les réglages en mémoire et quitter
• Si vous désirez modifier la configuration, déplacez le curseur à la colonne supérieure etmodifiez l’icône de verrouillage à « – ». Vous pouvez alors sélectionner des catégoriesindividuelles à bloquer.
Appuyez sur le bouton MENU
Vers V-CHIPPour exécuter (l’icône de verrouillage aparaît)
Appuyez sur ZERO pour accéder au menu Puce V
Pour activer (ON) ou inhiber (OFF) la puce V
Pour passer à FIXERCOTES TÉLÉVISEUR
Pour exécuter
V-CHIP ON OFFFIXER COTES TÉlÉVISEURFIXER COTES FILMSYST CLASSIFICAT CAN ANGSYST CLASSIFICAT CAN FRANONCOTÉ VISUALISER BLOC
TERMINER
Fixer Cotes Téléviseur
Pour configurer les cotes de Directives Parentales TV (EU) :
28
802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 28
V-Chip
29
Fixer cotes avec le bouton V-Chip
Exemple 2 :
Si vous voulez configurer vos réglages de la puce V de manière à bloquer toute laprogrammation au-dessus d’un réglage courant tel que TV PG-V (avec violence) :
Appuyez sur ZERO lors de l’affichage de TV PG-V
Toute la programmation au-dessus de TV-PG-V avec violence sera bloquée.
Pour accéder aux informations de cote au sujet d’un programme particulier, appuyez sur lebouton de la puce V tout en regardant ce programme. Le message suivant apparaît :
Si vous décidez que vous voulez bloquer cette catégorie d’écoute, appuyez sur « 0 » pendantque l’écran ci-dessus est visible, et tous les programmes de cette catégorie seront verrouillés.
Exemple 1 :
Si vous voulez définir vos réglages V-Chip (puce V) de manière à bloquer tous les programmesau-dessus de TV PG.
Appuyez sur ZERO lors de l’affichage de TV-PG
Toute la programmation au-dessus de TV-PG sera bloquée.
• En ce qui concerne l’écoute des enfants, vous pouvez bloquer les programmes TV-Y et Y7en appuyant sur « 0 » lorsque Y est affiché durant un programme. Les programmes pourpublics autres que des enfants ne seront pas touchés.
LE PROGRAMME EST COTÉ :TV-PG - V
802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 29
V-Chip
30
NR - Non coté.Il s’agit d’un film non coté. Ces films sont souvent importés de pays qui n’utilisent pas lesystème de cotes MPAA. D’autres films non cotés peuvent être l’oeuvre de réalisateursamateurs qui n’avaient pas l’intention de diffuser leur film dans le grand public.La programmation NR (non coté) peut contenir tous les types de programmation, y comprisdes programmes pour enfants, des programmes étrangers ou du matériel adulte.
G – Audience Générale .Selon le conseil d’étude, ces films ne contiennent rien en fait de contenu sexuel, violence oulangage qui ne conviendrait pas à un public de quelque âge que ce soit.
PG – Direction Parentale .La Direction parentale signifie que le film peut présenter un certain contenu tel que faibleviolence, une brève scène de nudité et un langage fort. Le contenu n’est pas réputéintense.
PG-13 – Parents Fortement Avisés.Les parents ayant des enfants de moins de 13 ans sont avisés que le contenu de films ainsicotés peut comprendre un contenu sexuel et de langage plus explicite et plus de violenceque les films cotés PG.
R - Restreint.Ces films contiennent du matériel de nature explicite, et ils ne sont pas recommandés pourdes enfants de moins de 17 ans sans supervision.
NC-17 - Personne de moins de 17 ans.Ces films sont considérés comme étant ce que la plupart des parents jugeraient trop adultepour l’écoute de leurs enfants, et ils peuvent contenir un langage choquant, des scènes denudité, de la violence et des sujets suggestifs et explicites.
X - Personne de moins 18 ans.Inappropriate material for anyone under 18.
Fixer Cotés Film
Appuyez sur le bouton MENU
Vers V-CHIPPour exécuter (l’icone de verrouillage apparaît)
Appuyez sur ZERO pour accéder aux options de configuration de la puce V
Pour passer à FIXER COTESFILM
Pour accéder au menu des cotesAinsi, pour interdire aux spectateurs les programmes X et NC-17 :
Vers la colonne XPour activer le verrouillage
Vers la colonne NC-17
Pour activer le verrouillage
Pour TERMINER
Pour enregistrer les réglages et quitter
Instructions pour bloquer l’écoute de films :
802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 30
V-Chip
31
E – Exemptées.Les programmes exempts comprennent : les informations, les émissions sportives, lesdocumentaires et autres programmes d’information, les débats, les vidéos de musique, etles programmes de variétes.
G – Général.Directives de violence :il n’y aura aucune scène réaliste de violence. Les descriptions decomportements agressifs seront rares et limitées à des représentations de nature claire-ment fictive, comique ou irréaliste.
8ans+ – Général-Déconseillé aux jeunes enfants.Directives de violence :toute description réaliste de violence sera rare, discrète ou peuintensive, et montrera les conséquences des actes. Il n’y aura ni langage choquant, ninudité, ni contenu sexuel.
13ans+ – Cette émission peut ne pas convenir aux enfants de moins de 13 ans.Programmes destinés à une audience générale, mais qui peuvent ne pas convenir à dejeunes enfants. Les parents peuvent juger que certain contenu ne convient pas à desenfants âgés de 8 à 13 ans.
16ans+ – Cette émission ne convient pas aux moins de 16 ans.Les parents sont fortement avisés d’exercer leur discrétion avant d’autoriser l’écoute par despré-adolescents et des jeunes adolescents. Les programmes peuvent contenir des thèmesmûrs ainsi que des scènes de violence intense.
18ans+ – Cette émission est réservée aux adultes.Matériel destiné uniquement à un public adulte.
Cotes Canadiennes de puce V
Instructions pour configurer les cotes Canadiennes de puce V :Appuyez sur le bouton MENU
Vers V-CHIP
Pour exécuter (l’icone de verrouillage apparaît)
Appuyez sur ZERO pour accéder aux options de configuration de la puce V
Pour passer à SYST CLASSIFICAT CAN FRA (pour Français)Pour accéder au menu des cotes
Ainsi, pour interdire aux spectateurs les programmes 16ans+ and 18ans+ :
Vers la colonne 18ans+Pour activer le verrouillageVers la colonne 16ans+
Pour activer le verrouillage
Pour TERMINER
Pour enregistrer les réglages et quitter
Pour obtenir des instructions sur « SYST CLASSIFICAT CAN ANG (en anglais) », veuillez vousreporter à la page 31 du côté anglais du présent manuel.
802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 31
V-Chip
32
Programmes Non Coté
Remarques au sujet des progranmmes non cotés:La programmation non cotée désigne tout programme qui ne contient pas de signal de cote.Les programmes des postes de télévision qui ne transmettent pas de signaux de cote serontdans la catégorie « Programmation non cotée ».
Exemples de programmes non cotés :
Bulletins d’urgenceProgrammes d’origine localeInformationsProgrammes PolitiquesAnnonces de Sevices PublicsProgrammes ReligeuxSportsMétéoCertaines récames télévisées
• Les films ou les programmes de télévision qui n’ont pas de signal de cote seront bloqués si
la catégorie non cotée est mise à BLOC (Verrouillage).
Instructions pour bloquer les programmes non cotés :
Vous pouvez bloquer des programmes qui ne sont pas cotés.
Appuyez sur le bouton MENU
Vers V-CHIP
Pour exécuter (l’icone de verrouillage apparaît)
Appuyez sur ZERO pour accéder aux options de configuration de la puce V
Vers NONCOTÉ
Pour VISUALISER ou BLOC
Appuyez sur EXIT une fois terminé
NONCOTÉ VISUALISER BLOC
802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 32
V-Chip
33
Régler Code Verrouiller
Les réglages de canal réservé et de puce V sont protégés par un code de verrouillage à quatrechiffres. Votre téléviseur est offert préréglé avec un code de verrouillage de 0000. Vouspouvez changer le code à tout numéro à quatre chiffres que vous désirez. Pour changer lecode de verrouillage, suivez les étapes ci-après.
Appuyez sur le bouton MENU
Pour RÉGLER CODE VERROUILLER
Pour exécuter
L’icône du candenas apparaît
Appuyez sur zéro pour accéder au code de verrouillage
Le premier chiffre sera mis en relief
Pour choisir le nombre
Pour passer au chiffre suivant
Continuez à suivre ces instructions pour entrer les quatre chiffres.
Pour TERMINER
Pour enregistrer les réglages et quitter
Votre code de verrouillage est maintenant défini.
CODE VERROUILLER 0 0 0 0
TERMINER 0
• Après une panne secteur, vous devez introduire un nouveau code de verrouillage.• Écrivez votre numéro de code de verrouillage et cachez-le.• Si vous oubliez le code de verrouillage, vous pouvez en entrer un de la même manière.
REMARQUE :
802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 33
Régla ges de l’Ima ge
34
Teinte
Couleur
Image
Clarté
Détail
La teinte vous permet de régler les niveaux de rouge et de vert dans l’image de votretéléviseur.
Appuyez sur le bouton MENU
Pour TEINTEPour augmenter le vert
Pour augmenter le rouge
Pour passer à l’option suivante
La fonction Couleurs vous permet de rendre toutes les couleurs de l’image du téléviseur plusvives ou plus subtiles.
Appuyez sur le bouton MENU
Pour COULEURPour rendre les couleurs plus vives
Pour atténeur les couleurs
Pour passer à l’option suivante
Cette fonction vous permet d’ajuster les niveaux de noir et de blanc sur l’écran du téléviseur,afin d’obtenir une image d’ensemble plus sombre ou plus claire.
Appuyez sur le bouton MENU
Pour IMAGE
Pour augmenter le contraste
Pour diminuer le contraste
Pour passer à l’option suivante
Permet de régler le niveau de luminosité.
Appuyez sur le bouton MENU
Pour CLARTÉPour éclairer l’image
Pour assombrir l’image
Pour passer à l’option suivante
Le détail permet de régler le niveau des détails dans une image.
Appuyez sur le bouton MENU
Pour DÉTAIL
Pour rendre l’image plus nette (plus de détails)
Pour rendre l’image plus douce (moins de détails)
Pour passer à l’option suivante
802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 34
Régla ges de l’Ima ge
35
Bruit Réduit
Régler Statut Vidéo
Cette fonction insère un écran bleu vide par-dessus les canaux qui ne transmettent pas ou quisont trop faibles pour être reçus clairement.
Appuyez sur le bouton MENU
Pour BRUITRÉDUIT
Pour activer ou inhibiter le Bruit Réduit
• Bruit Rèduit ne fonctionnera pas durant la configuration automatique du selecteur ni lorsquevous utiliserez le Sommaire Canaux.
Grâce à cette fonction, vous pouvez mettre en mémoire votre propre série de réglages de qual-ité de l’image en tant que « Choix » pour y avoir accès ultérieurement sur simple pression d’unbouton.
Appuyez sur le bouton MENU
Pour RÉGLER STATUT VIDÉO
Pour exécuter
Pour régler les niveaux de TEINTE
Pour passer à l’option suivante
Répétez les étapes ci-dessus pour régler chaque option.
Pour SAUVER COMME CHOIX
Pour mettre les réglages en mémoire et quitter
• Vous devez utiliser SAUVER COMME CHOIX pour sortir du menu Régler statut vidéo, sinonvos préférences ne seront pas mises en mémoire.
• Vous pouvez avoir accès à vos réglages “Choix” à n’importe quel moment en appuyant sur lebouton VIDEO STATUS de la télécommande.
TEINTE -------------|-------------COULEUR -------------|-------------IMAGE -------------|-------------CLARTÉ -------------|-------------DÉTAIL -------------|-------------
SAUVER COMME CHOIX
L’écran de réglages disparaîtra si vous n’effectuez aucun réglage ou si vous ne passez pas àl’option suivante en environ trois secondes. Tout changement apporté aux réglages de l’imagejusqu’à ce point sera sauvegardé. Pour quitter à tout moment le menu des réglages de l’im-age, appuyez sur le bouton Exit de la télécommande.
REMARQUE :
802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 35
Régla ges du Son
36
La fonction de réglage de niveau Basse vous permet de monter ou de réduire le niveau dessons à basse fréquence du téléviseur.
Appuyez sur le bouton MENU
Pour BASSEPour augmenter le niveau des graves
Pour diminuer le niveau des graves
Pour passer à l’option suivante
La fonction de réglage de niveau Aigu vous permet de monter ou de réduire le niveau des sonsà haute fréquence du téléviseur.
Appuyez sur le bouton MENU
Pour AIGUPour augmenter le niveau des aigus
Pour dimuner le niveau des aigusPour passer à l’option suivante
La fonction de réglage de la balance vous permet de régler le niveau sonore entre les deuxhaut-parleurs du téléviseur.
Appuyez sur le bouton MENU
Pour BALANCEPour déplacer la balance vers le haut-parleur droit
Pour déplacer la balance vers le haut-parleur gauchePour passer à l’option suivante
La technologie MTS permet la diffusion simultanée de plusieurs signaux audio, ce qui vousdonne le choix de ce que vous voulez entendre avec un programme de télévision.Outre le sonmonophonique ou stéréophonique, une diffusion MTS peut également comprendre un deux-ième programme audio (SAP).
Appuyez sur le bouton MENU
Pour MTSSélectionnez le mode(La flèche EN ONDE vous informe si le signal en cours de transmission contient des informations STÉRÉO ou SAP.)
• Gardez le téléviseur en mode STÉRÉO afin d’obtenir la meilleure qualité sonore. Le sonsera diffusé en mode STÉRÉOPHONIQUE même si une certaine diffusion est en sonMONOPHONIQUE seulement.
• Choisissez le réglage MONO afin de réduire le bruit excessif d’un canal ou d’un programme.• SAP vous permet d’écouter une autre piste sonore, si elle est disponible.
MTS (Son Multi Canaux)
Aigu
Balance
Basse
Pour quitter à tout moment le menu des réglages du son, appuyez sur le bouton EXIT de la télécom-mande.
REMARQUE :
802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 36
Éléments Généraux
Faites savoir à votre téléviseur quand il doit se mettre en marche ou s’arrêter. Utilisez cettefonction en tant qu’alarme pour vous réveiller, pour vous rappeler l’heure d’un programmeimportant ou encore comme un agent de diversion quand vous êtes en dehors de la maison.
Appuyez sur le bouton MENU
Pour MINUTERIE ON/OFF
Pour exécuter (commence par HEURE DÉBUT)
Pour régler l’heure (AM/PM) de mise en marche du téléviseur
Pour passer aux minutes
Pour régler les minutes
Pour accepter HEUREDÉBUT et passer à HEURE FIN (l’heure à laquelle letéléviseur se mettra à l’arrêt). Réglez l’HEURE FIN de la même manière quel’HEURE DEBUT
Pour accepter HEURE FIN et passer à CANAL
Pour choisir le canal
Pour passer à MODE
Choisissez UNE FOIS ou PAR JOUR
Pour MINUTERIE ON/OFF
Choisissez OUI pour accepter le réglage de minuterie, choisissez NON si vous nevoulez pas l’accepter
Pour TERMINER
Pour enregistrer les réglages
Minuterie On/Off
• On ne peut régler la minuterie On/Off sur des canaux bloqués ou protégés.• La minuterie On/Off ne peut fonctionner si l’horloge n’est pas réglée.• Les réglages de minuterie doivent être refaits après une panne secteur.
REMARQUE :
Si le téléviseur est en marche lorsqu’un événement programmé est sur le point de commencer,une fenêtre Prévisualisation de minuterie apparaîtra. La fenêtre Prévisualisation de minuterieapparaîtra dans le coin inférieur droit de l’écran sept secondes avant que la minuterie ne doivecommencer. Lorsque la minuterie sera actionnée, l’image Prévisualisation deviendra l’imageprincipale.
Remarque sur la minuterie On/Off pour PIP (AV-36F802, AV-32F802 etAV-27F802) seulement.
37
PureteCeci aide à nettoyer l’image pour y enlever la « neige ».
Appuyez sur le bouton MENU
Pour PURETE
Pour introduisez
Pour réglage purete
N S -------------|-------------
802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 37
Éléments Généraux
38
Si votre téléviseur est raccordé à une chaîne stéréophonique, vous pouvez mettre les haut-par-leurs du téléviseur hors service et écouter avec les haut-parleurs de votre chaîne.
Appuyez sur le bouton MENU
Pour H. PARLEUR TV
Pour mettre en/hors service les haut-parleurs TV
Appuyez sur EX I T une fois terminé
• Avant de remettre en service les haut-parleurs du téléviseur, assurez-vous de diminuer levolume du son ! En cas de volume élevé, le son devient extrêmement fort.
• Après une panne secteur, le réglage haut-parleurs TV revient à la position de marche(« ON »).
H. Parleur TV
Sans Audio
• Haut-parleurs externe : Lorsque vous utilisez des amplificateurs ou haut-parleurs externes,fermez les haut-parleurs TV (voir « haut-parleurs TV ») ci-dessus.
REMARQUE :
H. PARLEUR TV ON OFF
Si votre téléviseur est raccordé à une source de haut-parleur externe, Sans Audio vous permetde contrôler le niveau sonore à l’aide de la télécommande de votre téléviseur.
A p p u yez sur le bouton ME N U
Pour SANS AUDIO
Pour VARI ou RÉGLER
Appuyez sur EX I T une fois terminé
VARI : Vous permet de régler le niveau sonore des haut-parleurs externes à l’aide des
boutons VOLUME +/– de la télécommande de votre téléviseur.
RÉGLER : Le niveau sonore des haut-parleurs externes se règle à l’aide de la télécommandede l’appareil audio.
SANS AUDIO VARI RÉGLER
802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 38
Éléments Généraux
Utilisez cette fonction pour afficher le texte des Sous-titres (lorsqu’ils sont compris dans un programme).
Appuyez sur le bouton MENU
Pour SOUS-TITRES
Pour exécuter
Pour sélectionner S-TITRE, TEXTE ou OFF (arrêt)
Pour S-TITREou TEXTE
Pour sélectionner un canal de Sous-Titres ou de Texte
Pour TERMINER
Pour conserver les réglages et sortie
MODE : S-TITRE
S-TITRE : CC1 CC2 CC3 CC4TEXTE : T1 T2 T3 T4
TERMINER
Sous-Titres
• Les sous-titres se trouvent habituellement sur le canal de sous-titres CC1. Certains pro-grammes peuvent comprendre des informations de texte supplémentaires qui se trouventhabituellement sur le canal de texte T1. Les autres canaux sont disponibles pour usagefutur.
• Les sous-titres peuvent ne pas fonctionner adéquatement si le signal reçu est faible ou sivous lisez une bande vidéo.
• La plupart des programmes contenant des sous-titres afficheront un avis au début duprogramme.
REMARQUE :
Entrée de ComposantObtenez la meilleure qualité visuelle de votre lecteur de DVD en utilisant ce réglage et lesentrées DVD à l’arrière du téléviseur. Mettez à la position OUI pour entrée de composant (pourDVD) ou NON pour entrée vidéo composée (pour un magnétoscope régulier).
Appuyez sur le bouton MENU
Pour V4 COMPONENT-IN (ou V2 COMPONENT-IN pour AV-36F702, AV-32F702 etAV-27F702)
Pour OUI ou NON
EXIT lorsque vous avez terminé
• Cette option doit être utilisée uniquement avec les lecteurs de DVD. Reportez-vous à lapage 11 pour plus de renseignements sur le raccordement de magnétoscopes. Reportez-vous à la page 14 pour plus de renseignements sur le raccordement d’un lecteur de DVD.
Remarque : Les modèles AV-36F702, AV-32F702 et AV-27F702 n’a pas d’entrée 4.
V4 COMPONENT-IN OUI NON
39
802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 39
Fonctions des Boutons
L’écran Affichage indique l’état courant des minuteries et des entrées.
Appuyez sur le bouton DISPLAY
• Le canal ou l’entrée AV (Canal 07)• L’heure en cours (12:20 pm)
• L’état du Sleep Timer/minutes restantes (le Sleep Timer est inhibé)
• L’état de la minuterie On/Off (tous les jours, marche à 19 heures, arrêt à 22heures)
• Chaque appui sur le bouton DISPLAY change le mode d’affichage :
Affichage – Plein écran montré ci-dessus
Heure – Montre l’heure courante seulement
Canal – Montre le canal courant
Off – Met l’affichage à l’arrêt
• Vous pouvez également inhiber l’affichage à n’importe quelle étape en appuyant sur EXIT.
07MAINTENANT 12:20 PMMINUT. SOMMEIL OFFMINUT. ON/OFF CHAQUE JOUR
HEURE DÉBUT 7:00 PMHEURE FIN 10:00 PM
Le bouton MENU vous permet d’accéder au système de menus à l’écran JVC. Appuyez surMENU pour activer le système de menus à l’écran.
• Reportez-vous aux sections individuelles (telles que « Réglages du son ») pour obtenir desinformations précises sur l’utilisation des menus.
Menu
Exit (Sortie) et PIP Off
Display (Affichage)
Veuillez noter que si l’horloge, la minuterie sommeil ou la minuterie On/Off ne sont pas réglés,l’écran d’affichage montrera, respectivement, :« HORLOGE NON RÉGLÉE », « MINUT. SOM-MEIL OFF » et « MINUT. ON/OFF OFF ».
REMARQUE :
Appuyez sur le bouton EXIT pour quitter un écran de menu. Sur le RM-C301G, ce bouton estégalement marqué « PIP OFF ». Appuyez sur EXIT/PIP OFF pour inactiver la fonction Image-sur-Image (veuillez vous reporter à la page 44 pour plus de renseignements sur la fonctionPIP).• La fonction PIP est disponible uniquement sur les modèles A V-36F802, AV-32F802 et
AV-27F802.
40
802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 40
Fonctions des Boutons
41
Video Status (Statut Vidéo)
Sleep Timer (Minuterie Sommeil)
Hyper Surround (Hyper Quadrosound)
Muting (Mise en sourdine du son)
Le bouton VIDEO STATUS vous permet de sélectionner l’un de trois réglages d’affichage d’image,y compris un affichage de vos propres préférences.
Standard – Réinitialise les réglages de l’image aux niveaux standard usine.
Choix – Correspond aux réglages que vous avez enregistrés dans le menu Régler StatutVidéo en page 35.
Cinéma – Donne à la vidéo un aspect riche, similaire au film.
Appuyez sur le bouton VIDEO STATUS
Cette minuterie met le téléviseur hors tension à votre place en cas d’assoupissement. Vouspouvez programmer cette fonction avec des intervalles de 15 minutes à 180 minutes.
Appuyez sur le bouton SLEEP TIMER
Message de la minuterie sommeil
20 secondes avant l’extinction automatique, ce message apparaît :
Vous avez alors 20 secondes pour appuyer sur le bouton SLEEP TIMER pour reculer la mise hors tension d’encore 15 minutes.
BONNE NUIT !!
PRESSER LE BOUTON MINUT.
SOMMEIL POUR PROLONGER
Crée un effet sonore tridimensionnel profond en utilisant uniquement les haut-parleurs dutéléviseur dirigés vers l’avant. Appuyez sur le bouton Hyper Surround pour activer(ON) ouinhiber (OFF) l’effet.
Le bouton de mise en sourdine interrompt instantanément et totalement le volume quand vousle pressez. Appuyez à nouveau sur MUTING pour rétablir le volume au niveau précédent.
HYPER QUADROSOUND ON OFF
802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 41
Fonctions des Boutons
42
Le bouton RETURN+ a deux fonctions :
Return – Retour au canal regardé immédiatement avant le canal maintenant à l’écran.
Return+ –Vous permet de programmer un canal précis auquel revenir après le balayage àtravers les canaux.
RETURN+ et tenez pendant 3 secondes
Balayez à l’aide des boutons CHANNEL+/–.
RETURN+
Vous reviendrez au canal que vous avez programmé.
• Pour annuler votre canal Return+, enfoncez et tenez Return+ pendant trois secondes. Lemessage « RETOUR À UN CANAL ANNULE » apparaîtra.
• Return+ s’emploie uniquement avec CHANNEL +/–. La pression de toute autre touchenumérique annulera RETURN+.
• Return+ n’affecte pas le canal PIP (AV-36F802, AV-32F802 et AV-27F802 seulement).
Le bouton 100+ permet d’accéder directement aux canaux au-dessus de 99. Ainsi, pourpasser au canal 124 ;appuyez sur le 100+, 2 (deux), 4 (quatre).
RETOUR À CANAL PROGRAMMÉ
Bouton 100+
Return+
InputSélectionne la source d’entrée de signal pour la télévision : TV (pour antenne ou câble), ouVidéo 1, 2, 3 ou 4 pour appareils vidéo tels que magnétoscopes ou caméscopes.
IN P U T
BBEL’audio à haute définition BBE ajoute un son naturel, clair et de très haute qualité à tout pro-gramme. Activez ou inhibitez BBE à l’aide du bouton BBE.
BBE ON OFF
REMARQUE :
• Les modèles AV-36F702, AV-32F702 et AV-27F702 n’a pas d’entrée Vidéo 4.
BBE est une marque déposée de BBE Sound, Inc. Pour les États-Unis, sous licence de BBESound, Inc., en vertu des brevets américains 4638258, 4482866 et 5510572. Pour le Canada,sous licence de BBESound, Inc BBE est une marque déposée de BBESound, Inc.
802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 42
Fonctions des Boutons
43
Boutons DVD
Boutons Magnétoscope
Interrupteur TV/CATV
Interrupteur VCR/DVD
Vous pouvez également utiliser cette télécommande pour activer les fonctions de base de votrelecteur DVD. Ces fonctions comprennent :lecture, rembobinage, avance rapide, arrêt, imagefixe/pause, image précédente/suivante, ouverture/fermeture du plateau, mise en marche etmise à l’arrêt.
Mettez l’interrupteur sélecteur à la position DVD pour activer.
• La télécommande est préréglée avec le code 000 pour commander les lecteurs DVD de mar-que JVC. Pour un lecteur DVD de toute autre marque, reportez-vous à la liste de codes etaux instructions figurant à la page 20.
Utilisez le syntonisateur du téléviseur ou une boîte de câble pour sélectionner les canaux.Mettez cet interrupteur à la position TV pour utiliser le syntonisateur incorporé au téléviseur.Mettez l’interrupteur à la position CATV pour utiliser une boîte de câble.
• Reportez-vous à la page 18 pour obtenir des informations sur la programmation de votretélécommande pour l’utilisation de la boîte de câble.
Vous pouvez commander un magnétoscope ou un lecteur de DVD en utilisant les boutonssitués sur la partie inférieure de la télécommande. Utilisez l’interrupteur sélecteur VCR/DVDpour choisir l’utilisation du magnétoscope ou du DVD.
• Reportez-vous aux pages 19 et 20 pour plus de renseignements sur la programmation devotre télécommanmde à l’aide des codes d’utilisation magnétoscope et DVD.
Light (Eclairage)Votre télécommande comporte des boutons éclairés pour les fonctions principales telles queCHANNEL +/– et VOLUME +/–. Appuyez sur le bouton LIGHT pour illuminer les boutons.
Vous pouvez utiliser cette télécommande pour activer les fonctions de base de votre magnéto-scope. Ces fonctions comprennent :lecture, enregistrement, rembobinage, avance rapide,arrêt, pause, balayage des canaux, TV/magnétoscope, mise en marche et à l’arrêt.
Mettez l’interrupteur sélecteur à la position VCR pour activer.
• La télécommande est préréglée avec le code 000 pour commander les magnétoscopes demarque JVC. Pour un magnétoscope de toute autre marque, reportez-vous à la liste decodes et aux instructions figurant à la page 19.
802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 43
Fonctions des Boutons - PIP
44
PIP affiche deux images distinctes à l’écran. Votre téléviseur possède la PIP à deux syntonisa-teurs, ce qui signifie que vous pouvez voir, simultanément, les images provenant de deuxcanaux distincts. Une série spéciale de boutons de commande PIP est située sur la partiesupérieure de la télécommande. Des descriptions de chaque bouton sont données sur cettepage.
La fonction PIP est disponible uniquement sur les modèles A V-36F802, AV-32F802 etAV-27F802.
On/MoveActivez PIP en appuyant sur le bouton ON/MOVE.
(PIP) ON/MOVE
PIP OFF pour mettre PIP à l’arrêt
Une fois la fonction PIP activée, vous pouvez déplacer la fenêtre PIP à n’importe lequel desquatre coins de l’image principale du téléviseur à l’aide du bouton ON/MOVE.
ON/MOVE
• Chaque pression du bouton ON/MOVE déplacera la fenêtre PIP à un coin différent.
02
07
Remarque du Boîte de CâbleIl se peut que la fonction PIP à deux syntonisateurs ne fonctionne pas lorsqu’elle est utiliséeavec certaines boîtes de câble. La raison en est que, bien que certains modèles de boîte decâble puissent recevoir jusqu’à 181 canaux, ils peuvent uniquement transmettre le signal d’uncanal à votre téléviseur (veuillez également vous reporter au schéma de la page 11). Le syn-tonisateur PIP ne peut fonctionner correctement sans accès à l’ensemble des canauxdisponibles. Étant donné que le téléviseur reçoit le signal d’un seul canal depuis la boîte decâble, le PIP à deux syntonisateurs ne peut afficher un second canal différent.
Étant donné qu’il y a de nombreux modèles différents de boîtes de câble en usage aujourd’hui,si vous éprouvez de la difficulté à utiliser votre fonction PIP avec votre boîte de câble, nousvous recommandons de contacter votre compagnie locale de câblovision pour obtenir des con-seils sur le raccordement.
802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 44
Fonctions des Boutons - PIPFreeze
Swap
Channel +/– for PIP
Source
Utilisez le bouton Freeze pour bloquer une seule image fixe sur la fenêtre PIP.• Si la fonction PIP est inhibée lorsqu’on appuie sur Freeze, un instantané de l’écran principal
est pris et placé dans la fenêtre PIP.• Si la fonction PIP est activée lorsqu’on appuie sur Freeze, l’image qui était dans la fenêtre
lorsque le bouton a été enfoncé est maintenue.
Vous pouvez échanger le canal affiché à l’écran principal contre celui apparaissant dans lafenêtre PIP en appuyant sur SWAP.
Tout comme les boutons CHANNEL +/– principaux, CHANNEL +/– pour PIP vous permet de balay-er les canaux dans la fenêtre PIP.• La sélection directe des canaux à l’aide du pavé numérique à 10 touches pour la PIP n’est
pas possible.
Vous pouvez sélectionner la source de signal pour l’image de la fenêtre PIP.
• Si la PIP n’a pas de signal, la fenêtre sera bleue.• Si vous raccordez un DVD à Vidéo-2 ou Vidéo-4, la fenêtre PIP sera bleue.
• La fenêtre PIP est le neuvième de la dimension de l’écran complet.• La fonction PIP n’affichera pas les programmes ou les canaux bloqués. Un écran bleu appa-
raîtra en remplacement.
REMARQUE :
45
802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 45
Guide de Dépanna ge
46
802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 46
Garantie
JVC COMPANY OF AMERICA garantit ce produit et toutes ses pièces, sauf comme indiqué ci-après, À L'ACHETEUR DÉ DÉTAIL INITIAL comme étant EXEMPTS DE VICES DEMATÉRIAUX ET D'EXÉCUTION depuis la date de l'achat initialpendant la période indiquée ci-après (la « période de garantie »). L'écran est couvert pendantdeux ans.
Cette garantie limitée n'est valable que dans les cinquante (50) états des États-Unis, le Districtde Columbia et le Commonwealth de Porto Rico.
ENGAGEMENT DE JVC :
Si ce produit est jugé défectueux, JVC réparera ou remplacera les pièces défectueuses sansqu'il n'en coûte rien à l'acheteur initial.Ces réparations seront effectuées durant les heuresd'affaires régulières seulement aux centres de service agréés JVC.Toutes les pièces réparéesou remplacées sont garanties uniquement pendant le temps à courir de cette période degarantie. L'ensemble du produit et des pièces doivent être livrés à un centre de service agréé,sauf les modèles dont l'écran dépasse 25 pouces, lesquels sont couverts avec service à domi-cile.
VOUS DEVEZ :
• rapporter vos produits à un centre de service agréé JVC, accompagnés d'une copie de votrefacture.Pour connaître le centre de service JVC agréé le plus proche de vous, appelez aunuméro sans frais (800) 252-5722 (É.U. SEULEMENT).
• S'il n'existe aucun centre de service disponible localement, emballez le produit soigneuse-ment, de préférence dans sa boîte d'origine, et expédiez-le, assuré, au centre de service agrééle plus proche, accompagné d'une copie de la facture et d'une lettre d'explication concernant leproblème. Appelez le numéro sans frais indiqué ci-dessus pour connaître l'adresse.
CE QUI N'EST PAS COUVERT :
1) Les produits qui ont fait l'objet d'usage abusif, accident, altération, modification, manipulation,négligence, utilisation erronée, installation erronée, absence de soins raisonnables, ou si leproduit a été réparé ou entretenu par une personne autre qu'un centre de service agréé parJVC pour effectuer ce service, ou si le produit est raccordé à un accessoire quelconque nonfourni avec les produits, ou si le modèle ou le numéro de série a été altéré, manipulé ouenlevé.
2) L'installation initiale, l'enlèvement pour réparation et la réinstallation après la réparation nesont pas couverts.
3) Les réglages opérationnels couverts dans le manuel, l'entretien normal, le nettoyage de latête vidéo et audio.
4) Les dommages qui surviennent en cours d'expédition ou qui sont attribuables à un cas fortu-it ou résultent de changements cosmétiques.
5) Les problèmes de réception de signal et les défaillances attri bu a bles à des surt e n s i o n s.
No. de modèle No. de série Pièces Main-d'oeuvre
Pour les télévisions de modèles canadiens, veuillez vous reporter aux feuilles distinctes con-cernant la garantie pour JVC au Canada
47
802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 47
Garantie
48
6) Les tubes de prise de vue/le capteur d'images CCD, la cartouche et l'aiguille sont couvertspendant une période de 90 jours depuis la date d'achat.
7) Les accessoires, et
8) Les piles (à l'exception des piles rechargeables qui sont couvertes pendant 90 jours depuisla date d'achat).
Il n'existe aucune garantie explicite, sauf celles mentionnées ci-dessus.
LA DURÉE DE TOUTE GARANTIE IMPLICITE, Y COMPRIS LA GARANTIE IMPLICITE DECOMMERCIALISATION, EST LIMITÉE À LA DURÉE DE LA GARANTIE EXPLICITE DONNÉEAUX PRÉSENTES.
JVC NE SERA PAS RESPONSABLE DE LA PERTE D'UTILISATION DE CE PRODUIT, DESENNUIS, DE LA PERTE OU DE TOUS AUTRES DOMMAGES, QU'ILS SOIENT DIRECTS,INDIRECTS OU ACCESSOIRES (Y COMPRIS, DE MANIÈRE NON LIMITATIVE, LES DOM-MAGES AUX BANDES, ENREGISTREMENTS OU DISQUES) RÉSULTANT DE L'UTILISA-TION DE CE PRODUIT, OU DÉCOULANT DE TOUTE RUPTURE DE CETTE GARANTIE.TOUTES LES GARANTIES EXPLICITES ET IMPLICITES, Y COMPRIS LA GARANTIE DECOMMERCIALISATION ET D'APTITUDE À UN USAGE PARTICULIER, SONT LIMITÉES À LAPÉRIODE DE GARANTIE INDIQUÉE CI-DESSUS.
Certains états n'autorisent pas l'exclusion des dommages indirects ou accessoires ni les limita-tions à la durée de la garantie ;il se peut donc qu'elles ne s'appliquent pas à vous. Cettegarantie vous donne des droits précis et vous pouvez également avoir d'autres droits qui var i-ent d'un état à l'autre .
Si vous avez des questions concernant votre produit JVC, veuillez vous mettre en contact avecnotre Service clientèle :
JVC COMPANY OF AMERICA 1700 Valley RoadDIVISION DE JVC AMERICAS CORP. Wayne, New Jersey, 07470
Les produits remis à neuf ont une garantie distincte. Cette garantie ne s'applique pas auxdétails de la garantie du produit remis à neuf.Veuillez vous reporter aux informations sur lagarantie du produit remis à neuf contenues dans l'emballage de chaque produit remis à neuf.
802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 48
Centres de Réparations Agréés
49
SERVICE DE QUALITÉ SERVICE DE QUALITÉ
NUMÉRO SANS FRAIS : 1 (800) 537-5722http://www.jvc.com
COMMENT REPÉRER VOTRE CENTRE DE SERVICE JVC
Cher client,
Afin de recevoir des prestations optimales de l’appareil que vous avez acheté, veuillez lirele manuel d’instructions avant de mettre l’appareil en marche. Si des réparations s’avèrentnécessaires ou pour connaître l’adresse du centre de service le plus proche de vous sur leterritoire continental des États-Unis, veuillez composer le 1 (800) 537-5722 pour votre cen-tre de service agréé le plus proche ou visitez notre site Web à www.JVC.com
N’oubliez pas de conserver votre facture pour vous prévaloir du service sous couvert degarantie.
Mise en gardePour prévenir les secousses électriques, n’ouvrez pas le boîtier. Il n’existe, à l’intérieur, aucunepièce susceptible d’être entretenue par l’utilisateur.Veuillez confier les réparations à des techni-ciens de service compétents .
AccessoiresPour acheter des accessoires pour votre produit JVC, vous pouvez contacter votre revendeurJVC local.Dans les 48 états du territoire continental des États-Unis, appelez gratuitement au 1(800) 882-2345 ou sur le Web à www.JVC.com.
Ne réparez pas le téléviseur vous-même
Service au CanadaPour repérer votre vendeur ou centre de service JVC local au Canada, veuillez composerl e:
Ou visitez notre site Web à www.JVC.ca
Dans l’est du Canada:1 (416) 293-1311
Dans l’ouest du Canada:1 (604) 270-1311
En Français (Montréal):1 (514) 871-1311
802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 49
50
Codes de RechercheFonction des Codes de Recherche de Boîte de Câble oud’Antenne Parabolique :1) Faites glisser l’interrupteur sélecteur de mode à deux voies à la position CATV.2) Appuyez sur les boutons TV POWER et RETURN+ pendant au moins trois secondes, puis
relâchez.3) Appuyez sur TV POWER et vérifiez si la boîte de câble ou la boîte d’antenne parabolique
répond.4) S’il y a eu une réponse, appuyez sur RETURN+. Les codes de commande sont maintenant
définis. En l’absence de réponse, répétez l’étape 3. Si vous répétez l’étape 3 52 fois sansréponse, utilisez la télécommande fournie avec l’appareil.
5) Appuyez sur RETURN+ pour quitter cette fonction.
Fonction des Codes de Recherche de Magnétoscope :1) Faites glissez le premier interrupteur/sélecteur à deux voies à la position « TV » et l’autre
interrupteur/sélecteur à deux voies à la position « VCR ».2) A p p u yez sur les boutons VCR POW E R et RE T U R N+ pendant au moins trois secondes, puis
r e l â c h e z .3) Appuyez sur VCR POWER et vérifiez si le magnétoscope répond.4) S’il y a eu une réponse, appuyez sur RETURN+. Les codes de commande sont maintenant
définis. En l’absence de réponse, répétez l’étape 3. Si vous répétez l’étape 3 80 fois sansréponse, utilisez la télécommande fournie avec l’appareil.
5) Appuyez sur RETURN+ pour quitter cette fonction.
Fonction des Codes de Recherche de Lecteur DVD :1) Faites glissez le premier interrupteur/sélecteur à deux voies à la position « TV » et l’autre
interrupteur/sélecteur à deux voies à la position « DVD ».2) A p p u yez sur les boutons DVD POW E R et RE T U R N+pendant au moins trois secondes, puis
r e l â c h e z .3) Appuyez sur DVD POWER et vérifiez si le lecteur DVD répond.4) S’il y a eu une réponse, appuyez sur RETURN+. Les codes de commande sont maintenant
définis. En l’absence de réponse, répétez l’étape 3. Si vous répétez l’étape 3 30 fois sansréponse, utilisez la télécommande fournie avec l’appareil.
5) Appuyez sur RETURN+ pour quitter cette fonction.
802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 50
Spécifications
Spécifications soumises à modification sans prévais.
51
802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 51
JVC COMPANY OF AMERICADivision of JVC Americas Corp.
1700 Valley RoadWayne, New Jersey, 07470
JVC CANADA, INC.21 Finchdene SquareScarborough, Ontario
Canada, M1X 1A7
802 french CuRrEnT 1 9/4/01 9:45 AM Page 52
SERVICE MANUAL
AV-36F702AV-36F802
AV-36F702 /Y
AV-36F802 /Y
COLOR TELEVISION
BASIC CHASSIS
AC
No. 51907BDec. 2001
COPYRIGHT © 2001 VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LTD.
TVTV
RM-C303G[AV-36F702]
RM-C301G[AV-36F802]
CONTENTSa SPECIFICATIONS ....................................................................................................................................2
a SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ........................................................................................................................3
a FEATURES ..............................................................................................................................................4
a MAIN DIFFERENCE LIST........................................................................................................................5
a FUNCTIONS.............................................................................................................................................6
a SPECIFIC SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS ....................................................................................................7
a SERVICE ADJUSTMENTS ....................................................................................................................13
¤ STANDARD CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (APPENDIX) .................................................................................. 2-1
a PARTS LIST ...........................................................................................................................................37
AV-36F702AV-36F802
2 No. 51907B
SPECIFICATIONSItems Contents
Dimensions (W × H × D)
Mass
TV RF System
Color Sound System
TV Receiving Channels and Frequency
VL Band
VH Band
UHF Band
CATV Receiving Channels and Frequency
Low Band
High Band
Mid Band
Super Band
Hyper Band
Ultra Band
Sub Mid Band
TV/CATV Total Channel
Intermediate Frequency
Video IF Carrier
Sound IF Carrier
Color Sub Carrier
Power Input
Power Consumption
Picture Tube
High Voltage
Speaker
Audio Power Output
Video / Audio Input (1 / 2 / 3 / 4)
Audio Output
(Variable / Fix : Selectable)
AV Compu link EX Input
Antenna terminal
Remote Control Unit
37-7/8” × 30-1/2” × 24-1/2” / 96.2cm × 77.3cm × 62.1cm
149.6 lbs / 68.0 kg
CCIR(M)
NTSC, BTSC System (Multi Channel Sound)
(02~06) 54MHz~88MHz
(07~13) 174MHz~216MHz
(14~69) 470MHz~806MHz
(02~06, A-8) by (02~06&01) —
(07~13) by (07~13)
(A~1) by (14~22)
(J~W) by (23~36) (54MHz~804MHz)
(W+1~W+28) by (37~64)
(W+29~W+84) by (65~125)
(A8, A4~A1) by (01, 96~99) —180 Channels
45.75MHz
41.25MHz (4.5MHz)
3.58MHz
120V AC, 60Hz
160W
36” (90cm) Measured Diagonally
31.2kV±1.3kV (at cut-off in service mode)
2” × 4-3/4” / 5 × 12cm Oval type × 2
5W × 2
Video(1,2,3) : 1Vp-p, 75Ø (RCA pin jack) [AV-36F702]
(1,3,4) : 1Vp-p, 75Ø (RCA pin jack) [AV-36F802]
Audio(1,2,3) : 500mVrms ( -4dBs ), High Impedance (RCA pin jack) [AV-36F702]
(1,2,3,4) : 500mVrms ( -4dBs ), High Impedance (RCA pin jack) [AV-36F802]
S-Video ( Input 1 / 3 Over )
Y : 1Vp-p Positive (negative sync provided, when terminated with 75Ø)
C : 0.286Vp-p (burst signal, when terminated with 75Ø)
Component Input ( Input 2 ) [AV-36F702]
( Input 2 / 4 ) [AV-36F802]
Y : 1Vp-p positive (negative sync provided, when terminated with 75Ø)
PB/PR : 0.7Vp-p 75 Ø
Variable : More then 0~1550mVrms (+6dBs)
Low impedance (400Hz when modulated 100%) (RCA pin jack)
Fix : 500mVrms(-4dBs)
Low impedance (400Hz when modulated 100%) (RCA pin jack)
3.5mm mini jack
75Ø(VHF/UHF) Terminal, F-Type Connector
RM-C303G-1A [AV-36F702], RM-C301G-2A [AV-36F802]
(AA/R6/UM-3 battery × 2)
Design & specifications are subject to change without notice.
················································································································································································································
················································································································································································································
················································································································································································································
················································································································································································································
················································································································································································································
················································································································································································································
················································································································································································································
················································································································································································································
················································································································································································································
················································································································································································································
················································································································································································································
································································································································································································································································································································································································································
················································································································································································································
AV-36F702AV-36F802
No. 51907B 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS1. The design of this product contains special hardware, many circuits
and components specially for safety purposes. For continued pro-tection, no changes should be made to the original design unlessauthorized in writing by the manufacturer. Replacement parts mustbe identical to those used in the original circuits. Service should beperformed by qualified personnel only.
2. Alterations of the design or circuitry of the products should not bemade. Any design alterations or additions will void the manufactur-er's warranty and will further relieve the manufacturer of responsi-bility for personal injury or property damage resulting therefrom.
3. Many electrical and mechanical parts in the products have specialsafety-related characteristics. These characteristics are often notevident from visual inspection nor can the protection afforded bythem necessarily be obtained by using replacement componentsrated for higher voltage, wattage, etc. Replacement parts which havethese special safety characteristics are identified in the parts list ofService manual. Electrical components having such features areidentified by shading on the schematics and by ( ) on theparts list in Service manual. The use of a substitute replacementwhich does not have the same safety characteristics as the recom-mended replacement part shown in the parts list of Service manualmay cause shock, fire, or other hazards.
4. Use isolation transformer when hot chassis.The chassis and any sub-chassis contained in some products areconnected to one side of the AC power line. An isolation transformerof adequate capacity should be inserted between the product andthe AC power supply point while performing any service on someproducts when the HOT chassis is exposed.
5. Don't short between the LIVE side ground and ISOLATED (NEU-TRAL) side ground or EARTH side ground when repairing.Some model's power circuit is partly different in the GND. The dif-ference of the GND is shown by the LIVE : ( ) side GND, theISOLATED(NEUTRAL) : ( ) side GND and EARTH : ( ) sideGND. Don't short between the LIVE side GND andISOLATED(NEUTRAL) side GND or EARTH side GND and nevermeasure the LIVE side GND and ISOLATED(NEUTRAL) side GNDor EARTH side GND at the same time with a measuring apparatus(oscilloscope etc.).If above note will not be kept, a fuse or any parts will be broken.
6. If any repair has been made to the chassis, it is recommended thatthe B1 setting should be checked or adjusted (See ADJUSTMENTOF B1 POWER SUPPLY).
7. The high voltage applied to the picture tube must conform with thatspecified in Service manual. Excessive high voltage can cause anincrease in X-Ray emission, arcing and possible component dam-age, therefore operation under excessive high voltage conditionsshould be kept to a minimum, or should be prevented. If severearcing occurs, remove the AC power immediately and determinethe cause by visual inspection (incorrect installation, cracked ormelted high voltage harness, poor soldering, etc.). To maintain theproper minimum level of soft X-Ray emission, components in thehigh voltage circuitry including the picture tube must be the exactreplacements or alternatives approved by the manufacturer of thecomplete product.
8. Do not check high voltage by drawing an arc. Use a high voltagemeter or a high voltage probe with a VTVM. Discharge the picturetube before attempting meter connection, by connecting a clip leadto the ground frame and connecting the other end of the lead througha 10kØ 2W resistor to the anode button.
9. When service is required, observe the original lead dress. Extraprecaution should be given to assure correct lead dress in the highvoltage circuit area. Where a short circuit has occurred, those com-ponents that indicate evidence of overheating should be replaced.Always use the manufacturer's replacement components.
10. Isolation Check(Safety for Electrical Shock Hazard)After re-assembling the product, always perform an isolation checkon the exposed metal parts of the cabinet (antenna terminals, video/audio input and output terminals, Control knobs, metal cabinet,screwheads, earphone jack, control shafts, etc.) to be sure the prod-uct is safe to operate without danger of electrical shock.
(1) Dielectric Strength TestThe isolation between the AC primary circuit and all metal partsexposed to the user, particularly any exposed metal part having areturn path to the chassis should withstand a voltage of 1100V AC(r.m.s.) for a period of one second.(. . . . Withstand a voltage of 1100V AC (r.m.s.) to an appliance ratedup to 120V, and 3000V AC (r.m.s.) to an appliance rated 200V ormore, for a period of one second.)This method of test requires a test equipment not generally found inthe service trade.
(2) Leakage Current CheckPlug the AC line cord directly into the AC outlet (do not use a lineisolation transformer during this check.). Using a “Leakage CurrentTester”, measure the leakage current from each exposed metal partof the cabinet, particularly any exposed metal part having a returnpath to the chassis, to a known good earth ground (water pipe, etc.).Any leakage current must not exceed 0.5mA AC (r.m.s.).However, in tropical area, this must not exceed 0.2mA AC (r.m.s.).
• Alternate Check MethodPlug the AC line cord directly into the AC outlet (do not use a lineisolation transformer during this check.). Use an AC voltmeter hav-ing 1000 ohms per volt or more sensitivity in the following manner.Connect a 1500Ø 10W resistor paralleled by a 0.15µF AC-type ca-pacitor between an exposed metal part and a known good earthground (water pipe, etc.). Measure the AC voltage across the resis-tor with the AC voltmeter. Move the resistor connection to each ex-posed metal part, particularly any exposed metal part having a re-turn path to the chassis, and measure the AC voltage across theresistor. Now, reverse the plug in the AC outlet and repeat eachmeasurement. Any voltage measured must not exceed 0.75V AC(r.m.s.). This corresponds to 0.5mA AC (r.m.s.).However, in tropical area, this must not exceed 0.3V AC (r.m.s.).This corresponds to 0.2mA AC (r.m.s.).
11. High voltage hold down circuit check.After repair of the high voltage hold down circuit, this circuit shall bechecked to operate correctly.See item “How to check the high voltage hold down circuit”.
GOODEARTHGROUND 0.15 µF AC-TYPE
AC VOLTMETER(HAVING 1000Ø/V,OR MORE SENSITIVITY)
PLACE THIS PROBEON EACH EXPOSEDMETAL PART1500Ø 10W
A V
This mark shows a fast POWER CORDREPLACEMENT WARNINGConnecting the white line side ofpower cord to “WHT” character side.
operating fuse, theletters indicated belowshow the rating.
PWB
WHT
PW
White line side
AV-36F702AV-36F802
4 No. 51907B
FEATURES• Full-flat CRT (cathode ray tube) reproduces fine textured picture in
every detail.
• I2C bus control utilizes single chip ICs.
• Built in Twin Tuner system. [Only for AV-36F802]
• Built-in V-CHIP system.
• Built-in HYPER-SURROUND system.
• Built-in BBE.
• Adoption of the Picture-In-Picture (PIP) function. [Only for AV-36F802]
• 3 LINE DIGITAL COMB FILTER circuit improved picture quality.[AV-36F702]
IC702E2PROM 4k bit
IC701MAIN MICON
IF2
(Only for AV-36F802)
(Only for AV-36F802)
SCL 1 SDA 1
SCL 0 SDA 0
AFC 2
AFC 1
Remotecontrol
unit
IC301PIP
CONTROL
IC001MTS, TONE
SURROUND CONTROL3-D Y/C
TU001TUNER 1
TU001TUNER 2
IC1011 CHIP
CONTROL
IC501AVSW
CONTROL
(Only for AV-36F802)
(Only for AV-36F802)
• 3 LINE Digital Y/C Separation circuit improved picture quality.[AV-36F802]
• Component input terminal for taking best advantage of ComponentVideo Signal.
• Audio Video input terminal. (S-input ×2, V-input ×3)
• Variable/Fix audio output terminal.
• Closed-caption broadcasts can be viewed.
• With AV COMPU LINK EX terminal.
a SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM
AV-36F702AV-36F802
No. 51907B 5
MAIN DIFFERENCE LISTModel
Part nameAV-36F702 AV-36F802
MAIN PWB SAC-1542A-M2 SAC-1547A-M2
PIP PWB — SAC0P501A-M2
AV SELECTOR PWB SAC0S511A-M2 SAC0S505A-M2
3D Y/C MODULE PWB — SAC-0Y501A
!
AV-36F702AV-36F802
6 No. 51907B
FUNCTIONS
a FRONT PANEL
a FRONT PANEL DOOR OPENED
a REAR PANEL
[AV-36F702]
a REMOTE CONTROL UNIT(RM-C303G-1A)[AV-36F702]
POWER
DISPLAY
SLEEP TIMER
LIGHT
BBE
VIDEO STATUS
INPUT
1
7
4
100+
3
9
6
RETURN+
MUTING
MENU
V CHIP
PIP OFF
EXIT
2
8
0
5
+CH
VOL VOL+
CH
REC STOP PAUSE
PLAY FFREW
TV CATV DVDVCR
VCR CHANNELTV/VCR
VCR/DVDPOWERPREV NEXT
OPEN/CLOSE STILL/PAUSE
RM-C301G
HYPER SURROUND
TV
POWER
DISPLAY
SLEEP TIMER
LIGHT
BBE
CHANNEL
VIDEO STATUS
SOURCE FREEZE
PIP
SWAP
ON/MOVE
INPUT
1
7
4
100+
3
9
6
RETURN+
MUTING
MENU
V CHIP
PIP OFF
EXIT
2
8
0
5
+CH
VOL VOL+
CH
REC STOP PAUSE
PLAY FFREW
TV CATV DVDVCR
VCR CHANNELTV/VCR
VCR/DVDPOWERPREV NEXT
OPEN/CLOSE STILL/PAUSE
RM-C301G
HYPER SURROUND
TV
(RM-C301G-2A)[AV-36F802]
[AV-36F802]
ON TIMERPOWER
AV-36F702AV-36F802
No. 51907B 7
DISASSEMBLY PROCEDURE
REMOVING THE REAR COVER1. Unplug the power supply cord.2. Remove the 12 screws marked A as shown in Fig.1.3. Withdraw the REAR COVER toward you.
[CAUTION]
• When reinstalling the rear cover, carefully push it inward after in-serting the MAIN PWB into the rear cover groove.
REMOVING THE CHASSIS
• After removing the rear cover.1. Slightly raise the both sides of the chassis by hand and remove the
3 claws marked B under the chassis from the front cabinet asshown in Fig.1.
2. Withdraw the chassis backward along the rail in the arrow directionmarked C as shown in Fig.1.
(If necessary, take off the wire clamp, connector’s etc.)
*When conducting a check with power supplied, be sure to confirmthat the CRT earth wire is connected to the CRT SOCKET PWBand the MAIN PWB.
REMOVING THE TERMINAL BOARD
• After removing the rear cover.1. [AV-36F702]
Remove the 4 screws marked D as shown in Fig.1.[AV-36F802]Remove the 6 screws marked D as shown in Fig.1.
2. When you pull out the TERMINAL BOARD in the direction of arrowmarked E as shown in Fig.1, it can be removed.
REMOVING THE FRONT CONTROL AND POWER SWPW BOARDS
• After removing the rear cover and chassis.1. Remove the 4 screws marked F as shown in Fig.1.2. Then remove the FRONT CONTROL PWB and POWER SW PWB.
(If necessary, take off the wire, connector’s etc.)
REMOVING THE LF PW BOARD• After removing the rear cover and chassis.1. Lift the left side of the LF PWB while pressing the 2 PWB stoppers
marked G in the arrow direction marked H as shown in Fig.1.2. Then remove the LF PWB.
(If necessary, take off the wire, connector’s etc.)
SPECIFIC SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS
REMOVING THE DAF PW BOARD• After removing the rear cover and chassis.1. Lift the right side of the DAF PWB while pressing the PWB stopper
marked J and claw marked K in the arrow direction marked L asshown in Fig.1.
2. Then remove the DAF PWB.
(If necessary, take off the wire, connector’s etc.)
REMOVING THE SPEAKER
• After removing the rear cover.1. Remove the 2 screws marked M as shown in Fig.1.2. Withdraw the speaker backward.3. Follow the same steps when removing the other hand speaker.
CHECKING THE MAIN PW BOARD1. To check the back side of the MAIN PW Board.
1) Pull out the chassis. (Refer to REMOVING THE CHASSIS).2) Erect the chassis vertically so that you can easily check the back
side of the MAIN PW Board.
[CAUTION]
• When erecting the chassis, be careful so that there will be no con-tacting with other PW Board.
• Before turning on power, make sure that the CRT earth wire andother connectors are properly connected.
WIRE CLAMPING AND CABLE TYING1. Be sure clamp the wire.2. Never remove the cable tie used for tying the wires together.
Should it be inadvertently removed, be sure to tie the wires with anew cable tie.
AV-36F702AV-36F802
8 No. 51907B
Fig.1
F
M
A
A
DAF PWB
PWB STOPPER
PWBSTOPPER
PWBSTOPPER
CLAW
SPEAKER
CHASSIS BASE
MAIN PWB
LF PWB
POWER SW PWB
REAR COVER
FRONT CONTROL PWB
CRT SOCKET PWB
FRONT CABINET
(x3)
(x9)
D (x4) [AV-36F702](x6) [AV-36F802]
(x4)
E
L
HC
K
CLAW
CLAW
B
B
G
G
J
AV-36F702AV-36F802
No. 51907B 9
REMOVING THE CRT
* Replacement of the CRT should be performed by 2 or more persons.
• After removing the rear cover, chassis etc.,1. Putting the CRT change table on soft cloth, the CRT change table
should also be covered with such soft cloth (shown in Fig. 2).2. While keeping the surface of CRT down, mount the TV set on the
CRT change table balanced will as shown in Fig. 3.3. Remove 4 screws marked by arrows with a box type screwdriver as
shown in Fig. 3.
• Since the cabinet will drop when screws have been removed, besure to support the cabinet with hands.
4. After 4 screws have been removed, put the cabinet slowly on cloth(At this time, be carefully so as not to damage the front surface of thecabinet) shown in Fig. 4.
• The CRT should be assembled according to the opposite sequenceof its dismounting steps.
* The CRT change table should preferably be smaller that the CRT sur-face, and its height be about 35cm.
COATING OF SILICON GREASE FOR ELECTRICAL IN-SULATION ON THE CRT ANODE CAP SECTION
• Subsequent to replacement of the CRT and HV transformer or repairof the anode cap, etc. by dismounting them, be sure to coat silicongrease for electrical insulation as shown in Fig. 5.Wipe around the anode button with clean and dry cloth. (Fig. 5)Coat silicon grease on the section around the anode button. At thistime, take care so that any silicon greases does not sticks to theanode button. (Fig. 6)
Silicon grease product No. KS - 650N
Fig. 2
CRT CHANGE TABLE
APPROX.35cm
CLOTH
Fig. 3
CRT
BOXTYPESCREWDRIVER
CRTCHANGETABLE
Fig. 4
CRTCHANGE TABLE
CRT
CABINET
Fig. 5
Anode buttonCRT
Silicon greasecoating
Fig. 6
Silicon grease should be coated by 5mm or more from the outside diameter of anode cap.
Approx.20mm (Do notcoat grease onthis section
Anode button(No sticking ofsilicon grease)
Anode cap
Coating positionof silicon grease
AV-36F702AV-36F802
10 No. 51907B
MEMORY IC REPLACEMENT1. Memory IC
This model use a memory IC.This memory IC stores data for proper operation of the video and deflection circuits.When replacing, be sure to use an IC containing this (initial value) data.
2. Memory IC replacement procedure
Procedure Screen display
(1) Power offSwitch off the power and disconnect the power cord from the outlet.
(2) Replace the memory ICInitial value must be entered into the new IC.
(3) Power onConnect the power cord to the outlet and switch on the power.
(4) System constant check and setting1) Press SLEEP TIMER key and, while the indication of “SLEEP TIMER
0 MIN.” is being displayed, press DISPLAY key and VIDEO STATUSkey on the remote control unit simultaneously.
2) The SERVICE MENU screen of Fig.1 is displayed.3) While the SERVICE MENU is displayed, again simultaneously press
the DISPLAY and VIDEO STATUS keys to display the Fig.2 SYSTEMCONSTANT screen.
4) Refer to the SYSTEM CONSTANT table and check the setting items.Where these differ, select the setting item with the MENU UP/DOWNkey and adjust the setting with the MENU LEFT/RIGHT keys. (Theletters of the selected item are displayed in yellow.)
5) After adjusting, release the MENU LEFT/RIGHT key to store thesetting value.
6) Press the EXIT key twice to return the normal screen.
(5) Receive channel settingRefer to the OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS(USER'S GUIDE) and set thereceive channels (Channels Preset) as described.
(6) User settingsCheck the user setting items according to Table 2.Where these do not agree, refer to the OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS (US-ER'S GUIDE) and set the items as described.
(7) SERVICE MENU settingVerify what to set in the SERVICE MENU, and set whatever isnecessary.(Fig.1) Refer to the SERVICE ADJUSTMENT for setting.
Fig.1
Fig.2
SYSTEM CONSTANT
MODEL : 99–99999PURITY : YESCCD : YESV-CHIP : YESCAN V-CHIP : YES999999999 999
SELECT BYOPERATE BY EX
ITEXIT BY
SERVICE MENU
PICTURE SOUNDTHEATER OTHERSPIP 3-D Y/CLOW LIGHT HIGH LIGHTRF AFC1 RF AFC2VCO(CW) I2C BUS CTRL
SELECT BYOPERATE BY EX
ITEXIT BY
SERVICE MENU
PICTURE SOUNDTHEATER OTHERS
LOW LIGHT HIGH LIGHTRF AFC1 RF AFC2VCO(CW) I2C BUS CTRL
SELECT BYOPERATE BY EX
ITEXIT BY
[AV-36F702]
[AV-36F802]
AV-36F702AV-36F802
No. 51907B 11
1. Use remote controller keys
POWER OFFCHANNEL CH-02VOLUME 5INPUT TVHYPER SURROUND OFFBBE ONDISPLAY OFFSLEEP TIMER 0VIDEO STATUS CHOICEPIP SOURCE CH-04 —
PIP ON (PIP POSITION) LEFT LOWER SIDE—Only for AV-36F802
2. Setting of MENU
PICTURE ADJUSTTINT CENTERCOLOR CENTERPICTURE CENTERBRIGHT CENTERDETAIL CENTERNOISE MUTING ONSET VIDEO STATUS ALL CENTER
SOUND ADJUSTBASS CENTERTREBLE CENTERBALANCE CENTERMTS STEREO
CLOCK/TIMERSSET CLOCK Unnecessary to setON/OFF TIMER NO
INITIAL SETUPTV SPEAKER ONAUDIO OUT FIXCOMPONENT-IN NOLANGUAGE ENGCLOSED CAPTION OFFAUTO TUNER SETUP TUNER MODE: AIRCHANNEL SUMMARY Unnecessary to setV-CHIP OFFSET LOCK CODE Unnecessary to setPURITY CENTER
TABLE 1 (System Constant setting)
TABLE 2 (User setting value)
Setting item Setting value
YES NO
YES NO
MODEL
AV-27F802 AV-32F802 AV-36F802 AV-27F702 AV-32F702
AV-36D502 AV-32D502 AV-27D502 AV-36F702
AV-32D302 AV-36D302 AV-32D202 AV-36D202
AV-36230 AV-32230 AV-36260 AV-32260 AV-27260
CAN V-CHIP
V-CHIP
PURITY
CCD
YES NO
YES NO
Setting item Setting contentAV-36F702 AV-36F802
YES
YES
YES
YES
AV-36F702 AV-36F802
Setting value
AV-36F702AV-36F802
12 No. 51907B
a CAUTIONS1. Avoid heating for more than 3 seconds.2. Do not rub the electrodes and the resist parts of the pattern.3. When removing a chip part, melt the solder adequately.4. Do not reuse a chip part after removing it.
a SOLDERING IRON1. Use a high insulation soldering iron with a thin pointed end of it.2. A 30w soldering iron is recommended for easily removing parts.
a REPLACEMENT STEPS1. How to remove Chip parts
Resistors, capacitors, etc.(1) As shown in the figure, push the part with tweezers and alter-
nately melt the solder at each end.
(2) Shift with tweezers and remove the chip part.
Transistors, diodes, variable resistors, etc.(1) Apply extra solder to each lead.
(2) As shown in the figure, push the part with tweezers and alter-nately melt the solder at each lead. Shift and remove the chippart.
Note : After removing the part, remove remaining solder from thepattern.
REPLACEMENT OF CHIP COMPONENT
2. How to install Chip parts Resistors, capacitors, etc.
(1) Apply solder to the pattern as indicated in the figure.
(2) Grasp the chip part with tweezers and place it on the solder.Then heat and melt the solder at both ends of the chip part.
Transistors, diodes, variable resistors, etc.(1) Apply solder to the pattern as indicated in the figure.(2) Grasp the chip part with tweezers and place it on the solder.(3) First solder lead A as indicated in the figure.
(4) Then solder leads B and C.
SOLDER SOLDER
A
B
C
A
B
C
AV-36F702AV-36F802
No. 51907B 13
SERVICE ADJUSTMENTSADJUSTMENT PREPARATION1. You can make the necessary adjustments for this unit with either the remote control unit or with the adjustment equipment and parts
as given below.2. Adjustment with the remote control unit is made on the basis of the initial setting values, however, the new setting values which set the
screen to its optimum condition may differ from the initial settings.3. Make sure that AC power is turned on correctly.4. Turn on the power for the set and test equipment before use, and start the adjustment procedures after waiting at least 30 minutes.5. Unless otherwise specified, prepare the most suitable reception or input signal for adjustment.6. Never touch any adjustment parts, which are not specified in the list for this adjustment-variable resistors, transformers, capacitors, etc.7. Presetting before adjustment.
Unless otherwise specified in the adjustment instructions, preset the following functions with the remote control unit.
VIDEO STATUS STANDARD
HYPER SURROUND OFF
BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE CENTER
TINT, COLOR, PICTURE,CENTER
BRIGHT, DETAIL
MEASURING INSTRUMENT1. DC voltmeter(or digital voltmeter)2. Oscilloscope3. Signal generator ( Pattern generator ) [NTSC]4. Remote control unit5. TV audio multiplex signal generator6. Frequency counter7. Resistor (1MØ)
ADJUSTMENT ITEMS
• Check of B1 POWER SUPPLY
• RF AGC adjustment
• FOCUS adjustment
• WHITE BALANCE adjustmentWHITE BALANCE (Low Light) adjustmentWHITE BALANCE (High Light) adjustmentPIP HIGH LIGHT WHITE BALANCE adjustment [Only for AV-36F802]
• BRIGHT adjustmentSUB BRIGHT adjustment
• CONTRAST adjustmentSUB CONTRAST adjustment
• DEFLECTION adjustmentV CENTER and TRAPEZIUM adjustmentV-SIZE and V-LINEARITY adjustmentH SIZE and H POSITION adjustmentSIDE PIN and CORNER PIN adjustmentPIP DISPLAY POSITION adjustment [Only for AV-36F802]
• User mode setting position
• CHROMA adjustmentSUB COLOR adjustmentSUB TINT adjustment
• MTS circuit adjustmentINPUT LEVEL checkSTEREO VCO adjustmentSAP VCO adjustmentFILTER checkSEPARATION adjustment
• PURITY and CONVERGENCE adjustmentsPURITY adjustmentSTATIC CONVERGENCE adjustmentDYNAIC CONVERGENCE adjustment
AV-36F702AV-36F802
14 No. 51907B
ADJUSTMENT LOCATIONS
FRONT
S702 : MENUS703 : CHANNEL–S704 : CHANNEL+S705 : VOLUME–S706 : VOLUME+
LINE FILTER PWB
FRONT
3D Y/C MODULE PWB(Only for AV-36F802)
FRONT
FRONTTOP
FRONT
TOP
TOP
DAF PWB
CRT SOCKET PWB
(SOLDER SIDE)
PIP PWB
AV SELECTOR PWB
MAIN PWB
POWER SW PWB FRONT CONTROL PWB
CN006B
P
B CN007
DAFCP
TP-E1
TP-G
S702S704S705 S703
S706IC101
D101
S701
E3
F901125V 5A
CN005
CN002
CN001
PW
CN005CN004
CN004
S1 DAF
UPPER : HMIDDLE : FOCUSLOWER : SCREEN
S1
C
Q
E1HV
CP
E2
E1
K
P
CN
003
CN
002
CN
001
J501
SS
CN006 CN007
IC702
IC701 CPU
DEG
TU001
(Only for AV-36F802)
(Only for AV-36F802)
TU001
J601
R027
J602
K
Q
R507
Q511Heatsink
J502J504 J503
CN003
TU001
FRONT
AV-36F702AV-36F802
No. 51907B 15
BASIC OPERATION OF SERVICE MENU1. TOOL OF SERVICE MENU OPERATION
Operate the SERVICE MENU with the REMOTE CONTROL UNIT.
2. SERVICE MENU ITEMSIn general, basic setting (adjustments) items or verifications are performed in the SERVICE MENU.
• PICTURE ............................... This sets the setting values (adjustment values) of the VIDEO/CHROMA and DEFLECTION circuits.
• SOUND .................................. This sets the setting values (adjustment values) of the AUDIO circuit.
• THEATER .............................. This is used when the THEATER MODE is adjusted.
• OTHERS ................................ This is used when the OTHERS MODE is adjusted.
• PIP ......................................... This sets the setting values (adjustment values) of the PIP circuit. [Only for AV-36F802]
• LOW LIGHT ........................... This sets the setting values (adjustment values) of the WHITE BALANCE circuit.
• HIGH LIGHT .......................... This sets the setting values (adjustment values) of the WHITE BALANCE circuit.
• RF AFC1 ................................ This is used when the RF AFC1 MODE is verified. [Do not adjust]
• RF AFC2 ................................ This is used when the RF AFC2 MODE is verified. [Do not adjust]
• VCO (CW) .............................. This is not used for service.
• I2C BUS CTRL ...................... This is used when ON/OFF of the I2C BUS CTRL is set. [Fixed ON]
3. Basic Operations of the SERVICE MENU(1) How to enter the SERVICE MENU.
Press SLEEP TIMER key and, while the indication of “SLEEP TIMER 0 MIN.” is being displayed, press DISPLAY key and VIDEO STATUSkey on the remote control unit simultaneously to enter the SERVICE MENU screen 1 shown in the next figure page.
(2) SERVICE MENU screen selectionPress the UP / DOWN key of the MENU to select any of the following items.(The letters of the selected items are displayed in yellow.)
[AV-36F702]
• PICTURE • SOUND
• THEATER •OTHERS
• LOW LIGHT • HIGH LIGHT
• RF AFC1 • RF AFC2
• VCO(CW) • I2C BUS CTRL
(3) Enter the any setting ( adjustment ) mode[AV-36F702]
• PICTURE, SOUND and OTHERS mode1) If select any of PICTURE, SOUND or OTHERS items, and the LEFT / RIGHT key is pressed from SERVICE MENU ( MAIN MENU ), the
screen 2 will be displayed as shown in figure page later.2) Then the UP / DOWN key is pressed, the PICTURE mode screen 3 or the SOUND mode screen 4 or the OTHER mode screen 5 is
displayed, and the PICTURE, SOUND or OTHERS setting can be performed.[AV-36F802]
• PICTURE, SOUND, OTHERS and 3-D Y/C mode1) If select any of PICTURE, SOUND, OTHERS or 3-D Y/C items, and the LEFT / RIGHT key is pressed from SERVICE MENU ( MAIN
MENU ), the screen 2 will be displayed as shown in figure page later.2) Then the UP / DOWN key is pressed, the PICTURE mode screen 3 or the SOUND mode screen 4 or the OTHER mode screen 5 or
the 3-D Y/C mode screen 6 is displayed, and the PICTURE, SOUND, OTHERS or 3-D Y/C setting can be performed.
• PIP mode [Only for AV-36F802]1) If select the PIP item, and the LEFT/RIGHT key is pressed from SERVICE MENU (MAIN MENU), the screen 7 will be displayed as shown
in figure page later.2) Then the UP/DOWN key is pressed, the PIP mode screen 8 is displayed, and the PIP setting can be performed.[AV-36F702, AV-36F802]
• THEATER, LOW LIGHT, HIGH LIGHT, RF AFC1, RF AFC2, VCO(CW) and I2C BUS CTRL mode1) If select any of THEATER / LOW LIGHT / HIGH LIGHT / RF AFC1 / RF AFC2 / VCO (CW) / I2C BUS CTRL items, and the LEFT / RIGHT
key is pressed from SERVICE MENU ( MAIN MENU ), the screens 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 will be displayed as shown in figure pagelater.
2) Then the settings or verifications can be performed.
[AV-36F802]
• PICTURE • SOUND
• THEATER • OTHERS
• PIP • 3-D Y/C
• LOW LIGHT • HIGH LIGHT
• RF AFC1 • RF AFC2
• VCO(CW) • I2C BUS CTRL
AV-36F702AV-36F802
16 No. 51907B
SERVICE MENU
PICTURE SOUNDTHEATER OTHERSPIP 3D Y/CLOW LIGHT HIGH LIGHTRF AFC1 RF AFC2VCO(CW) I2C BUS CTRL
SELECT BYOPERATE BY EX
IT
SERVICE MENU (MAIN MENU) SCREEN PICTURE MODE
EXIT BY
SELECT BYEXITEXIT BY
1. BRIGHTSTATUS
99999999999
1. NOISE DET.STATUS
99999999999
1. OSD POS. 999
SOUND MODE OTHERS MODE
1. PIP BRSTATUS
99999999999
HIGH LIGHT MODE
SCREEN PIP MODE (Only for AV-36F802)
EXITEXIT BY
SELECT BY
TOO HIGH GOOD TOO LOW
RF AFC1 ONFINE 999
SELECT BYOPERATE BY EX
IT
RF AFC1 MODE[DO NOT ADJUST]
RF AFC2 MODE[DO NOT ADJUST]
I2C BUS CTRL MODE[FIXED ON]
EXIT BY
TOO HIGH GOOD TOO LOW
RF AFC2 ONFINE 999
HIGH LEVELREFERENCE LEVELLOW LEVEL
SYNC : YES
SELECT BYOPERATE BY EX
ITEXIT BY
I2C BUS ON
SELECT BYOPERATE BY EX
ITEXIT BY
THEATER MODE (1/2) THEATER MODE (2/2)
TINT 999 B CUT. 999COLOR 999 R DRIVE 999PICTURE 999 B DRIVE 999BRIGHT 999 DC REST. 999DETAIL 999 BLK ST. 999R CUT. 999 GMM PNT 999G CUT. 999
PAGE 1/2
EXITEXIT BY
SELECT BYOPERATE BY
CD MAT. 99 CMP CD M 99RY GAIN 99 CMP RY G 99GY PHASE 99 CMP GY P 99CORING 99 CMP COR 99
PAGE 2/2
EXITEXIT BY
SELECT BYOPERATE BY
BRIGHT
LOW LIGHT MODE
999 999
999
999
HIGH LIGHT999 999
2 31
11
12
4 5
7 8
9
13
VCO (CW) MODE[DO NOT USE]
14
15
10
SERVICE MENU
PICTURE SOUNDTHEATER OTHERS
LOW LIGHT HIGH LIGHTRF AFC1 RF AFC2VCO(CW) I2C BUS CTRL
SELECT BYOPERATE BY EX
ITEXIT BY
[AV-36F702]
[AV-36F802]
1. YC 001STATUS
99999999999
3-D Y/C MODE(Only for AV-36F802)
6
AV-36F702AV-36F802
No. 51907B 17
(4) Setting method1) UP / DOWN key of the MENU
Select the SETTING ITEM.
2) LEFT / RIGHT key of the MENUSetting (adjust) the SETTING VALUE of the SETTING ITEM.When the key is released the SETTING VALUE will be stored (memorized).
3) EXIT keyReturns to the previous screen.
(5) Releasing SERVICE MENU1) After returning to the SERVICE MENU upon completion of the setting (ad-
justment) work, press the EXIT key again.
¤ The settings for LOW LIGHT and HIGH LIGHT are described in the WHITE BAL-ANCE page of ADJUSTMENT.
1. BRIGHTSTATUS
99999999999
SETTING ITEM
INITIALSETTING VALUE (Adjust)SETTING VALUE
PICTURE MODE
AV-36F702AV-36F802
18 No. 51907B
INITIAL SETTING VALUE OF SERVICE MENU1. Adjustment of the SERVICE MENU is made on the basis of the initial setting values; however, the new setting values which set the
screen in its optimum condition may differ from the initial setting.2. Do not change the initial setting values of the setting (Adjustment) items not listed in “ADJUSTMENT”.
• PICTURE MODEThe four setting items in the video mode No.6 EXT BRI., No.7 EXT PIC., No.8 EXT COL. and No.9 EXT TINT are linked to the items in the TVMODE No.1 BRIGHT, No.2 PICTURE, No.3 COLOR and No.4 TINT, respectively. When the setting items in the TV mode are adjusted, thevalues in the setting items in the video mode are revised automatically to the same values in the TV mode.(The initial setting values given in ( )are off-set values.)When the four items (No.6, 7, 8 and 9) are adjusted in the video mode, the setting values in each item are revised independently.
No. Setting (Adjustment) item Variable range Initial setting value Remark
1 BRIGHT 000 — 127 063
2 PICTURE 000 — 127 070
3 COLOR 000 — 127 072
4 TINT 000 — 127 063
5 TV DETAIL 000 — 063 050 AV-36F702
TV DETAIL 000 — 063 045 AV-36F802
6 EXT BRIGHT ±025 ±000
7 EXT PICT. ±025 +002
8 EXT COLOR ±025 ±000
9 EXT TINT ±025 ±000
10 EXT DETAIL 000 — 063 050 AV-36F702
EXT DETAIL 000 — 063 045 AV-36F802
11 CMP BRIGHT ±025 ±000
12 CMP PICT. ±025 ±000
13 CMP COLOR 000 — 127 068
14 CMP TINT 000 — 127 068
15 CMP DETAIL 000 — 063 050
16 CMP R CUT ±025 –011
17 CMP G CUT ±025 ±000
18 CMP B CUT ±025 –001
19 CMP R DRV ±025 ±000
20 CMP B DRV ±025 ±000
21 WPL 000 / 001 001
22 B. B. SW 000 / 001 000
23 C TRAP 000 / 001 000
24 CORING 000 / 001 000 AV-36F702
CORING 000 / 001 001 AV-36F802
25 CMP CORING 000 / 001 001
26 TV SHARPF 000 / 001 001
27 EXT SHARPF 000 / 001 001
28 CMP SHARPF 000 / 001 001
29 RGB CONT 000 — 063 031
30 TV ID SENS 000 / 001 000
31 EXT ID SEN 000 / 001 001
32 F ID 000 / 001 000
33 Y MUTE 000 / 001 000
34 AUDIO ATT 000 — 127 127
35 SUB CONT 000 — 015 008
AV-36F702AV-36F802
No. 51907B 19
No. Setting (Adjustment) item Variable range Initial setting value Remark
36 R Y GAIN 000 / 001 001
37 CMP R Y GA 000 / 001 001
38 G Y PHASE 000 / 001 000
39 CMP G Y PH 000 / 001 000
40 CD MATRIX 000 — 003 003
41 CMP CD MAT 000 — 003 002
42 BLACK ST 000 — 003 001
43 DC REST 000 — 003 001
44 COLOR GMM 000 / 001 000
45 UV/CBCR 000 / 001 001
46 AT FLESH 000 / 001 000
47 ABL GAIN 000 — 003 000
48 ABL ST PNT 000 — 003 003
49 RGB ABCL 000 / 001 001
50 TV BPF TOF 000 / 001 000
51 EXT BPF TOF 000 / 001 000
52 GMM PNT 000 — 003 003
53 SVM GAIN 000 — 003 002
54 CMP SVM GA 000 — 003 002
55 SVM PHASE 000 / 001 000
56 AUDIO SW 000 / 001 000
57 BUZZ 000 / 001 000
58 IF FREQ 000 / 001 000
59 RF AGC 000 — 063 045
60 AFT MUTE 000 / 001 000
61 AFT SENS 000 / 001 001
62 R/G DRV SW 000 / 001 001
63 BLK SW 000 / 001 000
64 V S COR 000 — 015 010
65 V LIN 000 — 015 007
66 V SIZE 000 — 127 063
67 V AGC 000 / 001 000
68 V CENTER 000 — 063 052
69 TV AFC 000 — 003 000
70 EXT AFC 000 — 003 002
71 V POSI 000 — 007 000
72 H POSI 000 — 031 020
73 H SIZE 000 — 063 028
74 TV V FREQ 000 — 003 000
75 EXT V FREQ 000 — 003 003
76 SIDE PIN 000 — 063 025
77 STAND BY 000 / 001 000
78 TRAPEZ 000 — 063 035
79 V RAMP REF 000 / 001 001
80 V 48HZ 000 / 001 000
81 V EHT 000 — 007 000
82 TOP PIN 000 — 031 012
AV-36F702AV-36F802
20 No. 51907B
83 H EHT 000 — 007 000
84 BTM PIN 000 — 031 011
85 V BLK LOW 000 — 003 000
86 V BLK UP 000 — 003 000
87 CAPTION IN 000 / 001 000
88 H BLK 000 / 001 000
89 SCREEN 000 / 001 000
90 ACB SW 000 / 001 000
91 ACB PULSE 000 — 015 007
92 OVER MODU 000 / 001 001
93 APACON LIM 000 / 001 001
94 TEST 000 — 255 128
95 RF S/N TY 000 — 002 002 AV-36F702
RF S/N TY 000 — 002 001 AV-36F802
96 EXT S/N TY 000 — 002 002 AV-36F702
EXT S/N TY 000 — 002 001 AV-36F802
97 RF SN YC E 000 — 255 005
98 RF SN YC F 000 — 255 016
99 RF SN YC G 000 — 063 032
100 RF SN YC H 000 — 255 025
101 EX SN YC E 000 — 255 005
102 EX SN YC F 000 — 255 016
103 EX SN YC G 000 — 063 032
104 EX SN YC H 000 — 255 025
105 RF SN VC 1 000 — 063 000
106 RF SN VC 2 000 — 063 007
107 RF SN VC 3 000 — 063 014
108 RF SN VC 4 000 — 063 021
109 EX SN VC 1 000 — 063 000
110 EX SN VC 2 000 — 063 007
111 EX SN VC 3 000 — 063 014
112 EX SN VC 4 000 — 063 021
113 COR LEVEL 000 — 003 003
114 VNR CHK 000 — 255 003
115 YC SN TIME 000 — 255 005
116 VC SN TIME 000 — 255 005
117 VM DATA A ±127 +008
118 VM DATA B ±127 –004
119 VM DATA C ±127 –016
120 VM DATA D 000 / 001 001
121 VC SN STOP 000 — 255 010
122 CH MUTE 000/001 000
123 VM OFF TY 000/001 000
124 VC VM OFF 000/001 001
125 YC VM OFF 000 — 255 255
126 F LOCK 000 — 002 002
127 VF LOCK EX 000/001 000
128 PURI RGB 000 — 063 031
129 PURI BCK 000/001 000
No. Setting (Adjustment) item Variable range Initial setting value Remark
AV-36F702AV-36F802
No. 51907B 21
No. Setting (Adjustment) item Variable range Initial setting value Remark
1 NOISE DET. 000 / 001 001
2 IN LEVEL 000 — 063 025
3 FH MONITOR 000 / 001 000
4 STEREO VCO 000 — 063 030
5 PILOT CAN. 000 / 001 000
6 FILTER 000 — 063 030
7 LOW SEP. 000 — 063 028
8 HI SEP. 000 — 063 025
9 5FH MON. 000 / 001 000
10 SAP VCO 000 — 063 003
11 IN GAIN 000 / 001 000
12 FIL. OFFSET ±010 ±000
13 BBE BASS ±010 +001
14 BBE TRE ±010 –001
• SOUND MODE
Setting (Adjustment) item Variable range Initial setting value Remark
TINT ±20 –06
COLOR ±20 –03
PICTURE ±50 –15
BRIGHT ±20 ±00
DETAIL ±20 +03
R CUT. ±20 ±00
G CUT. ±20 ±00
B CUT. ±20 ±00
R DRIVE ±99 +07
B DRIVE ±99 –25
DC REST. 00 — 03 01
BLK ST. 00 — 03 00
GMM PNT 00 — 03 01
CD MATRIX 00 — 03 01
RY GAIN 00 / 01 01
GY PHASE 00 / 01 00
CORING 00 / 01 01
CMP CD M 00 — 03 01
CMP RY G 00 / 01 01
CMP GY P 00 / 01 00
CMP COR 00 / 01 01
• THEATER MODE
AV-36F702AV-36F802
22 No. 51907B
No. Setting (Adjustment) item Variable range Initial setting value Remark
1 OSD POS. 000 — 007 002
2 CCD POS. 000 — 015 003
3 EOSEL 000 / 001 000
4 MENU COLOR 000 — –030 –010
5 MENU PICT. 000 — –030 –010
6 MENU BRI. 000 — –030 –010
• OTHERS MODE
No. Setting (Adjustment) item Variable range Initial setting value Remark
1 PIP BR 000 — 015 005
2 PIP PICT 030 — 045 045
3 PIP TINT 000 — 063 036
4 PIP COL 000 — 015 010
5 P R CUT 000 — 015 003
6 P G CUT 000 — 015 000
7 P B CUT 000 — 015 002
8 P R DR 000 — 255 052
9 P G DR 000 — 255 055
10 P B DR 000 — 255 060
11 LEFT POS. 000 — 255 012
12 RIGHT POS. 000 — 255 026
13 UPPER POS. 000 — 127 012
14 LOWER POS. 000 — 127 011
15 PICT LOCK 000 / 001 001
16 SELDEL 000 — 015 000
17 AGCFIX 000 / 001 001
18 AGCADST 000 / 001 000
19 AGC 000 — 015 007
20 VSPDEL 000 — 031 000
21 VSPISQ 000 / 001 001
22 YCOR 000 / 001 001
23 XFREQF 000 / 001 001
24 WTCHDG 000 / 001 001
25 COLON 000 / 001 000
26 ACQNEW 000 / 001 000
27 DSTDET 000 / 001 001
28 CRIBEOK 000 / 001 000
29 FCBEOK 000 / 001 000
30 NOCRID 000 / 001 000
31 NONSED 000 / 001 000
• PIP MODE [Only for AV-36F802]
AV-36F702AV-36F802
No. 51907B 23
No. Setting (Adjustment) item Variable range Initial setting value Remark
1 YC 001 000 ~ 003 001
2 YC 002 000 ~ 003 001
3 YC 003 000 ~ 003 001
4 YC 004 000 ~ 003 000
5 YC 005 000 ~ 003 000
6 YC 006 000 ~ 003 000
7 YC 007 000 ~ 003 003
8 YC 008 000 ~ 003 000
9 YC 009 000 ~ 003 001
10 YC 010 000 ~ 003 000
11 YC 011 000 ~ 007 004
12 YC 012 000 ~ 007 002
13 YC 013 000 ~ 015 002
14 YC 014 000 ~ 015 010
15 YC 015 000 ~ 015 002
16 YC 016 000 ~ 015 004
17 YC 017 000 / 001 000
18 YC 018 000 / 001 000
19 YC 019 000 ~ 003 002
20 YC 020 000 / 001 000
21 YC 021 000 / 001 000
22 YC 022 000 ~ 003 002
23 YC 023 000 / 001 000
24 YC 024 000 / 001 000
25 YC 025 000 / 001 000
26 YC 026 000 ~ 003 000
27 YC 027 000 ~ 003 001
28 YC 028 000 ~ 003 001
29 YC 029 000 ~ 003 001
30 YC 030 000 ~ 003 001
31 YC 031 000 ~ 003 002
32 YC 032 000 / 001 000
33 YC 033 000 ~ 007 000
34 YC 034 000 ~ 015 000
35 YC 035 000 ~ 007 002
36 YC 036 000 ~ 031 015
37 YC 037 000 ~ 003 000
38 YC 038 000 ~ 015 009
39 YC 039 000 ~ 003 001
40 YC 040 000 ~ 003 001
41 YC 041 000 / 001 000
42 YC 042 000 / 001 000
43 YC 043 000 / 001 000
44 YC 044 000 / 001 001
45 YC 045 000 ~ 015 003
46 YC 046 000 ~ 015 012
47 YC 047 000 ~ 015 008
• 3-D Y/C MODE [Only for AV-36F802]
AV-36F702AV-36F802
24 No. 51907B
No. Setting (Adjustment) item Variable range Initial setting value Remark
48 YC 048 000 ~ 015 004
49 YC 049 000 ~ 015 010
50 YC 050 000 / 001 001
51 YC 051 000 / 001 001
52 YC 052 000 ~ 003 000
53 YC 053 000 / 001 000
54 YC 054 000 / 001 001
55 YC 055 000 / 001 001
56 YC 056 000 / 001 001
57 YC 057 000 ~ 015 000
58 YC 058 000 / 001 000
59 YC 059 000 / 001 001
60 YC 060 000 ~ 003 000
61 YC 061 000 ~ 015 000
62 YC 062 DBL 000 ~ 007 002
63 YC 063 N/A 000 ~ 015 002
64 YC 064 N/A 000 ~ 015 004
65 YC 065 N/A 000 ~ 015 002
66 YC 066 N/A 000 ~ 015 004
67 YC 067 000 / 001 000
68 YC 068 000 / 001 000
69 YC 069 000 / 001 000
70 YC 070 FIX 000 ~ 003 000
71 YC 071 000 / 001 000
72 YC 072 000 / 001 000
73 YC 073 000 / 001 001
74 YC 074 FIX 000 / 001 000
75 YC 075 FIX 000 / 001 000
76 YC 076 000 / 001 001
77 YC 077 FIX 000 / 001 000
78 YC 078 FIX 000 / 001 000
79 YC 079 FIX 000 ~ 007 005
80 YC 080 FIX 000 ~ 015 000
81 YC 081 FIX 000 ~ 015 008
82 YC 082 FIX 000 ~ 015 004
83 YC 083 FIX 000 ~ 015 004
84 YC 084 DBL 000 ~ 255 112
85 YC 085 DBL 000 ~ 255 008
86 YC 086 000 / 001 001
87 YC 087 000 ~ 003 003
88 YC 088 000 / 001 001
89 YC 089 000 / 001 000
90 YC 090 000 / 001 000
91 YC 091 000 / 001 000
92 YC 092 N/A 000 / 001 000
93 YC 093 N/A 000 / 001 000
94 YC 094 DBL 000 ~ 003 001
AV-36F702AV-36F802
No. 51907B 25
No. Setting (Adjustment) item Variable range Initial setting value Remark
95 YC 095 DBL 000 / 001 001
96 YC 096 DBL 000 / 001 001
97 YC 097 DBL 000 / 001 000
98 YC 098 DBL 000 / 001 000
99 YC 099 DBL 000 ~ 003 000
100 YC 100 DBL 000 ~ 003 000
101 YC 101 DBL 000 / 001 000
102 YC 102 DBL 000 / 001 000
103 YC 103 DBL 000 / 001 001
104 YC 104 DBL 000 / 001 000
105 YC 105 DBL 000 / 001 000
106 YC 106 DBL 000 / 001 000
107 YC 107 DBL 000 ~ 007 002
108 3-D Y/C 000 / 001 001
Setting (Adjustment) item Variable range Initial setting value Remark
R CUTOFF 0 — 255 085
G CUTOFF 0 — 255 085
B CUTOFF 0 — 255 085
• LOW LIGHT MODE
Setting (Adjustment) item Variable range Initial setting value Remark
R DRIVE 0 — 127 060
B DRIVE 0 — 127 060
• HIGH LIGHT MODE
Setting (Adjustment) item Variable range Initial setting value Remark
RF AFC1 ON / OFF ON
FINE -77 — +77 ± × ×
• RF AFC1 MODE
DO NOTADJUST
Setting (Adjustment) item Variable range Initial setting value Remark
RF AFC2 ON / OFF ON
FINE -77 — +77 ± × ×
• RF AFC2 MODE
DO NOTADJUST
Setting (Adjustment) item Variable range Initial setting value Remark
I2C BUS ON/OFF [FIXED ON]
• I2C BUS CTRL MODE
DO NOTADJUST
AV-36F702AV-36F802
26 No. 51907B
ADJUSTMENTS
ItemMeasuringinstrument
Test point Adjustment part Description
Check ofB1 POWERSUPPLY
DC Voltmeter R507 C504side (B1)
Q511heatsink ( )
[Main PWB]
1. Receive a black-and-white signal.2. Connect the DC Voltmeter to R507 C504 side (B1) and Q511 heatsink
( ).3. Confirm that the voltage is DC134V .+2V
-2V
RF AGCadjustment
1. Receive a broadcast.2. Select the No.59 RF AGC of the PICTURE MODE.3. Press the MUTING key of the remote control unit to turn off color.4. With the LEFT key of the remote control unit, get noise in the screen
picture. (0 side of setting value)5. Press the RIGHT key of the remote control unit and stop when noise
disappears from the screen.6. Change to other channels and make sure that there Is no irregular-
ity.7. Press the MUTING key and get color out.
No.59 RF AGC
ItemMeasuringinstrument Test point Adjustment part Description
ADJUSTMENT OF RF AGC
FOCUSadjustment
Signalgenerator
Remotecontrol unit
Notes:• Proceed to the following this adjustment after having completed theadjustments of B1 POWER SUPPLY, SUB BRIGHT and PICTURE.
• Set VIDEO STATUS to “STANDARD”.• The final adjustment of CONVERGENCE must be done after theFOCUS adjustment. (CONVERGENCE is changed by FOCUS ad-justment.)When makes difference by FOCUS adjustment, should be reconfirmingPURITY adjustment.
1. Receive a crosshatch signal.2. While looking at the screen center, adjust the FOCUS VR so that
the horizontal lines will be clear and in fine detail.3. Adjust the H VR so that the vertical lines will be clear and in fine
detail.4. Make sure that the picture is in focus even when the screen gets
darkened.
FOCUS VR[In HVT]
H VR[In HVT]
ItemMeasuringinstrument Test point Adjustment part Description
ADJUSTMENT OF FOCUS
B1 POWER SUPPLY
Remotecontrol unit
AV-36F702AV-36F802
No. 51907B 27
Description
Note :Set VIDEO STATUS to “STANDARD”.
1. Receive a black-and-white signal.(Color off)2. Select the [LOW LIGHT] MODE from the SERVICE MENU.3. Set the initial setting value of BRIGHT is 063 with the LEFT / RIGHT
key of the remote control unit.4. Set the initial setting value of R CUTOFF, G CUTOFF and B CUT-
OFF is 085 with the 4 to 9 key of the remote control unit.5. Display a single horizontal line by pressing the 1 key of the remote
control unit.6. Turn the screen VR all the way to the left.7. Turn the screen VR gradually to the right from the left until either
one of the red, blue or green colors appears faintly.8. Adjust the two colors which did not appear until the single horizontal
line that is displayed becomes white using the 4 to 9 keys of theremote control unit.
9. Turn the screen VR to where the single horizontal line glows faintly.10.Press the 2 key to return to the regular screen.
9 The 3 EXIT key is the cancel key for the WHITE BALANCE.
Notes:• Proceed to the following this adjustment after having completed theadjustment of LOW LIGHT WHITE BALANCE.
• Set VIDEO STATUS to “STANDARD”.
1. Receive a black-and-white signal. (Color off)2. Select the [HIGH LIGHT] MODE from the SERVICE MENU.3. Set the initial setting value of R DRIVE and B DRIVE is 060 with the
4 , 6 , 7 and 9 keys of the remote control unit.4. Adjust the screen until it becomes white using the 4 , 6 , 7 and 9
keys of the remote control unit.
9 The 3 (EXIT) key is the cancel key for the WHITE BALANCE.
ItemMeasuringinstrument Test point Adjustment part
WHITEBALANCE(Low Light)adjustment
Signalgenerator
Remotecontrol unit
No.1 BRIGHT
R CUTOFFG CUTOFFB CUTOFF
SCREEN VR[In HVT]
WHITEBALANCE(High Light)adjustment
Signalgenerator
Remotecontrol unit
R DRIVEB DRIVE
ADJUSTMENT OF WHITE BALANCE
BRIGHT999
999
999 999
R CUTOFF
B CUTOFFBRIGHT
G CUTOFF
H.LINE ON
[LOW LIGHT] MODE
REMOTE CONTROL UNIT
H.LINE OFF EXIT
R CUTOFF G CUTOFF B CUTOFF
R CUTOFF G CUTOFF B CUTOFF
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
999 999
R DRIVE
B DRIVE
H.LINE ON
[HIGH LIGHT] MODE
REMOTE CONTROL UNIT
H.LINE OFF EXIT
R DRIVE B DRIVE
R DRIVE B DRIVE
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
HIGHT LIGHT
AV-36F702AV-36F802
28 No. 51907B
ItemMeasuringinstrument Test point Adjustment part Description
PIPHIGH LIGHTWHITEBALANCEadjustment[AV-36F802]
Notes:• Proceed to the following this adjustment after having completed theadjustments of LOW LIGHT WHITE BALANCE and HIGH LIGHTWHITE BALANCE for the main picture.
• Set VIDEO STATUS to “STANDARD”.
1. Receive a black-and-white signal. (Color off)2. Select the PIP MODE from the SERVICE MENU.3. Then adjust the white color of the PIP screen using the No. 8 P R
DR and the No. 10 P B DR of the PIP MODE so that it is the samebrightness as the main screen.
No.8 P R DRNo.10 P B DR
Signalgenerator
Remotecontrol unit
PIP screen
Main screen
SUB BRIGHTadjustment
No.1 BRIGHT Notes:• Proceed to the following this adjustment after having completed theadjustments of LOW LIGHT WHITE BALANCE and HIGH LIGHTWHITE BALANCE.
• Set VIDEO STATUS to “STANDARD”.
1. Receive a broadcast.2. Select the No.1 BRIGHT of the PICTURE MODE.3. Set the initial setting value of the No.1 BRIGHT with the LEFT /
RIGHT key of the remote control unit.4. If the brightness is not best with the initial setting value, make fine
adjustment of the No.1 BRIGHT until you get the optimum bright-ness.
SUBCONTRASTadjustment
Notes:• Proceed to the following this adjustment after having completed theadjustment of SUB BRIGHT.
• Set VIDEO STATUS to “STANDARD”.
1. Receive a broadcast.2. Select the No.2 PICTURE of the PICTURE MODE.3. Set the initial setting value of the No.2 PICTURE with the LEFT /
RIGHT key of the remote control unit.4. If the contrast is not best with the initial setting value, make fine
adjustment of the No.2 PICTURE until you get the optimum con-trast.
No.2 PICTURE
ItemMeasuringinstrument Test point Adjustment part Description
ADJUSTMENT OF CONTRAST
ItemMeasuringinstrument Test point Adjustment part Description
ADJUSTMENT OF BRIGHT
Remotecontrol unit
Remotecontrol unit
AV-36F702AV-36F802
No. 51907B 29
ItemMeasuringinstrument Test point Adjustment part Description
V CENTER andTRAPEZIUMadjustment
Signalgenerator
Remotecontrol unit
No.68 V CENTERNo.78 TRAPEZ
Note:Proceed to the following this adjustment after having completed theadjustments of SUB BRIGHT and SUB CONTRAST.
1. Receive a crosshatch signal.2. Adjust the No.68 V CENTER of the PICTURE MODE to be the same
between the CRT vertical center and crosshatch vertical center.3. Adjust the No.78 TRAPEZ of the PICTUER MODE to be the vertical
lines straight.4. Confirm the vertical lines to be straight. If it is not straight, adjust to
be straight at the No.78 TRAPEZ.
Signalgenerator
Remotecontrol unit
Note:Proceed to the following this adjustment after having completed theadjustments of FOCUS, SUB BRIGHT, SUB CONTRAST, V CENTER,TRAPEZIUM, V-SIZE and V-LINEARITY.
1. Receive a crosshatch signal.2. Select the No.73 H SIZE of the PICTURE MODE.3. Set the initial setting value of the No.73 H SIZE with the LEFT /
RIGHT key of the remote control unit.4. Adjust the No.73 H SIZE until the horizontal screen size is 90%.5. Adjust the No.72 H POSI until the screen will be horizontally centered.
No.73 H SIZENo.72 H POSI
V-SIZE andV-LINEARITYadjustment
Signalgenerator
Remotecontrol unit
Note:Proceed to the following this adjustment after having completed theadjustments of SUB BRIGHT and SUB CONTRAST.
1. Receive a crosshatch signal.2. Select the No.66 V SIZE of the PICTURE MODE to squeeze the
laster.3. Adjust the No.65 V LIN of the PICTURE MODE to be symmetrical.4. Adjust the No.66 V SIZE until the vertical screen size is 92%.
No.66 V SIZENo.65 V LIN
Screen size
Picture size 100%
Screen size 92%
Picture size 100%
H SIZE andH POSITIONadjustment
Screen size 90%
Picture size 100%
Screen size
Picture size 100%
ADJUSTMENT OF DEFLECTION
AV-36F702AV-36F802
30 No. 51907B
ItemMeasuringinstrument Test point Adjustment part Description
SIDE PIN andCORNER PINadjsutment
Signalgenerator
Remotecontrol unit
No.76 SIDE PINNo.82 TOP PINNo.84 BTM PIN
Note:Proceed to the following this adjustment after having completed theadjustments of FOCUS, SUB BRIGHT, SUB CONTRAST, V CENTER,TRAPEZIUM, V-SIZE and V-LINEARITY.
1. Receive a crosshatch signal.2. Adjust such that vertical 2nd lines from left and right to be straight at
the No.76 SIDE PIN of the PICTURE MODE.3. Adjust the end of vertical 2nd lines from left and right to be straight
at the No.82 TOP PIN and the No.84 BTM PIN of the PICTUREMODE.
PIP DISPLAYPOSITIONadjustment[AV-36F802]
Notes:• Proceed to the following this adjustment after having completed theadjustments of V CENTER, TRAPEZIUM, V-SIZE, V-LINEARITY, HSIZE, H POSITION, SIDE PIN and CORNER PIN for the main pic-ture.
• Set VIDEO STATUS to “STANDARD”.
1. Receive a broadcast.2. Select the PIP MODE from the SERVICE MENU.3. Then adjust the PIP screen size so that it occupies 80% ± 2% of the
main screen area.
No.11 LEFT POS.No.12 RIGHT POS.No.13 UPPER POS.No.14 LOWER POS.
LEFT POS. RIGHT POS.
UPPER POS.
LOWER POS.
Mainscreensize
Main screen size
80%±2%
80% ±2%
Straight Straight
Remotecontrol unit
AV-36F702AV-36F802
No. 51907B 31
ItemMeasuringinstrument Test point Adjustment part Description
SUB COLORadjustment
Notes:• Proceed to the following this adjustment after having completed theadjustment of CONTRAST.
• Set VIDEO STATUS to “STANDARD”.
[ Method of adjustment without measuring instrument ]1. Receive a broadcast.2. Select the No.3 COLOR of the PICTURE MODE.3. Set the initial setting value of the No.3 COLOR with the LEFT/RIGHT
key of the remote control unit.4. If the color is not the best with the Initial setting value, make fine
adjustment of the No.3 COLOR until you get the optimum color.
No.3 COLORSignalgenerator
Oscilloscope
Remotecontrol unit
TP-BTP-E1 ( )[CRT SOCKETPWB]
YG
R
W Cy
(–)0V(+)
MgB
(A)
Notes:• Proceed to the following this adjustment after having completed theadjustment of CONTRAST.
• Set VIDEO STATUS to “STANDARD”.
[ Method of adjustment using measuring instrument ]1. Input the full field color bar signal (75% white).2. Select the No.3 COLOR of the PICTURE MODE.3. Set the initial setting value of the No.3. COLOR with the LEFT/RIGHT
key of the remote control unit.4. Connect the oscilloscope between TP-B and TP-E1.5. Adjust COLOR and bring the value of (A) in the illustration to the
voltage +26V (VW–B).
SUB TINTadjustment
Notes:• Proceed to the following this adjustment after having completed theadjustment of CONTRAST.
• Set VIDEO STATUS to “STANDARD”.
[ Method of adjustment without measuring instrument ]1. Receive a broadcast.2. Select the No.4 TINT of the PICTURE MODE.3. Set the initial setting value of the No.4 TINT with the LEFT/RIGHT
key of the remote control unit.4. If the tint is not the best with the initial setting value, make fine ad-
justment of the No.4 TINT until you get the optimum tint.
No.4 TINTSignalgenerator
Oscilloscope
Remotecontrol unit
TP-BTP-E1 ( )[CRT SOCKETPWB]
YG
R
W Cy
(–)0V(+)
Mg B(B)
Notes:• Proceed to the following this adjustment after having completed theadjustment of CONTRAST.
• Set VIDEO STATUS to “STANDARD”.
[ Method of adjustment using measuring instrument ]1. Input the full field color bar signal (75% white).2. Select the No.4 TINT of the PICTURE MODE.3. Set the initial setting value of the No.4 TINT with the LEFT/RIGHT
key to the remote control unit.4. Connect the oscilloscope between TP-B and TP-E1.5. Adjust TINT and bring the value of (B) in the illustration to the
voltvoltage +14V (VW–Mg).
ADJUSTMENT OF CHROMA
AV-36F702AV-36F802
32 No. 51907B
ItemMeasuringinstrument Test point Adjustment part Description
MTS SAPVCOadjustment
Signalgenerator
Frequencycounter
Remotecontrol unit
Resister[1MØ]
No.9 5FH MON.No.10 SAP VCO
1. Receive a RF signal (non modulated sound signal) from the an-tenna terminal.
2. Connect between pin 4 of [MPX] connector and GND (Pin 3 of [MPX]connector) through 1MØ Resistor.
3. Select the No.9 5FH MON. of the SOUND MODE, and reset thesetting value from 0 to 1.
4. Connect the Frequency Counter to pin 2 of [MPX] connector andGND (Pin 3 of [MPX] connector) .
5. Select the No.10 SAP VCO.6. Set the initial setting value of the No.10 SAP VCO with the LEFT/
RIGHT key of the remote control unit.7. Adjust the No.10 SAP VCO so that the frequency counter will dis-
play 78.67kHz±0.5kHz.8. Select the No.9 5FH MON. of the SOUND MODE, and reset the
setting value from 1 to 0.
MTS FILTERcheck
1. Select the No.6 FILTER of the SOUND MODE.2. Verify that the No.6 FILTER is set at its initial setting value.
No.6 FILTER
4 pin TP_952.53 pin GND2 pin AUDIO_R[MPX Connectorin MAIN PWB]
MTSSEPARATIONadjustment
Note: Menu “MTS” is set to “STEREO”
1. Input a stereo L signal (300Hz) from the TV audio multiplex signalgenerator to the antenna terminal.
2. Connect an oscilloscope to pin 1 of [MPX] connector, and displayone cycle portion of the 300Hz signal.
3. Change the connection of the oscilloscope to pin 2 of [MPX] con-nector, and enlarge the voltage axis.
4. Select the No.7 LOW SEP. of the SOUND MODE.5. Set the initial setting value of the No.7 LOW SEP. with the LEFT/
RIGHT key of the remote control unit.6. Adjust the No.7 LOW SEP. so that the 300Hz signal level will be-
come minimum.7. Change the signal to 3kHz, and connect an oscilloscope to pin 1 of
[MPX] connector.8. Adjust the No.8 HI SEP. so that the 3kHz signal level will become
minimum.
No.7 LOW SEP.No.8 HI SEP.
TV audiomultiplexsignalgenerator
Oscilloscope
Remotecontrol unit
1 pin AUDIO_L2 pin AUDIO_R3 pin GND[MPX Connectorin MAIN PWB]
L-Channel signal waveform
R-Channel crosstalk portion
Minimum
1 cycle
MTS INPUTLEVELcheck
1. Select the No.2 IN LEVEL of the SOUND MODE.2. Verify that the No.2 IN LEVEL is set at its initial setting value.
No.2 IN LEVEL
MTS STEREOVCOadjustment
Signalgenerator
Frequencycounter
Remotecontrol unit
Note: Menu “MTS” is set to “STEREO”
1. Receive a RF signal (nonmodulated sound signal) from the antennaterminal.
2. Select the No.3 FH MONITOR of SOUND MODE, and change thesetting value from 0 to 1.
3. Connect the Frequency Counter to pin 2 of [MPX] connector andGND (Pin 3 of [MPX] connector).
4. Select the No.4 STEREO VCO.5. Set the initial setting value of the No.4 STEREO VCO with the LEFT/
RIGHT key of the remote control unit.6. Adjust the No.4 STEREO VCO so that the frequency counter will
display 15.73kHz±0.1kHz.7. Select the No.3 FH MONITOR of the SOUND MODE, and reset the
setting value from 1 to 0.
No.3 FH MONITORNo.4 STEREO VCO
2 pin AUDIO R3 pin GND[MPX Connectorin MAIN PWB]
ADJUSTMENT OF MTS CIRCUIT
Remotecontrol unit
Remotecontrol unit
AV-36F702AV-36F802
No. 51907B 33
ADJUSTMENTS OF PURITY AND CONVERGENCE
Note: The final adjustment of CONVERGENCE must be done after theFOCUS adjustment. (CONVERGENCE is changed by FOCUSadjustment.)When makes difference by FOCUS adjustment, should bereconfirming PURITY adjustment.
PURITY ADJUSTMENT
1. Demagnetize CRT with the demagnetizer.
2. Loosen the retainer screw of the deflection yoke.
3. Remove the wedges.
4. Input a green raster signal from the signal generator, and turn thescreen to green raster.
5. Move the deflection yoke backward.
6. Bring the long lug of the purity magnets on the short lug and positionthem horizontally. (Fig.2)
7. Adjust the gap between two lugs so that the GREEN RASTER willcome into the center of the screen. (Fig.3)
8. Move the deflection yoke forward, and fix the position of the deflec-tion yoke so that the whole screen will become green.
9. Insert the wedge to the top side of the deflection yoke so that it willnot move.
10. Input a crosshatch signal.
11. Verify that the screen is horizontal.
12. Input red and blue raster signals, and make sure that purity is prop-erly adjusted.
Fig. 1
• P/C MAGNETS
P : PURITY MAGNET4 : 4 POLES (convergence magnets)6 : 6 POLES (convergence magnets)
CRT
WEDGE
P
P / CMAGNETS
4 6
DEFLECTION YOKE
Fig. 2
Long lug
Short lug
PURITY MAGNETS
Bring the long lug over the short lugand position them horizontally.
Fig. 3
(FRONT VIEW) GREEN RASTER
CENTER
AV-36F702AV-36F802
34 No. 51907B
STATIC CONVERGENCE ADJUSTMENT
1. Input a crosshatch signal.
2. Using 4-pole convergence magnets, overlap the red and blue linesin the center of the screen (Fig. 4) and turn them to magenta (red/blue).
3. Using 6-pole convergence magnets, overlap the magenta(red/blue)and green lines in the center of the screen and turn them to white.
4. Repeat 2 and 3 above, and make best convergence.
DYNAMIC CONVERGENCE ADJUSTMENT
1. Move the deflection yoke up and down and overlap the lines in theperiphery. (Fig. 5)
2. Move the deflection yoke left to right and overlap the lines in theperiphery. (Fig. 6)
3. Repeat 1 and 2 above, and make best convergence.
• After adjustment, fix the wedge at the original position.Fasten the retainer screw of the deflection yoke.Fix the P/C magnets with glue.
(FRONT VIEW)
RED
REDRED
RED
BLUE
(FRONT VIEW)
BLUEBLUE
BLUE GREEN
GREENGREEN
GREEN
(FRONT VIEW)
GREEN GREEN
GREEN
GREEN
RED REDRED
RED
BLUE
BLUE
BLUE
BLUE
Fig. 4
Fig. 5
Fig. 6
AV-36F702AV-36F802
No. 51907B 35
HOW TO CHECK THE HIGH VOLTAGE HOLD DOWN CIRCUIT1. HIGH VOLTAGE HOLD DOWN CIRCUIT
After repairing the high voltage hold down circuit shown in Fig. 1.This circuit shall be checked to operate correctly.
2. CHECKING OF THE HIGH VOLTAGE HOLD DOWN CIRCUIT(1) Turn the POWER SW ON.(2) As shown in Fig. 1, set the resistor (between S1 connector 2 & 3 ).(3) Make sure that the screen picture disappears.(4) Temporarily unplug the power cord.(5) Remove the resistor (between S1 connector 2 & 3 ).(6) Again plug the power cord, make sure that the normal picture is displayed on the screen.
Fig. 1
2 3 S1 CONNECTOR
HEATER
RESISTOR23.0 kΩ ± 115 Ω 1/4 W
++
POWERON OFF
RY951
R952
D535
R532
R951
Q951
Q532
Q531
R533
R534
R535R538C533
D534 D531
D532BW
C525
R537 FR525
D525
T502
4
AV-36F702AV-36F802
36 No. 51907B
SELF CHECK FUNCTIONS1. Outline
This model has self check functions given below. When a malfunction has been detected, the POWER is turned off and the LED flashes to informof the failure . The malfunction is detected by the signal input state of the control line connected to the microcomputer.
2. Self check items
Check item Details of detection Method of detection State of malfunction
3. Self check indicating function
The self-check function begins detection about 5 seconds after poweris supplied.In the event a malfunction is detected, the power is cut off immedi-ately.At this time, the ON-TIMER LED flashes to inform of the malfunc-tion.
[ON-TIMER LED indication]The ON-TIMER LED flashes at 0.5 seconds intervals.
POWERSupplied
After about5 seconds
Start ofdetection
Malfunctionis detected
POWER OFF
FlashingON-TIMER LED
Over-current protector Operation of B1 protector circuit. The microcomputer detects at 1second intervals.If NG is detected for more than200 ms, a malfunction is inter-preted.
When a malfunction has beendetected, the POWER is turnedoff. While the POWER is beingturned off , the power key of theremote controller is not opera-tional until the power code istaken out and put in again.
Printed in JapanVP0112SW
36F702Y-UCM #436F802Y-UCM #4
JVC SERVICE & ENGINEERING COMPANY OF AMERICA
Head office : 1700 Valley Road, Wayne, New Jersey 07470 (973)317-5000East Coast : 10 New Maple Avenue, Pine Brook, New Jersey 07058 (973)396-1000Midwest : 705 Enterprise St. Aurora, Illinois 60504 (630)851-7855West Coast : 5665 Corporate Avenue, Cypress, California 90630 (714)229-8011Southwest : 10700 Hammerly, Suite 105, Houston, Texas 77043 (713)935-9331Hawaii : 2969 Mapunapuna Place, Honolulu, Hawaii 96819 (808)833-5828Southeast : 1500 Lakes Parkway, Lawrenceville, Georgia 30243 (770)339-2582
JVC CANADA INC.Head office : 21 Finchdene Square Scarborough, Ontario M1X 1A7 (416)293-1311Vancouver : 13040 Worster Court Richmond B.C. V6V 2B3 (604)270-1311
DIVISION OF JVC AMERICAS CORP.
®
top related